-V n vi 1 .1 Ot- W, f £*• f c>1; / V | frvv(^ i (' Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2016 https://archive.org/details/anatomyofhumaneb01gibs Librum hunc cui fitulus, THE ANATOMY of Human Bodies* Dignum cenfewus 'jut IwjtrifflAtur . ‘Tbo. Millington , Praefo. Tho. Burwell , Rich . Torlejje , Dawes ^ Tho. Gill , >Cenfores, Dat. ex jfcdibus Collegii noftri in Comitiis Cenforiis Aug. 6. 1697* THE ANATOMY O F Humane Bodies EPITOMIZED. All the PARTS of Man’s Body, with their ACTIONS and V S E S, are fuc- cin£tly defer ibed, according to the neweft Do&rine of the moll: Accurate and Learn- ed Modern Anatomifts. The jfifcf) <£bitien, Corrected and Inlarged both in the Difcourfe and Figures. By T HO. GIBSON , M. D. Fellow the College of Phyficians, London. Printed by T. IV. for Awnfham and John Churchill , at the Black Swan in Pater-nofter-Row , and fold by Timothy Child ? , at the Whitt- Hart^ the Weil end of St. Paul's Church-Tard , 1697. WHEREIN LONDON TO THE READER- I Nftead of befpeaking the Readers Candour , (as is common with Authors) I have the pleafanter task of boafiing of it: for to Wat only is it owing, that this Book which de- ferved not a Second Im^rejfion , has now paft a Fifth. And I hope thofe who have been fo kind as to buy off the former , will not reckon it for a Fault, that This pretends to be more corred and complete than they; for to have continued the known Errours and Imperfections thereof, would have been an Injury both to the Reader , and my felf : To the Reader , in obtruding acknow- ledg’d Errours, and concealing new Difcoveries; And to my felf in gh ving occaiion to be thought negligent in what I have taken fo great pains in, and ignorant of what I know, A 3 " But To the Reader. But my publishing this Book now a Fifth time in Englijh , needs a better Apology than I can give : Only this I can fay, That though it fpeak English, yet none (hall well underhand it, that is a ftranger to the more learn- ed Languages : And therefore it dis- dains the Converfation of Quacks and old Women, leaving them to me- ditate on the traditional Virtues of their Receipts, without offering to in- ftru£t them in the Knowledge of them' Celves, of which their Ignorance and Impudence render them incapable in any fenfe. Its Ornaments indeed are in a great meafure borrow’d , but it fears not the Fate of the Daw in the Fable , to be un plum’d and laugh’d at ; becaufe they are not furtivi colores, feeing it bruts not in them as its own, but has every where the ingenuity to confefs the true Owners, whom if the Rea- der dehre to know, it here prefents him with a Lift of the Principal, Adrian, To the Reader. Adrian. Spigelius de Humani Corporis fa- brica. Jsbrandi de Diemerbroeck Anatome corporis humani. Thom a Bartholini Anatome. D. Willifius de Cerehro. — — Exercitationes Medico-pkyjica dua , i. De Sanguinis accenfone, 2. De motu Mufculari . • — De primis viis & de refpirationis organis in his firft and fecond part of his Pharma - ceutice Rationales. Dr. HighmoreV Corp. bum. defy. Anatomica. M. Malpighii Epifola Anatomica de Cerebro, Lingua , T actus organo. *>-—r-De vifcerum fruit ur a, viz. Hepatis , Ce- rebri cortices, & Lienis. Exercit. de Omento, Ping. & Adip. duct. Nicolai Stenonis Dijfertatio de Cerebri Anat. — - De Mufculis & Glandules Objervationum fpecimen. — — De Glandulis Ores, & novis earundem v li- fts Obfervationes Anatomica. Carole FracafTati Dijfertatio Epiftolica de Ce~ rebro. Dr. LowerV Traclatus de Corde. Dr. GliiTonV Traclatus de Ventriculo & In- te finis. «* Anatomia Hepatis. Dr. CharltonV Enquiries into Humane Na- ture tn IV. Anatomick P telethons in the New Theatre of the Royal College of P by f- stares in London. A 4 Dr. To the Reader , jj r . WhartonV Adenographia , //w Glandula- I rum totius corporis defer iptio. Lamb. Velthufii Tr a fiat ns duo Medico-phyfcf ttnus tie Lie we, alter de Getter at tone. Dr. HarveyV Exercit at tones Anatomic a de Cordis motu, & circulations Sanguinis. Exercit ationes de generations Animalium. Cafp. Bartholin. (Thom. F. ) Diapbragmatis Jlruclura nova. Trane ifci Stockhamer, Dodloris Medici & A- natomici Microcofmographia. 1 Laurentii Bellini Exercitatio Anatomic a de j fruttura & ufu Renum. j Dr.Grew’i Comparative Anatomy of Stomachs and Gats , fubjoined to Ifis Mujeum Regalis Societatis. Anton. Nuck de duclu falivali novo , faliva , duel ib us Oculorum aquofis, (T humor e aqueo. Gualt. Nedham Difquifitio Anatomica de for- mat ofeeiu. Job. Conr. Beyer i Parerga Anatomica & Me - dica t viz. de Glandulis lnteflinalibus y &c. fob. Conrad. Brunneri Experimenta nova cir~ ca Pancreas. Dr. Mayow’s Tract atus quinque Medico-phy » (ici, &c. Regneri de Graef Opera omnia, fobannis Swammerdami Miraculum Natura y five Uteri Multebris fabric a.. 'Job. Alph. Boielli Opus pofthumum de motu Animalium. Frederici Ruyfchii refponfones ad D. Job. Gaubium , To the Reader . Gaubium , & Job. Jac. Campdomercum. Dr, H. Ridley’* Anatomy of the Brain. Dr. Brigge’* Ophthalmographia , five Oculi ejufq\ partium Defcriptio Anatomica. Dr. Cole’s Cogitata de fecretione Animali . Dr. Croone de ratione motus Mufculorum. Mon f Aw Verney of the Ears. Dr. Henfhaw’* Aero-Chalinos. Monf Perrault Efjays de Pbyfique, Steph. Blancardi Anat. Reform at a. Dr. Havers’* Ofieologia nova. Mr. Cowpcr’f Appendix to hk Myotomia re- formata. Thefe, I fay , are the Authors which have chiefly adorned this Book 7 feveral whereof were not fought to in the former Editions ; and thofe that were, have now ( fome of them ) been much more liberal in contri- buting their Symbols to make it snore complete. As it is, if it may affift the memory of luch as are well skill d in Anatomy, or , jnftruff and direti the young Begin - ner , I have not mifs’d of my Defigm Farewell. THE CONTENTS. The Introduction. a p. i. ad vi. Book I. 5 9 1 8 22 3, 1 34 45 So Of the loweft Cavity called Abdomen. C HAP. I. Of the divifion of the whole Body, and of its Parts. J — Page i- II. Of the circumfcription , regions, and parts of the Abdomen. III. Of the common containing parts of the Belly IV. Of the proper containing parts. V. Of the Omentum. VI. Of the Gullet. VII. Of the Ventriculus or Stomach. VIII. Of the Inteftines or Guts. IX. Of the Mefentery. X. OftheVenx lades, Glanduls lumbares , Re- ceptaculum commune, Duftus chyliterus tho- racicus, and of the motion of the Chyle. 6 $ XI. Of the Liver. 73 XII. Of the Vena portae. 82 XIII. Of the Vena cava difperfed within the Abdo- men. . ^9 XIV. Of the Gall-bladder and Porus bilarius. 93 XV. Of the Pancreas. 100 XVI. Of the Spleen. io 5 XVll;. of the Kidneys and the Glandule renales. 1 21 XVIII. Of.- The Contents. *3S 1 3 ? 141 and 144 femina- M3 XVIII. Of the Vreters. XIX. Of the Bladder. XX. Of the Vafa praeparantia in Men. XXI. Of the Stones or Tefiicles , the Scrotum the Epididymidae. XXII. Of the Vafa deferentia , Veficulae ies and Proftatae. XXIII .Of the Yard. 160 XXIV. Of the Vafa praeparantia in Women. 1 7 1 XXV. Of Womens Tefiicles or Ovaria. 173 XXVI. Of the Vafa deferentia in Women , or then Oviducts. 177 XXVII. Of the Uterus or Womb , and its Neck. 182 XXVIII. Of the Vagina, and its Content s, viz. the Hymen, and Carunculae myrtiformes. 190 XXIX. Of the Pudendum mnliebre , or Woman’s Privity. 195 XXX. Of a Conception. 201 XXXI. Of the Placenta uterina, or Womb-liver, and Acetabula. 213 XXXII. Of the Membranes involving the Foetus, and of the humours and air contained in them. 2 1 7 XXXIII. Of the ZJmbilical Veffels . and of the nou- rifhing of the Foetus. 224 XXXIV. What parts of a Foetus in the Womb differ from thofe of an adult per f on. 240 XXXV. Of the Birth. 244 Book II. Of the middle Cavity called Thorax. C HAP. I. Of the common containing parts of the Thorax, or Breafi . Page 249 II; Of the proper containing parts • and firfi of the Dugs. The Contents. Dugs. 250 III. Of the internal proper containing parts, viz. the Pleura, Mediaftinum, and Diaphragma. p. 263 IV. Of the Pericardium, and the humour contained in it. 276 V. Of the Heart, in general, and of the reafon of its motion. 279 VI. Of the Pul fe, and the circulation of the Blood. 285 VII. How Blood is made of Chyle , of its Heat and Colour , and whether the Body be nourifhed by it. VIII. Of the parts of the Heart, viz. the Auriculas, the Ventricles , and the Septum that dividetb them. - 303 IX. Of the afcending Trunk of Vena cava. 307 X. O/Ve naarteriofa, and Arteria venofa. 31 6 XI. Of the Aorta, or great Artery. 319 XII Of the Afpera Arteria and Lungs. 335 XIII. Of Refpiration. 344, XIV. Of the Neck , and the parts contained in it, viz* vbe Larynx, Pharynx, Tonfillae, &c. 353 Book III. Ofthehigheft Cavity, or Head. C HAP. I. Of the Head in general , and its common containing parts . Page 359 IT. Of the Hair. ^ 6 i HI. Of the proper containing parts. 304 IV. Of the Brain in general. 370 V. Of the manner of differing the Brain: of the Brain properly fo called , the Fornix, Septum , and the three Ventricles. 374 VI. Of The Contents. 0 If 3 J •o ts 9 )«! ti it, '4 37 :j ! 9 IS I ■4 Z. i3 !S >9 >i 4 ’0 lit 'i VL Of tk Medulla oblongata , and its fore-parts , viz. Crura, Corpora ftriata, Nervorum opti- corum thalami. Nates and Teftes, with the Vulva and Anus •, as alfo of the Glandula pinealis. Plexus choroides , and Infundibulum. 378 VII. Of the Cerebellum, and the fourth Ventricle ; as alfo of the hinder-part of the Medftlla oblonga- ta, of the Rete mirabile, and Glandula pitui- taria. 384 VIII. Of the Spinalis medulla. 392 IX. Of the aftion of the Brain , and the ( fuppofed ) Succus nutritius of the Nerves . 394 X. Of the Nerves ariftng within the Shull ", and fir ft, of the firfi and fecond pairs. 40 1 XL Of the third and fourth pairs. 40 6 XII. Of the fifth, ftxth , and feventh pairs. 408 XIII. Of the eighth, ninth, and tenth pairs. 412 XIV. Of the Nerves of the Spinalis medulla \ and firfi, of the Nerves of the Neck. 423 XV. Of the Nerves of the Vertebrae of the Thorax. 4 2 7 XVL Of the Nerves of the Vertebrae of the Loins . * , 429 XVII. Of the Nerves which arife from the marrow of Os facrum. 431 XVIIL Of the Face and its parts. 434 XIX. Of the Eyes in general , and their outward or containing parts . 43 6 XX. Of the Tunicles of the Eye . 440 XXL Of the humours and veffels of the Eye. 442 XXII. Of the Auricula. 446 XXIII. Of the inward part of the Ear . 448 Xxiv. Of the Nofe. 455 XX V. Of the external parts of the Mouth. 458 XXVL Of the inner parts of the Mouth. 459 Book IV. The Contents. Book IV. Containing a delcription of the Veins, Arte- ries, and Nerves of the Limbs : with ah Appendix of the Glands thereof. C H A P. I. Of the Veins of the Arm. Page 469 II. Of the Arteries of the Arm. 471 III. Of the Nerves of the Arm. 472 IV. Of the Veins of the Thigh , Leg, and Foot. 473 V. Of the Arteries of the Thigh, Leg , and Foot. Ibid. VI. Of the Nerves of the Thigh, Leg, and Foot. 474 An Appendix to Book IV. 47 S Book V. Containing a Treatife of all the Mulcles of the Body. C HAP. I. Of a Mufek in general, and of its parts. Page 477 II. Of the differences and attion of the Muffles. 484 III. Of the Muffles of the Eye-lids and Forehead. 487 IV. Of the Muffles of the Eyes . 489 V. Of the Muffles of the Noff. 492 VI. Of the Muffles of the Lips and Cheeks. 494 VII. Of the Muffles of the lower Jaw. 495 VIII. Of the Muffles of the Ear, 499 IX. Of the Muffles of the Tongue . 502 X. Of the Muffles of the Bone of the Tongue , called Os hyoides, ^03 The Contents. XI. Of the Mufcles of the Larynx. 505 XII. Of the Mufcles of the Uvula , Palate , and Throat. 508 XIII. Of the Mufcles of the Head. 509 XIV. Of the Mufcles of the Neck. 5 1 2 XV. Of the Mufcles of the Thorax. 5 1 3 XVI. Of the Mufcles of the Back and Loins. 516' XVII. Of the Mufcles of the Abdomen. 518 XVIII. Of the Mufcles of the Genitals , both in Men and Women. 523 XIX. Of the Mufcles of the Bladder and Anus. 5 24 XX. Of the Mufcles of the Scapula or Shoulder- blade. 525 XXI. Of the tJWufcles of the Arm. 527 XXII. Of the Mufcles of the Ulna. 530 XXIII. Of the Mufcles of the Radius. 532 XXIV. Of the Mufcles of the Wrift. 534 XXV. Of the Mufcles of the Palm of the Hand. 535 XXVI. Of the Mufcles of the four Fingers. 537 XXVII. Of the Mufcles of the Thumb. 540 XXVIII. Of the Mufcles of the Thigh. 542 XXIX. Of the Mufcles of the Leg. 545 XXX. Of the Mufcles of the Foot or Tarfus. 548 XXXI. Of the Mufcles of the Toes. 5 5 1 Book VI. Of the Bones. C H A P. I. Of Bones in general , their cofifii - tuent and integral parts. Page 559 II. Of the different conjunctions of Bones one to an- other. 567 III. Of the SM in general 570 IV. Of The Contents. IV. Of the Sutures of the Skull. p. 5721. V. Of the proper Bones of the Skull. 574 VI. Of the Bones common to the Skull and upper Jaw. 578 VII. Of the upper and lower Jaws. 382 VIII. Of the Teeth. 584 IX. Of the Bone of the Tongue called Os Hyoi« des. S 89 X. Of the Bones of the Neck , viz. the Clavicular and Vertebra. 59© XI. Of the Vertebra of the Thorax. 594 XII. Of the Ribs. 59§ XIII. Of the Breaft-bone or Sternum. 597 XIV. Of the Vertebra of the Loins. * 5 99 XV. Of the Os facrum, and Os Coccygis or Rump~ bone. 600 XVI. Of the Ofla innominata. 60 1, XVII. Of the Scapula or Shoulder-blade. 60 4 XVIII. Of the Os humeri or Shoulder-bone . 605 XIX. Of the Bones of the Cubit. 607 XX. Of the Bones of the Hand. < 5 o 8 XXL Of the Thigh-bone, and Patella. 6 n, XXII. Of the Bones of the Leg. 61$ XXIII. Of the Bones of the Tarfus. 615 XXIV. Of the reft of the Bones of the Foot . 61 7 An Appendix to Book YL C HAP. I. Of a CartilagSo 621 II. Of a Ligament. 62$ III, Of the Nails. 62% 1 THE A natomy is the artificial figuration Anatom^ of the Parts of the Body by fittion , infiitu - what. ted for the attaining to the knowledge of its Frame , and the ufe of each Part . All animal Bodies of convenient bulk , are the Iusufe Subjett of Anatomy : But an humane Body is the i e &i primary, both becaufe its framd is more perfed and exquilite than that of any other , and becaufe the Anatomift dilfeds others , to the end only that by comparing thofe with this, he may obtain a more accurate knowledge of it , the prefervati- on and cure whereof is the principal and ultimate End of Anatomy. dniEndi This Art being fo noble for its SubjctJ- , and fo beneficial for its End-, as many as have taken pains In cultivating of it , have deferved very well of Mankind : for Skill therein, as it is very pleafant and fatisfadory unto all, fo is it abfolutely necef- fary for fuch as take upon them to adminifter Me- dian , or pradife Ghirurgery. But the Minima or fraalleft particles, whereof the parts of our Bodies .confift , being fo very fine , that many of ji them cannot be difeovered by the naked eye, and fome deny to flievv themfelves to the bed Giafies that have yet been invented , dis no wonder that , there have been and dill continue various Opinions ' Concerning the nature of feveral parts , and con- |fequently of their actions and ufes, and the man- E ner 11 The Introduction. 7he Vi- brick of tbe Body conftfts of farts Jimi- lir and dijftmilar. Similar parts whit. DiffmiUr mbit. ner and reafon of them. But the unwearied di- ligence of lome later Anatom ills hath brought many things to bght , wherein all Antiquity was miftaken ; whole difcoveries , colleded with the greateft care, I fhall infert (with due commemo- ration of the Authors ) in their proper places in this Treat ife. Before our entrance whereupon, 1 think it neceflary , by way of Introduction , firlt to explain to the young Student in Anatomy, what thofe fimilar parts are that the bulk of the Body con fids of ; that when dijfimilar parts which conlift of them, are defcribed, he may the better underftand what is faid. And firft we mull explain what is meant by fi- milar and dijfimilar parts. A fimilar (otherwile called a fimple ) part, is that which though it be cut or divided into feveral pieces , yet they will be all of the fame nature , fubftance and denomi- nation with one another, and with the whole : as every portion or particle of a Bone (v g.) is Bone 0 A dijfimilar (otherwife called a compound , and an organicalj part, is that whofe portions are neither of the fame fubftance , nor denomination; as (v.gd) a Finger^ which conlifts of the skin , flelh, bone, &c. Of this latter kind of parts , this is no proper place to treat : And as concerning the former, the Reader mtuft underftand, that though they be cal- led fimple or fimilar, *tis not meant that they are truly fo : (for there are none amongft thofe we term fo, whofe leaft particles are not of different natures and kinds:,) but that they appear fb to the more iuperficiaiand flight view of the Anatomift; and to diftinguilh them from the compound or diffimilar parts , whofe diverfity of fubftance the eye at the firlt glance difeovers, Thefe The Introduction. m Thefe fimilar parts are commonly reckon’d to si.nikr be Ten, 'viz., the Skin , a Membrane , Flejh , a Fibre ^ at& a Vein, an Artery a Nerve ^ a Ligament , a CMm- ' ' tag?, a Bone. Thefe are common to the whole Body, there being no diffimilar or organical pare which does not confift of feveral of them. There are befides thefe , other parts which may alfo be called fimilar as to their fubftance • but becaule they are proper only to fome particular part, ’twill be more convenient to treat of them when we come to fuch part: and therefore we Ilia 11 omit: to fpeak of them here, and confine our felves to the parts mention’d. The word Skin , though in a large and vulgar L acception it be applied to the Membranes of the T'' eS M& Mufcles, &c. ( as we commonly fay fuch a piece of flelh is skinny ) yet Anatomifts underftand it only of the outward integument or cover of the Body, which the Latins term cutis. The word Membrane is a common appellation If; to all the coverings that in veil the folid parts of dMerfc the Body, or contain the fluid humours. Tims the Bones, Mufcles, Brain, &c. are cloathed with membranes and the gall, humors of the eye,drc. contained in them. Flejh is an uncertain term , unlefs fome reltri- TIL ftive explication be added to it, to limit its being F M», jot# meant of this or that particular fort of fiefn ^ ^ ita there being four forts of it, vit. , i. That of the Mufcles , which moft properly bears the name *, and comprehends r" folid (yetfoftj fub fiance , that the Body chiefly couldls of ; which (hall defcribed in the fifth Bock „ 2 That of the F'ifczra or Bowels, vh iver, Spleen, am Booh 1! tne red, bulk of the be further T. Mufculur 6 of the .. 2 - Kidneys, of which in the firfi il J cer ^ Mem* IV T he Introduction. Membra. nous. 3. Membra? m iielh, that namely which is 4 - Glinlu- lous. I’M. merati. partly membranous, and partly flefiiy, as the fub- llance of the Gullet, Stomach, Inteilins, Womb, B’ dder, and the Membrana carnofa (fo called) it felf ^ of all which more afterwards in their pro- per places. 4. That of the glands (or kernels.) The Glands in refpeft of their conformation , are elands of u (bally divided into conglobate , and conglomerate ^ two Lint:, and thefe have a different ufe the one from the 1. conglo - other. 1. The conglobate are fmooth in their fur- facc, and are made up of one continued fubftance as it were: the ufe whereof is to feparate the lympba from the arterial blood, and to remand it by the Lympheaucds, either into the chyliferous, or fanguiferous vefiels (only thofe in the Mefen- tery, as likev-ife thofe in the Breafts of Nurfes, are thought to minifier to the chyle , as well as 2. rr.gh- to the lympba .) 2. The conglomerate are fomewhat uneven in their furface, and confift each as it were of many Idler glands : and their ufe is , to fepa- rate b om the blood,and alfo to elaborate and alter, feveral forts of juices, and then by one or more proper duds to convey the fame into peculiar ca- vities. As the Parotides and maxillar glands con- vey the faliva into the mouth by their falival duds, &c. A Fibre is defined by Dr. Gliffon (in cap. 4. de IF nine.) to be a body in figure ■ like a thread , J len- der , tenacious , ten file, and irritable , made of fper - matical matter , for the fake of fame motion and fir eng th. They are of two forts, flefhy, and ner- vous : The firfl conftitute a great part of the Mufcles, and are tubular, filled with a fluid ( of which fee more Book V. Chap. I. ) and are the main .inftruments of motion : The latter (being alio tubular, a$ forae think) run through, and are interwoven IV. A F.bre. The Introduction. V v. A Vein o interwoven in the nervous parts , and are the principal organs of fenfe : being otherwife called membranous fibres, when they are interwoven in Membranes. A Fein is a fanguiferous veflel , whofe larger branches in the habit of the body, especially in the limbs , run next under the skin , and both there and alfo in the Venters ( viz., belly , bread: and head) ferve to convey back again towards the heart, that blood which was fent from thence by the Arteries into the refpedive parts. They are of a thinner fubltance and loofer texture than the Arteries : and of a like nature with them (only finer) are the milky veins that convey the chyle, and alfo the peculiar duets that difeharge the par- ticular humors from the conglomerate glands •, and fomewhat finer yet are the Lympheduds that return the Lympha feparated from the arterial blood by the conglobate glands. An Artery is alfo a fanguiferous Veflel, and ge- VI. a* nerally holds the fame courfe with a Vein, but lies -An Artery, deeper. It can no where be feen in the furface of the body, but may be felt to beat in feveral parts at the fame time with the heart • and its pnlfe is chiefly indicative of the temper of the blood, but partly alfo of the vigor or defed of fpirits. its coat is ftronger and more fibrous and denfe than that of a Vein. Itsufeis, to convey blood and vital fpirit into all the parts,for their nourilhment, and the confervation of their innate heat. The Nerves areveflels taking their originefrom VI j s the medullar fubftance of the brain ( taken large- ANerve* lyj and the fpinal marrow, convey ing thence ani- mal fpirits into all the parts , for their fenfe and the motion refpedively. They are without any fuch in fenfible cavity or humor flowing therein , as the Vei&s and Arteries have ; and confift of a double VI The lntroduHion. VIII. A Li&a- jnent. IX. A Ciirti- X. Done. coat derived from the two membranes that cloath the brain , and a medullar fubftance contained therein. Their divifions and diftributions do not correfpond with thofe of the Veins and Arteries, nor have they one common trunk from whence all the reft are propagated , as thofe have , but fpring each from its particular root ; unlefs one will call the medulla oblongata continued into the fpinalis , a Nerve , and fo make it the common trunk. A Ligament is a part of a middle fubftance be- twixt a Cartilage and a Membrane, appointed for the tying of fundry parts together. Thofe which tye the bones to one another are void of fenfe, but thofe that knit other parts together are ( dul- ly) fenfible. A Cartilage ( or Griftle ) is of a middle fub- ftance betvyixt a Ligament and a Bone. It is flexi- ble, but infenlible : and by the drying up of its rnoi't glutinous particles , in age it often degene- rates into bone ; whence, in a great meafure, is the ftirfnefs in the joints of old men , molt or the ends of the bones in their articulations with one a nether being tipped with cartilages , which in age alfo grow bony. A Bone is a very dry, cold and bard part , in- flexible, void of fenfe , affording ftabiliment and form to the whole body. Some bones are more fpongie and porous , ana others more folid. Co- lliers again have large cavities , filled with mar- row *, others none. But of thefe, and all the o- ther fimilar parts, more in their proper places. Thus much I thought good to premife by way of Introduction , to make the Reader more capable of receiving both delight and benefit in perilling this Anatomical Treatife, to which I now pro- ceed. 1U i I The hirjl Boot. OF THE LOWEST C AVIT Y, CALLED ABDOMEN. CHAP. I. Of the Divifion of the whole Body , and of its Parts. A N humane Body may be confidered either the Body '• generally , with refbeft to the whole • or confidered JL JL particularly , with refpett to each part of ™ rrM re - which it confills. fpsfo. In its general confideration there are to be ta- i. Gene* ken notice of, its external form or fnape , its rally. bulk, and its colour. But thefe Accidents be- ing obvious to the eye of every man , as well as to the Anatomifl’s, ate no proper fubje&s for our difeourfe. The particular confideration of it obferves and 2> vmicu. ■> deferibes the figure , connexion and compoiition Urjy. or Hr ufture of each feveral part , and the great diverfity of their actions and ufes. The whole Body is divided into the Trunk. (z on- TI:e divifion tabling three renters') and the Limbs. The three pfykwhk B 4 Tenters ' 2 Of the Abdomen. Book L A part defined. fhe fun- ction of a pan what. Venters are the Cavities of the Abdomen or Belly, the Cheft, and Head. The Limbs are the Arms 9 Thigh and Legs. A Part may be thus defined „ vizi. It is a bodily or J'olid Subfiance , cohering with , making up , and partaking of tbs life of , the whole , and ferving for fome function, or life. In this definition are implied thefe five things. 1 . A part mull: be folid^ whereby the fpirits and humors are excluded. 2. It rnuft cohere with the whole , that is , be not only contiguous, but continuous to it : and from hence alfo the fpirits and humors are ex- cepted, as only touching the iides of the vefiels as they pafs along, being contained in them , but not united to them. 3. It (with others J rnuft fenre to compleat or make up the whole. Whence the Child in the womb is not to be reckoned a part of a pregnant woman , though it be knit to her womb by the Navel-firing ('the placenta intervening^ becaufe after delivery file remains a perfed woman, as fhe was alio before conception. 4. It rnuft partake of the life of the whole ; whereby the nails and hairs are exempted, which have only a vegetative, but no animal life. A nd 5 It mi It have fome function , or ufe : fo that preternatural excrefcencies , as Warts, &c. are not to be reputed parts, (being alfo excluded by the rj . >;d need, as contributing nothing to the perfection of the whole J Having mentioned the function , and ufe of a part, it vvi.1 1 be convenient to explain what is meant by them, and to difdnguilh them. T he function (or action) of an (organical) part, is a certain effective or operating motion produced by Ch. i . The dtvifion of the body , and its parts. it, from its own proper aptitude. And is either pri- vate, or publick. By the private ad ion the parts only provide for themfelves •, but by the publick , for the whole animal. As for inftance : The fto- mach by a private adion converts the blood that is brought to it by the Arteries , into its own nouriihment : But by its publick adion , which is Concodion, or turning the food into Chyle , it provides for the whole body. The ufe of a part is that affiflance which the lefs principal parts afford to the principal one in performing its adion. And it differs from the adion of a part in two refpeds. Fir ft. In that thofe parts only arefaid to have an adion , which ope- rate whereas many have an ufe , which ad no- thing at all themfelves , but only accommodate and affifl thofe that do ad. Thus the Fat has no adion of its own , but it is ufeful to cherifh and moiflen the Mufcles, &c. that their motion or adion may be performed more glibly and eafily. Secondly , An adion belongs to or proceedeth from the whole organ that operates but every particu- lar part that makes up the organ , hath an ufe. Thus the whole Mufcle exerts its adion , which is contradion : But the feveral parts of which a Mufcle confiils , have each of them their ufe to affift this adion • as , the Membrane that invefts it, is of ufe to inclofe and contain its fibres , and to diftinguifh and keep it apart from other Mufi* cles •, the ufe of the Nerve is to bring it animal fpirits ^ of the Artery, to fupply it with blood, &c. But becaufe the adion of a lefs principal part, may be of ufe to further that of one more principal as alfo becaufe the adion of feveral or- gans may- confpire to one ufe (as the Mufcles of the Abdomen, to the exclufion of the excrements) therefore adion and ufe. are often confounded, and ufed 3 It if two- fold., pri~ note ,mi publick. Hoe ufe of a part what, and wherein it differs from tbs a£tion. 4 Of the Abdomen. Book L ufed the one for the other by Anatomifts nor fhall we every where in the following Trad diftinguifh them fo nicely. The Ahi- The ? arts °f have a twofold difference (ion of the or diftindion ; the one from their wetter, and the 'parts. other from their function, or end. j. From In refped to the matter of which they confift, their mat- they are divided into fimilar and dijjimilar jof which ter * we have treated fully enough before in the Intro- duction. In refped of their function, or end, they are di- dion or v * r -kd into organical, and non-organical. end, vif. An organical part is that which is defigned for into orga- performing fome adion. Such as are chiefly the nicaI > dijfmilar parts •, but yet fome of the fimilar may be alfo termed organical : as for inftance,a Nerve, which conveys and diftributes the animal fpirits ; and likewife the Arteries and Veins , which do the fame to the blood, andnon- A non-organical part is that which has only an organical: ufe, and no adion : as a griille, fat, &c. m alfo into Again in refped of their function , or end , the principal, parts are divided into principal, and minifiring. A principal part is that which performs the molt noble and principal adion , and from which the adionsof many other parts proceed, or are affifled. Of which fort are, i. The Heart , which is the (difeributing) fountain of vital heat , and nutri- tive blood, communicating both to all the other parts, by its continual pulfation. 2. The Brain, which is the fountain of the animal fpirits, and fo the Author of all fenfe and motion. To thefe fome add, 3. the Genitals , on which the prefer- vadon of the Species depends j as on the other, that of the Individual,. Ch. i The divifion of the body, a ad its parts. A miniflring part is that which minifters to and mini- afiifts the principal : fuch as are the Stomach, Li* lxnn S* ver, Reins, the Hand , &c. And of thefe feme are necejfary , others not. The necejfary are thofe without which a man The mini, cannot live. Such as are the Stomach , Liver, firing are Lungs, &c. eitl:er ne " The not necejfary are fuch as contribute to the ^ a ^ ,or well-being , but are not abfolutely neceflary to ce {[ ar y 3 the life of a Man : as an Hand, a Leg, fimple muf- cular fle/h , which in confumptive perfons is al- mod wholly fpent. There are alfo other divilions of the parts of the Body, as into parts containing, parts contained , and the fpirits , exprefs’d by or impetum facientes , by Hippocrates. Fernelius divides the Body alfo into puhlick 1 and private Regions. The private are fuch as the Brain, Reins, Womb, ere. The publick are Three. The firlt includes the Vena porta , and all the parts whither its Branches reach. The fecond begins at the roots of the Cava , and ends in the fmaii veins before they become capillary. The third contains the Mufcles, Bones, and the bulk of the Body , and is terminated by the Skin. But this divifion is only of ufe in Medicin. CHAP. II. Of the Circtrmfcription , Regions ? and Parts of the Abdomen. I N the former Chapter we divided the Whole Bcdy into the Venters , and Limbs. Of which, becaufe the Venters are mere fubjedf to Putre- faction, Of the Abdomen. Book L 6 fadion, as containing parts that are very moift and flabby - whereas the Limbs confift of parts that are more dry and firm, fuch as the Bones , M'uf- cles and Tendons : I fay , on this account , the Venters are ufually firft difl'e&ed , and of them firft of all the Abdomen or Lower Belly that con- tains the Guts , which , of all other parts , are apteft in a fhort rime to fend forth noifoqie fmells, and to be ofFenlive to the Anatomift. Wc fhall begin with it therefore , and in the fecond place proceed to the middle Venter or Cheft , and lad of all to the Head : making each of thefe the fub- jed of a particular Book, Before we begin to cut open the Abdomen, three things are to be confidered in relation to it. Firfl, Its Cireumfcription or Bounds. Secondly , Its Re~ gions. Thirdly, The fpecial or conftituent Parts of it. The cir- As concerning the Circumscription of it, its up- cumfcri- per part is fevered (within) from the Breaflby the puon of the Midriff. In the fore fide it is bounded above by the nren°" Cartilago enfiformis , or the Heart-pit, and beneath by the Share bones. On the fides , by the fhort Ribs, and Oft a Ilia, or Hip-bones. Behind , by the vertebra of the Loins , Os Sacrum , and the Coccyx. Its Re ?i- Rs Regions are either Anterior , or Pofterior. cns - The Anterior (which comprehends alfo the ha- ;; Ante ~ teral ) is fubdivided into three others , viz., the uppermoft, middle, and loweft. The uppermoft , which reaches from the Cartilage) enfiformis to within three inches above the Navel, ( parallel to the loweft of the fhort Ribs ) hath three parts. Two lateral , which are called %o- chondria , or fubcartilaginea , becaufe they lie under the Cartilages of the fhort Ribs. In the right hy~ pochondrium Chap. 2. Of the Regions of the Belly. 7 pochondrium lieth the greateft part of the Liyer, and part of the Stomach ; and in the left , the Spleen, and a greater part of the Stomach. The third part is that which lieth before , between the two lateral parts , and is properly called Epiga- ftrium , becaufe the (middle of thej Stomach lieth under it. In this part remarkable is the Pit of the Breaft, which formerly has been nfed to be called but fcrobiculus cordis by the modern Wri- ters. The middle Region extendeth it felf from three inches above the Navel , to three inches under it. The forepart is that where the Navel is, from whence it is called Regio umbilicalis. The two la- teral parts are called in Englifh the Flanks ; in Latin Ilia ^ by Arifiotle Myva, either from their laxity or foftnefs, or from falacitas , as if they were the feat of Fuji - 0 by Galen means, be- caufe being placed between the Offallia , and Ribs, they are lank , and feem empty. They are called by Dr. Glijfon , Epicolica , becaufe on each fide, this Region invefteth the lateral parts of the Gut Colon. The lowe/l Region is called vOTjaVetw, hypoga - Jlrium. This Region reacheth from three inches below the Navel, to the Os Pubis and Groins, and hath three parts j two later af and one anterior cr middle. The lateral are bounded by the Offa Ilia , fo called, becaufe a great part of the Ilium intejlinum iieth under them on each fide. Beiides this, in the right lateral part are placed the be- ginning of the Colon , and all the Cacum intejlinum. In the left are contained thd ending of the Colon 9 and beginning of the intejlinum Refium. The forepart of the Hypogajlrtum by Arijlctle , lib. t. Hift. animal. 3. is called Inesr by feme (in fpecial ) Abdomen. At the lower part of it is feated the 8 Of the Abdomen. Book L the Tubes , which in the adult or ripe of age is covered with hair ; and on each fide of this, the Groins , called faGuva, or Inguina. Within this forepart of the loweft Region, are contained part of the Mefentery and fmall Guts , the Bladder,, and in Women the Womb. 2. PoJ ?e- The poflerior Region is divided into two parts, nor. £i ie U pper and lower. The upper is called the Region of the Loins, reach- ing from the root of the Midriff to the top of Os facrum , and contains within it the Kidneys , the Tancrews Afellii , and Centre of the Mefentery,the Receptacle of the Chyle,and the defending trunks of the Cava and Aorta. The lower part of the hinder Region reaches from the top of Os facrum, to the lower end of the Rump-bone or Coccyx. It is much broader above than below, and within it are included the ftraight Gut, part of the Ureters , and in Women the Tefticles or Ovaria , &c. Its parts, ' The parts of the Abdomen are containing (of outer) and contained ( or inner.) Com An- The containing parts are fuch as are either corn* tnon to it with the reft of the Body •, or are pro* per to the Abdomen alone. and con- T he parts contained ferve either for concoction, turned. for reparation of excrements, or for generation. Of a ' i which in order, and hrft of the common con * taming parts. & H A P, Chap. ]. Of the common containing parts » 9 CHAP. III. Of the common containing parts of the Belly , T H E common containing parts of the Belly are five, the cuticle or fcarf-skin , the skin , the fat, the membrana carnofa , and the common mem- brane of the Mufcles. The fcarf-skin, in Greek is named ov 70 Ap(m 773t7tt<, becaufe it is placed upon the true skin as a covering. It is as large as the true skin, and more compact for the ferous humour that in pujlules and blifters ouzes through that, is Hope by the denfity of this. Yet it is full of pores ? for the evacuation of fweat , and exhalation of vapors. It has neither blood-veflels nor nerves difperfed through it , and therefore is void of fenfe. It is bred of a vifcous and oleous vapour of the blood, raifed and exhaled by the natural heat of the fubjacent parts,and dried andcondenfed by the external cold, as molt Anatomilts have taught • but Dr. Gliffon thinks it to be a foft,flippery,vifcid and tranfparent juice ( like the white of an Egg) i Ailing out of the capillary extremities of the nerves, which end in the outward fuperficies of the true skin, where it is coagulated , and by its vifeolity flicketh upon it like glue fo that it can hardly be feparated therefrom by a knife, but may eafily by a veficatory. It fometimes alfo almofi; wholly peels off in Scarlet or burning Fe- vers, and the Small-Pox ^ but a new one prefent- ly fucceeds it. Diemerbroeck thinks, it is bred nei- ther of thefe ways, but has a feminal principle as well as the skin itfelf,or any orter folid part.But not fo probably, feeing it has no fenfe, and may be The com- mon con- taining parts of the Belly, i.Cuticu- la, or fcarf- skin. Its miter. io Of the Abdomen. Book L often quite loft, and yet prefenr.ly regenerated s all which circumftances agree to no part that has a feminal principle. And whereas he objeds ? that becaufe Infants when they are born have a fcarf- skin, therefore it cannot be bred by condenfation,, feeing there is neither cold nor drinefs in the worab,but on the contrary warmnefs and moifture, which will hinder all condenfation ^ Dr. Glijfon folves this Objection , by fhewing how a Liquor may be condenfed or indurated two ways : the one , by reparation of the thinner parts by way of exhalation, which is properly called defecation 3 . and this he confefles cannot happen in the womb “ the other , by coagulation , that is, by feparating the more ferous part of the matter from the thicker particles - which fort of condenfation may take place well enough in the womb. See his trad K deventric. &c. p. 11,12. where he very clearly makes this out. Some, from their obfervations by their Micro- fcopes , affirm the Cuticle to be fcaly , like that ofFifhes.* But feeing it is fo denfe as to contain the ferum in raifing of blifters , (as well as for other reafons) ’tis very improbable that ’tis of that texture , though perhaps its outer furface may appear fo. vfes. ■ The ufe of it is , Firfc , To defend the Skin, ( which is of an exquifite fenfej from external im- moderate either heat or cold. In cold weather its pores are fo feraitned , that the more tender parts lying under it are not too much affieded with the cold : In hot weather by its compadnefs it hindreth too great perfpiration. Secondly, To be a medium between the Skin and the objed to be felt • for when it is rubb’d ofr, the true Skin cannot endure the touch of 0=* ther Bodies without pain. Thirdly',’ Chap. Of the common containing -parts. 1 1 Thirdly, To hinder the ferous humour from IITuing from the Arteries ; for this we fee to happen when the cuticula is rubbed off by any means. Fourthly, To make the Body more beautiful * which it does by fmoothing the afperities of the true Skin, and inducing a comely colour of white and red. Whitenefs is natural to this part , and the rednefs is owing to the blood that is aifus’d to the outward fuperfkiesof the trueSkin: which being feen through the Scarf-skin makes that ho- rrid colour. Next under the Cuticle lieth the true Skin i a.Cutis,?? which is five or fix times thicker than it. In Greek ’tis called <%twc or s firjft Letter, p. io.)fayes, u cannot be feen without optick inftru- 4t ments, and can hardly be fiiew’d by the vulgar u and common way of diffe&ion , much lefs can j u the pyramidal papilla *, particles, which the Pro- tc feffors of Anatomy in their difi'eftions are wont to take no notice of, although they are to be 4t reckon’d fo necelfary to be known and feen of 4C the Students of Phyfick , that they are by no means to be neglected in anatomical adminiftra- “ tions, efpecially private ones. Of the reticular body and of the pyramidal papilla you have his Figures in the firlt Table of this Book. Difference The Skin in the Forehead and Sides is thin,," of thick • thinner yet in the palm of the Hand, but thinneft; tc f s ' of all in the Lips : In the Head, Back, and under the Heel it is thickeft. It is thinner in Children and Women than in Men j and in thofe that live in Chap. 5. Of the common cont dining parts. 1 ^ In hot Countries , than thofe that live in cold. And this ( as Spigelm obferves) is the reafon why thofe that are born in cold Countries, when they come under the fEquino&ial Line , are often ta- ken with Fevers , becaufe that great heat that is there excited in the Body by the outward air, cannot exhale through the too thick Skin ■ but being retained induces a preternatural heat , and fo a Fever. It is full of Pom , as well as the cuilcula. For Fores. thofe who deny them , oppofe not only reafon, but ocular demonftration. The paffihg of Quick- filver through a Sheep-skin evidences this • and Mr. Boyle has tryed the fame in a piece of the skin of a Man’s arm. And any one may fatisfie him- felfby an ordinary Perfpe&ive , or but a good pair of Spectacles , of the fame. For if when he is fweaty, he wipe off the fweat from the tips of his fingers, he may plainly fee frefh fweat ilfue out by the pores, and Hand in little drops. It is of a molt exa& temperature , neither too f emp ; ri ~ cold nor too hot, that it might the more accurate- t ure\\ni iy judge of the temperature of tangible things, vejjelsi Its nervous part , which is naturally cold, is at- temper’d by the heat of the arterial blood chat flows Continually for the fupply of its parenchy- matous part : and its parenchyma is not heated too much by the afflux of the blood, becaufe it is lodged amongfl fo numerous cold nervous fi- bres. It has very many both capillary Arteries and reins diftributed through it ^ as alfo abun- dance of nervous twigs , which endue it with a moil exquilite fenfe. As for the hair that in many places grows out Hath of the skin , we Ihall defer our difcourfe of it, till we come to treat of the hair of the Head , in Book III. chap, 2. G i Its 14 Of the Abdomen. Book I. Mion. Its aihon is ienfationor feeling. Wilich action is chiefly performed by thofe fore-mentioned py- ramidal papilla which Malpighius by the Micro- fcope has obferved to arife out of it a . in greater plenty in fuch parts as are of more exquifite fenfe, as the palm of the hand , foal of the foot , &c, but in lefs, in fuch as are of a more dull. vfes. Its ufe is, Firft, to cloath the whole Body, and defend it from theinjmiesof the weather , &c. Secondly, To be a general vent or emunftory to the Body , by which all its exhalations may fit- ly tranfpire. Which whether it be done only through its pores , as moll Anatomilts have af- firmed 3 or alfo through its very fubltance , as Dr. Glijfo n has of late aflerted , is a controverfie hardly worth the infilling on. Laflrly , In feveral places of the body to put forth and nourifh the hair , for the fence and or- nament of the refpective parts. 3. Fdt. Next under the Skin lies the Fat, which is commonly taken to be a covering diltinft from the membrana carnofa that lies under it , having the name of membrana adipofa given it ; but Dr. Gliffon reputes it only a part of the carnofa : for he fays, that membrane in its outer part is full of membranous cells, which are fill’d with a yellowilh fat, fomewhat like as the cells in the pulp of an Orange are filled with its juice. Mal- pighius fays, “ The Blood-velfels are expanded 44 like the boughs of trees , every where through the membrane that lies under the Fat , and the 5,4 membranous cells full of fatty globules hang f upon their ends, like leaves upon the boughs of trees. The bells are of almofc an oval figure, “ and are like the lobules of which the Lungs are u compofed, or rather like a conglomerate gland. “ They 1 Chap. Of the common containing parts., 15 44 They are knit to one another by the mem- 44 brane out of which they are formed. And 44 through the fame membrane and cells , he fays, 44 do not only capillary Veins and Arteries , but 44 duBus adipofi alfo run, which fwell with fat, 44 efpecially if they be beheld in an Animal newly 44 kill’d. Whether thefe veflels, adds he, propa- 44 gated through all the fat that is placed in the 11 circumference (or ambitus') of the body , flow 44 from the Caul , as from their root , fenfe has 44 not as yet difcover’d ; But feeing the Caul is 44 knit to the back, as to the centre of the whole “ body, it does not feem unlikely but that they 44 may be propagated into every region of the bo- 44 dy, by means of the membrana adipofa that is 44 extended over all : as we obferve of the Lym- 44 phedu&s, though they want any notable and 44 common trunk.’ 1 Thus far he. 3 Whether we Ihould call it Fat , or the fatty membrane , is not worth the while to difpute : nor much matters it, whether we repute the Fat , and fubjacent membrane, for one or two integuments. Let every one enjoy his opinion. For myfelf, i chufe rather to diftinguilh them, and confider them apart. Fat is defined to be a greafie fubfiance , bred of its defini* the oily portion of the aliment and blood , condenfed tim. by cold. In Men it is placed next under the skin, and situatkn* that all the Body over , except in the Lips , the upper part of the Ear, Eye-lids , Cod and Yard, which have no fat at all • and in the Forehead, where the skin cleaveth dole to the carnous membrane, as alfo according to fome , in the Temples. It is collected in the cells before- mentioned, and according to the common opi- nion is bred of an oily portion of the blood fweat- C 3 ing Book I. 1 6 Of the Abdomen. ing like a dew out of the Veins , and afterwards concreting : but according to Malpighius , the vafa adipofa are the conduits of its matter, as fhall be further {hewn in Chap. 5. of the Omentum or Caul. This Fat is properly called Pingucdo , whereas that of the Caul, &c. is called fevum , Suet or Tallow. And they differ in this, that pinguedo is eafily melted , but not fo ealily congealed ; whereas fevum is not eafily melted, but is ealily congealed, Befides, pinguedo is not brittle , but fevum is. The ufes of it are thefe ; Firft , It defendeth the Body from the external air. Secondly, It prefervetb the natural heat. Thirdly, It furthereth beauty by filling up the interfaces of the Mufcles and wrinkles of the Skin • whence very lean people for want of it look fhrivel’dand deformed. Fourthly, By filling up the empty fpaces be- tween the Mufcles, it rendreth the motion there- of more glib and eafie, ( fo ic do not abound too much) and keepeth all the parti from drinefs, or breaking, Hence it befmears the extremities of the Cartilages, the jointings of the greater Bones, and the VelMs that they may pafs lately. Laffly, Malpighius^ .rejecting all thefe ufes as prim > > iy intended, thinks the principal life of it, whilfi it is mixed with the blocd , is to be a con- tinual pabulum (or food) of the natural heat, whereb, the vital flame ( and confequently heat) is perpetuated. Alfo to mitigate the acrimony cf the blood , and join and unite the faline par- tich : thereof fo as that they become affimilable to the fc .1 par ; s for their nutriment , ferving to thofe particles as oil to colours in painting, or lime to i tones in building. When it is feparated Chap. 3. Of the common containing Parts . 17 from the blood, and collected , ere or other where, he is inclin’d to the common opinion, that in cafe of famine it pafTes into the nourifliment of the body. But as to its more ordinary ufe when collected in particular parts, the Reader may find it where thofe parts are treated of. The Car nous membrane is only properly focal- ^ _ Mem _ led in Brutes, in whom it is truly flejfhy and mufi- brim cular, fo that by means hereof they can at plea- carnofa, fure move and (hake their skin which is co tigu- ous to it, no fat intervening between them .* But in Man , feeing it has no carnous fibres , or pa- renchyma, it is very improperly termed carnous . We (hewed juft now Dr. Glijfon ' s opinion to be, that it is not truly diftinft from the Fat , but the Fat is a part of it : and upon account of the fat that adheres to it, he thinks it deferves the name of adipofa rather than carnofa. Only in the Fore- head and Neck it looks fomewhat flefliy , and therefore may in thofe places with better reafon be called fo. The ufes that we afcribed to the fat agree alfo its vfe r to this membrane, viz,, to defend the body from external cold, and to preferve the natural heater, yea it ferves alfo to fuftain and ftrengthen the veflels that pafs betwixt the skin and mufcles be^. tween which it is placed. Some make this mem- brane the feat of that honour or (hivering that happens in the beginning of Ague-fits , fuppofing it to be of exquifite fenfe , and that it is then twitched by (harp humours. But I think that fymptom rather proceeds from the like affe&ion of the membrane next under it, which is The common membrane of the Mufcles. This Thread over all the body (except the skull, accor- braneoftke G 4 ding Mufcles^ Of the Abdomen, Book L ding to foinej and is knit by fibres fomewhat loofely both to the foregoing that lies above it 9 and to the proper membrane of each Mufcle that lie under it. It is very thin , but ftrong % It is not yellow like the former , but whiter and more tranfparent. Its Glands. Dr, Haven in his OJleologia nova, p. 199. fays, “ he hasobferved the fame fort of glandules in this “■ membrane, as thofe which occupy the membrane u that lies over the Joints in all that part which 11 has none of the large Glands : and amongft ma- “ ny of the Tendons there are feveral of the larger u Glands , or the lelfer glandules conglomerated t( ' into the form of Glands. So that he dare be po~ u fitive in this alfertion, that the common mem» w brane of tiie Mufcles is every where glandulous. Upon thisfuppofition, the ufe of this membrane mull be not only (as has hitherto been taught ) to ferve as a common bag to contain the Mufcles in 9 and to help to keep them in their proper places : but alfo to moiicen and befmear the fubjacent Muf- clesand their Tendons wir.ha mucilaginous liquor,, which lubricates them, and fo makes them more ; glib and pliable in their motion. CHAP. Of the proper containing parts, 7 be proper jpK E proper containing parts are the -Mu* con Zinins Ji fles of the Belly, and the Peritonaeum, pans of the A - to the Afufcles , feeing we have affigned a j'r-. ur parth-ulai Book Qviz,. the fifth) for the defcrip- iks. non 4 ail the Mufcles of the Body, we fiiall refer the Readti Bother for thefe of the Abdomen , where he may fines. them fully defcribed Chap. 17. and Chap. 4. Of the proper containing parts . 19 and at prefent content our felves with only na- ming of them. There are five pair of them : The outer molt are the Obliquely defending • the next, the Obliquely amending •, the third., the Refit ; the fourth , the Pyramidal ; and the inmoi't , the Tranfverfe. All which being removed , the Peri- toneum appears next The Peritoneum or inmoft inverting coat of 2 - Me Pe- the Belly commonly called its Rim , ( derived from ritonxum ’ from its office of encompaffmg ) adheres above to the Midriff, belove to the Share- , and Flank- or Hip-bones ; in th t fore-part firmly to the tranfverfe Muffles, but chiefly to their Tendons about the Linea alba ^ behind to the flefhy heads of thefe Mufcles loofely. The end of this con- nexion is both for its own ftrengtb , and that it may the better comply with and ferve the Muf- cles in their compreffion of the Belly. Its figure is oval , and its fub fiance membranous. Its ffi urs The inner fuperficies of it , which refpects the Guts, is fmooth, equal, and flippery , bedewed' ° with a kind of watery humour {teaming or ex- haling from the parts contained in the Abdomen : but the outer fuperficies , whereby it cleaves to the aforefaid Bones and Mufcles , is rough and unequal. As for the origine of it, Fallopius will h ave ic to Origin* proceed from the fuperiour and inferiour plexus of Nerves of the Abdomen ^ for from th m it cannot be feparated without tearing. To him Dr. Glifjon afients. 'Arne derive it from the Liga- ments by which the vertebra of the Loins, and of Os facrum are knit one ro another, efpecially front thofe of the fir ft and third of the Loins, be- caufe it is there thickeft. Diemerbroeck denies it to have any origine at all , other than the firft fe~ minal matter out of which it was formed in tbs womb* 20 Of the Abdomen. Book I. 'pupliciij. Perforati- ons. Proeefles* womb. Bat that is only its material principle, and hinders net but that it may have ( according to Dr. GlifforC s diltin&ion) a principle or origine of continuation. it is double everv where , but appears fo to be dvefly about the vertebra of the Loins, and in the Hypogaftrium. For in the former place between its membranes lie the Vena cava , the Aorta , the Receptacle of rhe Chyle , and the Kidneys •, and in die latter, the Bladder, and in Women the Womb. Above , where it adheres to the Midriff , it has three foramina or holes • the firlt on the right fide, whereby the attending trunk of the Vena cava pafles \ the fecond towards the left tide , for the Gullet (vviih the Nerves of the eighth pair Inferted into the upper Orifice of the Stomach) to defeend by * the third behind , by which the great Artery or Aorta , and the intercoltai Nerve defeend , and the duthis chyliferus afeends. Below, it has paflages for the {freight Gut, for the neck of the Bladder , and in Women for the vagina of the Womb \ alfo for the Veins , Ar- teries and Nerves that pafs down to the Thighs. Before , in a foetus , for the umbilical VeJTels , to pafs in and out by. It has two remarkable Procejfes in Men placed before , by the os pubis , on each fide one. They are certain oblong produftions of its outer Mem- brane palling through the holes of the Tendons of the oblique and tranfv erfe Mufcles, and de- pending into the Cod, there bellowing one Tu» iiicie on the Stones , and containing them like a bag. There ' are alfo two ProcefTes in Women, but they reach only to the lnguina or Groins, and terminate in the upper part of the Privity, or the fat of Motts Veneris. The inner Mem- brane / Chap. 4. Of the proper containing parrs. 21 brane of the peritoneum (in Men ) rescues hut to the very holes , through which the Procefles de- fcend , which it makes very ftrait - hut being either relaxed or broken , the outer gives way, and fo there follows a Rupture , either the Caul, or the Guts, or both falling down thereby into the Cod. By the holes of the ProcefTes there de- fcend in Men the Veil els preparing the feed , and the Mufcles called Cremafteres ^ and by them a- fcend the Veffels bringing back the feed. In Wo- men there pafs by them the round ligaments of the Womb , which after fpreading chemfelves and growing jagged , are either joined to the Clitoris , or elfe terminate before they come at it, in the fat of Mens Veneris. It has Arteries and Veins from the Mammary Veffelu and Epigaftrick, and from thofe of the Midriff, or the Phrenick. It has {lender threads of Nerves from the pairs of the Vertebra of the Loins chief- ly. Its ufe is to aflill the equal and orderly con- Tfe. tradion of the belly for the expullion of the ex- crements, and by its fmoothnefs to prevent the Guts being hurt by the circumjacent parts. Its feveral other more private ufes may be observed in the foregoing description of it. And thus far of the parts Containing . T A B. I. Fig. 1. {hews the parts contacted in the Abdo- men , which appear to the firft view after all the containing parts are removed. aaaa The Skin of the Abdomen turned bttsk i whofe infide is fatty. bfcbb The Omentum or Caul » cccc The 22 Of the Abdomen. Book I cccc The 6 aflro-epiplo'ick ve/fels . dd T/j tended , and fometimes empty , and accordingly take up more or lefs room \ but yet it is not fo loofe, but that it is fome ftay to them, and part- ly hinders them from departing out of their places. CHAP. VI. Of the Gullet . T HE Caul being removed, the Stomach of- lk Gullet, fers it felf next to examination : but feeing the Gullet is as it were the Pipe or Funnel to it, though that be feated in tne Thorax , and fo Should be conudered in the next Book j yet be- caufe of its relation to the Stomach, being but an appendage of it, we (hall treat of it here, before we proceed to that. St is called in Greek, qiiafi ssw >y ivueJi , /w mmeSa becaufe it is narrow and long : As alfo o)jvpetyO- s on ol h to pzy.iiM *. , becaufe it conveys the meat to the Stomach. _ it is an organical part, round and hollow , be- Origins ginning at the root of the Tongue behind D 3 larynx f Of the Abdomen* Book L larynx , ( which part of it is called pharynx') and defcendeth from thence directly between the Windpipe and the vertebra of the Neck, and the four frit vertebra of the Thorax , upon which it refteth but when it is come to the fifth ver- tebra, it giveth way to the defcending trunk of the great Artery by bending a little to the right fide ^ afterward accompanying the Artery down to the ninth vertebra , there it turns a little to the left again, and climbs upon the Artery * and by and by about the eleventh vertebra it pafieth through the Midriff, a little on the left fide of its nervous Centre, at a hole diftind from that of the great Artery, and is inferted or continued unto the left Orifice of the Ventricle, fulfime. It is framed of three Membranes: The outmojf is common to it and the Stomach , and is very thin , being endowed only with membranous Fibres, and thole very {lender. Some derive its Origine from the Midriff, ethers from the Pleura , others from the Peritoneum , and others laftly, from the Ligaments of the vertebra of the Neck and Breaft upon which it refteth. 44 All which 44 Opinions ( according to Dr . Gliflon ) may be 44 true , if they be intended only of an origine 44 of continuation or connexion, feeing it is conti- 44 nued plainly to the three fir ft , and knit to the 44 lait : but none of them is true, if they be in- 44 tended of a fuftaining, or maintaining origine, 44 or of a principle of influence. The fecond or middle is flefhy and thick , and confifts of two ranks of flefhy Fibres, which afeend and de- feend obliquely , (fpiral-wifej and do mutually intei cuffate or crofs one another , fo as that the Fibre which before it meet with another to interfed , did lie underneath another, rides upon that which it interfeds 9 and fo continues upper- jnoff Of the Gullet. Chap. 6. 33 molt till it come to a fecond, under which it paf- fes again, and fo on by turns. The third or m- nermoft is- indued with deader ftreight Fibres, and thofe only, as ancient Anatomifts have taught* but Dr. Willis affirms it to have Fibres of divers kinds, and thofe diverfly woven one with ano- ther. It is wholly nervous , faving a certain woolly or downy fubftance that cloaths its in- fide. It is continued to that Membrane that co- vereth the Mouth, Jaws and Lips » and (accord- ing to Dr. Willis ) it defcends three Fingers breadth below the Mouth of the Stomach. From its being thus common to the Mouth , Gullet and upper orifice of the Stomach, proceeds that great confent among thefe parts in Vomiting, &c. It hath Veins in the Neck from the Jugulars, VeJJels, in the Thorax from the vena fine pari *, but where it is joyned to the Ventricle , it hath fome twigs from the ramus coronarius , which is a branch of the vena port * mentioned. What was faid of the Parenchyma of the Sto- mach in the foregoing Chapter , may without re» peating it here, be applied to the Guts likewife. Many late Anatomifts have obferved abun- GhrJs* dance of Glands to ftick in this inmoft coat, (be- fides thofe which make Dr. Willis 1 s glandulous coat) but they have been treated of by none , [ E 3 think* 4§ Of the Abdomen. Book I. think, foexadlyasby Peyerus , who has writ a fmall tvaft of them , and defcribes them thus. 44 They are very foft and delicate as to their fub- 44 fiance, be fays , fo that if one handle them rug- 44 gedly, they are eafily fqueezed and defaced. 44 They cannot be feen on the outlide ^ but if one 44 flit open the Gut lengthways , and thrufting his 44 finger againll the outlide , prels the infide out 44 by the flit, and hold it to the light, they plain- ly appear like little teats , with each one a 44 fmall pore in its top toward the cavity of the 44 Gut , as their bafes or backfides have bloud- 44 vefiels, (and as he fays. Nerves too) inferted in- 44 to them. If one prefs with his finger on their 44 backfide, there will ifiue out of their pore a clam- 44 mifh humour. There are but very few (fame- 44 times none ) of them in the Duodenum or Jeju - 44 num , but they are molt numerous in the lleum v 44 efpecially towards its lower end , and they are 44 chiefly on that fide of the Gut that is oppofite 44 to the adhefion of the Meferitery. Where they 4; are, they are not fingle , but a knot or duller 44 of them together , whence ( as alfo from their 44 ufe) he reckons them in the number of conglo- 44 merate glands. They are thus in knots in the ^fmall Guts • but in the Cmcum, Cohn and ReBum 44 they Hand fingle, but are larger than the other, 44 with every one a pore in it likewife. Thefe 44 are almolt as big as a Vetch ( and of the fame 44 fliape) but thole in the fmall Guts are but about 44 the bignefs of Millet. He thinks the office of 44 thofe in the fmall Guts is to feparate a double 44 fort of liquor , m. a fubvifcid and glutinons tr ’ferum from the Arteries , and a nitro-aereous 44 fpirit from the Nerves , ( according to Dr. Mdyow'% cpinicn) 44 which two being mixt toge- ther make a fermentative liquor for the per- 44 fcding Of the Guts. 49 Chap. 8. 41 fe&ing of chylification in. the Inteftines. But thofe in the thick Guts, he fays , ferve for little 4t elfe but to fpue out a clammifh humour , by ct means whereof the Guts are fenced againft the tc hardnefs of the excrements , &c. and alfo the tl particles of the excrements themfelves are tc thereby glued together, as it were , into a due “ confidence. Yet he fufpe&s there is fomething “of a nitro-aereous fphit alfo mixed with this “ humour, and thinks it moll probable that the tfc flatus in the Colon owe their origin thereto.]] Thus he. As to their Veffels, the Veins fpring from the Veins. Porta , but not all of them from the fame branch : For the duodenalis furculus is fent into the Duode- num, and the Hamorrboidalis interna to the left part of the Colon near its ending , which running downwards from thence under the Re Crum is in- serted into its end or anus y as the dexter mefente- ricus is fent to the Jejunum , Ileum , Cecum , and the right part of the Colon. Epiylo'is poflica is in- serted into the middle part of the Colon , which marcheth acrofs under the Stomach. Befides thefe, a fprig from the ramus bypogaftricus of the Vena cava is fent to the Mufcles of the intefti - num Re Cum, which maketh the external hemor- rhoidal. The Vfe of thefe Veins inferted into the Inte- Their vfe.' Hines the Ancients thought to be, both to carry venal bloud to them for their noqrifijment, and alfo to receive the Chyle out of them and carry it to the Liver there to be turn'd in bloud. As to the firfh ufe, ’tis certain (by the circulation of the bloud) that thefe Veins carry nothing to the Guts • but the blood that is in them , is alt recei- ved from the Arteries there , to be carried back towards the Liver, and fo to the Heart : but as E 4 to 5° Of the Abdomen. Book I. to the latter, there are fome learned Anatomiffcs that ftill think, though the greateft part of the Chyle is received by the vem latter, yet that fome part isfuckt in by thefe Veins , that it may be more readily conveyed into the mafs of bloud. But this opinion is exploded by others as learned and more numerous , who deny any fuch office to them, to whom I fubfcribe. Betides thefe fanguineous Veins there are ano- ther fort of Veins inferted ( more or fewer ) into all the Guts, called Latteal , but of them we will treat in a diftindt Chapter. Arteries. The Arteries fpring partly from ramus cceliacus intefiinalis , partly from both the me f enteric#. To the Duodenum and the beginning of Jejunum, a fprig is fent from the right ramus coeliacus : but to the reft of the Jejunum , to Ileum, C&cum and the right part of Colon , mefentericus fuperior • to the left part of Colon, and to the intefiinum Rettum t mefentericus inferior. This laft , paffing along the Rettum to the Podex , makes the internal hamor- rhoidal Arterie, as fome branches from the arteria hypogafirica make the external. Laftly , epiplois poftica , which rifeth from the lower part of arte- via fplenica , (which is the left branch of arteria cceltacaj is fent to the middle part of the Colon , which lieth under the Stomach. 7 heirvfe* Their Vfe is to convey nourilhment and warmth to the Guts ■, and when the Body is mor- bofe, to carry thither the impurities of the bloud, upon a purge taken, or critically, fo to pafs out by ftool. Yea, ’tis very probable, according to Peyerus his opinion before-cited , that fuch Arte- ries as terminate in the glands above-deferibed, do fpue out through them into the Guts, even in a healthful ftate, that fliiny humour that bedaubs the in fide of them. Nerves Chap. 8. Of the Guts. 51 Nerves they have from the inferiour raraifica- Nerves. tions of the Intercoftal or ninth pair. The Duo- denum hath fome twigs from the upper branch of the ramus mefentericus called ftomachicus , which go alfo to the Pylorus. All except the Reftum have many twigs chiefly from the plexus mefente - ricus maximus , and fome alfo from other Mefen* terical plexus of the Intercoftal pair } but the Refium y with the lower end of the Colon , receive flips from the plexus Abdominis infimus or mini- mus • and the utmoft extremity of the Intercoftal is inferted into the fphinfter ani , whither alfo pafs three or four that fpring from the bottom of Os facrum. Thefe Nerves ferve for the feeling , and for V >e t t e f“ the periftaltick or worm-like motion, of the Guts-, m(h which though it be obfcure and flow , yet becaufe it is continual , it had need of fo great a number of Nerves or nervous fibres as are bellowed on the Inteftines. Now this motion is in fome mea- fure performed by the oblique fibres , but efpeci- ally by the tranfverfe , whereby what is contain- ed in them is driven from above downwards : unlefs it happen that the motion be inverted , as in the Iliack paflion, in which they drive their Contents from below upwards. Peyerus thinks that even in a natural ftate (at leaft in the fmall Guts^} this motion is reciprocal, the contracti- ons of the fibres being carried fometime upwards, and fometimes downwards ^ to the end that both the fermentative liquors may by this agitation be the more intimately mixed with the chylous mafs, and alfo the chyle the better diftributed into the Lacteal veffels. If it were otherwife , thedefcent of the chyle, he thinks , would be fo haity , that every one wou'd labour under the cceliaca affettio. And he quotes from IVepfer an Inftance in an hu» mane 52 Of the Abdomen. Book I. mane body, and alledges bis own observation in aH his difTe&ions of Creatures alive , for the con- firmation of the truth hereof. But the learned and curious that would be further informed about the perildaitick motion , may confult Dr. Glijfon in cap. 1 5. of his Book de ventriculo & intefrinbs, or Dr. Charkton in £'e£t. 3. of his third preledion before the College of Fbyficians. As for that o- ther Vfe, t which Teycrus Tcribes to the Nerves, of tranfmitting a nitro-aereous fpiiit through the Glands into the Guts , which mixing with that Jiumou: that is feparated’ from the Arteries makes • a ferment for the perfecting of chylification in the IntdHnes , the Reader is at his difcretion what opinion he will entertain of it. 7 k divifi-- Though the Guts be one continued Body from o’ 1 of the the pylorus to the anus , yet from the thicknefs of Gms. their fubftance, as alfo from their magnitude , fi- gure, and variety of office, they are difting'uiih’d into Several by Anatomifts, and firft into thirty and thick. V 1 The differences between the thin and thick Guts are thus fumm’d up by ylquapenclent : tc The “ thin or fmaU are placed above, are long , equal, “ round, rolled about in wreaths , full of wrin- u kies, interwoven with innumerable Veins , and 11 Chyle is found in them: On the contrary , the “ thick are placed below , are fliorc, anfraduous, “without twilling wreaths, and endued with “ fewer Veins ^ and the wrinkles or folds in the “ Guts are expanded, and there refult from them “ certain recedes or cells, and the faces are found u in them. The thin. The thin poffefs the umbilical region and hypo - gafirium • and in refped of their figure , fixati- on, longitude and plenty of ladeal Veflels , they 'are Chap. 8. Of the Guts. 5 ? are divided into three, riz,. the Duodenum^ Jeju- : num and lieon. The firft is called Duodenum , becaufe the An- i* D,1 °* dents- thought it to be twelve inches long. But denum ° being chiefly vers’d in the difledtion of Brutes, they were thereby deceived; for though in Sheep, for inflance, it be of that lengtn, yet in Man it is but about four fingers. It is continued from the pylorus from whence turning backwards and down- wards it reaches to the middle of the greater and right end of the Pancreas ; and is none of it knit to the Mefentery , but to the fore-leaf of the Caul. It is thicker in its Membranes than the two following fmall Guts, but its paffage (becaufe ftreight) is ftraiter than theirs. Towards its lower end, (Tometimes higher , fometimes lower ) it has molt commonly two dudfs leading oblique- ly into it ; firlt the dutius choledochus communis , by which the bile from the Liver enters this Gut ; and fecondly a little below this , dutius pancreati- cus (othcrwifc Wirtfungianus ) by which the pan- creatick juice pafles hither from the Pancreas or Sweet-bread; though thefe two ducts are fome- times joined into one, and both open by one mouth into this Inteftine. The fecond is called Jejunum, or the hungry 2. jeju- Gut, becaufe it is for the mod: part found empty ; num< ’ partly by reafon of the multitude of milky Veins that enter it ; partly by reafon of the fermentati- on of the acrimonious choler with the pancreatick juice , which are both poured in juft before its beginning. In length it is about eight feet. It beginneth on the right fide , under t Colon % - where the Duodenum endeth , and the Guts begin -to be wreathed; and filling a good part of the umbilical region, efpecially on the left free , it is continu'd unto the Ileum , from which It may be diftinguiih'd 54 Of the Abdomen. Book I. diftinguilh’d firft by its emptinefs, fecondly, by its greater number of Veins and Arteries, from which it looks reddilh ^ thirdly , from the near- nefs of the folds or wrinkles of its inmoft coat one to another , which are but about half an inch diftant, whereas in the Ileum they are a whole inch or more ; and laftly , from the thicknefs of its coats, as being thicker than thofe of the Ileum. 3. Ileum. The third is called Ileum , u cir- cumvolvendo , from its many turnings and wind- ings. It hath thinner membranes than the two before-going. It is feated under the Navel , and filleth both the Ilia. It is the longed of all the Guts, for in length it containeth above twenty feet *, but it is the narrowed of all , for it is but about a finger’s breadth in diameter. It hath fewer wrinkles than the Jejunum , and lefler \ about the lower end of it they fcarcely appear. At its beginning it is diftinguilhed from the Jejunum by all the four particulars above men- tioned ^ and it is eafily diftinguifhable from the C&cum or Colon , being not joyn’d to thefe by a ftreight dud , but tranfverfe. For the Cacum and Colon are fo united as to make one continued ftreight Canal, whofe lower fide the Ileon amend- ing pierceth, and into the latter whereof its in- ner Coat hangs loofly the length of half an Inch at leaft, making the Valve it felf of the Colon , and is the limit that divides the Cacum from it. This Ileum oft falls down into the Cod, whence fuch a Rupture is called Inteftinal. And in this Gut happens the Diftemper called Folvulus or lliaca paffio , wherein there is often vomiting of the dungy Excrement. This Diftemper is cau- fed herein , either when one part intrudes into another , or when the Gut is twifted and twined Chap. 8. Of the Guts, its like a Rope, or when it is fluff’d with fome mat- 01 ter that obftruds it : or laftly , when it falls out ar- of its place into the fcrotum , as was noted be- lt fore. And thus much of the firft fort of Inte- kI Hines, viz., the fmall or thin. I have once and again made mention of the 7 Mr of wrinkles in the infide of the Jejunum and Ileum, valves* k which by modern Anatomifls are called Falvula conniventes. Thefe happen from thefe Guts in- ir. i moll Coats being much longer than the two j. other ; for hence it mull needs ever and anon 'D j wrinkle or bag out, and where it does fo, llrait- en the paflage , by which means the Chyle de- fcends more flowly, and thereby the Ladeal veffels have the more time to imbibe it. , Now follow the inteflina craffa , the thick or The thick great Guts they are three in number alfo. Guts. The firft is called C cecum , tjqkIv , the blind i.C^cum. Gut , becaufe one end of it is (hut , fo that the I Chyle ( or faces rather ) both goes in and comes out at the fame orifice. In Man it is about as thick, and but half as long, as your larger Earth- worms flretched out at length only its mouth that opens towards the Colon is pretty large. It owes its origine rather to the Colon than the lie- w, and feems to be as it were an appendage to it. It is bigger in an Infant than in a Man. It is not tied to the Mefentery , but being placed in the Cavity of the right os Ilium , by its end it is joyned to the right Kidney , the peritoneum com- ing between. In found perfons it is general- ly empty. In four-footed Bealls it is always full of Excrements. Apes have it larger than a Man , Dogs larger than Apes •, but Conies, Squirrels, and Rats, largefl of all , if you conli- der the proportion of their Bodies. Its ufe is very obfcure in Men , being fo very fmall and commonly Of the Abdomen. Book I. commonly empty. But in grown foetus'* s , or Infants new born, it is full of Excrement , for which it ferves as a Store-honfe till after the birth that they go to ftool. And in fuch Ani- mals as have it large , ( according to Dr. Glijfori) it ferves for a Bag or fecond Ventricle , wherein the prepared Aliments may be ftored up and fo> long retained , till a richer, thicker , and more nutritive juice may be drawn from them. i e. Colon. The fecond is Colon y mkov* either quafi cavum , becaufe it is the hollomfi or widell of the Guts •, or elfe fS kwm Jw, ab impediendo , be- caufe it detaineth the Excrements. It hath its beginning at the os Ilium on the right fide , and afcending by its Spine it arrives at the right Kidney ^ to which parts it is annex’d by a mem- branous connexion. From thence bending left- ways it creeps under the Liver by the Gall- bladder, (which tinges it there a little yellow- ifh ) to the bottom of the Stomach , to the whole length whereof it is tied by the mediation of the f( “.-Leaf of the Caul , as it is knit alfo to the Pant v cas and Loins by the mediation of the hinder Leaf. Then it comes to the lower part of the Spieen, and is knit to it. Then touch- ing the left Kidney , and adhering firmly to it by Fibres,, it comes to the left os Ilium ; from which descending by the left Groin to the pelvis it embraceth the bottom of the Bladder behind on each fide. Afterwards it afcends upwards by the right Grom near the place from whence it firfr took its rife • and thence marching back again towards the left fide , and running it felf in betwixt the Ileum and Back-bone, it reaches to the top of os Sacrum i and there unloads it felf into the Redurn. Its length according to Dr. Gliffon^ is about feven feet \ others reckon 1 . Chap. 8. Of the Guts. 57 * it (hotter. It goeth almoft quite about the Ab~ dotnen , next to the Mufcles , that it may be the j c better comprelfed by them for avoidance of the Exxrements. Diemerbrosck has an ingenious rea- fon why it fbould pais under the Stomach • viz.. J! That as Chy raids judge no digedion more na- ® tural, than that which is performed by the heat 5 of Dung, fo the heat of the Excrements in the Colon does help the codion of the Stomach. , It is not of one continued equal width, but /w Cells * ! at about every two or three Inches didance it is Li S a “ more contraded , being fomewhat furrow’d on m '' lU the outfide, and ridged on the inner , whereby the Gut is divided into fe.veral Cells. This comes to pafs partly indeed from the inmod Coat’s ex- * ceeding the middle and outmod fomewhat in j length, but chiefly from the Ligament ( which is half an inch broad) that runneth on the upper and middle part of this Gut aii along, and is : much dorter than the membranes of the Gut , as appeareth when it is cut through here and there, for then the Gut may be dretched out to near half as long again. The Vfe of thefe Cells is to hinder the flowing of the excrements into one place, which would comprefs the parts adjacent ; as alfo for the flower paflage of the faces, that we may not have a continual and hady need of going to docl. On its outfide , efpecially from its palling by the Spleen to its joyning, to the Refium , it has a great many fatty knots , which ferve to moiden and lubricate it , that the feces may pafs the more glibly. The Reftutn alfo has fuch like, for the fame reafon. It hath a Valve where it is joined with the Ileum , its valve. which Valve is nothing elfe but the inmod : coat of the Ileum propending or hanging out flaggy x to the Colon, (as was noted before ; ) Forks shape, Soigehus Of the Abdomen. Book I. Spigelius compares it to the figmoides in the right finus of the Heart. This Valve fo ftoppeth the hole which is common to the lleon and Colon, that flatuofities cannot afcend from this latter into the former , much lefs excrements regurgi- tate. But if the periftaltick motion of the Guts be inverted, ( as in the Iliack Palfion) fo that the inmofl: coat of the Ileum be drawn back from its depending into the Colon, the excrements of the Colon, yea Cly Iters themfelves may afcend up thro* the fmall Guts into the Stomach , and be thrown up by vomit. 3 .Rectum. The third is inteftinum Rettum, the freight Gut. This hath its beginning at the firft vertebra of the Os Sacrum , where the Colon endeth * and paffeth ltreight downwards to the extremity of the Coc- cyx. It is fall tied on its back-ftde to both thefe bones, by mediation of the Peritoneum , to keep it from falling out • and on its fore-fide it grows in men to the neck of the Bladder , ('whence in the pain of the Stone there, there generally hap- pens a tenefmus or continual inclination to go to Itool) and in women to the neck of the Womb : but in both there is a mufculous fubftance that comes between. It is a foot in length , not fo wide as the Colon , but its Membranes are thicker. Ttssphin - At its lower end , ( called the Fundament, ) it far Muf- has a Sphinder Mufcle, by the help whereof it is tle > clofe purfed up, to hinder the continual exit of th6 faces. But in going to ftool the fame is partly voluntarily relaxed, and partly forced open by the excrements themfelves whim they are fquee- zed or forced down through the compreffion of the Guts by the contradion of the Abdominal Mufcles. This TaJj.UL Of the Guts. 59 Chap. 8. ThisGut ('efpecially its inner Membrane) ufu- ally bags a little out in (training at (tool, or upon taking Aloetick Purgers, yea fometimes fo much, that it requires an artificial putting up again. As for the hemorrhoidal Veins and Arteries, that are inferted into the anus, we have given an account of them before in this Chapter ■, as we (hall do of the Mufcles belonging to it, in Book V. of the Mufcles , Chap. 1 9. The Explication of the Figure. A The Stomach. B The Gullet or Oefophagus. C The left and larger part of the Stomach. © The upper orifice of the Stomach. E The right external Nerve of the fixthpair (Dr* Willis’* eighth ) encompajfing the orifice. F The left external Nerve of the fame pair. GG The gaftrick Vejfels creeping along the bottom of the Stomach. H The lower orifice of the Stomach , called py* lorus. fa The infertion of the Gall-paffage into the Duo- denum. I The infertion of the Pancreatick dud into the fame. Ill The Jejunum and Ileum with the Veffels creeping along them. K. The Caecum. LLLL The Colon. M The Valve in the beginning of the Colon opened . mmm The Ligament bolding together the Cells of the Colon. NN The Redum. O The SphinUer of the Anus, pp The Mufcles called Levatores Ani. f ' CHAP. 6 o Of the Abdomen. Book 1 % the Mefeti- very, its Time and defcri ■ #'• Subfl&uce. CHAP. IX. Of the Mefentery. T H E Mefentery is fo called from its fltuatiofl. For it has its Greek name tuirwle&p, q from whence the Englifli is derived ) from its being ' placed iv i&TQ vW j m tfoe wid/J 0 / the Inteftines. And it is a membranous part , fitua- tcd in the middle of the lower Belly, ferving not only for conveying fome VefTels to the Inteftines, and others from them, but alfo tyes molt of the Guts together fo artificially, that for all their manifold windings they are not entangled and confounded. Which may be much wondred at, how the Guts being about nine or ten yards long,fl;ouId-.all but the Duodenum and part of the Rettum be comprehended by that circumference that is but a fpandiftant from the centre; for no longer is the Mefentery betwixt thofe bounds. But it is.almoft of a circular figure, which is moft capacious ; and though it be narrow and plain at -its rife, yet its circumference is wrinkled and enlarged into fo many folds, as to be three Ells in length , whereby it comes the nearer to anfwer the length of the Guts. It has a double Origins*-, an higher, and a low- er. The higher is at the firft, and the lower at the third vertebra of the Loyns. It is compofed of two common Membranes which are propagated or continued from a du- plicature of the peritonadm ; and betwixt thefe two it has a third Membrane that is proper, ( which was firft difeover’d by Dr. Wharton f in a young Maid) and is thicker than either of the othe-r Chap, 9. Of the Mefentery. 6 1 other two , wherein the Glands are feated and by which the VelTels are conduced. As for the Fat with which it is ftufft betwixt its Membranes , though the fame happen natu- rally to it, yet ought it not to be reputed a pro- per part of it. For not to mention that in Dogs, Cats, and fuch like Animals , this part is, very thin and tranfparent , even in humane Embryo * s it is without Fat and in very lean Men there is. but little, though in fat Men it be heaped up to fo great a thicknefs. The parts contained in the Mefentery are ei- Partsl ther common or proper. The common are Veins, Arteries, Nerves, and Lymphedu&s. The proper are Glands and the Fern s latte*. Of thefe lad we ihall fpeak in the next Chapter, of the reft here. The Veins are called Mefarajca • thefe fpring from ramus mefentericus dexter & finifler , branches of the vena Port#. (Their ufe, asalfothatof the Arteries, was fhewn in the Chapter before, {peak- ing of the VelTels belonging to the GutsJ It hath alfo two Arteries , the one fuperiour,the , other inferiour,branches of the arteria mefintcrica , which pafs as the Veins do. As for the Nerves. Dr. Willis defcribeth them Very accurately in his Book deCercbro, cap. 25. which take thus in Ihort. “ As foon as the inter - u coftal pair is defcended as low as over againft 44 the bottom of the Stomach , it fends forth 011 44 each fide a large mefenterick branch , each of u which is again divided and makes two plexus 44 in each fide. In the middle of thefe is the grea- * 4 teft plexus of all, which (as he fpeaks ) is like the 41 Sun amongft the Planets from which , twigs 41 and numerous Fibres are difperfed into all the 44 parts of the -Mefentery , which accompanying ! 4 the fanguiferoys VelTels in their whole procefs^ F 2 44 do 62 Of the Abdomen. Book I. 41 do climb upon and twill about them.} Others it hath from thofe which fpring from the fpinalis medulla , between the fivft , fecond , third , and fourth vertebra of the Loins , ( as Spigelius af- firmethj Lymphe- Befides thefe Veffels known to the Ancients,’ about 38 years ago there were found out an- other fort by Tbo. Bartholin ( a learned Dane ) and called by him vafa lymphatica , which he gives a large account of in append. 3. to the libel, j. de Penis, of which 1 fhall give a Compendium here, becaufe the Mefentery abounds with them. Their Ti ■ They are of figure long and hollow like a Vein, but very fmali and knotty , having very- many Valves which permit the lyrnpha or water contained in them to pafs to the chyliferous Vef- fels (and many Veins) but hinder its return. Colour and They are of a pellucid and cryftallin colour, £ub)ime, jj]^ e hydatides , confining of a tranfparent and molt thin skin , which being broken , and the lymphct flowing out, utterly disappears. Number* Their number cannot be defin’d , for they are almoft innumerable. As to their rife, Bartholin fpeaks uncertainly ; but Malpighius affirms , that they always proceed from Glands • and Stem, that they always either arife from or are inferted into Glands. fafsrtm* As to their infertion or ending, thofe under the Midriff do difcharge their liquor into the recep - taculum chyli , ( to be fpoken of in the next Chap- ter.) Thole in the thorax , immediately into the thoracick duff. And thofe of the Neck , Arms, &c. into the jugular Vein. Bartholin thought they ail difcharg’d themfelves into thefe three Chanels : but Diemerbroeck affirms , they open al- fo into many other Veins ^ and quotes Stem no- ting that they empty themfelves into the jugular and Chap. 9 . Of the Mefentery. 6 1 and other Veins and alfo his Countryman Fre- derick Ruyfch writing , that by ligature and ftru- dure of the Valves , he has plainly feen , that all the lympheduds in the Lungs do difcharge their lympha into the fubdavian , axillar , and jugular Veins. Stem diflinguifhes them into three forts • for Differed fome from their firft Origins (but what thofe oi mufi. are, he cannot fay) are difperfed over the fur- &g Ian £- face of tire frit Glands they approach unto*^* 41 ' others run from the hollow fide of one Gland to the gibbous of another ; and a third fort run from the hollow fide of thefe latter , to the Veins into which they difcharge their lympha. Whence (fuppofing this difference) an Inquiry may arife. Whether the lymphedud that paffes out of the hollow fide of the Gland , carry a more elabo- rated lympha than that which entred into its gibbous fide ? or whether only the quantity be cncreafed ? I believe that into every Gland there enter an Artery, Vein and Nerve , and therefore that fome new lympha is added to that which was brought in from the Lymphedud inferred into it , which together therewith enters into the Lymphedud ariling out of it *, but that there is no further elaboration of the former lympha , which l think perfect at its entrance into the firft Lymphedud. There has been much difpute what this lympha ivJmth which they carry, is. It feems to Bartholin to be Lymphs meer limpid water ^ but to fimple water there is added an alimentary liquor , or a thinner part of the Chyle, fit for Nutrition, thoroughly mixed with it. The former , he fays , is call off either by fweat , or other ways whereby water pafles away^ the later is circulated on. Glifon , that it is a liquor condens’d from the halitus of the F } blood Of the Abdomen,, Book I, blood (like Dew) driven into thefe Veflels , and flowing back with the vehicle of the aliment brought by the Nerves. Segerus ( and Sylvius ) that it is the animal Spirits , or is made of them, which after they are diftributed into all parts by the Nerves, are there partly confum’d and diffipated , and are partly condens’d into this water. Diemcrbrocck quotes more Opinions befides thefe, but rejeds them ah , and eftablifh- eth this of his own , viz,. u That it is a fermen- taceous liquor feparated from the ferous part of the blood in the conglobate Glands, yet not fimple, but impregnated with much fus’d and a volatile Salt , and alfo withfome fulphureous particles ^ which when it is conveyed to the u vafa chylifera , makes the Chyle thinner and apt to dilate eafdy in the Heart ^ and when to the reins, prepares the venous blood ( now too thick) for a quick dilatation in the Heart.] This lymfocL, whatever it be, ( or be for) differs from the f crura • for if one gather a little of it I in a Spoon, and let it hand, without fetting it on the Fire, it will turn into a jelly , which the femm will not do. And thus much of the LymphcduCts ( with their lymph a ) in general-, as 't-o thofe’ particu- larly of the Mefentery , fome only pafs through it from other parts , as from the Liver , &c. but many have their rife in- it , and both the one and other are emptied into the receptaculum cbyli. ThGUn- It hath many little foftifh Glands fix’d in its lutes of the proper Membrane , cover’d oh each fide by the Mefentery. two common ones , and befet with Fat. If you cut them in two , and prefs them with your Fin- gers, you may fqueeze a whitifh liquor out of them. They are whiter in young people than Chap. 9. Of the Mefentery. in old. In number they are very uncertain ^ in Man fewer and fmaller alfo than in other Crea- tures. The biggeft by much is at the rife or centre of the Mefentery, (called by s. IfeUius Pancreas') into which all the vena laftea are in- ferred. Of its ufe, as alfo of the leffer , we fhall fpeak ini the next Chapter, when we come to treat of the palfage of the Ladeals. We will only note here , that when thefe Glands grow fcirrhous , or are any ways obftruded , fo that the Chyle cannot tranfcolate through them, there follows a fiuxus cceliacus , or chylofus , which con- tinuing, there enfues an Atrophy , and the party dies tabid. And perhaps from the fame. Ob- ftrudion in the Glands, the courfe of the lympha being flopped , and by that means the Lymphe- duds that pafs from one Gland to another being over-extended and buriting , an Jfcites is partly caufed. It is but one, yet becaufe of its different thick- Tfe dhtjs- nefs it is divided by fome into two parts. tf'&e The one they call Mefaraum , v, becaufe it is placed ** yd ,'apeuuv ( fubaudi ) in the midjt of the f mall Inteftines , which it knits together •, and this is the thicker part of it. The other being the thinner , they call be- ing feated G yksu tS , in the midfi of the Colon, to which it is joyned in its whole length, fave only in the Colon’s palfage under the Sto- mach •, and in its lowed border it adheres to a part of the Re ft urn. Difeafes incident to this part are reckoned up nifeafis. by Dr. Wharton to be thefe ; thofe of internments ^ ftrattnefs or obftrudion , tumours of whatfo- ever kind, ( Scirrhi , Scropbula , Struma ) Inflam- mations, Abfceffes , Ulcers, and Tone vitiated. G '■ - ■ " F 4 ' Of 66 Of the Abdomen. Book I, Of all which the Reader that defires fuller infor- mation, may be fatisfied by the faid learned Au* thor, in his Adenography cap. n. CHAP. X. Of the Venae lafteae, Glandulae Iumbares, Receptaculum commune , duftus chyli- ferus Thoracicus, and of the motion of the Chyle, Venas 1 clOiClod* X vclf- Dennmon, V Enue lattea, the Milky veins ( fo called from ' the white colour of the Chyle which they carry) were not difcover’d ( as fuch) till the year 1 622. when Cafpar Afellius found them out in diflefting a Live-dog well fed. But fince him many others have made a more accurate difcovery of them than he. They are (lender pellucid VefTels , having but a bogle Coat , difperfed in great numbers thro’ the Mefentery , and appointed for the carrying of the Chyle. Their rife is from the inmoft Membrane of the inteftines, where their Months are hid under a kind of a fpongy cruft or mucus , through which by the predion of the Guts the Chyle is (trained and received by the mouths of thefe veffels. From whence they proceed uic readied way to fuch Glandules of the Meftotery as are neareft to them: bat in their callage many fmall ones .uni- ting te one another o co r manly grow into one large trunk • namely, a pretty way before they infinuate themfelves into the Gland , to which we faid they were going. But in their very en- trance into the Gland , or a little before, this trunk Chap, io, Of the Vense lafteae, &e. 6 7 trunk feparates again iuto new branches, more and fmaller than the other. And thus far thi| are called radicales , or prim't generis , of the fir It kind. Out of the Gland there fpring again new capillary ones , which by and by meeting toge- ther make one trunk again as before, which keeping its courfe towards the centre of the Me- fentery , enters as many Glands as lye in its way, being divided into new branches juft before its entrance into each Gland , as before. But whilft all the trunks bend one way , they alfo meeting with one another , do in procefs feveral of them grow into one. And at length all the trunks arrive at the great or middle Gland of the Me- fentery ( called improperly Pancreas ) which moft of them enter into, but fome of them pals over its Surface , and by and by they all empty themfelves into. the great or common receptacle of the Chyle that lies behind the faid Gland, thofe that were inferted into it riling out of it In like manner as they did before out of the leller Glands. As they run from one Gland to an- other, they are called fecundi generis , or of the fecond kind : And from their having paft all the Glands to their opening into the common re- ceptacle , &c. they are called term generis , or of the third kind. By the way we cannot omit to take notice of Glandulx thofe three Glands which Bartholin calls Lumba - lumbare*. rej, from their being fituated upon the Loins ^ and which he thus deferibes. * Two of them which * K are larger, lye one upon the other betwixt the I0 8. defeending Cava and Aorta , in that Angle which Edjt. 74 , the Emulgents make with the Cava. The third being fmaller Hands over thefe, under the ap- pendices of the Diaphragm. They have com- munication, or are knit one to another by fmall la&ea) 68 Of the Abdomen. Book I. la&eal branches , efpecially>the two larger . 3 He once thought them to fupply the place of the common Receptacle in Man ^ that not being fo plain in him as in feveral Brutes. But lince a Receptacle is acknowledg’d as well in Men as Brutes, Dr. Wharton's Opinion concerning their ufe feems more probable, viz,. That they fupply the place of thofe larger Glands that are found in the Mefenteries of Brutes, but are not natural to Men ^ And for this reafon he prefumes, that all fuch Animals as want thofe greater Glands in the.Mefentery, have thefe Lumbar® as well as Men, I • • ' , • 1 |j Recepta- The common Receptacle is called Receptacultm. culum Chyli Pecquetianum 0 from Pecquet who firft found «oramune. ouC -j. anc j t p e Thoracicus ( whole be- ginning it is ) in the year 1651. I mean he was the firft that affigned the true ufe unto them , but. both were obferved in Horfes by Bartholomaus Eujlachius above an hundred and thirty years ago , as appears in a Book he writ, 1564. pag. 301. of the Vena fine pari J wherein he has thefe words , (as cited by Dr, Wharton.) From this notable left trunk of the throaty (viz. the Subclavian Vein ) there fprings a great branch , which befidcs that it has a femicircular door , ( or valve ) in its Origine^ is moreover white , and full of a watry humour ^ and not far from its rife it is 'divided into two , that after a little fpace mite again into one , which fending forth no branches de- fcends by the left fide of the vertebrae, and having pajl through the cJ'Midrfif runs, down to the .middle of the Loins : where becoming larger , and folding about the great Artery , it has an obfeurs ending^ which l have not as yet well dif cover'd.’} Here we Jtave a clear defeription of them, only that is the beginning Chap, io. Of the Venae la&eae, &c. 6 phragm in refpiration. Now as foon as the Chyle is once got into the LaBea , we need not be feli- citous for a reafon of its further progrefs to the Receptacle and up the Thoracick Dud •, for what is once got in, cannot Aide back again , by reafon of the Valves and feeing fo long as there is any Chyle in the Guts, there is no ceflation of its being preft into the LaBea , that which- comes behind muft needs drive forward that ' which went before, by which it is made to afeend to the Heart. Which afeent is alfo helped by the Lympha that mixes with it in the Receptacle and DuCt , not only in that it is thereby dilated , but more efpecially from that motion which is im- prefled upon the Lymph a from the pulfatioft of Chap. si. Of the Liver. 73 the Heart , whereby it is made to circulate by the Lymph eduds , as well as the Blood by the Veins. CHAP. XL Of the Liver . T H E Liver is feated in the upper part of the 71 % e Liver. Abdomen , namely about a finger’s breadth Its fim- Aiftance from under the Midriff, in the right Hy- *'m. pochondre, (under the fhort Ribs) which , being of a great bulk, ft quite fills in a manner, and reaches from thence towards the left fide, a little beyond the Cartilago enfiformis 1 or pit of the Sto- mach'. Its upper fide is convex or round and fnrooth, the under is hollow , lying on the right fide of the Stomach and pylorus , &c.. Its lower edge reaches below the ffiort Ribs on the right fide, and very near as low as the Navel before. In Dogs and many other Brutes , it is plainly Lobes. divided into divers Lobes y to which that Man’s might feern to correfpond, many of the Ancients reckon’d it to have four Lobes, called port- (Qbferv. 2. a fecond thing is concerning the co-tour of the Bile ^ that though for the mod part, in a health- ful date, it be yellow , yet preternatu rally and in a morbous date it isoft^l of feveral other co- lours , as pale-coloured, eruginous, porraceous, vitelline , reddiih and blackifh. And when it thus degenerates and corrupts, it is the caufe of mod violent and acute Difeafes } as the Cholera morbus , Dyfentery, Colick, &c. CHAP. XV. Of the Pancreas. T H E Pancreas ( as much as to fay , A U-fle/B ) or the Sweet-bread , except its Membranes andVelFels, is wholly Glandulous. It feems to be compared out of many Globules or knots in-* eluded in a common Membrane , and joyn’d one to another partly by Membranes , and partly by Veilels. Every Globule by it felf is fomewhat hard •, but all together ( becaufe of their loofq connexion) feem foftifh. It is of a palifh colour, very little tin&ured with red. Its invefting Membrane it has from the Peritoneum. It The Pan- creas. Its Sub - fiance* Chap. 15. Of the Sweet-bread* 101 It is feated under the bottom and towards the situation , hinder fide of the Stomach, and reaches from the an f con ~ Cavity of the Liver, (namely from that part nixmn% where the Porta enters it ) to the lower end of the Spleen crofs the Abdomen. It is annexed (by its DuCt) to the Duodenum , and fometimes to the Duftus bilarm , to the Rami fplenici, the Caul, the upper part of the Mefentery , and upper Nervous plexus of the Abdomen. It is not joyned to the Spleen. Its figure is long and flat , broader and thicker figure* about the Duodenum , but towards the Spleen, thinner and ftraiter. It is letter than moil of the Fifcera , commonly Bignefs . about five Fingers breadth long : where it is broadeft , it is about two Fingers breadth , and about one Fingers breadth thick. Its Vejjels are of five kinds. Veins it has from VeJfeJs the fplenick branch • Arteries from the left branch of the Coeliaca , fometimes from the Splenick ^ Nerves from the Intercoftal pair, efpecially from the upper plexus of the Abdomen •, it has alfo ma- ny Vaja lymphatica , which , as the reft , pafs to the Receptaculum cbyli. But befides thefe Veflels which are common to du£Ius it with other parts , it has a proper membranous pancrea* Dud of its own, which was firic found out by ticus. Wirtfungus at Padua above 40. years ago. This Velfel commonly has but one Trunk , whofe ori- fice opens into the lower end of the Duodenum or beginning of the Jejunum , and fometimes is joyned to the Duttus bilarius^wiib which it makes but one mouth into the Inteftin. Within the Pancreas ( according to Dr. Whar on) it is div ided into two Branches , which fend forth abundance of little Twigs into all the GlobuH above fpoken f .f, where they imbibe the Humour that is fepa- rated 102 Of the Abdomen. Book I. rated by them from the Arteries , and by their Trunk tranfmit it to the Guts. ThisPancreatick humour though is never found in this Dud , be- ta nfe it flows fo quickly out of it into the Duode- num by a fteep way even juft as the Urine, paf- fing out of the Reins by the Ureters to the Blad- der, is never found in them becaufe of its rapid tranlit. Very many have been the differences of Opi- nions concerning the Office of this Glandule. Some have thought it to be only of ufe to fuftain the divifions of the Velfels, and to ferve the Stomach for a Culhion to reft upon ^ others, that it mini- fters a ferment to the Stomach ^ others , that it receives the Chyle , and brings it to greater per- fection • and others, that it ferves as a Gall-blad- der to the Spleen , or fometimes ferves in its Head. Which Opinions being all very unlike- ly, 1 lhall not fpend time to examine them. The nature There are three other Opinions , for the firffi of the pan- whereof let the credit of the learned Author creaiick ( wj, Dr. Wharton ) recommend it as ic can, but Hiice. tQ me j c f eems improbable , and it is this , That it receives the Excrements or Superfluities of the fuperiour plexus of the Nerves of the lixth pair., (E)r. Willis's Intercoftal or ninth pair) being uni- ted with fome branches from the fpinal marrow, and by its proper VelTel or Dud difcharges them into the Inteftins. In anfwer unto which I fiiall only fay this, That I cannot tell how thick Ex- crements fhould be convey'd by the Nerves that carry fuch pure Animal Spirits , and have no vi- flble Cavity ^ nor fecondly , how thefe Nerves in particular fhould cum delcflu as he fpeaks fend the Excrements hither , and all the reft be diP- charged from any fuch Office. The Chapt 1 5. Of the Sweet-bread. 10? The fecond Opinion is fomewhat more proba- ble, and is defended by famous Phyficians and A- natomi/b, as Franc. Sylvius , Bern. Srvalve 1 Regn, de Craef and tsbrand de Diemerbroeck, from which laft I /hall tranfcribe it. 44 I have found, faith be, 44 in the Difle&ions of Brutes both alive , and 44 newly ftrangled , a certain liquor fublimpid, 44 and as it were falivous , ( fomething auftere 44 and lightly fubacid , and having fometimes 44 fomething of falti/linefs mixed ) to flow out of 44 the Duclus pancreaticus into the Duodenum, 4t fometimes in a pretty quantity. Whence I 44 judged — that there is exco&ed in the Pancreas 44 a peculiar humour from the ferous and faltilh 44 part of the Arterial blood brought into it , ha- 44 ving fome few Animal Spirits convey’d thither 64 by fmall Nerves mixed with it , and that this 44 liquor flowing into the Duodenum , and there 44 prefently mixed with the Bile , and the Meat 44 conco&ed in the Stomach gliding by the Pylo- 44 rus into the Guts , does caufe a peculiar effer- 44 vefcency in thofe Aliments , whereby the 44 profitable chylous particles are fepavated from “the unprofitable , ate attenuated , and being “brought to greater fufion (This Operation of 44 it, fays he , is /hewn by the diverfity of the fub- 44 france of the Aliments , concofled in the Sto- “ mach, and Hill there contained , from that of 44 thofe which have already flow’d into the In- 44 teftins : for the former are vifcid and thick, 44 and have the various colours of the food taken : 44 but the latter on the contrary are more fluid, 44 lefs vifcid, and more white) are withal made 44 apt to be impelled by the periitaltick motion 44 of the Guts, through their inner mucous Coat 44 into the La&eal vefiels , the other thicker by “ little and little pa/Ting down to thq thick Guts, (W. to 104 Of the Abdomen. Book L 44 to be there kept till the time of excretion. 44 Now this effervefcency is caufed through the 14 volatile Salt and fulphureous Oyl ot the Bile 44 meeting with the acidity of the Pancreatick 44 juice ^ as in Chymiftry we obferve the like 44 EfFervefcencies to be caufed by the concourfe 44 of fuch things.^ Thus he. So that he will not have this Juice to be any thing excrementitious, nor to be fo very little in quantity , as fome have affirmed 3 to demonftrate which he cites the Ex- periment of de Graef , who in Live-dilfe&ions could gather fometimes an Ounce of it in feven or eight hours time, which he has tafted, and found it of the tafte before-mentioned, viz., fomething auftere, fubacid and faltifh. Vide ejus u 4 natomen corporis humani , p. 73, &c. where you may fee what Difeafes it is the caufe of when diftempered. A third Opinion is that of Brunnerus , who thinks that the Barter eas is of the fame ufe with the other conglomerate Glands of the Mouth, Throat, Stomach, and Guts, and its Juice of the' fame nature with the Saliva. That it confifts of Lympha feparated from the Arteries, and of Ani- mal or Nitro-aereal Spirits communicated by the Nerves. That like the Saliva it is a Dilfolvent or Menflruum in concodtion and chylification, but does nor. ferment with the Bile, but only takes fomewhat off its Acrimony. That its juice is not of any peculiar fort , he endeavours to evince by repeated Experiments upon Dogs , from fome of whom he rut the greatelf part of the Pancreas , and in others cut afunder its Duft that palfes from it to the Inteftins, and yet they conduced falter two or three days indifpolition ) to be as livery , and in every rdpe& in the fame condi- tion as before. From w hence he conclud e , that that juice which naturally flows out of the Pan- mas 9 S3* Chap. 1 6. Of the Spleen* 105 ft! ici j ill rli S lot Is )C 0 ! \ ' fe h it 1 j, ; creas , muft in thefe cafes be fupplied from other parts ; and therefore that it is of no peculiar na- ture, but of the fame with that of thofe parts that fupply its defeft , and thofe can be no other than the conglomera te Glands of the parts afore- faid. He that would be further fatisfied in the grounds of this Opinion , or how this ingenious Author made his Experiments , may confult his Book lately publilhed, entituled, Experimenta no- va circa Pancreas , &c. CHAP. XVI. Of the Spleen. T H E Spleen is fo called in Englifh , from the ThespUem- Greek from whence alfo the Latin tts name. word Splen is derived. It is otherwile called in Latin, Lien, and in Englifh the Milt. It is commonly but one in Men , though fome Humbert have found two , yea Fallopius three. In Dogs there are fometimes two or three, unequal in big- nefs, out of each of which there pailes a Veffel in- to the Ramus Splenicus. In Infants new-born it is of a red Colour: in Colour. thofe of a ripe age it is fomewhat blackilh and in old men it is of a leaden or livid colour. In Man it is broader, thicker, and heavier than fiignefs* in Bealls j for it is about fix Inches in length, three in breadth , and one in thicknefs. Some- times it is much larger, but the bigger the worfe. Spigelius has obferved , that it is larger in thefe that live in fenny-places, than in thofe that live in dry •, and in thofe that have large Veins , than in them that have fmalh As io 6 Of the Abdomen. Book I figure. Simmon, It As to its figure, Hippocrates compares it to an Oxe’s Tongue ^ Hriftotle to an Hog’s Milt. To- wards the Stomach on its inner-fide it is fome- what hollow •, on its outer, gibbous, having fome- times fome impreffion upon it from the Ribs. It is fmooth and equal on either fide , fave where in its hollow fide it has a freight line or feam ) at which place the Splenick-veflels enter into it, Its upper end is called its head , and the lower its tail. It is feated in the left Hypocbondrium oppofite to the Liver : ( fo Hippocrat. 6. Epidem. calleth it the left Liver ^ and Arijlot, 3 .de biftor. animal. 7. the baftard Liver ) betwixt the Stomach and that end of the Ribs next the Back • in fome higher, in others lower : but naturally it defcends not below the lowed Rib. Yet fometimes its Liga- ments are fo relaxed,that it reaches down lower- yea fometimes they quite break , fo that it flips down into the Hypogaflrium : fo Riolanus tells the dory of a Woman that was troubled with a Tu- mour there , which was taken by her Phyficians for a Mole • but dying of it , and being opened, it was found to be occafioned by the Spleen fal- len out of its place, and lying upon the Womb. And whereas it very much endangers life when whether ... ... _ may be cut it falls out of its place , one would think that it cut of the could not but with great danger be cut out of the with body. For how can one imagine that a part fo difficult to come at and that has fuch large Veiled infected into it, ( not to mention its ufe ) can with fafety be taken out of the Body ? Wounds in it are commonly mortal ; Inflammation , or but Obftrudions in it do grievoufly all] id the Patient, and fometimes kill him : fare then the total ablation of it one would think ffioitld be ve- ry fatal. And yet ( among others ) the inge- nious Chap. 1 6. Of the Spleen. 107 pious Brunnerus in the Preface to his above-cited Book affirms, that he firft took the Spleen from a Dog, and at fome diftance of time by a fecond Operation cut out the greateft part of the Pan- creas from the fame, arid yet he continued to eat and drink, Ihit and pifs , and run about as briskly as if he had wanted neither of them , till about three Months after the laft Operation he was loft; in a crowd. And Malpighius relates , how ha- ving tyed all the Velfels that come into or go out of the Spleen in a young Dog , ( which is much the fame thing as to cut it out ) and clofed up the wound in his fide after the Operation, tho’ hereby when the fame fide after a good while was open’d again, the Spleen was dried up almoft to nothing *, yet in the mean time the Dog was every way both as to his ftomach , excrements, plight, brisknefs, &c. as well as before the Liga- ture. And Ant. Nuck tells us of a Dog out of whom he cut not only the Spleen , but one Kid- ney alfo, having firft fall tyed the Velfels that go to and fpring from each \ and afterwards healing up the wound , the Dog continued in good plight. It is tyed to five parts • its upper part to the connexion. Midriff (commonly) and its lower to the left Kidney by thin Membranes • by its hollow part which giveth way to the Stomach being diftend- ed, to the upper Membrane of the Omentum , and to the Stomach by fundry velfels. Its gibbous or arched part is knit to the Peritoneum by thirt Membranes. It is clothed with a double Membrane • the ou- Membranes ter , common, being propagated from the perito- neum, (or as fome will have it from the Omen- tum'. ) the inner, proper. The firft is ftrong, and Contains the Spleen as in a bag : Both Veins, Ar- il terief io8 Of the Abdomen. Eook I. Sid^sssee, teriesand Nerves run along it, and betwixt it and the inner a great number of Lymphedu&s. The Arteries that run through the inner Sub- ftance of the Spleen, do many of them terminate in it - 7 fo that when it is pulled off , ( which ’tis not hard to do ) you may difcern a great many red fpecks, which are the little mouths of the broken Arteries. The inner Membrane is fmooth and ftrong , but not fo denie but that Air can pafs through it, if one blow hard into the Spleen by the fplenick Artery , after the outer Mem- brane is drawn off. Some think this Coat fprings from the outer one of the Veffels that enter the Spleen : t JWalpigbius fuppofes it to be woven by an Implication of the Fibres that run overthwart the Spleen. Blood-veffels run along this alfo , as one may obferve by fyringing Ink into the Sple- nick Artery 7 for then they are difcover’d both by their fwelling and alteration of colour. The fubftance of it is flaggy, loofe, and fpongy] commonly held to be a concrete fanguineous bo- dy,ferving to fuftain the veffels that pafs through it: but Malpighius with his Microfcope has dif- cover’d it to be ( befides the Fibres , to be de- fcrib’d by and by ) a Congeries of Membranes form’d and diftinguifn’d into Cells , in which are included very many Glands. Thefe Cells and Glands he defcribes thus in the fourth and fifth Chapters of his lib. de Liens. 44 Though the 44 Spleen by its colour and loofenefs of fubftance u feem to be fiefh , or concreted blood 7 yet if 44 one tye the Artery , and blow hard by the 44 Vein, (or on the contrary ) the Spleen will ex- 44 ceedingly fwell and being thus blown up, if 6,4 it be dtied, and afterwards cut , you may per- 44 ceive its whole bulk to be made up of Mem- 44 branes forming Sims's and Cells like Honey- combs Chap. 1 6. Of the Spleen. 109 44 combs. They are propagated either from the 44 invefting Membrane , or ( which he thinks 44 more probable) from the venous dud that runs 41 along the middle of the Spleen •, like as the 44 Cells in the Lungs , he thinks , proceed from 44 the Branches of the T r achea growing (lender. 44 Their lhape is irregular • they communicate 44 with one another , and gape not only into the 44 extream branches of the Splenick Dud, but al- 44 fo into the Tides of the trunk it felf , by means 44 of the holes or pores therein ( to be defcribed 44 by and by J They are watered with Blood- 44 veflels , and within them are included nume- 44 rous bunches of Glands , or if you will, of 44 Bladders or little Bags , which do exadly re- 44 femble a bunch of Grapes. Thefe little Glands I 44 have an oval figure , and are about as big as 44 thofe of the Kidneys : I never faw them of 44 other colour than white • yea though the Blood- 44 velTels of the Spleen be fill’d with Ink, and play 44 about them, yet they always keep the fame co- 44 lour. Their fubftance looks as if it were mem-= 44 branous, but ’tis foft and eaiily crumbled *, their 44 Cavity is fo fmall that it cannot be feen , but 44 it may be guefled , in that when they are cut 44 they feem to fall into themfelves. They are 44 almoft innumerable,and are placed wonderfully 44 in the aforefaid cells of the whole Spleen, where 44 vulgarly its Parenchyma is faid to be • and 44 they hang upon fibres arifing from their cafe, * 4 and confequently on the utmofi: ends of the Arteries and Nerves, yea the ends of the Arte- 14 ries twill about them like the Tendrils of 44 Vines , or clinging Ivy Each bunch confifts 44 of feven or eight. Befides the membranous 44 cells that enclofe them , they are covered with 4 a bloody fubltance , which plentifully Magnates I % 4S m I IO Of the Abdomen. Book I. Fibres. “ in thofe cells , as appears by fyringing water “ by the Artery into the Spleen , for it will be a tinged after feveral repetitions , and bring a- “ bundance of blood out with it.] Thus he. From the inner Membrane ( according to MaU pighius ) fpring innumerable fibres , which run acrofs the Spleen to the oppofite part of the fame Membrane , or to the Capfula or common cafe of the veifels which runs through the middle of the Spleen. They keep not the fame plane, but ever and anon being fplit into two, they each inofculate with others in like manner divided, and make a fort of Net- work. The Ancients be- lieved them to be twigs of blood- veifels ^ Dr, Clijfon fuppofes them alfo to be veifels , but that they contain not blood , but nervous juice : But Malfighius concludes them to be only fibres, be- cause they have neither any difcernible cavity, nor any communication with veifels ; and alfo becaufe both Spigelius and himfelf have obferved tire inner membrane of the Spleen , which affords rife and infertion to them , and is framed of a plexus of fuch like fibres , to become bony and fometimes cartilaginous., which he thinks cannot eafily agree with the nature of vefiels. Their ufe he thinks to be only for the llrengthning and confervation of the foft llrudture of the Spleen. To thefe opinions of Malfighim concerning the glandules and fibres of the Spleen have later AnatomiHs generally fubfcribed : But Dr. Fred. Ruyfih has exprell his dilfent therefrom in an Epifde to C ampdomercus ( lately publilhed.) He fayes, w That the whole fabrick of a Mari's tL Spleen is nothing but a certain congeries of Ar- lL teries. Veins, Lyraphedu&s and Nerves, which “ are infolded in the inveiling membranes. But it is to be noted (adds he ) that the protra&ed “ and Chap. 1 6. Of the Spleen. in 44 and extreme propagines of the Arteries and 44 Veins feem to acquire another nature , for they 44 are fo foft and juicy , that they may eafiiy be 44 reduced in a manner (as I may fay) to nothing; 44 for their extreme particles are dilfolved by the 44 lead rubbing that may be : yea by only (leeping 4C them in fair water till they are a little rotten, “theydiflblve into a brown or black-ruddy liquor. 44 Thefe extreme parts, I fay, are mere propagines 44 of the bloud-veflels; and there is no other rea- 4t fon why they reprefent glandules , but becaufe 41 they are difpofed fafciculatim or in duller s, and 44 are reduced into fofter, more juicy and round bo- 44 dies, which hath impofed not only upon others, 44 but till of late upon my felf alio. But thefe pro- 44 pagines thus difpofed in clulters are to be diftin- 44 guidied from glands, feeing they are not covered 44 with any peculiar membrane, nor confilt by 44 themfelves , which is required in glands ; 44 They are placed very clofe to one another, 44 without any ( natural) vifible empty fpace be- 44 tween, or cell, though Malpigbius defcribe, and 44 Bidloe draw all thefe things J Thus far as to the glandules : Then he proceeds to th e fibres, and fays, 44 That though he has ufed 44 the utmofl diligence, he never found fuch fibres 44 in a Man's Spleen. He confelfes indeed that the 44 matter is fo in a Calf’s Spleen ; viz., that there 44 are in it innumerable fibres, betwixt which the 44 aforefaid propagines or clutters are feated : And 44 thefe fibres feem to be of great ufe in a Calf’s 44 Spleen, viz., that they may dlablifh the fulci ; u that are found in a Calf’s Spleen ( that are in 44 lieu of the venous branches) that they may not 44 be too much extended by the refluent bloud. 14 But in a Man’s Spleen that has no fulci but f Veins, fuch fibres are not necefiary. I 3 t; Lufll/. 1 1 2 Of the Abdomen. Book I. Laftly, as o 'he cells To often mention’d iii Malpighi ns's d Tnption of the fubftance of the Spleen , Dr. Ruyfch tho’ he grant “ that in a “ Calf’s Spleen there is fqmething like cells ( for u the texture he ahxefaid fibres refembles the u little holes of cells) / t in a Man’s (well con- “ ft kitted) he neyer round any fuch thing. • /•:-/*, It K*th Feffels of all kinds* as i. Feins from the 'ins Ratsius fpiemcus of the Vena porta. The Ramus before it enter the Spleen has two Coats, but in irsenttance its outer and thicker is received by the inner Coat of the Spleen, which (according; to Malpjghius ) turning back enters into it , and becomes a Capfula or common cover for both: Veins, Arteries, and Nerves. And whereas A- natomifts did formerly teach , that this Vein up- on its entrance into the Spleen, did prefently di- vide it felf therein into fundry branches , and fo was all equally obliterated in its Membranes and Parenchyma : fee affirms, that there is formed out floe venous of it a large venous Butt or Sinus ^ that runs quite dud and through the Spleen, (fomewhat like that in the tu-iu, pancreas') into which the blood (howfoever al- ter’d) is received through the Glands from the Arteries : And becaufe he could never trace the Veins fo far as the Glands, he believes that thej blood, &c. is conveyed into the aforefaid venous Bull by fuch -like tubuli or pipes as the milk is ftored up in and iffues out of in Women’s brealls: and that by making fome flay in thefe, it ac- quires feme rew mixture and alteration. That there are fuch tubuli , appears from his own ob- fervation , ( and from Dr. Gallon’s before him) that the Veins ( efpecially the venous Ducf be- fore-mentioned) have abundance of little hole? or pores in t seir fides , ( every where fave or that fide under which the Arteries and Nerve Chap. 16. Of the Spleen* ny run ) which are extended into the Parenchyma of the Spleen, and confbitute thefe little pipes: Dr. Ruyfch , as in other things he dliF’ ^s from Malpighius as to the fubftancc 0: a M V . Spleen, foalfoin the particular o: the holes in ..he lTdes I of its Veins ; for he fayes, a mans fpleuick vein is not full of holes like a lieve, as a Calf’s is , nor does it end into fulci like that This Vein enters the Spleen fometsmes in one and fometimes in more branches : but whether they be one or more, they have each one a Valve* which looks from the Spleen outwards permit- ting the humours to flow from the Spleen to the Ramus fplenicus , but hindring them from return- ing back. And though one cannot di (cover any Anaftomofes of the Veins with the Arteries in the fubftance of the Spleen, yet there is one no* table one of the Splenick Artery with this Ramus fplenicus before it enter the Spleen. Whole ufe mult be, partly to further the motion of the hu- mours contained in the Ramus towards the Li- ver, partly that the fuperfluous plenty of Blood, which perhaps cannot pafs quick enough through I the narrow pafTages of the Spleen , may return back again by help of this Analtomoiis , through the Ramus to the Liver. There are alfo two Veins that open into the Ramus at a little diftance from the Spleen •, the one called vas breve ( but fliould rather be called vafa brevia , there being for the molt part feveral ) which arifeth out of the bottom of the Stomach : (The Errour of the Ancients as to the ufe of this Veil'd was detected before, chap. 1 2. and its true ufe declared : ) and the other the internal Hemorrhoidal. It hath two Arteries , entring one at its upper, 2. 4 rte~ the other at its lower part. Thefe commonly fpring from the left Cceliack branch , which is I 4 ceiled ' 1 1 4 Of the Abdomen. Book I. called the Splenick Artery ; but fometimes ( faith Diemerbroeck ) from a certain branch which ari- feth out of the very trunk of the Aorta , and pro- ceeds by a bending pailage along the fide of the Pancreas to the Spleen, approaching whereto it is divided into two, and thefe branches entring it as aforefaid , they are fubdivided through it into a thoufand twigs, the moll of which terminate in the oval Glands above-defcribed , and the re- mainder are fpent partly on the Membranes that make its cells, and partly on the inverting coats, as may be made to appear by filling this Artery with Ink or Air. 3 , Nerves. Its Nerve is one of the left mefenterical bran- ches of the Intercoftal pair, which at its entrance into the Spleen , is ordinarily divided into two branches, which are inclofed in the common cafe, running by the fides of the Artery , or fometimes above it, but under the Vein: Its fubdivilions do inofculate with one another , and accompany the bifurcations of the Arteries within one co- ver through the whole fubftance of the Spleen, entring the Glands with the Arteries. Contra-, ry to what has been formerly taught, that they are all fpent on its inverting Membrane \ which was fuppofed, becaufe the body of the Spleen has but a very dull fenfe : But that proceeds not from deleft of Nerves, ( feeing it has a pretty ma- ny twigs) but probably from that fiupor or numb- nefs which that acid juice that is bred in the Spleen, may be conceived to induce upon them. ihdr Cap- Malptgb'ius in his accurate Anatomy of the fula. Spleen, hath found out a confiderable Membrane not obferved by former Anatomifts , which from its cloathing or inclofing the Blood-vertels and Nerves, he calls a common cafe or capfula. It has its rife from the inner and proper invert- ing Chap. 1 6 . Of the Spleen. ”5 ing Membrane of the Spleen , ( as was faid before in the defcription of the Veins ) which being turned back in the ingrefs of the veflels enters to -within the Spleen, and being formed into a pipe inclofes the trunks and branches alfo of the afore- faid vefiels , which fpring out of each fide of the * long dutt or firms, fomewhat like the leaves of Fern. It has fuch like holes in it as the Veins be- fore defcribed : and the fibres of the Spleen do very many of them either arife from, or elfe are i inferted into it. * Though Dr. Wharton in his Adenograpbiajap. 4. 4. vafa going about to prove the Spleen to be no Gland, Lympha- ufes this as one Argument , That there were ne- tica. „ ver obferved any Lymphedutts to be diflributed through this part : yet Olaus Rudbeck , Fr. Sylvius , Fred. Ruyfch , Malpighius , &c. affirm it to have many, which ariiing from its conglobate Glands pafs though the Omentum very plainly into the Receptaculum chyli. See them exprelt in the fol- lowing figure of a Calf’s Spleen. The Ancients knowing neither the true paf- The ufe of fage of the Chyle, nor the circulation of the the spleen. Blood, erred grofly as to the ufe of this part. They thought that it attracted a more feculent and melancholick part of the Chyle , by the Ra- mus fplenicus, from the Mefaraick veins , which having elaborated, it fent it out again partly by ib- the vat breve to the Stomach to excite the appe- :k tite and further the concoction thereof, and partly by the internal Hemorrhoidal ; hut it is tk certain, that no Chyle, nor indeed Blood pafiech not by the Ramus fplenicus to the Spleen , 2s neither any thing from the Spleen by the above faid Vef- fels ; but whatever they contain , comes towards the Spleen, namely into the Ramus , and what fs in it, goes to the Liver. One need add no fur- ther. n6 Of the Abdomen. Book I. ther reafon to evince the erronr of their Opini- on } nor that of thofe that would make it either a blood-making , or a blood-perfe&ing Bowel. Dr. Glijfon (in lib. de Hepate , cap. 45. pag. 434. ) thinks it to make an Alimentary juice, or at leaf!: a vehicle for it , which being firft imbib’d by its nervous Fibres , is from them received into the Nerves, by which it is firll carried to the Gian-, dula renales j where being refin’d , it is received again by the Nerves , and is carried to the Brain and Spinal marrow , and from thence by the. Nerves again into all the parts of the Body. We* will not here enter into a difpute about the nu- tritious juice of the Nerves • but fuppcung it, certainly this feerns an odd way of conveying ei- ther it or its Vehicle thus to and again, by the fame fort of Vefi'els; not to fay that fo acid a juice as is excoded in the Spleen, one fhould think , would be no very welcom gueft to the Nerves, nor be lufFer’d to march fo quietly, efpe- cially pafiing againlt the current of the Animal Spirits that continually flow from the Brain and Spinal marrow. This Opinion therefore we fbali pafs by as very improbable , having little elfe to recommend it fave the credit of its learn-? ed Author. Felthufws fays , That whatever is more thick and feculent in the Chyle and Blood, is drawn to the Spleen , and there by fermentation is brought to a ftate of fufion and volatility , from whence ftore cf Spirits are bred in the blood 3 for kis by fermentation alone , fays he , that Spirits are extracted out of any body. Dr. Mayoxv according to his Hypothefis , that the ferment of the Stomach conlifts of Nitro-aere- al Particles fupplied by the Nerves , and that the ferments in ail the other vifeera conlilt of the fame. Chap. 16. Of ttye Spleen. 117 fame, affigns thefe three ufes to the Spleen. 1. That the Nitro-aereous Particles which paf- ling through the Brain in a continued feries , are not fpent on the natural or animal fun&ions, may be reconveyed ( by thofe Nerves that go to the Spleen , and which have communication with molt of thofe that are bellowed on the vifcera in the Abdomen ) into the mafs of blood, and right- ly mixed with it in the Spleen. 2. That the Nitro-aereous Particles may be carried in a due plenty and with a certain regimen to the vifcera appointed for the concoction of Meats. For ac- cordingly as thofe vifcera are full or empty of Aliment, fo they have need of a greater or lefs afflux of fermentative particles. 3. That the Nitro-aereous particles being put in motion and vigour , and intimately mixed with the Salino- fulphureous particles of the blood in the Spleen, may excite fuch an effervefcency in the mafs of blood, as may be fit to bring its Salino-fulphu- reous particles to a due volatility.] Whence, feeing thefe offices of the Spleen are not fo ne- ceffiary, but that life may be continued without them , though they much conduce to the right difpolltion of the Animal Qeconomy and to a perfect health ; I fay on this account he thinks it not difficult to underftand how it comes to pafs that an Animal may live that has it cut out. Blancard gives this as his Opinion. 44 The mi- u merous Grape-flone-like Glands without doubt tc receive a Lymphatick humour from the Arte- 44 rial Blood , which is carried by Lymphatick 44 veflels, plain enough to be feen on the fimpus “ fide of the Spleen , to the receptacle of the u Chyle. The blood being thus deprived of a 41 too great quantity of this liquor , is made fo 44 much the fitter to have the Bile feparated from 1 1 8 Of the Abdomen. Book I. 41 it in the Liver. Thus alfo all the blood that 41 is to go to the Liver , whether in the Spleen, 44 or in tlie Intcfbins , or in the Stomach, does 44 firft part with its too thin juice. For this rea^ 44 Ton the Spleen is made livid , and all the blood 4 that enters the Liver , is far blacker than that 44 which is contained in the Vena cay a. But the 44 young Student will ask why the liquor is fent 44 from the Lymphatick VefTels of the Spleen into 44 the Receptacle of the Chyle ? I anfwer , That 44 through the mixture of liquors vvhcfe particles 44 are of divers kinds, the Chyle might (by fer- “menti.ng as it were, as appears in Chymical 44 mixtures) be made the more perfect Dr. Havers (in his Ojieologia nova r p. 210, &c.) inquiring into the generation of the mucilage that lubricates the Joints, &c. thinks, that the change, which that part of the bloudfrom which it is pro- duced , undergoes in order thereunto , is made by fome gland •, and that there is none which feems fo fit and likely to be concerned in this affair as the Spleen , which he fuppofes to be the ojfcina , where nature produces and elaborates the mucilage , from whence it is adminiflred to the bloud, and by thatdifpenfed in its circulation to all the parts , about which 'tis neceffary it fhould be employed. The reafons of this his opinion, the Reader may fee in the place quoted. The la ft, ( and to. me the molt probable ) ufe is this, viz,. That it ferves to make a fubacid and faltifh juice of the Arterial blood and Animal Spirits that flow plentifully into it , which puf- fing by the Ramus fplenicus to the Liver , ferves there to make ( and further the reparation of) the Bile, which is the proper a&io.n of the Liver , as was fhewed before, chap. 11. Now this juice is thus elaborated : The bulk of the Spleen confift- Chap. 1 6. Of the Spleen. 119 ing moftly of membranous cells indofing bun- ches of Gland?, as we (hewed before from Mai- pigbius , into thefe the Arterial blood is poured by the capillary Arteries wherewith are mixed fome Animal Spirits depolited into the fame by the ends of the Nerves, which bridling the Sul- phureous Spirit of the Blood , induce on it a lit- tle acidity • and then being driven out of the it ! Cells and Glandules , by the beating of the Ar- teries and the preflure of the adjacent parts , it is t received into thofe tubuli before fpoken of, and fo into the large venous dud, from whence it flows into the Ramus fplenicus , and by it is con- veyed to the Torta and Liver. But it does not pafs haftily through the Spleen , but feems to make fome flay in the abovementioned Cells and Pipes, and alfo in the venous dud, that it may ac- e, quire fome more acidity by its Aagnating in a- them : as Wine Handing in a Vinegar- veffel fours It more and more ^ and as the Bile by flaying in the di Gall-bladder gets a greater acrimony. And this lis flay of the blood in the tubuli and venous dud, lie Malpigbius alfigns this reafon of, viz.. becaufe :k they are fo much more capacious than the Arte- to ries that bring the blood into them ^ fo that the on current could hardly be continued in them by the it imprefs or propulfion of the Arterial blood , if iiii it were not furthered by the motions of the ad- i jacent vifcera and Inteftins fqueezing as it were the Spleen againft the Ribs. That the Spleen 1: does minifter to the adion of the Liver, and not to fanguification ( amongft other reafons ) may be prefumed by this, that the Blood takes fo long and tedious a march from that to this by the Ra- r: mus fplenicus ^ whereas it might readily have been conveyed into the trunk of the Cava that is hard by Book I. 120 Of the Abdomen. by the Spleen, if the juice that is elaborated in it had not been for the fervice of the Liver. Tab. IV. Reprefents the Pancreas , and the Spleen with its LympbeduLls. Fig. i. Reprefents the Pancreas. AA The Parenchyma of the Pancreas opened. B The Trunk of the Dudtus pancreaticus. CCC Its Branches. D The Dudtus bilarius joyning to the Pancreatiek BuCr. E The Duodenum opened. F The infer t ion of thefe faff els. Fig. 2. Reprefents the Lymphatick and Sangui- neous Velfels of the Spleen tied. A The Spleen of a Calf. ~ B The Sanguineous and Lymphatick Veffels tied. C The Splenick Vein. D The Splenick Artery. E The Splenick Nerves , whofe number vs uncertain l F The Lymphatick Veffels an [mg out of the outer part of the Spleen. f fff The Valves in the faid Veffels. G The Ligature. Fig. 3. Reprefents an Oxe’s Spleen , from Dr I Highmore. A A The fubjlancc of the Spleen cover'd with its prG~ per Coat. B A portion of the Vena portae* G Its left , or Splenick Branch. D This Branch opened near the spleen that the Valve b. may appear ,< " EE The Chap. 17. Of the KJdneys^and Gland. Renal. 1 2 1 EE The Coat of the Spleen differed and turned bach , that the progrefs and plexus of the Veffels and Fibres may be (hewn Jibe better. £ A portion of the Splenick Artery , which running through the whole fub (lance of the Spleen , doth difpenfe into it the little 'twigs aaa. b The Valve in the Splenick branch looking outwards to the Porta. ccc 1 he holes which appear in the Ramus fplenicu? leading from the fubftance of the Spleen. ddd Nerves running along the fidcs of the Splenick Artery. CHAP. XVII. Of the KJdneys , and the Glandulse renales. T H E Kidney is called in Latin Ren , from yj, e /&y- to flow ; becaufe the ferofity of the neys. Blood doth flow through the Kidneys to the Ure- Their ters, and through them to the Bladder. By the mLm - Greeks they are called ni&l, d vh®hi> ningcre , or fpargere. They are in number two , both becaufe of the Number * great quantity of the ferous Excrement that is to be feparated and difeharged by them *, and alfo that one being flopped by a Stone , or otherwife violated, the ferum of the Blood might be tranf- colated by the other. They are feated behind the Stomach and Inte- simtim flins in the Loins, one on each fide of the Verte- between the Membranes of the Peritoneum their lower end refts on the head of the Mufcle Pfoas ( which is one of the movers of the Thigh) iuft where the Nerve enters into it , which is the Jaufe that a big ftone being in the Kidney, and prefling i22 Of the Abdomen. Book I, prefling on the Nerve , a numbnefs is felt in the Thigh of the fame fide. In Man the right Kid- ney is lowefl: , by reafon of the greatnefs of his Liver, and commonly biggdr alfo than the left ; yet it has not fo much fat about it as the left , by reafon of the vicinity of the Liver , whofe heat hindreth theencreafe of fat. ■figure. In figure they refemble the Afarum leaf, or a Kidney-bean : towards the Loins or outwards they are gibbous ; and alfo in their ends on the infide ; but in the middle where the Veflels en- ter in and go out, they are hollow. Their fur- face in grown perfons is fmooth , but in the Foe- tus and Infants it is very unequal , as may be feen in the following figure of the Kidneys of an Embryo. Common. As for their connexion ; by the external fatty Membrane they are tyed to the Loins ; by the emulgent Veflels, to the Vena cava , and the Aor- ta ; and by the Ureters to the Bladder. The fight hath the Inteflinum ceecuni joyn’d to it , and fometimes the Liver; the left hath the Spleen and the Colon. Bignefs. They are in length about five Inches reaching the length of three and fometimes four vertebra ; betwixt two and three fingers breadth broad, and one Inch thick. In falacious or luftful Men, they are commonly larger than in others. Membranes Their Membranes are two. The outer is com- i.Common. mon , borrowed from the Peritonaum ; within the reduplication of which the whole Kidney is wrapped ; and therefore it is called Rents fafeia. This Membrane is befmeared with much fat; whence it is called Tunica adipofa ; and into it entreth the Arteria adipofa from the Aorta ; as alfo the Vena adipofa , which on the right fide commonly arifeth from the Emulgent, feldom from Chap. 17. Of the Kjdmys^nd Gland. Renal. 123 from the Cava ; but on the left, always from the Cava. By means of this Membrane ’tis that they are both joyned to the Loins ; the right, to the C cecum and fometimes to the Liver; the left, to the Spleen and Colon, as was noted ^ before. Many Vfes have been affigned to the fat col- the ufc of le&ed in this Membrane ; as, to ferve for a {ofiitsFat, fwathing-band to the Kidneys ; to preferve the hot and moilt temperament of them , which o- therwife would neceflarily be refolved by the continual affufion of the ferous Excrement, &c. But Malpighius thinks it more probable, that fee- ing much fat bedaubs the VeiTels that enter into the hollow fide of the Kidneys , not only before their entrance but after , and that the fame is extended to the Membranes of the pelvis and all its pipes, that therefore its chief ufe is , tobe- fmear the faid VeiTels through which the Urine palfes, that they may not be fretted and exco- riated by its acrimony and faltnefs. The inner is proper , and feems to be connate 2> Fropsfl with them, and not propagated from any part. It adhereth very clofe to them , and has inferted into it fmall Nerves from the Intercolhl pair, and one twig from that particular branch thereof which goes to the Stomach ; whence that content betwixt the Kidneys and Stomach , that in the pain of the Stone in the Kidneys, a vomiting is caufed. But thefe Nerves enter the fubflanct of the Kidneys in but very few and thofe fmall Hips, whence it has but a dull fenfe. The emulgent VeiTels as they penetrate this Membrane , are faid to borrow from it a Capfula or common cover, fwhereinthey are both included-,) as the Vef* fels of the Spleen, and the Porta an i porus bila- r ius of the Liver, do from the Coat of their re- K fpeft ive' i 24 0 / the Abdomen. Book I, fpe&ive vtfcera , as was fiiewn above in their de- fcription. But * Bellini fays, that thefeVeflels ‘ in the Kidneys borrow their Capfula from the 59,60.* Membranes of the pelvis, within which they are difperfed prefently upon their entrance into the Kidneys, and fpringing out of them again run to the cortical or fuperficial part of the Kidneys clad with a common Capfula from thofe" Mem- branes. Subfiance. As to the fub fiance of the Kidneys ( excepting the vafculai part ) it has been thought by fome Anatomies to confifl: of concrete blood or a pa- renchyma : by others, of a peculiar carnous fuff fiance • by others , that it is of a double nature (becaufe of its different colour • ) the outer part, which is of a dull red, to be a peculiar parenchy- ma like that of the Liver j and the inner , whicl looks paler, tc be carnous, but fibrous. But how ! foever their Jubfiance may appear to the naked eye, Malpighim^lth .his -Micro&bpe hath difco- vered it to be far other than it has hitherto beer • apprehended. He fays (lib. de Renibus cap . r, 2, 3.] 44 That the Kidneys in Men are not of one con- 44 tinued frame, but confifl: of feveral Globules, 44 as fo many dillincf Kidneys : That though ir 44 grown Men their Superficies feems commonlj 44 plain, yet it is unequal in Infants new-born; 44 and that in adult perfons the conjunction Oi 44 Globules does ftill appear within from the di- 44 verfity of colour , which in the feveral Glo 44 hulcs outwardly and towards their fides, where 44 by they joyn one to another , is red, but more 44 pale towards their middle. Each Globule con- u ' fiffsj of alike parts , namely of all thofe whicl 44 the whole Kidney partakes of, viz. of Blood- 44 vcflels, Nerves, Glands, excretory Vdlels, ant 44 a Papilla in which the excretory veflels terrni-; 44 A ate.- Chap» 17. Of the Rjdneys^nd Gland. Renal. “ nate.— If one take off the Membrane from “ a frefh and as yet foft Kidney , there may by a u good Microfcope be difeovered certain round tc and very fhort Bodies roll’d about like little “ Worms, not unlike thofe that are found in the u fubftance of the Tefticles being cut through “ the middle, or on their furface when their co- “ verings are removed : The way to diicover u them is to pour Ink upon them , and then “ gently wipe it off*, by the help whereof one w may alfo difeern , under the outmoft furface, il wonderful branchings of veffels with their Glo- “ bules ( or Glands ) hanging at them, like Ap- “ pies. But for this purpofe ’tis bell to injed “ Ink by the Emulgent Artery ; for thereby all “ the branches of the Artery will be tinged black, “ and fo much of thefe Glandules as the capil-’ “ lary Arteries run through. Hereby one may tc alfo difeover certain continued winding fpaces “and fims\ running through all the outward “ Superficies of the Kidneys. Then cut the Kid- *• ney in at the back lengthways as deep as to the “Pelvis, and pour Ink upon it, which gently “ wipe off with your fingers end , and you will u fee innumerable fmall pipes running from the “furface towards the Pelvis as their centre, 41 which look fomething like fibrous or parenchy- u matous flefh, but are indeed membranous and u hollow • which pipes make up a great part of w the fubftance of the Kidneys , and are the ex- lL cretory Veffels of the Urine. But if you would u plainly difeover thefe tubuli , you mult have a u fpecial care (in cutting of the Kidney in twoj “ that you cut ftreightways of them , and not “ Hoping, for then you cut them in two , and fo u cannot trace them in their progrefs. From “ the Glands into which the extremities of the' K x Arteries' 126 Of the Abdomen. Book t. 44 Arteries end, the roots of the Veins arife , and 44 he thinks that the Nerves reach to them too 5 “ and that it is probable that the excretory vef- M fels of the Urine are extended fo far alfo, feeing 44 this is conftant in all Glands , that every little 44 Globule has befides the Artery and Vein , a 44 proper excretory Vellel , as the Bilary in the 44 Liver, &c. And he has obferved that thoft 44 fame Pipes or Urinary Fibres running ftreighl 44 from the Glands towards the Pelvis , do many 44 of them, terminate into one of the Papilla, 44 through which the Urine is tranfcolated intc 44 the Pelvis , for into it they jet out.] (Theft Papilla fhall be deferibed by and by. ) By thi‘ cuiious and accurate defeription of their fub- dance, he has greatly difpelled that mill of ig- norance that Anatomifts hitherto were in con- cerning it. But to proceed. Emulgents. The Emulgent Artery , fpringing from the de- 1. Arteries, feending Trunk of the Aorta , enters the Kidney in its inner and hollow fide , being firft divided into two ^ but having entred it , thefe are fubdi- vided into divers branches , which fpreading themfelves between the coats of the Pelvis , ihoot forth into (mailer twigs •, and thefe with the like twigs of the Veins borrowing a common capfula from thence, (according to Bellini , as was obfer- ved before) run through the whole fubftance ol the Kidney, and end in the Glands afore-menti- oned. By this Artery ( being large ) is much blood conveyed to the Reins, partly to nourifli| them, but chiefly that in their Glandules a good| part of the Serum may be feparated from it,whicfi being carried by the Urinary fibres or pipes tc the Papilla ouzes through them into the Pelvis. 2. Veins. The Emulgent Vein is a little larger than the Artery, it has the like branching within the Kid- ney Chap. 1 7. Of the Kjdneys, the Epididymidx. lie stones. , Hp PI E Stones in Latin are called Teftes , eith jhdr j| becaufe they teftifie one to be a Man , or b mme, caufe amongft the Romans none was admitted bear rvitnefs but he that had them. In Greek the are called tw'JV., ySa^i, and aifo JiJh/Mt, Twin, becaufe according to Nature they are alwa two. 7hy are They are reckoned among the principal part principal an g that jufbly ■, for though they are not nece $ am ' fary to the life of the Individual , yet they are, i the confevvation of the Species. Yea and by tl lofs of them the Individual receives very gre< prejudice both as to the ftrength and adiyity < Chap. 2i. Of the ^WEpididymidse. 145 Ms body, and as to the acutenels cf his reafon,^. according to that of Aven^oar , In Eunuchvs malos agnofcimus mores , rationis funt pejfimce, inieU It Hits diminuti. They have a peculiar fubflance , ( fuch as is rot TJArfub* in all the Body beiides ) whitifh and left, rM^ xme * up of innumerable little ropes of Seed-carrying ! veflels, which are continued ( and by very thin Membranes tyed ) to one another , carrying the Seed in their undifcernable hollownefs. The way to make thefe Eejfefls viuble , de Or'aef has taught us , viz.. Tye fait the Va& deferens in a live-Dog or other Brute , and then thefe internal Ropes of veflels titherways inconspicuous , will prefentiy j be fo filled and diftended with feminal matter, as that they may be eafily difeerned. Galen , Dr. Wharton , arid of late Peyenis , &c. reckon them amongfc the Glands , and that with good rea- fon. They are in Number two, hanging without the Humber, Abdomen , at the root of the Yard, in the God. Their Figure is oval, onely a little flattiih. Their Bignefs differs very much in feverai Perfons ^ as big as a Dove’s Egg is reckon’d a mean fize. Hip- pocrates held the right to be bigger and hotter than the left , and therefore called it dpfay>p<&, I the Male-getter , as the left the Female- begetter. But thefe are fancies that are obfolese, and indeed' feern ridiculous , feeing there is no fuch difference of their bigneis , and that their Veflels are common. They have Arteries and Veins ( as was faid be- Veffds, fore) from thole called Vafa preeparantia. Which fome have thought to reach onely to the inmoff Coat called Tunica albuginea , becaufe they are not confpicuous in the inner fubffance of the Telife des, But though this may be true of the- Veins, L 4 which 146 Of the Abdomen. Book I* which onely receive the fuperfluous Arterial Blood, and have nothing to do with the Seed yet it is not true of the Arteries , namely of the moil numerous branches of them. Indeed Blood isfeldom feen in the fubftanceof the Tefticles, but that comes to pafs by reafon that the Arteri- al Blood prefently lofes its colour , and by the feminifick faculty of the Stones is turned into Seed, which being whitish , of the fame colour with the VeOels, makes them undifcernible. Yet in thofe men that have died of languifhing Dif- eafes , and whofe Tcftes have their faculty im- paired, Diemcrbrosck affirms that he has oft difco- ver’d fanguiferous vefieis in the inmoft parts of the Stones, and has fhew’d them to many in the publick Anatomical Theatre. As for Nerves , Dr. Willis fays he could never obferve more to go to them than one from a Vertebral pair, and that too was moll of it fpent upon the Mufcle ■ Cremajler. Diemerbroech agrees to one Nerve, but thinks it proceeds from the ixxth pair , ( which is Dr. Willis's intercoflal , a c - diftinguifh’d from thgt commonly called the fixth , but his eighth .) Others will have branches from both thefe Nerves to go to them. Concerning the ufe of thefe Nerves there is great controverfie. Dr. Glijfon , Wharton, &c. will have them to convey a Succus genitalis , which makes the greateft part of the Seed. Dr Willis , as he denies (m Cerebri Ana- tome , cap. 27 J. any Succus nutritius to be con- veyed by the Nerves to other parts , fo that any Succus genitalis is brought by them hither, but onely animal Spirit. And whereas to ferengthen the former Opinion, ’tis ufually objefted , That the Seed muff needs confift of a nervous Juice and plenty of fpirits brought from the Brain , becaufe of the great debility and enervation that is indu- Chap. 21. Of the Stones and Epididymidse. 147 too great ced upon the Brain and Nerves by the expence of it: he thus anfwers , That this comes ; to pafs, becaufe after great profufions of Seed, l0 ^ for the reftauration of the fame humour (whereof l: ' Nature is more follicitous than for the benefit of ri ' the Individual] a greater tribute of fpirituous ■■ liquor is required from the Blond to be bellowed ; on the Tefticles : wherefore the Brain being de- ’ frauded of a due income and afflux of the faid fpirituous liquor , languifhes •, and fo the animal fpirits failing in the fountain, the whole Nervous fyftem becomes depauperated and flaggy. Where- to may be added , that alfo the animal Spirits themfelves that a&uate the Projlates , being deri- ved from the Spinal Marrow , are much wafted by venereal Ads • fo that for this reafon befides, the Loins are enervated.] In this anfwer Bar- id tholin acquiefces. And cle 6raef\ Dimerbroeck , &c„ confefs indeed that the fpirituous Arterial Blood is impregnated with Animal Spirits from the Nerves, but affirm, that the matter out of which the Seed is elaborated, is onely the faid Blood ; and to thefe we fa'ofcribe. Lympheduffs they have alfo ariiing from betwixt their Coats , and afcending upwards into the Abdomen with the V if a deferent/ a. Thefe have many Valves looking upwards, which hinder any thing from defcen- ding by them to the Tcftes , but permit the Lym- ph a to aicend, which they convey into the Chyli- ferous Velfeis. Malpighius thinks it not impro- bable, that fame fat is derived to the ferninary Velfeis, for the generation of Seed, or at U to be mixt with it feeing moll Creatures grow the fatter upon being gelt. They have two forts of Coats, , prop common. er nd C oats. The 148 Of the Abdomen* BookL 1-hi Cod, The common inveft both the Tefies , and are two. The outermofi; confifts of the Cuticula and True skin (here thinner than in other places.) This is called Scrotum , hanging out of the Abdo- mcn like a Purfe. It is foft and wrinkled , and is generally affirmed by Anatomies to be without fat. On the cutflde it has a Suture or Seam, that runs lengthways of the God , and di- vides it into the right and left fide. The other or inner common Coat , is a carnous membrane, which Teems to be mufcular, becaufe of the power It has to contrad and wrinkle it felf. It is called tfeV©-, and adheres to the proper Coat next un- der it (called Vaginalis ) by many membranous Fibres. This is the common account of this part that all Anatoraifb have ufually given: But lately Dr. Frecl. Ruyfch affirms, 44 That it has the membram adipofa alfo under the carnofa , or rather that tc the carnofa is fatty (on the in fide ) as It is in o- ther parts of the body. And hefides, be fayes , 41 that in the Scrotum there is a Septum within di** u viding it into two parts, of which , fayes he, “ you have nothing in Vefalius , Bartholin , Ver- 4 * keycn z ds Gracf &c. Men that have otherwife 44 deferved very well of Anatomy : And what 44 wonder ? feeing all things about the Scrotum of 44 one newly dead are fo flippery and moveable, 41 that the true confutation of the Septum can 44 hardly appear. Wherefore if any would de- 4i raonftrate this, the Scrotum is to be blown up, 44 and to be cut open after 5 tis dried , by which 44 means the Septum yields it felf to view , and u has an infinite of bloud-veiTels running through 44 it.il Thus he. The proper Coats are alfo two , and thefe en~ clofe each Stone apart. The outer is called Ely- troidjCs^ Chap. 2i. Of the Stones and Epididymidas. 149 troides , or Vaginalis ^ becaufe it contains the Stone as a (heath. It is a thick and ftrong Mem- brane, having many Veins. In the outfide it is uneven, by reafon of the Fibres by which it is knit to the Danos - but in the inner fide it is firiooth. This is nothing eife but the production of the Peritoneum , even as the Sere , n is of the Skin and membrana carnofct of the Abdomen. Into this coat is inferted the Mufcle Cremdfier^ of which prefently. The inrnolt is vutA vApaErn the Nervous membrane , called Albuginea , from its colour. It is white, thick and ftrong , framed of the external Tunicle of the Vafa preparantia. It immediately enwraps the Stone , towards which it is rough, but on the outfide next the Vaginalis it is fmooth ; and between thefetwo the Water is contained in an Hernia aquofa. Into the outer of the proper Membranes ( as Mufcles,, was faid) is inferted the tJVufcle Cremafter. Thefe Mufcles (to each Stone one J have their rife from the Ojfa pubis and almoft encompaffmg round the prccelfes of the Peritoneum defeend with them to the Tefticles • where their carnous Fi- bres run through the whole length of this fame 7 ’mica vaginalis , efpecially in its lower part, and fo keep the Stones fufpended, from whence they have their name ( from Hgeuafa fufpendo.J From their fpreading themfelves thus on the out- fide of the outer proper Goat , Riolanus reckons them for a third proper Coat , calling it Ery~ tbroides : and becaufe by its carnous Fibres it makes the vaginalis look red , fuch as take it not for a diftinct Coat, do give the name of Erythroi - des alfo to the Vaginalis , calling it by either name indifferently. Thefe Mufcles pull up the Stones in the aft of generation , that the Veffels , being flackned, may the more readily void the Seed : and 150 Of the Abdomen. Book I. Epididy- mitis, and at other times they help to fuftain their weight. Thefe Mufcles in ficknefs and old age become flaggy, and fo the Scrotum relaxing it fejf, the Stones hang low. Upon the Stones as yet clad with the Tunica albuginea , are fixed the Epididymida (called alfo Paraftatne thin Metribrane , through which fome fmall wigs of both Veins, Arteries and Nerves run. They are about three Fingers-breadth long, and >ne broad but in fome places broader and fome larrower, as they run in and out. They are two„ one for each Feus deferens ) divided from one an- ther by a little interftice ^ and they do feveral- y by a peculiar paffage emit the Seed contained n them into the Vrethra. They are very an- raduousand winding, and ( as wasfaid) confilt f many little Cells , that they fliould not pour ut all the Seed contained in them , in one ad of Population, but might retain it for feveral. They ave no communication one with another, not ven in their very opening into the Vrethra ; but ■A he Seed that is brought to the VeficuU femiriales n the right fide by the right vas deferens , ilfues y its proper paffage into the Vrethra • and thac rhich is brought to the left likewife. So that if y any accident the l^eftculce on one fide be burlfc r cut, (as in cutting for the Stone they gene- illy are ) yet thofe on the other being intire tay ftill fuffice for generation. Now r when the ?ed is emitted out of thefe VcficuU in the ad of eneration, itpalfes out the fame W'ay it came i*, which in this cafe may eafily be, ( though :heryvife it be unufual there fliould be a contra- r motion in the fame velTel) for as it comes in om the vdfa deferentia , it drills along gently ;eofti iilliHlfl :e fcl ithout any force % but in Cotta when the Mu- 1 5 6 Of the Abdomen. Book I. fcles of the Yard and all the bordering parts are much tumified, it is exprelled or fouiited out ol them with fome violence , and palling along theii neck, (which is a continuation of the vafa defe- rentia ) ouzes through a Caruncle ( like Quick- hirer through Leather) into the Vrethra , or the Dud of the Yard that is common both to Seed and Urine. 1 fay it ouzes from the necks of the veficuU through a Caruncle into the Vrethra , foi there is one plac’d as a valve before the orifice o] each of them ^ partly to hinder the coming o! the Urine into them , partly to hinder the invo- luntary effufion of the Seed. Now though naturally the little holes througl which the Seed pafles out of the necks of the v/el ficula into the Vrethra be almoft imperceptible yet if they be either eroded by the acrimony o; the Seed (Tuch acrimony as is contraded by im- pure embraces," or in Claps as we call them ) oi if of themfelves they be debilitated and fo be- come more lax, ( as fometimes happens to old or impotent Men that meddle too much ) ther there happens a Gonorrhoea or continual efflux ol Seed. And fo Fefalius and Spigelius have obfer- ved them much dilated , in dilfeding fuch as have died with a Gononbcea upon them. Prolhtax The Pr oft at a are placed near to the VeficuU feminales • de Gracf calls them Corpus glandofum. fuppoling them to be one body , and only divi- ded by the common Duds of the veficuU femina- les and vafa deferentia coming through the midlf of it. They are of a white , fpongy and glandu- lous fubftance, about as big as a fmall W alnut, enedmpafs’d with a llrong and fibrous Membrane from the Bladder, to the beginning of whofc neck they are joyned at the root of the Yard. Jr Of the Proftates. Chap. 22 . *57 fhape they come nearer to an oval , fave that on their upper and lower part they are a little dc- preft, and in that end by which the vafa defe- r’entia enter, they are fomething hollow like a Tunnel. The Sphinder mufde of the Bladder encompafTes them, fo that for fo far as they cover the neck of the Bladder, the Sphinder touches it not, they coming between. They have all forts of Vellels , which run moftly on their outer fide. In their inner part they have ten or more final! Duds which all unload themfeives into the V- rethra by the fides of the great Caruncle (through which the Seed palfes from the veficuU. into the Vretbra) but themfeives have each one a fmali one to drop its orifice, left the liquor that is con- tained in the Proftates fhould continually flow- out, or the Urine fhould flow in. And thefe fmali Duds 1 fuppofe are continued from thofe veficula which appear in the Proftates of thofe. that die ( any way ) fuddenly after having had to do with a Female. For in fuch , the fpongy part of the ProJlaty the intumefcence and ere&ion of the Penis , md partly by the comprelfion of the Sphincter >f the Bladder that girds the Troflata about. Thefe Proftates are often (at leafl: partly ) the eat of the Gonorrhoea and the humour that they ontain, that which is Hied ^ for, if it were true eed, men could never endure a Gonorrhoea fo ong without more notable weakning and emac- iating , the flux being fo large as fometimes tis. I I (hall here omit all Philofophical Enquiries in- o the nature of the Seed , contenting my felt mrely with the Anatomical part. How far it ontributes to the generation or formation of the I r oetus , fhall be (hewn afterwards , chap. 30. of a 'onception. The diftance betwixt the root of the Cod and Perin called Inguina , the Groins. Tab. Vlir. Fig. I. ihews the Fa fa deferentia , Seed-bladders, and Proftates. I AA Parts of the Vafa deferentia , which appear thick, but have only a fmall Cavity. BB The parts of the Vafa deferentia of athinfub- fiance and large Cavity , being widened. CC The extremities of the Vafa deferentia nar- rowed again , andgaping each with a little hole into the neck of the Seed-bladders. DD The neck of the Seed-bladders parted from each other by a Membrane going between , fo that the Seed of one fide cannot be mixed with that of the other , before it come to the Urethra. EE The Veficulae feminales, or Seed-bladders blown up, that their wonderful widenings and narrowings may be feen. FF Fejfels tending to the Seed-bladders. GGG 7 he Membranes whereby the Seed-bladders and Vafa deferentia are kept in their places. Book I. 370 Of the Abdomen. HH The Sanguinary veffels running by the fides qj the Vafa deferent i a. I A Caruncle refembling a Snipe's head , through whofe eyes as it were the Seed iffues but into the Urethra. KK The dutts of the Corpus glandofum, or Pro- ftatae opening into the Urethra by the fides of the Caruncle. LK The Corpus glandofum divided. MM The Urethra opened. Fig. II. Shews the Bladder, &c. the Penvs and its VelTels, &c. A The upper or fore-part of the Bladder » 3B The neck of the Bladder. CC Portions of the Ureters. DD Portions of the Vafa deferentia. £E The Veffels running to the Seed-bladderSi FF The Veiiculce feminales, or Seed-bladders. GG The fore-part of the Proltatx, or Corpus glan* dofum. H The Urethra adjoyning to its fpongy part. KK The Mufcles called the Erellors or Extenders of the Penis. LL The beginnings of the Nervous bodies feparated from the Oil a pubis , which puff up like Bellows when the Tard is ere died [. MM 7 he Skin of the Penis drawn afide. NN The duplicature of the Skin making the Pne- putium. GO The Skin that was fajlen’d behind the Glands PP The back of the Penis.' Q. The Gians; R The urinary paffage whereby the Gians vs perfora- ted in its fore-part. ... SS The Nerves running along the hack of the Penis. f T the Chap. 24. Of the Vafe praeparantia. 171 TT The Arteries running along the back of the Penis; U The Nervous bodies 'meeting together. WW Two Veins which unite together , and run along the back of the Penis in a remarkable branchy X The Vein opened, that the Valves in it may be feen. Fig. Ill, ftiews the Penis cut afunder tranfverfly. A A The fpongy or fibrous fubfiance of the Nervous bodies. BB The two Arteries that march along the Nervous bodies. C The urinary pajfage of the Urethra. D The fpongy fubfiance of the Urethra. E The Septum between the two Nervous bodies. FF A very firong Membrane of the Nervous bodies. G A very thin Membrane containing the fpongy fub- fiance of the Urethra. H A notable Vein creeping along the back of the Penis, lil kit matt Of the GENITALS in Women. CHAP. XXIV. Of the Vafa prseparantia. Avingjlow done with the Parts miniftring ■ ' IT! to Generation in Men i we next proceed to thofe of Women * in defer ibing of which it has d, wm prill been the method of divers Anatomifts to begin 5rft with the outer parts of the Privity : but be- :aufe we would obferve * as much as may be, the faihe order inWomeri as we have in Men, we fhall firft begin with the Spermatick Veflels, which are if fctfo forts. Attsries and Veins . M The 172 Of the Abdomen. Book I Spermatick Arteries. The Arteries are two, as in Men. They fprin£ from the great Artery a little below the Enrol- gents (very rarely either of them from the Enrol- gent it felf ) and pafs down towards the Tefle, not by fuch a direft courfe as in Men , but witl much twirling and winding amongft the Veins with which yet they have no inofculation , as ha been generally taught. But for all their winding when they are ftretch’d out to their full length, the; are not fo long as thofe of Men j becaufe in then they defcend out of the Abdomen into the Scrotum but in Women they have a far fhorter paflagi reaching only to the Tejles and Womb within th Abdomen. Veins . The Veins are alfo two, arifing, as in Men, th right from the Trunk of the Cava , a little belov the Emulgent, the left from the Emulgent it fell In their defcent they have no more windings tha in Men, and therefore are confiderably fhorter. Both the Arteries and Veins as they pafs dow are cover’d with one common Coat from the Peri tonaum, and near the Tejles they are divided int two branches, the upper whereof is implanted it to the Tellicle by a triple root and the other i fabdivided below the Tejles into three twigs, on of which goes to the bottom of the Womb, ano ther to the Tuba and round Ligament , the thin creeping by the Tides of the Womb under its com 1 , mon Membrane, ends in its neck , where it is it terwoven with the Hypogaftrick Veflels like Net. By this way it is that the tJWenjlrua fome times how in Women with Child for the fir! Months , and not out of the inner Cavity of th "Uterus : but yet that blood does not flow at tht time fo much by the Spermatick Arteries as by tb Hypogaftrick. Chap. 25. Of Womens Tejlicles or Ovaria. ij? x The ufe of thefe Spermatick veflels is to mini- EMr 'fa fter to the (generation of Seed, according to the ancient do&rine • but ) nutrition of the Eggs in the Ovaria or Tefies ( according to the new ) the nouriihment of the Foetus , and of the Womb it felf, and the expurgation of the Menfes inaf- much as blood is conveyed by the Arteries to all thofe parts to which their ramifications come, in svhich parts they leave what is to be feparated ac~ :ording to the Law of Nature , the remaining )lood returning by the Veins; I CHAP. XXV. Of Womens Tefticles or Ovaria, f'TTOmen’s Tejlicles differ much from Men’s Women-. W both in their fituation , figure, greatnefs, Teftes. :overings, fubftance, and alfo ufe. Firft, their fituation is not without the Body, Their faufa ,s in Men, but in the inner Cavity of the Abdo~ tion ‘ nen , on each fide two Fingers breadth diftance rom the bottom of the Womb, to whofe Tides lowever they are knit by the Intervention of a trong Ligament, that has us’d to be called and iccounted the Vat deferens •, as if the Seed were :arried by it from the Tejles to the Womb. Of vhich afterwards. They are fiat on the Tides *, in their lower part Figures >val, but in their upper (where the Blood- veT- els enter them ) more plane. Their fuperfi- iesis more rugged and unequal than in thofe of den. They have no Epididymides , nor Cremajler dufcles, M % They I 74 Greatnefs. TtinicJe. Sitbftance. Whether they elabo- rate Seed. Of the Abdomen. Book 1 They differ in bignefs according to age. 1 thofe newly come to maturity they are about hal as big as thofe of Men • but in thofe in years the are lefs and harder. Preternaturally they fomt times grow to a vaft bignefs from Hydropical tu morns, in which feveral quarts of ferousliquc have been found to be contain’d. They have but one Membrane that encompalfi them round •, but on their upper fide , where th Hafapraparantia enter them , they are about ha way involved in another Membrane that accorr panies thefe Veflels , and fprings from the Per ton£um. When this cover is removed , their fubflan appears whitifh, but is wholly different from tl fubftance of Men’s Tefticles. For Men’s ( as w; faid above ) are compofed of Seminary veil'd which being continued to one another are twei ty or thirty Ells long, if one could draw them 01 at length without breaking : But Women’s d principally confift of a great many Membram and fmall Fibres loofely united to one anothei amongfl: which ( in the outer fuperficies of tl Teftes ) there are feveral little Bladders ( like 1 Hydatides ) full of a clear liquor , through who Membranes the Nerves and Hafa prepay anti a rui and are obliterated in them. The liquor contained in thefe Bladders had a ways been fuppofed by the followers of Hippocn tes and Galen , to be Seed ffored up in them, as they fupplied the place of the FeficuU feminal in Men. But from Dr. Harvey downwards, m; ny learned Phyficians and Anatomifts ( accordirlj to Hrijlotle ) have denied all Seed to W ; omei Of which the faid Dr. Harvey thus difcourfe; JDe ovi materia , Exercit. 34. u Some Worn* emit no fuch humour as is called Seed , and y< « — J 1 1 2hap. 25. Ofl'Vomen’sTejlicles or Ovaria. 175 ‘ is not conception thereby neceflarily fruftrated; ; 1 for I have known feveral Women ( fays he ) , 1 that have been fruitful enough without fuch e~ a t million ^ yea, fome that after they begun to t 1 emit fuch humour , though indeed they took a t l greater pleafure in copulation , yet grew lefs c fruitful than before. There are' alfo infinite If Inftances of Women, who though they have tj: ; pleafure in coitu^ yet fend forth nothing, and jig!' notwithftanding conceive. Mir or maxims , adds Je, eor, qui emiffionem banc ad generationem neccfja- wam put ant , nun animadvertijfe , humor em ilium )raA ejici , & circa clitoridem vulvaque orificium ut- Aurimum profundi , raro inira vulvam , nunquam 1 j ero intra uterum , ut cum marts fpsrmate mifcea- ? ur • effeque confijhntia ferofum five icborofum , ad Jj uodum urina •, non autem genitura injlar , lentum ;i | tque untluofum • af facile inuotcfcit. Quor- um autem for as ejici at ur , cujus'ufus neceffano in- i jir requiritur ? Debuitne humor ille , Mfero ■j 1 itturus, ad limen vulva amandari ^ wf major e cum |] jrati# rtfero retraberetur demo ? So that oth from the place of its e million , and from its j; onfiftence, he concludes that the humour emit- ted cannot be Seed. To ftrengthen which Opi- r :ion two Reafons may be added, why it cannot e the humour contained in thefe Veficulce , and dpnfequently that it cannot be Seed \ fir ft be- lufe it is fent forth in greater quantity than that : can be fupplied from them and fecondly be- rufe the Veficula are deftitute of any fuch pore r palfage whereby the liquor contained in them fight ilfue out *, for if you prefs them never fo ard, unlefs you bur ft them , there will nothing afs out of them. Wemuft therefore fubfcribe to that new but they are ecelfary opinion that fuppofes thefe little Blad- Ovma H N 3 ders 1 7 6 Of the Abdomen. Book I, ders to contain nothing of Seed , but that they are truly Eggs, analogous to thofe of Fowl anc other Creatures ^ and that the Toil ides ( fo cal led) are not truly fo, nor have any fuch office a 1 thofe of Men, but are indeed an Ovarium , where, in theft Eggs are nourished by the Sanguinary! Veffels difperfed through them, and from whend one or more ( as they are fecundated by th< Man's Seed ) feparate and are conveyed into th< Womb by the Tuba FaUopana , of which b; and by. That thefe Veficula are analogous to the littl Eggs in the Ovarium of Fowl, de Cracf evince by this Experiment , That if you boil them their liquor will have the fame colour, tafle, an< confiftency with the White of Birds Eggs. And their difference in wanting Shells is of no mo ment • for even the Eggs of Fowls while the; are in the Ovary ( yea after they have defcendei into the Uterus ) have no Shell : and thougl when they are laid , they have one , yet that i nothing eifential to them, but only afencetha Nature has provided ( upon their exclufion ) ti preferve them from external injuries while the; are hatched without the body ^ whereas thefe o Women being foftered within their body , hav no need of other fence than the Womb, by whicii they are fufhciently defended. Having compared thefe Veficula to the Eggs c Fowls, 1 might here follow the method of Do ft or Harvey and de Graef , and deferibe the Om rium , &c, in Hens, &c. that from thence thefe i Women might the better be conceived of ait apprehended • but to the curious and learne: Reader I fhall recommend the faid Authors fo latisfaHioip and avoiding all unnecelfary and (t this Epitome ) unfuitable excurfion , 1 fhall onl furthe Chap. 2 6. Of the Vaf defer, in W omen. further note two things : Firft , that thefe Eggs in Women are commonly towards the number of twenty in each Telticle or Ovarium , of which fome are far lefs than others. And fecondly, that the Obje&ion of the Galenifls againfl the Ariftotelians , ( viz,, that the Tefies of Females mull needs make Seed, becaufe when they have been cut out, barrennefs always follow’d) will be fufficiently obviated by this new Flypothefis, that agrees to the neceffity of the Tellicles fo far as to affirm that the V'eficulce contained in them become ( when they are impregnated by the mafculine Seed ) the very Conceptions themfelves , which therefore it would be in vain to expett if the Female were caftrated. Beiides the Tafia prceparantia , and Nerves ( of which lalt in the 27 th Chapter ) they have alfo Lympbedutfs^ according to Dr. Wharton. CHAP. XXVl j In Virgins it is about two Fingers breadth Bigwfs, broad, and three long. In thofe that have lain with a Man it is a little bigger , and fomething larger yet in thofe that have born Children. In Jhape it is fomething like a Pear , only a Figure. little flattilh above and below. Butin Women with Child it becomes more round. In Maids its Cavity isfo fmall that it will hard- cavity* ly hold a large Hazel-nut. In thofe that have had Children it will hold a fmall Walnut. It is di- vided into no Cells as it is in moll viviparous Brutes, but only into the right and left fide by a Suture or line that goes lengthways , much like that on the outfide of the Scrotum in Man. Its Cavity is not quite round , but jets out a little towards each lide •, which jetting fome call its Horns, but improperly .• for though Galen ( and many after him,) having never dilfected any Wo- man, prefuming that their Womb was like that of other viviparous Creatures , attributed Cornua- thereto , yet in truth they have none } but the Tuba F'aUopiana ( as was noted before ) anfwer 1 86 Of the Abdomen. to them in many refpeds. Only in Brutes ( viz., fuch as have Cornua ) the conception is alway formed in the Cornua , as being the greater part of the Uterus, ( which from the very orifio of its Fundus is prefently divided into them , & when one parts the fore from the middle Fingeii as wide as one can ) but very rarely in the Tube in Women , but moft an end in the Fundus i felf. Of which more in Chap. 30. Arteries. j ts Scries fpring partly from the Spermatid or Prayardntes , and partly from the Hypoga ftrick. Thefe two Arteries do bri each fide by ; notable branch inofculate one with the other And both their branches that run on one fide thi Womb, do inofculate with thofe of their owi flock on the other. Which may plainly be feei by blowing into the Trunk of either of them 01 which fide you will, for then the branches on th< other fide will be puffed up , as well as thofe 01 that fide you blow. They run along the Womb not with a ftreighi or dired courfe, but betiding and winding , that they may be extended without danger of break- ing when the Womb is enlarged to fo great 1 bulk by the Foetus. By thefe Arteries It is that the Men fes flow, in greateft quantity out ofthofi that open into the Uterus it felf , but in feller oul of thofe branches that reach and open into tht Cervix or neck of the Womb, and in leaft (if al all) out of the Vagina. As to the reafon of the meriftrual flux , ? tis not likely that the redundance of blood is the foie caufe of it; for then would the term of the flux come fooner or later accordingly as the Die! ihould be more full, or more {paring. Whereas experience fhews, that let a Woman feed nevei fo high, and fo breed liefer fo much blood , this Chap. 27. Of the Womb and its Neck. 187 flux comes never the fooner, ( though perhaps it may be larger • J or let her ufe the moil (pare diet, and ( if (he be healthful ) it will be never the longer a coming. Wherefore befides a fufficient flock of blood there feems requilite alfo a fer- mentation therein , to the producing this flux. Which fermentation by what it Ihould be caufed, is hard to determine. Thole who grant Seed to Women, derive it thence, becaufe as foon as Girls come to puberty , and delire and become fit for coition, the rnenfes begin to flow. But concluding, according to the Moderns, that wo- nen have no Seed , the fame can be no caufe thereof. Aftroiogicai reafons i account vain, Tse- ng there are menflruous women at all fealbns - nd the fame women have their menfcs , in pto- efs of time , at all ages of the Moon. Other it eafons may by the Curious be offered , but all fei hofe I have met with are unfatisfying. Waving hem therefore, but fuppofmg a fermentation in tit he blood to be the principal caufe , we fhali on- f add a word of the immediate reafon or man- IK erof the Flux : When through this fermenta- :eat tori the blood flows fo plentifully into the Ute- isli ine Arteries, that the Veins ( which are fewer tan the Arteries ) cannot return it all back a- let it tin by the circulation , it burfts forth of the ex- tol 'emities of the Arteries fo long, till the tod reat quantity of the blood be leflen’d and the rmen.tation ceafes , which it does ordinarily ter three or four days , and fo the flux flops ill the next period. In Women with Child they ddom flow, either becaufe the redundant blood i then bellowed on the nourifhment of the Fa« A 3 according to the old Hypothecs ; or ac- < rding to the new, becaufe it is defrauded of a l rillderable part of the Chyle ( or nutritious 0 Juice) 1 88 Of the Abdomen. Book I Veins. Nerves, Lymphe- dutts. juice) which is confirmed by the Foetus , whereby it becomes diminifhed and depauperated, whicl is the reafon why Nurfes alfo feldom havi them. The Feins do likewife fpring from the Fra parantes , and from the Hypogaftrick. There ar many anaftomofes of thefe Veins one with an other, fas there was noted of the Arteries) bu efpeciallv in the Tides of the Uterus , which d| more readily appear by blowing of them up than thofe of the Arteries above fpoken of, Tn blood brought hither by the Arteries, that is no fpent on the ordinary nutrition of the Womb, o is not call: out when the menfes flow, returns b thefe Veins back to the Heart, It has Nerves from the Plexus mefenterii max ij mus of the Intercoftal pair, and from the lowe] Plexus of the fame. As alfo from the Nerves d Os facrum. And the fame run alfo to the Teftt or Ovaria. Now it is thefe Plexus of Nerve that are chiefly affected in the Hyfterical paffior or Fits of the Mother. For thefe Fits are merel Convullive, and often happen without any faul of the Womb at all. And that fymptom that i fuch Fits is ufual, namely when fomething like Ball feems to rife from the bottom of the Bell and to beat ftrongly about the Navel ( which i ufually taken by women for the riling of tin Womb or Mother) is nothing but the Convul fion of thefe Plexus of Nerves : which one wi the rather believe, when he confiders that fom men are afflided with the fame fymptom. .01 which fee more in Dr. Willis (in Cerebr. anat. jj 201.) who derives the pain of the Colick all from the fame caule. Be Graef fays, there are many Lymphedufis ths creep through the outer fubftance of the Vteru. whic Chap. 27. Of the Womb and its Neck. 189 which one after another meeting into one, empty themfelves into the common Receptacle : And thefe, he fays, Bartholin miftakes for Fence latte*. The ufe of the Womb is to receive into its ca- pacity the principles of the formation of the Foe- tus, to afford it nourifhment, to preferve it from ; njuries, and at length when it is grown to ma- turity and requires the light and a freer air, to :xpel it forth. I ife; ® The Cervix or Os internum of the Womb being T ^ e tieclf . • -i • 1 ^ thp Vffnmfc. T ontinuous to it and corning betwixt it and the 'agina, we will treat of it in this Chapter. It eems to be a part of the Fundus or of the Womb roperly fo called, only it is much narrower, for ' t; :s Cavity is no wider in Virgins than a fmall ss Vuill, and in women with Child its inner Orifice v bth either quite clofe its fides together, or is ^ aub’d up with a flimy yellowifh humour, fo that athing can then enter into the Womb, un- 1{ . [i .fs in very luftful Women it be fometimes open’d ; fuperfostation. It is an Inch or more in length, s Cavity as it opens to the Fagina is compared the mouth of a Tench *, Galen likens its paffage that in the Gians of a Man’s Penis * for it is >t round, but long and tranfVerfe. It is w; ink- Id, and has many fmall duds opening into it, • 5l nt of which one may prefs apituitous feroiis jitter. It has the fame Membranes and the IneVeffels with the Vterus it felf. De Graef I is that among!! its wrinkles he has often ob- 1 wed Hydatides or little watry Bladders 5 and talks, that the abovefaid ferous matter ferves c ly to moifteri the Fagina, &c, and to excite i 6 CHAP; 190 Of the Abdomen. Book I. Vagina. Its name . Dcfcrip- non. CHAP. XXVIII. Of the Vagina, and its Contents, viz. ^Hy- men and Carunculse myrtiformes. C ontinuous unto the Cervix is the Vagina, fi called, becaufe it receives the Vents like Sbeath. It is called alfo the door of the Womb , am its greater Neck , to diftinguilh it from the lefTe juft now deferibed in the foregoing Chapter. It is a foft and loofe Pipe, uneven on its infid with orbicular wrinkles, of a nervous but fbme what fpongy fubftance (which lull: caufeth to pu up a little, that it may embrace the Yard moi clofelyj about feven Fingers breadth long, and : j wide as the ftreight Gut : all which yet, bot : length, width, and loofenefs differ in refped < age, &c. and as a woman is inflam’d morec lefs with luft. So alfo the aforefaid wrinkles ai much more numerous and clofe fet in Virgin and in women that feldom accompany with man, and that have never born Children, th 1 in thofe that have born many Children, and i Whores that ufe frequent copulation, or tho that have long laboured under the fluor albus, f( in all thefe three forts they are almoft obliter ted. Its thicknefs on the upper fide, faccor ing to de Graef) is about a ftraws breadth ; b on its lower it is twice as thick. ' Stockbam fays, it confifts of a fpongy and glandulo, fubftance , through which not only plentif branches of Veins and Arteries, ( viz,, from t hypogaftrick and hemorrhoidal) are difperfe, as alfo Nerves from the Os facrum but it has a fo proper excretory Duds, which gape like pois Chap. 28. Of the Vagina and its Contents. 191 into its inner cavity, and are molt numerous near the urinary pafiage. And this fubllance, he fays, is contained between two Membranes, of which the inner is nervous and wrinkled ^ the outer, carnous. It has very many Arteries and Veins t fome of vejftfs, which inofculate one with another, and others not : By the Arteries that open into it do the Menfes fometimes flow in Women with Child that are plethorick : for they cannot come from the Womb it felf, unlefs abortion follow , as fometimes it does. Thefe Veflels bring plenty of blood hither in the venereal congfefs, which heating and puffing up the Vagina encreafeth the pleafure, and hinders the Man’s Seed from cgoI- ing before it reach the Vterus. They fpring not only from the Hypogaftrick, but alfo from the demorrhoidal, but thefe latter run only through :he lower part of the Vagina. Its Nerves Dr, Willis thus defcribes : From the lowed: plexus of :he Abdomen two Nerves are fent into the Pelvis vhere each receives a notable vertebral Nerve - ind fo they make two plexus , one oh each iide 'rom which there arife two afcending Nerves hat run to the Intejlinum rettum r and two de- fending that are carried to this part we are peaking of. Cafp. Bartholin relates that in a Cows vulva he GhnrV /as (hewn by Jof. du Verney , a Gland on each de of it, fomewhat on the hinder part, each of /hich has a du£t running from it opening into he vulva , but at its orifice has a notable papilla laced which clofes it, fo that no liquor can pafs ut but by the protuberating and unclofing of the apifla in coitu. He fays, he has not yet obferved rem in Women, but inclines to believe they are ■ 01 wanting in them and thinks that that ii- 0 naos 192 Of the Abdomen. Book I. quor which is fometimes emitted by them with pleafure, ilfues a great part of it from hence. Tht Glands, he fays, are of the conglomerate kind, and are inverted round with peculiar and proper carnous Fibres which feem to arife from the Sphincter of the Bladder, as thofe which incom- pafs the Pro/lata in Men do according to the ob iervation of de Graef : and therefore he think thefe Glands in Females are in lieu of the Profta ta in Men. The infer- Near its Outer end , between the Nympha (0 ■lion of the which in the next Chapter) in its fore and up ff jf t!oc per part it receives the neck of the urinary Blad der encomparted with its Sphinder : oppofit whereto in its hinder or lower part it is ftrongl knit to the Sphin&er of the ftreight Gut. Th urinary paflage, or Vrethra , is not above two Fin gers breadth long from the neck of the Bladde to its end, and about as thick as a Goofe-quill. flymen. The Hymen is a thin nervous Membrane inter woven with carnous Fibres, £2*d endowed wit many little Arteries and Veins, fpread acrofs th dudt of the Fagina, behind the infertion of tb neck of the Bladder, with a hole in the mi|| that will admit the top of ones little Finger, b which the Menfes flow. It is otherwife calk the Zone or Giidle of Chaftity. Where it found in this form defcribed, it is a certain not of Virginity but upon the firft congrefs with Man it is neceflarily violated,, which is ufuall accompanied with an cffufion of Blood ^ whic blood is called the Flower of Ftrginity • and < this the holy Text makes mention in Deut. 2: verfesi^ — 21. And when once it is broke, never ciofes again. Chap. 28. Of the Vagina audits Contents . 193 But though this efiuflon of blood upon coition from the rupture of this Membrane , ( or per- haps of Capillary velTels in the Vagina ) be a cer- tain token of Virginity ^ yet it will not follow on the contrary, that where it is wanting,Virgini- ty is alfo wanting. For the Hymen may be corro- ded by acrimonious fretting humours flowing through it with the Menfes ; or may be violated by the falling out or inverflon of the Vterus or the Vagina at leaft , which fometimes happens even to Maids or laftly, perhaps the indifereet and unwary Bride has had her Menfes a day or two before , in which cafe both the Hymen and the ner wrinkled Membrane cf the Vagina are fo flaggy and relaxed, that no fuch rupture , and by confequence no fuch effulion may happen. In fome there naturally wants a foramen in the Hymen , by which means there being no exit for the Menfes , fuch are in great peril of their life,, if they be not relieved by Surgery, viz,., by open- ing it with fome lharp Inftrument. Clofe to the Hymen lie the four Carmcula myr - Caruncti- 1 tiformes y fo called from their refembling Myrtle- myrti- ® berries. The largeftof them is uppermofr, ftand- f° rmes » ing juft behind the mouth of the Urinary palfage which it helps to Ihut. Oppofite to this in the bottom of the Vagina , there is another , and on each fide one, fo that they ftand in a fquare. But of thefe there is only the firft in Maids, the other three are not indeed Caruncles , but little knobs made of the angular parts of the broken Hymen roll’d into a heap by the wrinkling of the Vagina a according to PJolanus and Diemerbroeck. Thefe three when the Vagina is extended in a Woman’s labour, lofc their afperity and become fntooth, fo. Q xt that 194 Of the Abdomen. Book I. that they difappear , until it be again contra&ed to its natural ftraitnefs. rhe sphin - De Gracf affirms , 44 that the Vagina near itsi fterMufcleS'- outer orifice has a Sphincter mufcle alraoft 44 three Fingers broad , that upon occafion con- 44 ft tinges or contracts it. Which conffridtion is more particularly defcribed by Stockbamer , who fays, 44 it is performed partly by means of the 14 Fibres that run through the outer carnous coat 44 of the Vagina •, and partly by this Sphincter 44 Mufcle, and two Net-like plexus which in theft 44 compolition are like the nervous bodies of the 44 Penis, or of the Clitoris • for they confift: of vef- ' 4 fels and fibres water’d with black blood , and 44 clad with a thin Membrane • they climb on ei- 44 ther fide of the Vagina near its outer orifice,' 44 and notably help to conffiringe it when they! 14 are puft up with fpirituous ulood in coition ; 44 for by their (welling they drive the Tides of the! u vagina inwards - which that they may the bet- 44 ter do, the Sphincter mufcle ( ifeending from 44 the Sphincter c f tire Anus) doth outwardly co- 44 ver thefe plexus, that oy its conftriftion it may 44 hinder them to fweli outwardly. fhe ufe of Having thus defcribed the parts of the Vagina , ib: i) agi- its ufe is eafily declared to be, to receive the lean’s Yz ac ,, being cied , to direct and convey the Seed imp trie Womb, to ferye for a Conduit by whic.h the Aenjes may flow out, and to afford Chap. 29. Of the Pudendum muliebre, 195 CHAR XXIX, J Of the Pudendum muliebre , or Woman* s j; Privity. lit nr H E parts that offer themfelves to view lat-;: J. without any didudtion, are the FiJJura mag - :st net or great Chink, with its Labia or Lips , the eit Mons Veneris and the Hairs. Thefe parts are cal- led by the general name of Pudenda, becaufe when they are bared , they bring pudor or fhame upon 1 Woman. The great Chink is called Cmnus by Galen a Fiffura, .iiw, to conceive \ by Hippocrates, Natura. It is ifo called Vulva , Porcus , Concha , and by many >tber Names that Fancy has impofed upon it. It reaches from the lower fide of the Os pubis xtj 0 within an Inch of the Anus ; being by Nature ron lade fo large, becaufe the outer Skin is not fo co pt to be extended in travail as the membranous mo 'agina and Collum minus are. It is lefs and clofer 1 Maids than in thofe that have born Children, ns length makes the Perineum not to be above n Inch long. It has two Lips , which towards ov? ie Tubes grow thicker and more full or protu- •id erant , and meeting upon the middle of the Or for ibis make that riling that is called Mons Veneris 5 r the Kill of Venus. The inner fubftance of this Hill, which makes Mons Ve- bunch fo up, is molt of it fat ; and under the neris* x lies that Sph'indter mufcle that we fpoke of in |e lad Chapter, that conflringes the orifice of \ \ ne Vagina , and fprings from the SphinBer ani, ~.y a little drawing afide the Labia , there then Tear the Nympbce and the Clitoris , The 1 96 Of the Abdomen. Book I tymphx* The Nympha are fo called becaufe they flam next to the Urine as it fpouts out from the Blad der, and keep it from wetting the Labia. The; are called alfo or Wings. They are pla ced on each fide next within the Labia , and ar two carnous and foft produ&ions, beginning a the joynting of the Ojfa pubis or upper part of th Privity, (where they are joyned in an acute an gle, and make that wrinkled membranous pro du&ion that clothes the Clitoris like a Pr, that fignifies la- Clitoriso fdvioufly to grope the Pudendum. It is otherwife called Virga, for it anfwers to a Man’s Yard in fhape, fituation, fubftance, repletion with fpirits and erection ^ it has nervous bodies, a feptum , a glans, mufcles and the like Veflels with the Penis. But it differs therefrom, firft in magnitude ^ for this is very fmall in refpeft to that , as being not to be blown up to the thicknefs of ones little Fin- ger. Secondly, the forked roots of the nervous bodies that lye hid within the fat of the Pubes , are twice as long as that part of it which is uni- ted into one body with the feptum between * whereas on the contrary in the Penis the united part is four times as long as the forked. Thirdly, the Clitoris wants an Vrethra , and its prominent glans wants a foramen. Fourthly, it has only one pair of Mufcles. In fome its united part grows to that length, as to hang out from betwixt the J Lips of the Pudendum : yea there are many fto- ries of fuch as have had it fo long and big as to be able to accompany with other Women like unto Men , and fuch are called Fricatrices , or o- p therwife Hermaphrodites ; who it’s not proba- ble are truly of both Sexes , but only the Teftes fall down into the Labia , and this Clitoris is pre- ternaturally extended. But in moil it jets out fo little as that it does not appear but by drawing alide the Labia. It is a little, long and round body , confifling hsfvb*. ( like a Man’s Penis ) of two nervous , and in- wardly black and fpongy parts , that 2rife on each fide from the bunching of the Os \febium y and meet together at the joynting 01 conjunction of 198 Of the Abdomen. Book I. Gians. Mufcles. VeJJels. of the OJJa pubis. It lies under the fat of Mom Venervs , in the top of the great Fiffure. In Ve- nery by means of the two nervous bodies it puffs up , and Itraitening the orifice of the Vagina contributes to the embracing of the Penh the more clofely. It's outer end is like to the Gians of a Man’s Yard, and has the fame name, (as alfo Tentigo.) And as the Gians in Men is the feat of the great- eft pleafure in copulation, fo is this in Women ; whence it is called Amoris dulcedo and Oeftrum Ve- neris. It has feme refembiance of a Foramen , but it is not pervious. It is molt of it covered with a thin Membrane from the conjunction of the Nymph a winding Duft beyond the Tefticles, widert» ™ ing more and more by degrees, and then they turn back towards them, and end in the form 01 1 jof a Tunnel. ..... The Tefticlesare fmall, but contain very many limpid Eggs, which being ;iM (cut open, there iffued out a clammy liquor like the White of an Egg. This being premifed, ranis | a We opened another half an hour after the fo* Coitus , the Cornua of whofe Vterus look’d a lit- dore * tie redder, but the Ova in the Tefticles were •ithsl not yet chang’d, unlefs they had remitted a Hoff ittle of their clear nefs : but neither in the Va- \irld nor in the Cornua could we perceive any feed, or any thing like it. u About fix hours after the coupling we dif- efted another, in whofe Tefticles the Fotticuli "or Cafes) of the Ova irtclined to rednefs, >ut of which being pricked with a Needle,- a lammy and dear liquor iffued frrft, but DJ*>od ollowed, flowing out of the Sanguinary veffels ,‘lifperfed through the FoUiculi ; We could find : id Seed neither in this Coney. P M Foist 204 Of the Abdomen. Book 44 Four and twenry hours after the Coitus , i 44 opened another, in one of whofe Tefticles ' 44 found three, and in the other five Folliculi 44 the Ova very much changed •, for being befc 41 limpid and colourlefs, they were now tun 44 duskilh and of a faint red, in the middle I 44 whofe Superficies a little Papilla (or Teat): 44 it were difeover’d it felf: when the Fulliu 44 were cut open, there appear’d a little limp 14 liquor in their middle, and in their circum ’> 44 rence a certain thicker and reddilh matter. 44 Twenty feven hours after the Coitus we ■ 8,4 fpefted another, the Cornua of whofe Vtek 44 with the Ovidu&s looked more bloody, a i 44 the extremity of the Ovidnfts did on every fi 44 embrace the Tcjles like a Tunnel in the mi 44 die fuperficiesof the Folliculi, as in thofe I 1 44 fore, there ftood out little Papilla, throu 44 which by prefling the fubftance of the Tel 44 cles there iflued a limpid liquor, which vf 44 followed by another redder and thicker. Ope 1 44 ing the Cornua of the Womb we found no Egji, 44 but the inner wrinkled Tunicle of the Corn 1 44 was a little more tumid. 44 Eight and forty hours after the Coitus i 44 examin’d another, in one of whofe Teftic 4 ‘ we found feven, in the other three Follic 44 changed , in whofe middle the Papilla we; 44 fomething more eminent, through which, 44 prefling the fubftance of the Tefticles, there 1 44 iued a little liquor like the White of an Eg, 44 but the remaining reddilh fubftance of 54 Ova, being now become lomething thick*", “was not fo ealily prefled forth as in the; 44 before. 'hap. 30. Of a Conception* 205 “ Two and fifty hours after the Coitus vve 1 viewed another, in one of whofe Tefticles we i‘ found one, in the other four Follicuh altered^ 'tf’ cutting open which we found a glandulous-like “if' matter, in the middie of which there was a its little Cavity, wherein finding no notable li- 4 quor, we begun to fufped whether or no their > limpid iubltance, which is contained in proper im Membranes , were burlt forth or expelled : mi! wherefore we fearched carefully both the Qvi- du&s and the Cornua , but we could find no- thing ; only the inner Tunicle of the Cornua Ml being much puft up, Ihined. “ Seventy two Hours , ( or three Days and Nights ) after the Coitus we infpeded another, ea which exhibited a far other and moll wonder- )fe ful change ^ for the Infundibulun did embrace hro the Tefticles on every fide moll clofely, which :T( being pull’d off we found in the Telticle of di 'the right fide three Folliculi a little greater and 0| harder, in the middle of whofe fuperficies we oE faw a Tubercle with a little hole in ic like a Cc Papilla * but differing the faid Cafes through the middle , their Cavity was quite empty : jitiii twherefore we fearched the ways through which [di :he Ova mufl pafs, again and again, and found U n the middle of the right Ovidud one, and in k ' :he outer end of the Cornu of the fame fide two nice, rery fmall Eggs, little bigger than fmall Pins- ther leads , whi.h notwithllanding their fmalnefs l ire doathed wich a double Coat - out of thefe Ipggs being pricked, there ilfued a moll limpid ic(uor In the very beginning of the Cor mi 2>f the left fide we found only one Egg,' juft like hofe fmall ones of the other fide , whence it is 4ear that the Ova excluded out of the Tejles P z “are Of the Abdomen. Boob 206 “ are ten times lefs than thofe that yet ftick 11 the Tejles ^ which feems to us to come to p; 44 inafmuch as thofe that are ftill in the Tejles c( 44 tain as yet another matter, namely that 44 which the glandulous fubftance of the Ca 44 is made. 44 The fourth Day from the Coitus we oper 44 another, in one of whofe Tefticles we foi 44 four, in the other three Globules or Cafes c 44 ptied , and in the Cornua of the refpe&ive fi 44 we found as many Eggs, greater than the 1 44 mer, which did not ftick in the Oviduft* 44 beginnings of the Cornua , but were now ro 44 on towards their middle : in their Cavity 44 beheld as it were another Egg fwimming, 44 clearer than in the other before. 44 The fifth day from the Coitus , we d i fled “another, in whofe Ovaria or Tefticles weijd 44 fix emptied FoUkuii , that had each a not;) 44 Papilla , through whofe Foramen we ealily ,'ji 44 an ordinary briftle into their Cavity .• we fo 44 alfo the fame number of Eggs (bigger 111 44 thofe the day before ) in divers parts of 1 44 Cornua , in which they lay fo loofely, thai 44 blowing only, one might drive them this :j 44 or that way. The inner Tunicle of thefei 44 the Egg within an Egg as it were) was becj 44 yet more confpicuous. “The fixth day after the Coitus we examj’ “■ another, in one of whofe Tefticles we obfej’ 44 fix Cafes emptied, and in the Cornu of the fi 44 fide we could light of but only five Jj 44 near the Fagina , brought as it were upc 44 heap : and in the Tefticle of the other fidp 44 found four Follicuh emptied , and in the O 44 of that fide only one Egg : The caufe of w < 44 diffen 207 'hap. 30. Of a Conception. ‘difference we fiippofe to be,either becaufe fome 'Eggs by the wave-like motion of the Cornua ' ( not unlike the periflaltick motion of the ' Guts ) being carried dovynwards towards the ; ' Vagina were driven forth ^ or becaufe being ' confirmed in the Folliculi they came not to the 1 or: Uterus ^ or light on fome other mifchance. ' Thefe Eggs were as big as fmall peafe. “ The feventh day from the Coitus we examin’d . 'another, in whofe Ovaria we found fome Folli- culi emptied, that were greater, redder , and 4 harder than the foregoing, and faw as niany . “‘tranfparent Tumors or Cells in divers parts of the Uterus \ out of which being opened we tur- 'nedOz/d as big as Pocket-Pifcol Bullets, in which we beheld nothing but the inner Tunicle very confpicuous and a inofu limpid humour. It is to be wondred at, that in fo fnort a fpace of time the Eggs fhould imbibe fo great plenty of liquor , that whereas before they might eafi- ly be taken out of the Womb, now they could very difficultly. “ The eighth day from the Coitus we opened another, in the right Cornu of whofe Uterus we faw one, in the left two Cells one of thefe was almolt twice as big as the other : for Na- ture doth fometimes fo vary, that there are Eggs of divers bignefs found not only in divers Animals of the fame fpecies diffieded at ^ the fame diftanee from the Coitus , but alfo in one and the fame Individual. !n the horns of the Womb being opened we faw the Eggs a little bigger than the day before , but ail of them, their Tunicles breaking, poured out their clear liquor before we could take them quite out : for which reafon we tried another difffi^ed P 2 ' like* 8— ■ — - — * - - i j ■ - - | - T i 208 Of the Abdomen. Book u likewife the eighth day after the Coitus ; tl u right Cornu of whofe Vtcrus we faw fwelled r 44 into two, and the left into four tranfpare: 44 Tumours or Cells, out of which that we migi 44 take the Ova we ufed the greateft diligen 44 and attention ; but as foon as we came to ther 44 their Tunicles were fo very tender that th< 4C burft as the former : which when we faw , tl 44 Eggs that remained we boiled with the Vteru 44 whereby their Contents harden’d like tl 44 Whites of Hen’s Eggs. The inner fubltan tc of the Cells on that fide whereon it receiv 44 the Hypogaftrick veffels , was become mo 44 tumid arid red. 44 The ninth day after the Coitus we diffcfh 11 another that was old ^ the TelHcles of tl 44 were almoft as big again as thofe of younger 44 in the right we faw two, in the left five Fol u cult lately emptied , and befides thefe , othe 44 that look’d very pale , which we judged to I 41 thefe that had been emptied the Coitus befo 44 this, although for the moil part they lea' 44 only fome palifh points or fpecks, to which tl 41 encreafe of the Tefticles is owing. The Fol / u culi of the lafb Coitus were each befet with 44 Papilla , but the others were fmooth. In tl 141 right Cornu there were two , and in the le 44 five Cells, wbofe fubftancc being more rare ai 41 pellucid than the other parts of the Vterus , w 44 interwoven with many twigs of Veins and A 44 terics. Opening fome of thefe Cells, we cou 14 fee the Ova , but could not take them 0 44 whole wherefore being compelled to exami: 44 the Contents of the Eggs in the very hollow ' 4 the Cells, we found it clear like Cryflal ; 4 d. the middle whereof a certain rare and th ^ rlni I Chap. 30. Of a Conception. 209 ,c i r ! c il c ,1 X X i‘ cloud was feen to fwim, which in other Conies difie&ed likewife on the ninth day after the Coitus , for its exceeding finenefs efcaped our fight. The inner fubftance of the Cells, namely that which receives the Hypogaftrick veffels, being more tumid than the reft , exhibited the rudiments of the Placenta. “ The tenth day after the Coitus we infpe&ed another, in whofe right Tefticle we found one onely Folliculus emptied , which by rejfon of the Sanguineous vefiels difperfed plentifully through it, was redder and had a lefs Papilla • in the middle of this pale fubftance there ap- pear’d as yet a very fmall Cavity : but in the left Tefticle we found fix fuch Folliculi. In the Cornua of the Z Herns we found alfo fo many Cells, namely one in the right and fix in the left, diftant a Fingers breadth one from ano- ther, in the middle of which Cells lay a rude mucilaginous draught of the Embryo like a little Worm. One might alfo plainly difcern the Placenta , to which the Egg by means of its Cho- rion was annexed. The matter of the Eggs boil’d with the Womb hardned like the White of an Egg, and tailed like the boiled congealed fubftance of the Eggs in the Tefticles. The twelfth day after the Coitus we opened another, in one of whofe Tefticles we found feven, in the other five Folliculi emptied , and as many Cells in the Cornua much bigger and rounder than the foregoing, in the middle of which the Embryo was fo confpicuous , that one might in a fort difcern its Limbs. In the regi- on of its breaft two fanguineous fpecks, and as many white ones did offer themfelves to view , in. the Abdomen there grew a certain mucilagi- P 4 “ nous 3io Of the Abdomen. Book I 44 nous fubltance inclining here and there to red 44 We could not difcern more in this fhapelel [ 4 little Animal becaufe of its tendernefs. “ The fourteenth dav^after the Coitus we dif 44 fe&ed another, the Cells of whofe Therm \n< 44 beheld to be yet greater, and their fanguineou 44 vellels more, and more turgid : we alfo notec' 44 that the Cells the larger they grew , came aifc" 44 nearer to one another , and their inter fHcc 14 were leflened. ' The Membranes Amnios an< 24 Chorion were knit together, which though the; f 4 appear thicker and ft rc-nger, are yet more has 44 to be feparated from one another than in th< 4 Ova taken intirely out of the Womb • tearing 24 thefe we faw an Embryo with a great and pellu 14 cid Head , with the Cerebellum copped •, it 144 gogle Eyes, gaping Mouth , and in lome for 144 its little Ears might be difeoveted alfo. It 24 Back-bone was drawn out, of a“ white colour 24 which bending in about the Sternum refemblec 24 a Ship • by whofe Tides moil flender Vellels run 44 whofe ramification's were extended to the Bad 64 and Feet.' In the region of the Break two fan “ guineous (pecks greater than the foregoing ex- 144 hibited the Rudiments of the Ventricles' of the 24 Heart at the fi'des whereof were feen two] 144 whitifh fpecks for Lungs. In the Abdomen be- 24 ing opened, there firfl fhew’d it felf a reddifl 44 Liver •' then a white Body , to which was knit 44 a mucilaginous matter like a writhed thread. 44 being the rudiments of the Stomach and Guts, 44 All which in thofe that we dilTe&ed afterward 44 had acquired only a greater bulk and perfe- 24 ction. And' therefore to prevent tedioufiiefi 44 by repeating the fame things, we will on pur- ^ pofe pafs| by alLthe other diffedions we made Chap. 30. Of a Conception. 4 in this kind of Creature , excepting only one 4 which we made the day before the kindling 3, 4 that thofe things that. in. the former were only 4 confufedly difcerned , may appear plain in 4 this. 44 At length on the twenty ninth day after the 4 Coitus we infpeftecl another that had kindled 4 fix weeks before, and in the Coitus by which 4 file was impregnated had voided all the thicker 4 part of the Seed of the Male , which in fome 4 meafure did refemble the confidence of a moft ill ■ limpid jelly. In her Ovaria we found eleven ' t 4 little whitifh FoJliculi 3 and befides thefe, others far lefs, little or nothing differing from the 4 fubftance of the Tefies. The FoUiculi of the j ; Ova in the Tefies feem not to vanifh wholly, ’ but to leave a certain fpeck in them 3 whence ' it certainly comes to pafs, that Conies, the cft- 4 ner or the more young ones #hey bring forth, 1 have the greater and whiter Tefticles 3 fo that Isn ; one may guefs by only viewing the Tefies , whe- ther they have had many young ones or often. Having view’d the Ovarium we paid to the Vte~ rus , which we found no longer diftinguifh’d in- • to Cells, but all along diftended like a Pud- ' ding 3 which was fo agitated with a wave-like motion , like the perildaltick of the Guts, that ' the young ones neareft the Vagina as yet in- 1 eluded in their Membranes were excluded, and that fo haftily , that if we had not cut out the whole Vterus , they had all certainly gone the fame way. TheWomb was no thicker than when they are not with young, otherwife than we have faid it to be in Women. In its Cavity we faw eleven Foetus fprawling , which were all fo clofely coupled together by the Membrane 'Chorion ( wherein all are feverally involved) tc as 212 Of the Abdomen. Book I “ as if they had all been included in one and the “ fame Chorion Thus much I thought fit to tranflate of thal accurate Anatomift’s Obfervations concerning the generation of this fort of Animal, becaufe ill gives fo very great light into the manner of the generation of an humane Foetus. For there is ar exacf analogy betwixt them , abating fome cir- cumftances •, as Firft, that in Women the Con- ception is not formed in the Cornua, feeing hei Womb has none , nor in the Tuba very feldon and according to nature, for they are only the Infundibula or Oviducts to convey the Ova froirl the Te(les to the Fundus uteri , though they beai fome refemblance to the Cornua in Brutes \ I fay the conception is not formed in thefe, but in the Fundus uteri or Womb properly fo called, where- into the Ovum being received , prefently begin: to fwell and grow bigger , and there appears as it were an Egg within an Egg , by means of th< two Membranes with which it is cloathed *, whicl Membranes are originally in the Ovum while ii is in the Tefticle, and imbibe the moifture that is fent now plentifully into the Womb , even a: the little Yelks in Hens &c. gather the Whin about them in the Ovidud and Vterus , whicl they have none of in the Ovarium • or as Seed: in the Ground do imbibe the fertile moiftun thereof to enable them to fprout. Another con fiderable circumftance wherein they differ , is th< flow procedure of the formation of the Foetus ir Women in comparifon of that in Conies now de feribed. For feeing thefe go with young but 25 or 30 Days , and Women 9 Months , we mufi imagine that the Embryo is as perfe&ly formed ii the former on the tenth Day as in the latter ii m Chap. 31. Of the Placenta and Acetabula. 21 1 — .. .. — — — — the tenth Week , or longer. But 1 fay , abating thefe, or if there be any other fuch like circum- fiances, there is fo great a likenefs betwixt the one and the other , that without infilling more on the matter or manner of the Conception , we lhall pafs on to the defeription of the parts that encompafs the Foetus, then Ihew how it is nou- rilhed, and laftly what parts there are in a Foe- tus that differ from thofe in a Child born. Cm CHAP. XXXI. Of the Placenta Uterina or Womh-liver , and. Acetabula. 5:: U Pon the cutting open the Womb of a Wo- Placenta man with Child, the firlt thing that offers uterina. it ielf is the Placenta uterina , or Womb-cake, otherwife called Hepar uterinum , or Womb-liver, flfe from the likenefs of fubltance , and alfo ufe, ac- cording to thofe thatimpofed the name. Its fubfiance is very like that of the Spleen , on- its [ ub - ly that is more brittle, and this more tough and fi^ce, tenacious, fo that it cannot fo eafily be feparated r from the Velfels. Itisfoft, and has innumerable >S? Fibres and fmal) Velfels. Its Parenchyma is part- ly, if not altogether, glandulous. Dr. Fred Ruyfch affirms ( as he does of the Spleen) that it his no fibres , no peculiar glands, nor cells , with bloud-veffels placed between ; but that its whole fabrick is only an aggeries of Arteries and Veins. Cf which opinion you may fee more before in chap. i5. of the Spleen. It is of very different Jhapes in feveral Crea- shape and tures, but in Won en it is circular, yet with^ nM ” p ? 0 . fome 214 Of the Abdomen. Book I. fome inequalities in its circumference. It is two Fingers breadth thick in its middle, ( but thin- ner near the edges ) and a fpan or a quarter of a yard over from one fide to the other when the Foetus is come to maturity ready for the birth. On that fide next the Foetus it is fmooth and fomething hollowifh like Navel-wort , and grows every where firmly to the Chorion -, but on that next the Womb it is very unequal, having a great many tubercles or bunchings, whereby it adheres faft and immediately to the Womb. But to what part of it , is not agreed among Anato- mies, fome affirming it to grow to the fore-part, fome to the hinder-part ^ forae to the left fide, others to the right. Dr. Wharton ( affenting to Fallopius') fays, it always adheres to one of the two corners of the Womb ( that anfwer in fome mariner to the Cornua in Brutes ) whereinto the Foramen of the Tuba opens , fo that he fays , the laid Foramen is as it were the centre to the Pla- centa. Be Graef thinks it is moll commonly fatten’d there, but not always, becaufe the Ovum for a while being loofe in the Cavity of the Vte- vus , may be tumbled to this or the other part, and where ever it fixes , there it is joyn’d to the Womb by the Placenta. Number. When there is but one Foetus in the Womb, it is but one- but if there be Twins, then accord- ing to Dr. Wharton , &c. are there two Placenta , either dittind in fhape, or if they appear in the lhape of one, then are they feparated by a Mem- brane one from the other ^ and a particular rope of Umbilical veflels is inferted into each from each Foetus. But Dr. Needham affirms, that there is generally but one Placenta even when there are two or more Foetus. Nor does that line that feems to divid? the Placenta from one another , really Chap. yi. Of the Placenta and Acetabula. 215 do fo. For the Veffels of the right-hand Foe- tus extend beyond this line to the left iide of the Placenta ; and on the contrary , ? tis hut feldom, fays he, that the Placenta are multiplied accord- ing to the number of the Embryo’s. It grows not out of the Womb originally , but Originsi its firft rudiments appear like a woolly fubftance on the outfidc of the outer Membrane that inverts the Embryo ( called Chorion ) about the eighth or ninth Week, upon which in a fhort while a red, te : carnous and foft fubftance grows , but unequally and in little knobs, and then it prefently thereby rt, fticks to the Womb, and is very confpicuous about the twelfth or thirteenth Week. Tiil now the Foetus is encreafed and nouriihed wholly by the appofition of the cryftalline or albugineous liquor wherein it fwims loofe in the inner Mem- brane ( called Amnios) having no Fafa umbilicalia formed , by which to receive any thing from the Placenta. But when it waxes bigger and begins to need more nounfhment, the extremities of the Umbilical veffels begin to grow out of the Navel by little and little , and are extended towards this Placenta , that out of it , as Plants by their Roots out of the Earth , they may draw a more firm nutritive juice , and carry it to the Foetus. But of this more in the 33 d. Chapter. It has Feffels from a double Origine, fome from vejfcls* the Womb, and fome from the Chorion imme- diately , but mediately from the Foetus. The former are of four kinds, Arteries, Veins, Nerves and Lymphedu&s : all which though they be very large and confpicuous in the Womb , and are fo even in that very place where the Placenta is joyned to it : yet they fend .but the frnallert Capillaries into the Placenta it fell , a nr are di- fperfed only through that fide of L that is . r;xc I| ' the 2 i 6 Of the Abdomen. Book I. the Womb. Thofe that come from the Chorion are Arteries and Veins , and Dr. Wharton fuppo- fes alfo Lympheducfs. The Arteries and Veins that come from the Womb fpring from the Hy- pogaftricks, and alfo that branch of the Sperma- ticks that is inferted into the bottom of the Womb. Thofe that come from the Chorion are the Umbilical veffels of the Foetus. Of the ule of both the one and the other vve lhall fpeak in Chap. 33. when we come to difcourfe how the Foetus is nourifhed, as alfo of the ufe of the Pla- centa it felf, of which we (hall only obferve this further here-. That after it is joyned to th£ Womb, it Hicks molt firmly to it for the firft months, as unripe Fruit do to the Tree: But as the Foetus becomes bigger, and riper, and nearer to the birth, by fo much the more eafily will it part from the Womb } and at length like to ripe Fruit, after the Child is born , it falls off from the Womb, and makes part of the After-birth. Aeeta- It was an old tradition continued for many bula, hundred years, that the Placenta adheres to the Womb by certain parts called Cotyledones or Ace - tabula . That there are fuch in fome Creatures it is certain • Dr. Needham fays, they are only pro- perly fo called in Sheep and Goats , in whom be- ing with young the Uterine glands are hollow like a Saucer or an Acorn-cup , and are adapted to the little Prominences ( or Digituli ) of the PlacentuU that grow on the Chorion 9 ( though Diemerbroeck fay , that on the contrary the Pld- centula are hollow , ( and fo are truly the Aeetd- hula ) and the Uterine glands protuberant ) and doubts not but thefe names were firft given by thofe that difle&ed thefe kind of Creatures and were afterwards applied in following ages to other Animals, So that fid wonder there have Chap. 52. Of the membranes and humours. 217 been fo great contefts even about the fignificati- on of the word Cotyledon , ( which is the Greek word for the Herb Vmbilicus Venervs or Navel- wort) and what that was that was fo called in ® the feveral Creatures that were faid to have [■* them. But becaufe fuch Controverfies are now an obfolete, and that ’tis generally confelfed that ill'; Women have them not , we (hall not in this Epitome run out into needlefs Difputes ; but t> only obferve one lingular Opinion of Diemer- >1) broeck, who afcribes Cotyledones to Women. He :|j thinks that each Woman ( unlefs Ihe go with ti Twins) has but one Cotyledon, and that the fore- faid Placenta uterina is it. And indeed it mull beconfelt that it refembles much the (hape of that from which the Cotyledones have their name - md theiefore feeing he formed this Opinion to defend our great Mailer Hippocrates , who had afcribed them to Women , ( that is, as Diemer- broeck expounds it, one Cotyledon to one Woman) we lhall not oppofe it, but confefs it to be, if not true, yet both ingenious and ingenuous. CHAP. XXXII. Of the Membranes involving the Foetus, and of the Humours and Air contained in them. N Ext to the Placenta follow the two Ad'cm- branes that involve the whole Foetus , Cho ~ ’ ion the outer , and Amnios the inner : betwixt vhkh two, after the Foetus is perfectly foimed, Dr. Needham , &c. affirms there is a third, viz,, dllamotdes ,whkh in Women likewife includes the * r • Arhole Foetus *. Of each of thefe in their order, 3 ! with the liquors they contain. to feet™ " The j>, 59, 2l8 Of the Abdomen. Book I Chorion. The outrnoft Membrane is called Chorion , it i: pretty thick, fmooth on the infide , but without fcmething unequal or rough, and in that part o; it that adheres to the Placenta and by it to th< Womb, has very many Veffels which fpring frorr • the Placenta it felf,and from the Umbilical velfels Thofe which fpring from the Placenta are difper- fed through it before the foetus is fhaped , (at Diemerbroeck affirms * ) but the latter not till the Navel-rope is grown out to a juft length, at which time they enter it and intermix with the former, and from this Membrane are inferred into thl Placenta to which the Chorion adheres. It is bull one even when the Mother goes with Twins: for, as in a Nut that has two Kernels in it, they are both included within the fame Shell, but are each irivefted in their proper Membrane • fo T wins are both inclofed in one Chorion , but have each a particular Amnios. It inverts th QOvum originally, which Ovum being brought into the Womb, and becoming a Conception , this Mem-:, forane imbibes the moifture that bedews the Womb plentifully at that time. For whiles the Conception is loofe in the Womb , and has no : V effels that reach out of it felf, nor is faften’d to any part, it mart: have its encreafe after the fame manner as the Egg has in Hens, tc which while it 44 is in the racemus or knot, confifts of no other: 44 fubftance but Yelk and when it d> ops off from u thence and delcends through the Infundibulum , 44 it receives no alteration ^ but when it comes 44 into the Cells of the procefs of the Vteirus , it u begins to gather a White, although it ftrck to 14 no part of the Vterus , nor has any Umbilical f ¥dfd \ but (fays my Author , the immortal a UAvn;p<>\ Chap. 32. Of the membranes and humours. ±ig ' Harvey *) as the Eggs of Fifties and Frogs do * De ge- ; without, procure to themfelves Whites outof' 5 rat - 1 the water ^ or as Beans,Peafc, and other Pulfe, erdc'^de and Bread-corn being iteepM in moifture fwell, general and thence acquire aliment for the bud that is Ovi. ' fpringing out of them : fo in like manner out of the plica or wrinkles of the Womb (as out of a Dug or Womb-cake) does there an albu- gineous moifture flow ,• whence the Yelk ( by that vegetative and innate heat , and faculty wherewith it is endued ) gathers and concodb its White. And therefore in thofe plica and the hollow of the Womb does there plentifully abound a liquor refembling the talte of the White. And thus the Yelk defcending by lit- tle and little is encompafled with a White, till at laft in the outmoft: Vterus having aflumed S' Membranes and a Shell , it is perfected.) Thus M fay does the Chorion imbibe that albugineous quor that from the firft Conception encreafes lily in it, (and tranfudes through the Amnios fc herein the Embryo fwims ) till the Umbilical :fl~els and the Placenta are formed, from and rough which the Foetus may receive nourifh- as ;ent. This liquor that it imbibes I take to be nutriti- /n liquor; ms juice that ouzes into the Cavity of the Vterus iii!; it of the capillary orifices of the Hypogaftrick i d Spermatick Arteries, and is of the fame na- ire with that which afterwards is feparated in le Placenta and carried to the Foetus by the lim* Meal Vein, and with that alfo which abounds i the Amnios even till the Birth. For the pla- ick or vegetative vertue is only in the Ovum it i f, and the augmentation that the firlt Linea- ls fits of the Embryo receive is only by appofn i >h of this nutritious albugineous juice. , But this Q, Membr itis 220 Of the Abdomen. Book' Memb.ane Chorion by that time the Umbilici, Veflels and Placenta are formed , is grown i denfe and compad, that it is not capable of in bibing more but that which at this time is in i does in fmall time tranfude into the Amnios, at fo it felf becomes empty, and gives way to tl encreafe of the Allantoides, ( which thencefo: ward begins to appear ) whofe liquor augmen daily as the Foetus grows nearer and nearer 1 the birth. This is my conjedure , which I ful mit to the cenfure of the learned. Amnios. The Amnios is the inmoft Membrane that in mediately contains the Foetus. It is not knit 1 the Chorion in any place fave where the Umbil cal Vdl'cls pafs through them both into the PI j cent a. It is very thin, foft, fmooth, and pelli cid, and encompafles the foetus very loofly. It h; Veflels from the fame origins as the Chorion. is fomething of an oval fhape. Its liquor. Before the Ovum be impregnated, this Mem brane contains a limpid liquor, which after tl impregnation is that out of which the Embryo , formed. In it reiides the plaftick power , an the matter alfo out of which the firlt lineamem of the Embryo are drawn. But becaufe its liqucj is fo very little , there tranfudes through th Membrane prefently part of that nutritious albi gineous humour that is contained in the Chariot , | which it had imbibed out of the Vterus , as w; but even now Ihewn. And by the juxta-appoli don or addition of this humour to the undifcei nible rudiments of the Embryo, it receives its er ereafe. But though the Amnios have its addition: nutritious liquor at firfl only by tranfudation yet whea the Umbilical Veffels and the Placent are formed, it receives it after another mannei Chap. 32. Of the membranes and humours. 221 : or then this liquor being feparated from the Mother’s Arteries by the Placenta , and imbibed iy the Umbilical Vein of the foetus , it palTes d-i- eftly to its heart , from whence being driven, . great part of it, down to the Aorta , it is fent orth again by the Umbilical Arteries , out of yhofe Capillaries difperfed plentifully through he Amnios it iffues into its Cavity , even as far nore grofs and vifcid juices in taking a purge ( or ometimes critically ) ouze into the Inteftins out f the fmall mouths of the Arteries j though in- leed it be here by the intervention of Glands, vhich ’tis hoped the Curious will fometime dif- over alfo in the Amnios. 1! 1 There are fome that think they have obferved r enf the generation of the parts in a Chicken, ' which from firft to laft receives nothing from he Hen. ) Says he , * 44 there appears at the * Dege- J 4 very firft a red leaping Punttum or Speck , a nerat. b A- 4 beating Bladder, and Fibres drawn from thence nimal Ex ~ ‘containing Blood in them. And as. much as ercit * ^ I, ‘ 4 one can difcern by accurate infpedion, Blood is 4 made , before the leaping Speck is formed • 1 and the fame is endued with vital heat , before 4 it is ftirred by the Pulfe : and as the pulfation 4 begins in the Blood and from it ; fo at length 4 at the point of death it ends in it. And 4 becaufe the beating Bladder and the fanguine- 1 ous Fibres that are produced from it appear 1 firft of all ^ I Ihould think it confentaneous to ’ reafon,that the Blood be before its receptacles ' namely the content before its container ; and that this is made for the fake of the other, le confeffies it to be a Paradox , that Blood Ihould e made and moved, and endued with vital fpirit sfore any fanguifyipg or motive Organs are in being •, 2?4 Of the Abdomen. Book I * E^er- cit. 57- 3, By the mouth being } and that the Body fhould be nourifhet and encreafed, before the Organs appointed foi conco&ion ( namely the Stomach and Bowels' are formed : but neither of thefe are greatei Paradoxes than that there fhould be fenfe ant motion in the Foetus before the Brain is compo- fed ; and yet, fays he, “ the Foetus moves, con- 4C tradts, and ft retches out it felf , when there i 1 “ nothing confpicuous for a Brain but clear wa u ter. I fay , if all thefe unlikely things do cer- tainly come to pafs in an Egg , that has nothing to fet the vegetative , or vital principle thereo. on work, but the warmth of the Hen that lit: upon it; why fhould we think it ftrange that nu- tritious juice impregnated with the vital fpirit; of the arterial Blood, with which it circulatec, through the Mother’s Heart ( it may be mort than once) fhould be turned into Blood in an hu- mane Foetus ( foftered with fuch kindly warmtt in the Womb ) though it neither receive an) humour under the form of Blood from the Mo- ther, nor have it felf as yet any Organs of fan- guification fo perfedt as to perform their office \ But to proceed. The pjroffer nutritious juice being depofited by the Umbilical Arteries in the Amnios , as foon as the Mouth, Gullet, and Stomach, &c. are formed fo perfectly that the Foetus can fwallow , it lucks! in fome of the faid juice, which defending into the Stomach and Intellins is received by the Vend latte*, as in adult Perfons. That the Foetus is nourifhed this way, Diemer « hroeck evinces by thefe Reafons. ct 1. Becaufe the Stomach of the Foetus is never Its. a empty, but is found polfeft of a milky wbitifh liquor } and fueii like is contained even in its Mouth. u io Becaufe 2?5 Chap. 33. Of the nutrition of the Foetus. “ 2. Becaufe there are F«s contained in the Inteftins, (which Philofophers Call Meionium ) I ' which the Infant as foon as ’tis born voids by /tool. Without doubt thefe are the excrements of fome aliment taken in by the Mouth. “ 3. Becaufe the Stomach could not prelently after the birth perform the function of con- co&ion, if it had not at all been accullomed to it in the Womb. His fourth Reafon, fuppoling the Fcetus to be ourifhed in part by the Mother’s Blood, I (hall at ot recite, becaufe I think that to be an erro- ati ;ous Opinion, as I think to make appear by fpilid by. dal “ 5. Becaufe the Infant as foon as it is borii e ra* knows how to fuck the Bread:, which it could laal'not be fuppofed to be fo dextrous at, if while mijrit remained in the Womb it had taken nothing by fudion. ['re A “ 6 . Becaufe many Infants as foon as they are of !p born, before they have fucked any Bread, or jo|p taken any thing by the Mouth, vomit up a 4 nilky aliment : which therefore mult needs be y ( d! ‘ received into their Stomach in the Womb. ; [' o0i ;iis he gives an inftance of in one of his own oforJildren. Thefe Arguments I think fufficient to prove the Fcetus wat they are alledgedfor- but when he would U notnou- aerwards prove that the Fcetus is alfo nouvilh . rijhed.it all -'by. the Mother’s Blood conveyed by the tlm- jv real Vein, I think his Reafons are invalid. For ' e> ' • ( ays it mult be fo, fir ft, becaufe the did Vein s mplanted into the Placenta (but this is but oe giag the Queftion, for ’tis necelfary it Oiould implanted into it, though it receive nothing r n it but nutritious juice.) Secondly , becaufe of b great quantity of Blood that will ilfue out of R the 2 Of the Abdomen. Book ] the Umbilical Vein, if one tye the Navel-rop and then open the faid Vein betwixt the Lig; ture and Placenta : for he fays there will flow 01 four times as much Blood as could be fuppofed l be contained in the fmall Arteries on that lie the Ligature next the Placenta. I anfwer, th firil one would be well fatisfied that the Ligatu was made fo ftrait, that there could no Bloc pafs through it from the Foetus to the Placenl And fecondly, it cannot exa&ly be guefled he much Blood may be contained in the Foetus's A teries in the Placenta , fo as that one fhould |l certain that there does four times more flow o by the Vein. f 3 ut laftly , fuppofe there do fol times as much more blood ilfue out of the Vt as is contained in the Foetus’s Arteries that are that fde the Ligature next the Placenta , and tl blood come from the Dam’s Hypogaftrick ai Spermatick Arteries ♦, I fay there will not oif four times, but forty times as much iflue then from, for all the blood of the Dam might th be drawn out this way. Wherefore I think tlj Experiment makes much more againfi: his 0 }' nion than for it. His third Reafon is the nece ty of it ; becaufe as the foetus encreafes , it neeii much aliment, and its weak Bowels can conco but little, it muff therefore have fome purer al ment, and which is already conco&ed ( he mes blood) to nourilh it, and by its commixture > help forward the changing the aliment receivl by the Mouth into blood. Anfvo. This reafli himfelf invalidates in the next Paragrap * Anat. * where he confefles that the Foetus in the Won) corpJium. is nourilhed in the fame manner as the Chichi P’ 367* in an Egg , which receives encreafe firft by t; inner White ( as he diftinguilhes ) by way » appofition ^ Secondly, it receives nourilhind Hhap. 33. Of the nutrition of the Foetus. 237 1 by the mouth from the outer White , and t the fame time its Umbilical VefTels enter ie Yelk ( to draw nourilhment from thence ) ’hich, he fays indeed , refembles the Mother’s lood ^ but feeing it has not the lead form of lood, why would it not be more plauubly faid 1 'iat it is inftead of the Succus nutritm that the eetus in viviparous Animals receives by the Na- il-vein ? And feeing thefe feveral Liquors are irned, part of them, into blood in a Chicken, uthout any of the Hen’s blood to ferment them mills he fpeaks • ) why Ihould not the fame power ok* granted to the vegetative or animal foul of 0 -lie Foetus in the Womb , without any a hi dance ie l)m the Mother’s blood ? To which I shall add another Argument (out of Dr. Harvey ) taken ioH)m Casfarean births, when living Infants are ickct out of the Mother’s Womb, after (he is ot tad. For if it had its life and heat from the Mo- : tier’s blood ^ furely it Ihould dye as foon as die ;tit aleaft, if not fooner : for when death approa- jilfces, the fubordinate parts do languihi and grow fcc.d before the principal:, and therefore the nlart fails lad of all. Wherefore the blood of it : t. '.Foetus would fird lofe its heat , and become 1 (( flit for its office, if it were derived from the pair fether’s Womb } feeing her Womb is deditute tie: 0 ill vital heat, before her Heart. But enough othis. te lut fome may objed, if the Foetus be nourilhed The reifm J'noneofthe Mother’s blood , why fhould her whvm- Infes be ftopt all or mod of the while (he is w nit ^ v h Child ? To which I anfwer , that ’tis for ^ f fame reafon that Nurfes that give fuck com- fo* uily want them alfo - for as in Nurfes the chyle #es in a great proportion to the Breads, ideby the blood being defrauded of its dues R % ana Chill matte their Men- 2^8 Of the Abdomen. Book I. and wonted fhare does not encreafeto that degree as to need to be leflened by the flowing of the Menfes •, fo in Women with Child , there is fo great a quantity of the Succus nutritius ( which is only Chyle a little refined and impregnated with vital fpirit) that pafles to the Placenta by the Hypogailrick and Spermatick Arteries for the nourilhment of the Foetus , that unlefs the Mother be very fanguine , her Menfes intermit after the firfl or fecond Month. I fhall conclude therefore , that the Foetus i< nourifhed three feveral ways, but only by one, humour : firfl: by appofition of it whiles it is yel an imperfect Embryo and has not the Umbilica VefTels formed ^ but after thefe are perfeded , il then receives the fame nutritious juice by the Umbilical Vein, the more fpirituous and thin pari whereof it tranfmutes into blood, and fends fortl the grofier part by the Umbilical Artery into the Amnios , which the Foetus fucks in at it: Mouth, ( after the parts of the Mouth, the Gulc Ventricle, &c. are formed fufficiently for fuc an adion ) and undergoing a new concodio in its Stomach is received out of the Inteflrins b) the F'ena lattea, as is done after the birth. cbjervation The now generally received opinion of the Foe tus" 1 s receiving nourifhment by the mouth in th< latter months, may, befides the reafons above recited from Diemerbroeck , be further confirmee 1 ) by the following Obfervation. About Novembel . 1 696. I was fent for to an Infant that could no> fwallow. The Child feern’d very deflrous of food 1 and took what was offer’d it in a Spoon wit'S greedinefs} but when it went to fwallow it , : was like to be choaked , and what fhould hav< gone down returned by the mouth and nofe,and i fell into a fcrugling convulfive-fort of fit upon if Chap. 33. Of the nutrition of the Foetus. 259 It was very flefhy and large , and was two dayes old when I came to it • but the next day died. The Parents being willing to have it opened, I took two Phylicians and a Surgeon with me. O- pening the Abdomen firfl: , the Guts had fome of the Meconium remaining ftill in them , though the Child had gone two or three times to ftool. The Stomach had in it a pretty deal of a flimy fortof Liquor, ( or gelly rather ) fomewhat like pretty thick (drained) water-gruel. I lhali not mention any obfervations upon other parts in the Abdomen , as being not to our prefent purpofe. Then we cut open the Thorax , and taking out the Gullet ( with the Wind-pipe, Lungs, &cj .continued to the Stomach , we blew by a pipe down the Gullet, but found no pa (Page for the wind into the Stomach. Then we made a flit ip the Stomach, and put a pipe into its upper orifice, and blowing, we found the wind had a vent, but tot by the top of the Gullet. Then we carefully lit open the back-fide of the Gullet from the lomach upwards ,and when we were gone a little ibove half way towards the pharynx. we found it lollow no further. Then we begun to flit it open rom the pharynx downwards, and it was hollow ill within an inch of the other flit , and in the mperforated part it was narrower than in the iollowed. This Jfihmus ( as it were ) did not eem ever to have been hollow, for in the bottom fthe upper, and the top of the lower cavity here was not the leafl: print of any fuch thing, ut the parts were here as fmooth as the bottom f an acorn-cup. Then fearching what way the wind had palled 'hen we blew from the ftomach upwards , we >und an oval hole ( half an inch long ) on the j>re-fide of the gullet opening into the afpcra ar~ R 3 ter 10 240 Of the Abdomen. Book ] teria a little above its firft divifion, juft under th lower part of the ljlhmus above-mentioned. Now, I fay, this is a plain confirmation of th foetus's being nourifhed by the mouth \ for th Gula being impervious. Nature had formed th hole in the wind-pipe and gullet, for the liquc contained in the amnios to pafs into the Stomach which it might do without prejudice , or an fear of choaking, in the Womb , while the Chil breathed not : but when it was born and came t breathe, there could be no longer any paflage th way, and fo the Infant was neceflarily tamifhed. What parts of a Fcetus in the Womb dif from thofe of an adult perfon. Aving delivered the Hiftory of the Foeth we will only further fhew in what Parts Foetus in the Womb differs from an adult perfo And this we cannot do more exaftly than in tl manner that Diemerbroeck has reckon’d then whom therefore we fliall here tranflate , with li tie alteration. This diverfity, he faith, conhfts in the diff rence of magnitude , figure , fituation , numbe ufe, colour, cavity, hardnefs,motion,excrement and ftrength of the Parts. Now this diverfity is confpicuons either in tl whole Body, or in the feveral Ventricles , or the Limbs. There is confiderable in the whole Body, 1. The littleriefs of all the parts. 2. The reddifh colour of the whole. C H A P. XXXIV. Chap. 3 4 . Wherein a Foetus differs from a Man. 241 3. The foftnefs of the Bones ; whereof many are as yet griftly and flexible,and that by fo much the more, by how much the foetus is further from maturity. In the Head there are feveral differences. As 1. The Head in refpecf to the proportion of the reft of the Body is bigger, and the fhape of the Face lefs comely. 2. The bones of the Scull are fofter , and the- Crown is not covered with bone, but only with a Membrane. :d . 3. The bone of the Forehead is divided, as alfo that of the under-jaw : and the Os cuneiforme is divided into four. 4. The bone of the Occiput or hinder part of the Head is diftinguifht into three, four or five bones. 5. The Brain is fofter and more fluid, and the I Nerves very foft. 6 . The bones that ferve the fenfe of Hearing are wonderfully hard and big. 7. The Teeth lye hid in the little holes of the Jaw-bone. 8. There is no lefs diverfity in the Thorax. For, 1. The Dugs fwell, and out of them in Infants new-born whether Male or Female, a ferous Milk ilfues forth fometimes of its own accord, fometimes with a light prelfure : yet there are no Glandules very confpicuous, but there is fome fafhion of a Nipple. 2. The Vertebra of the Back want their fpin.ous procefies, and are each one made of three diftind Bones, whofe mutual concourfe form that hole whereby the fpinal marrow defcends. 3„ The Heart is remarkably big, and its Auri- cula large. R 4 4. There Ct Of the Abdomen. Book I. 4. There are two unions of the greater Veffiels, that are not confpicuous in adult perfons .• viz.. 1. The Foramen ovale , by which there is a paffiage open out of the Cava into the Vena pulmonaris , juft as each of them are opening the firlt into the right Ventricle , and the latter into the left Ven- tricle of the Heart. And this Foramen juft as it opens into the Vena pulmonans has a Valve that hinders any thing from returning out of the faid Vein into the Foramen. 2. The Canalvs arteriofus, which two fingers breadth from the bafts of the Heart joyns the Arteria pulmonaris to the Aorta. It has a pretty large Cavity, and afeends a little ob- liquely front the faid Artery to the Aorta , into which it conveys the blood that was driven into the pulmonary Artery out of the right Ventricle of the Heart , fo that it never comes in the left Ventricle-, even as that blood that is fent out ol the left Ventricle into the Aorta, never came in the right, (except a little that is returned from the nutrition of the Lungs ) but palled immedi- ately into it out of the Vena cava by the Foramen ovale. So that the blood pafles not through both the Ventricles as it does after the foetus is born •! for then it muft have had its courfe through the Lungs, which k cannot have, becaufe they are now very denfe and lye idle and unmoved. Yeaf they are fo denfe and heavy, that if one throw them into water they will link ^ whereas if the foetus be but born and take only half a dozen breaths, they become fo fpongy and .light that they will fwim. Which (by the way) may be of good ufe to difeover whether thofe Infants that are killed by Whores, and which they com- monly affirm were ftill-born, were really fo ot ho. For if they were ftiil-born, the Lungs will • 1 - ... r 1 Chap. j^.fVherein a Foetus differs from a Man. 24 j fink ; but if alive, ( fo as to breath never fo little a while) they will fwira. 4. The Gland Thymus is notably large , and confifts as it were of three Glands. In the lower belly there are thefe differences. 1 . The Umbilical Veffels go out of the Abdo~ men. 2. The Stomach is narrower , yet not empty, but pretty full- of a whitifh liquor. 3. The Caul is hardly difcernible, being almofl like a Spider’s- web. 1 4. The Guts are feven times longer (or more) than the Body.- 5. In the fmall Guts the Excrements are pitui- tous and yellow, but in the thick fomewhat hard and blackilh, fometimes greenifh : the C cecum is larger than ufual, and often filled mt\^faces. 6 . The Liver is very large, filling not only the right Hypochondre, but extends it felf into the left fide, and covers all the upper part of the Sto- mach. It has a paflage now more than in the adult railed Canalis venofus , which arifing out of the Sinus of the Porta carries the greateft part of what is brought by the Umbilical Vein directly and in a full ftream into the Cava above the Li- fer ^ but as foon as the Infant is born , and no- ting comes any longer by the fa id Vein, tins Ca- talvs prefently clofes, as the Vein it felf turns to 1 Ligament • as alfo do the Vrachus and the two Umbilical Arteries. 7, The Spleen is fmall. 8. The Gall-bladder is full of yellow or greep Choler.. 9. The Sweet-bread is very large and white. 50 The Kidneys are bigger and unequal, in jtheir fupefficies, and look as if they were com- pounded. or a. colk&ion of very many Glandule's. Of the Abdomen. 244 Book I. 1 1. The Renes fuccenturiati are exceeding large ^ they do not only border upon the Kidneys, as in the adult, but lye upon them and embrace their upper part with a large Sinus as it were. 12. The Ureters are wide , and the Bladder diftended with Urine. 13. In Females the Vterus is depreffed , the Tub* long, and the Tefies very large. The difference in the Limbs confifls, 1 . In the tendernefs and foftnefs of the Bones. 2. The little bones of the Wrift and Inltep are griftly and not firmly joyned together. CHAP. XXXV. '< Of the Birth . T H E Foetus fwimming in the liquor of th< Amnios , and the Navel-rope being fo long it muft needs have fcope enough to change its ft tuation, and that is the reafon that Anatomifl 1 differ fo much about it. But according to Do ctor Harvey its ufual pofture is thus. The pojlure 44 Its Knees are drawn up to the Belly, its Leg of the fee- “ bending backwards , its Feet acrofs , and it tus in the « jq an 4 s lifted up to its Head , one of which i 44 holds to the Temple or Ear , the other to th 44 Cheek •, where there are white fpots on th 44 Skin as if it had been rubb’d upon. The back 44 bone turns round , the Head hanging dowi 44 towards its Knees. Its Head is upwards, anc 44 its Face commonly towards the Mother’s 44 Back. At hs But towards the birth (fometimes a Week 0 bmh r two before ) it alters its fituation , and tumble dowi Chap. 35 . Of the Birth . 245 down with its Head to the neck of the Womb, with its Feet upwards. Then the Womb alfo fettles downward and its orifice relaxes and o- pens. And the Foetus being now ill at eafefprawls and moves it felf this way and that way, whereby it tears the Membranes wherein it is included , fo that the Waters (as they call them) flow into the Vagina y which they make flippery for the eafier egrefs of the Infant : though fometimes the Mem- branes burfl: not, but come forth whole, ( as they do commonly in Brutes.) At the fame time the neighbouring parts are loofened and become fit for diftention : the joyntings of the Os facrum and Petten with the Coxendix , as alfo of the Off a pubis are fo relaxed, that they yield very much to the pafiage of the Foetus. And its motion gives that dilturbance to the Uterus , that prefently the ani- mal fpirits are fent plentifully by the Nerves to its conftri&ory Fibres, and the Mufcles of the slb- dowe«,which all contra&ing together,very ftrong- ly expel the Foetus , which (in the molt natural birth ) goes with the Head foremoft: : and if the Feet or any other part ( befides the Head ) do offer it felf firft, the travail is always more pain- J ful and dangerous. The feveraETorts of Creatures have fundry the term terms of going with young : The ftated and rnoff of going ufualtime of Women is nine Months; though ™uhctilL fome bring forth fome Weeks fooner, and others later. But when it is given out that perfect and fprightly Infants are born at feven Months end; it is either t„o hide the faults of fome new-married Woman, or from the miftake of the ignorant Mother. As alfo when fometimes the Mother has affirmed her felf to go eleven Months or up- wards, it is either through miftake, or to keep fall fome fair Eftate, when the pretended Father's 4 “ * dead 24 6 Of the Abdomen. Book I. dead without an Heir , for which the cunning Widow plays an after-game. The reafon Divers reafons are given why the Foetus at the °t the Rated time of birth is impatient of Raying any longer in the Womb. As the narrownefs of the place, the corruption of its aliment, or the defeft of it, the too great redundance of excrements in the Foetus , and the neceffity of ventilation or breathing. All thefe are plauhbly defended by their feveral Authors. But without blaming in- genious Men for exercifing their Wits on fuch'a Subject, we choofe however rather to be content with refolving all into the wife difpofal of the great Creatour, whofe Power and Wifdom werq • not more eminent in creating Man at firft out of , the DuR of the Earth, than out of thofe princi- ples and in that method whereby he is produced in ordinary generation. Tab. X. Fig. i. Reprefenteth the ufual situation of the Foetus in the Womb, A Its Head hanging down forwards , fo that its No ft vs hid betwixt its Knees . BB Its Buttocks , to which its Heels clofe . CC Its Hr ms. D The Vmbilical rope pajfing by its Neck , and wound round over its Forehead. Fig* II. Sheweth the Foetus taken out of the Womb, and as yet tyed to the Placenta , the Umbilical VefTels being feparated at their rife. AAA The Abdomen opened . B The Liver of the Foetus, | C The Chap. 25 * Of the Birth. 247 2 The Vrinary Bladder. DD The Inteflins. £ The Vmbilical Vein. F The Vmbilical Arteries. p The Urachus. I The Vmbilical Veffels united and invejled in their common Coat. The Funiculus umbilicalis reaching to the Pla- centa. LKKK 7 he Veins and Arteries difperfed through the Placenta. JLL The Placenta of the Womb. ig. HI. Sheweth an Embryo in its juft dimenlion, (communicated to me by Dr. E. Tyfon .) Its wide Mouth with the Tongue in it. The Vmbilical rope. The Thighs and Legs , with the Coccyx d ap- pearing like a Tail. The End of the Firh Book. ^The Second Book . OF THE MIDDLE CAVITY, CALLED THOR A CHAP. I. If the common containing farts of the Thorax or Breafl. Itherto of the lowefl; Cavity or Abdomen , jhs Brcafi . and of the parts contained in it, whe- ther appointed for Chylification ( and in brae refped for Sanguification ) or for Procreation . 'low it followeth that we defcribe the middle Cavity, called Thorax , which containeth the Or- gans of Refpiration, and thofe that elaborate the Hood and Vital Spirits, with the trunks of the /eflels whereby thefe are diftributed into all the )arts of the Body , for their refe&ion , and the )refervation of their natural heat. This Cavity is bounded above by the Clavicu- Its bawds, z or Chanel-bones, below by the Diaphragm or vlidriff , ( whereby it is fevered from the Abdo- men ^ ) in the fore-part by the Breaft-bone and Cartilages 5 * — ' 250 Of the Breafl. Book II t Cartilages in the Sides by the Ribs ; behind bj the Vertebra of the back. Figure. Th q figure of it is in a manner Oval, fomewhal flat before and behind , whereas in Beaks it i< lomewhat (harp : So that only Man lieth on hi< Back. Parts. The parts whereof it iscompofed, are eithei containing , or contained. The parts containing are either common , or proper. The cm - The common containing parts are in number five, men cm- viz. Cuticula ? Cutis , Pinguedo , Membrana carnofa, and the common Membrane of the Mufcles. Ol which having at large difeourfed in Book I. Ch. 3, when we treated of the common containing parti of the lower Belly, we Ihall not here repeat what is there delivered,but pafs on to the proper. CHAP. IL Of the proper containing parts', and firf^ of the Dugs ; The proper containing parts. T H E proper containing parts are either external or internal. The external are in number Three, the Break, the Mufcles, and the Bones. The internal proper containing parts are three in like manner ^ the Pleura , the CMediaftinum^ and the Diaphragm. Dugs are granted to both Sexes, and are feated in the middle of the Thorax , on each fide one, upon the peftoral Mnfcle that draweth the Shoul- der forwards. , {J J °p Men. j n jy[ en t [ ie y are f ra med of the Cutvs , the Mem- hr ana carnofa , Fat , and the Nipple , and fervejj only for beauty,- and are called Mammilla?; In the Paps. ^hap, 2. Of the Breafls. 2 5 x 2 . Of Wo* men. Their big* nefs. In Women, belides thefe parts , they have re- writable Veflek, Glandules, and Pipes to cdn- lin the Milk feparated by the Glandules, and re called Mamma. They differ much- as to their bignefs in feveral yomen, and in the fame Woman in regard of *e and other circumftances : for . before they ive their Menfes, and when they are very old, iey bunch out but very little. And in the mid- !e or flower of their age , when they give fuck, f are with Child , they are bigger than at other mes. They are made up of many glandulous bodies Ghnfo <’a different bignefs, and are not of one conti- l ed glandulous fubftance, ( -a.*, Dr. Wharton af- imeth , lib. de Gland, p. 23 6. ) There is one ( and in the middle juft under the Nipple that ibigger than the reft. The fpaces between the (ands are filled up with fat, and there are a- fcidance of Vefiels that go from one to another, ney are all inclofed by the Membrma carnofa al make up as it were an half globe. They are v liter of fubfbnce in Women than in Brutes. Iirough thefe Glands the Milk is feparated m the Blood, being nothing but the Chyle willing out of the left Ventricle of the Heart Bod. v ;h the Blood,- ( to which it is not as yet a!fi- fc Dated) and driven hither along the Thora- V- k Arteries. Unlefs we will admit Vena la~ ae to come hither , which Opinion we final! ex- ile &ine afterwards. dpon the middle great Gland ftandeth the P'illa or Nipple, which is round and of a fpon- Papil-r- ||fubftance, covered with a very thin Skin, and n many little holes in it for the Milk to diftil 252 Of the Breafl. Book I Gians of a Man’s Penis , in that by handlings fucking, it becomes eredt or (tiff , being othe wife commonly flaggy. It is red in Virgins , . vid in thofe that give fuck , and biackifh in 0 Women. All the Tubuli lattifcri or Milk-co duits end in it. Its bignefs. it differs in bignefs , being as big in fome as Mulberry, in others as a Rafpberry, in otht lefs : when Women give fuck , it is longer th at other times. vfe. Its.ufe is to be like a Pipe or Tunnel , throu, which the Child ( taking it in its Mouth) m fuck the Milk out of the Breafl: : And it is of e quifitc fenfe, that the Milk pafling through it m caufe a kind of titillation, whereby Mothers a, Nurfes may take the greater delight and pleafi to fuckle their Infants. Areola. There is a little circle that furrounds it call Areola , which in Virgins is pale and knotty j I thofe that are with Child or give fuck, brow: and in old Women, black. ,! ThrirVef- The Breads have all forts of Veflels, Vei t i Arteries, Nerves, Lymphedudts, which are co - rnon to them with other parts • and Tubuli lai- fen proper to themfelves, and according to fop, Fence la(lc&. Of all tnefe in order. Veins. The Feins are of two forts, for fome are ext- nal , fome internal. The external fpring frf which it is made, thought that the flopping of he Menjes ( as commonly happens to Nurfes, mlefs very plethorick) occafioned the regurgi- ation of the blood by the faid Veflels up to the freafls, where fo free a vent was found for it, fter it was firfl changed into Milk by their Glandules. They afligned the fame blood for the lourilhment of the Foetus in the Womb , and hought that after the birth it afeended up to the heafts. But having in the former Book (Ch. 33.) aewn that the Foetus is not nonrilhed at all by he Mother’s blood, as alfo in this Chapter that 4ilk is not made of it we need not ( though c were eafie to ) fhew how ill this Hypothecs ?ould fatisfie the Queflion , if blood fhould be. appofed the matter out of which Milk is made. Vnd indeed it is fareafier to invalidate the Rea- ons that have been urged for it , than to draw ny from the new that are more fatisfa&ory. So hat as above in ( Book I. ) difeourfing of the tanner and matter of the nourifhing the Foetus a the Womb , we fcrupl ed not to expofe our ■ /v ■ ” * ’ - felves 2<5o Of the Breajl. Book II. felves to the Smiles of our fo over-fagacious Fir- tuofi , invefolving all into the wife difpofal of the Creatour •, fo we (hall not be alhamed to pro- fefs our (I think invincible ) ignorance here al- fo, without giving this Queftion any other Re- folution, than that it is fo , becaufe Providence has order’d it fo to be. However we will not omit to give DicmerbraccK s Opinion , which if it cannot fatisfie , may for its ingenioufnefs de- light. 44 The caufe of it ( fays he ) is a flrong imagi- 44 nation , or an intenle and often thinking oi “ Milk, Breafts, and their Suftion, which work- 44 eth wonderful things in our Bodies : not in-j 44 deed limply of it felf, but by mediation of the 44 appetitive power , or of the paffions of the 44 Mind, which induce various motions on the 44 Spirits and Humours. So the imagination and 44 thinking of a great danger maketh a man 44 tremble , fall, be cold , fall into a fwoon, yes hath fometimes turn’d his Hair grey in a fhort 1 44 time : The imagination of a joyful matter 6,4 caufeth heat and animofity of the body think- 44 ing on a lhamefni thing, or a view of it, cau~ * 4 feth blufhing ■, thinking on a terrible thing, 44 palenefs ; on a fad thing, cold. Luftful thoughts 44 make the Body hot , relax the ftrift Genitals 44 of Women, eredt the Penis, and do fo open the 4t feminary ways that are otherwile invifible, that 44 Seed iflueth out of its own accord in involunta- 44 ry or no&urnal pollution. The fame intenfe 44 imagination (adds be) and a defirous cogita- 44 tion of fuckling the Infant , is the Caufe that 44 the Chyliferous Veflels ( by which he means Ve- nae ladfece properly fo called ) 44 are loofened and 44 opened towards the Breafts, efpecially if fome ■f outward Gaufes tending that way favour ana 44 further □lap. 2. Of the Breads. 261 1 further incite that ftrong imagination , as wan- ;t ton handling of the Breafts, the moving of the 1 Foetus in the Womb, the fucking of the Papilla , ‘ &c. For according to the different influx of 1 the Animal Spirits , the parts are fometimes 1 ftraitned , fometimes relaxed , as every one 1 knows ; and according to that different con- 1 ftri&ion or relaxation the blood and other im- pelled humours, flow fometimes more, fome- 1 times lefs into the parts ■ and fometimes beget 1 heat, foftnefs, rednefs • fometimes conftridion, ‘cold, and palenefs. Amongft thefe impelled ‘humours is the Chyle, &c. — ] Tocon- irm this Opinion , he gives feveral Inftances therein nothing but imagination could move the Ihyle to tend to the Breafts. His firft is that :nown Story of Santorellus ; That a poor ; man’s Wife dying, and not having means e~ ’ nough to hire a Nurfe for the Infant fhe had 1 left behind her , he ufed , ( to ffcill it a little) 1 often to lay it to his Paps , ( without doubt 1 ( fays Diemerbroeck ) with a great defire to ' yield it fome Milk ) and fo at length by that ; intenfe and continual thought , and often re- 1 peated fucking of the Papilla , his Breafts af- ‘ forded Milk enough for the fuckling the In- ‘ fant. (Which by the way feems to make much gainft his Opinion of the Chyle’s being con- r eyed to the UMamma by the Fence l ail c a • for being Men according to Nature give no fuck, 0 what purpofe fhould Fence laPlea be diftribu- ed to their Mammilla? and yet here is an in- lance of a man giving fuck , and therefore the Myle is more likely to be brought by the Ar- eries , which Men have as well as Women •, un- efs we will grant that force to imagination, to make Fence lactea^ as well as to fend the Chyle by Book II 262 Of the Brea fl\ them, which would be an equal force of imagina lion to imagine. But to proceed ) He tells an other Story of an old Woman that came to giv fuck, and he delivers it with fuch Circumftance as may create a belief cf the truth of it. 44 At tyancn a Town not far from us (viz. cc from Vtrecht , in which Province it is) abou 44 thirty years ago there was an Hoftefs that kep 44 the Bore’s-head Inn without the Gate , whi 44 was brought to Bed a little after her Husband’ 44 death, and died in Child-bed, or very foon af 44 ter , leaving a healthful Child behind her 44 and having left very little Eftate , her Mothe 44 whofe name was Joan Vuyltuyt , being alfo poo 4t and not able to put it out to Nurfe , yet ha< 44 fuch pity on her Daughters Child , as to un 44 dertake to Nurfe it , and fhe was now three 44 fcore and fix years old. Now having fome 44 times ufed, with the greatefl commiferation 44 to hold it to her Breafls when it cried , and of 44 fered it the Nipple to fuck ^ by that ftronj 44 imagination, and defirous cogitation of nurfin| 44 the Infant, her Breafls begun to give Milk, anc 44 that in a few days fo plentifully , as was abun 44 dantly fufficient to feed the Child, fo that i 4 had fcarce any need of other fuftenance *, an( 44 fo, to the admiration of all, the Infant wa v ‘ well nourifhed with the Milk of this old Wo 44 man, whofe Breafls for many years had beei 44 wither’d and flaggy , but now became plum] 44 and full like a young Woman’s. There an 44 many dill aiive in that City that remember th< 44 thing very well.] 1 confefs the Story is ven odd, but whether to be refoived into the force 0 imagination, I leave the Curious to meditate However he very plaufibiy anfwers feveral Ob lection? that may be made againft it, which! .'hap. Of the Pleura, 2 63 ill be woith the while for the Latin Reader to erufe in his Anat. corp. human, lib. 2. cap. 2. p. ,09,411, The two other external proper containing arts of the Thorax are the Mufcles and the [mes. Butofthefewe (hall omit the defcription i:re, having thought it more convenient to treat 1 all the Mufcles , and all the Bones of the whole i)dy in two diftinft Books , viz., of the Mufcles i the fifth, and of the Bones in the fixth : And i for thefe of the Thorax in particular, the Muf- iS are defcribed in Chap 15. of B. V. and the .mes in Chap. 11,12, 13. ofB. VI, 1 C H A P. III. Of the internal proper containing Parts , viz. the Pleura, Mediaftinum and Diaphragm. •p H E internal proper containing parts are in L number three, the Pleura , the Mediaftinum , (with the Thymus growing to it ) and the . iaphragm. The Pleura hath its denomination from the pleura, i bs which it cloaths on their infide, ( for a Rib i in Greek called 2nd fo it may be term- < in Englilh, the Coftal membrane. It is membranous, white, thin, and hard, re- its fub~ i nbling the Peritonaum^ and lining all the Ca- (lanes, ny of the Thorax . Spigelius de human , corp. fair, lib . 9. cap. 3, will Ive it to be thicker and ftronger than the Peri- tonaum , 264 Of the Breaft. Pdrts. Figure. Holes. Book I] ton&um , contrary to the Opinion of Riolanus , wh affirmeth the Peritonaeum to be the thicker an ftronger, becaufe it is appointed for fuftainin the weight of the Guts. It confifts of a double Membrane, of whic! the inner, or that next the davity, is thickef This is fmooth on its infide, and bedewed with waterifli humour , that the Lungs might pla againfl it without any prejudice. Sometimes 0 one fide, and fometimes on both, it fends fort ( on its infide ) certain nervous Fibres, ( even i healthful perfons ) which being inferted into th invelting Membrane of the Lungs do fo fix then in their place, as to hinder that liberty of afcer and defcent in refpiration which is natural t them, and yet many times without any notab] injury to their breathing. Though foraetimc (as Spigelius has obferved ) they tye the Lungs 1 very clofe to the fides, as to caufe a continual an incurable Dyfpnuea. As to that waterilh humor that bedews the infide of this Membrane, it feem to proceed from vapours raifed from the blood and condenfed by the ( comparative) coldnefs c this Membrane. The outer Membrane is thinnet and rough on its outer furface, that it migh cleave the more firmly to the Ribs and Mufcle by the intervention of their proper membrane. As for its figure , without, it is arched ^ with] in, hollow ^ above it is narrower, below broad er, being chiefly widened fide- ways. Above, it is perforated in fix or feven place' to give way to the Vena cava defending, an' the Aorta afcending, the Gula, the Wind-pipe La&eals, Lymphedudls and Nerves. Below! where it covereth the Midriff, it is perforate in three places, to give way to the Vena cav afcending, and the Aorta defending, as alfo t the Gula, 1 Chap. 3. Of the Fleur a. 265 It is faid to have its rife from the Membranes tovering the Spinalis medulla ; however , it ad- heres very clofe to the Vertebra of the Back, : rom whence it comes forward on each hand by :he fides to the Breaft-bone , under which the Membranes of each fide are joyned together , and b becoming double it goes back again ftreight 'rom the middle of the Breaft to the Back , divi- ling the cavity of the Thorax into two parts, like 1 partition-wall, and one Lobe of the Lungs from he other : and this is called Mediafiinum , of vhich by and by. Its Veins fpring from the fuperiour Intercoftal Veins. ranch, and from the Vena fine pari. The Arteries in like manner proceed from the Arteries c aperiour Intercoftals , ( which arife from the ubclavian) and thefe defcend to about the fourth Lib, below which it has its Arteries from the inder part of the Aorta defcending. It hath Nerves from twelve vertebral pair, h T erjsSf 'iz.. from all the pairs of the Thorax : for from etwixt each of the twelve Vertebra of the Back here fprings a pair of Nerves , and each is nmediately divided into the fore- and hinder- 'anches : The fore-branches are they which ferve ae Intercoftal Mufcles , external and internal, ad alfo the Pleura : as for the hinder , they are ^flowed upon the Mufcles which lye on the ack, &c. The Veins and Arteries according to Spigelm an between the two Membranes of the Pleura , id therefore he thinks that when an inflamma- on of the Pleura ( called a Pleurifle ) impofthu- ates, the matter is rather gathered betwixt its lembranes, than berwixt the Intercoftal mufcles id it. The 266 Of the Breaft,, Book II. of the Me- The fecond internal proper containing part is diaftinum, the Mediaflinum \ fo called becaufe it ftandeth in the middle of the Breaft, and divideth its cavity into two partitions, w. a right and left. Its rife „ It fpringeth from the Membranes of the Pleura meeting at the Sternum , ( as was faid before • J fo that at its rife it confifts of four Membranes, becaufe the Pleura , of the duplicature whereof it is made, confifts of two. But as the Mediaflinum. tends from the Sternum through the middle oj the Thorax towards the Back , its duplicate^ Membranes are fo fevered, that the Heart with its Pericardium are contained in the cavity that is! formed by their feparation. Yet when they ar- rive near the Back , they joyn one to another again as clofe as they did at the Breaft , though they prefently part again , ( faith Diemerbroed ) and make another narro wer Cavity, but as long,! for the Gullet, &c. to defeend by. Some have formerly imagined a third Cavity at its Origin] under the Sternum , as in particular Dr. Highmore , who fays the interftice betwixt the Membranes is large, and yet fhe fays) they are knit to one an- other by certain Fibres. In this Cavity, he thinks, there are thick vapours and flatus fometimes con- tain’d, which caufe very acute pains there, by retching the membranes and violating the fibres that knit them together. But in truth there is no fuch Cavity, nor consequently any fuch vapours, or pain depending thereupon. For though in- deed, if the dilfe this part. 5 It con0 s 1 fay it confids of two Mufcles, an upper a of tvr/> a lower, which are thus deferibed by the ate : Mufiles. p a Author. 41 The upper Mufcle by one eild, (viz,, its hel “adheres circular-wife to the Ribs, and to 1 “ Appendix of the Sternum the other paffeth 1 “ to the Tendon , which makes the nervous cel “ of the Diaphragm (as they call it) and is fp “ on ( or continued unto) the flefli of the lo; H Mufcle . and fo the whole Midriff beccjjf — 7 a ■ . hap. 5. Of the Midriff, 271 ‘like one digaltrick or double-bellied Mufcie. Jay, the faid Author makes it a trigaftrick one, afinuch as he has obferved (in Oxen ) that the f'e-part of the upper Mufcie (hoots forth a ndon to every baftard Rib on each fide the Frmm , to which Ribs the upper part of the tmfverfe Mufcles of the lower Belly alfo ad- hres, fo that he thinks they are continued one no the other. Of what ufe he makes this uni- 0, fhall be (hewed in BookV. chap. 17. Of the j ufcles of the Abdomen. “ The lower fprings from the Vertebra of the joins, and neither proceeds from the other, or touches it but by the mediation of the “fendon, ( for though the Fibres of each Muf- fle feem fometimes to mix a little one with Another on the under fide, yet that is only by a iediation of each of their Tendons.) Thole wo Appendices (as they are called ) of this low- r Mufcie whereby it adheres to the Vertebra ?, have by all Anatomifts been reprefented as if ‘hey were of the fame length ^ whereas indeed ‘ hey are not fo , for the right is both longer ‘han the left, and very much exceeds it in the c umber of carnous and tendinous Fibres, Yea ‘he right arifes from (or rather terminates ‘ ito) the firft , fecond and third Vertebra of ; “ ie Loins, as from fo many heads • whereas 1 ie left adheres to the lafh , and lafc but one of ‘he Back, ^s to the courfe of the Fibres of both thefe Teles, becaufe they are better apprehended by 'h view than they can be by the defeription , I hi wave this latter, and content my fell with 0 ibiting to the Eye of the Reader a Scheme of r. 'e Mufcles in 7 ab. 13, Fig. 2, & 3. front the a Author, T 3, I he 272 I'Wxi* 'Holes. Oftht Breaft . Book] The upper fide of the Midriff is cloathed wi the Pleura , and its lower with the Peritomeu. To the upper membrane the Mediaflinum a Pericardium are knit ^ and fometimes the low tips of the Lobes of the Lungs,but that connexi is preternatural. It is perforated on the right hand in ( or ne; the Nervous centre by the Trunk of Fena ca afcending from the Liver ^ and on the left ha I a little more backwards , its lower Mufcle in upper or fore-part ( before it is become t dinous) is perforated by the Gullet and two S machick Nerves fpringing from the par vagi At which latter perforation the fabrick of Diaphragm is remarkable ^ for there ( as 1 may fee in the forefaid Figures) the Fibres wh are next to the upper orifice of the Stoma run not {freight as in other parts of it , crooked like a Bow, encompafhng the Laid c free, and by their contraction fo conlhringing that the continual motion of the Diaphragm c fes no regurgitation of any thing out of the S inach, nor is the afeent even of vapour perm ted, except when it is violently burft open belching or vomiting. In the hinder part of lower mufcle, viz,, betwixt its two Appends or productions whereby it is knit to the Fertel there defeend the Aorta^ a branch of the V azygos^ and the intercoftal Nerve ( dilfinguik from the par vagum by Dr. Willis') for the v.fr> the parts of the Abdomen. It has been laid to have two Arteries , cah phrenic a, frpm the Aorta defeending, and as a ny Feins from the Trunk of Vena cava afcendi; through it. But the above-mentioned Barth fays, that the lower mufeie has peculiar Bio 1 vTcflbls. ^ For befides thofe Veins that fpr “ ^ fir Chap. Of the Midrijf. 2 7? “ from the Cava , ( which provide for the upper u Mufcle and middle part of the lower ) this lc lower has on each fide peculiar and notable u ones which arife from the Vena adipofa , to 1 which as many Arteries anfwer in like manner lt fpringing from the Lumbares , yet at a different “ Origin from thofe other that accompany the lt above-mentioned Veins that fpring from the ' f, Cava.~\ It has a peculiar Nerve which fprings from the brachial Nerves with a double or triple Hoot • namely two or three flips , proceeding from the aforefaid Nerves, grow into one trunk, which is the Nerve of the Diaphragm. The firffc and chiefeft flip is produced from the fecond ver- :ebral Nerve : and the trunk that is made up of ill the three , defcends down the Neck and through the cavity of the Thorax without any ramification as far as the Midriff, where being livided again into two or three flips , on each ide it is inferred into its flefhy or mufcular part. Mow becaufe the Intercoftal pair , according to Dr. iViUvs, has communication with the Verte- bral from whence this Nerve of the Diaphragm fpringeth, yea with this Nerve it felf , (for he Tays that two or three Nerves are fent from the rervical Plexus of the Intercoftal into the Trunk it felf of the Nerve of the Diaphragm ) that learned Author very ingenioufly gives a reafon af the great confent of the Midriff with the Heart, Brain and Face, when a man laughs. “ For, ''fays be, as often as the imagination is affected ,c with fome pleafant or wonderful conceit , the Heart would prefently fain triumph ( ovare) * and be lighten’d by throwing off its burthen as “ it were .* wherefore that the blood may the ' c quicklier be emptied out of its right Ventricle ;t into the Lungs, and confequentlv out of the T 4 " 46 teft 274 Of the Breaft. Book II. 44 left into the Aorta , the Diaphragm being in “ ftigated by the Serves that go to it from tht u abovefaid Plexus , is drawn upwards with < 44 more rapid Syftole , and often repeating it 44 jumps as it were, it bears up the Lungs , anc 41 caufes them the quicker and frequenter to dif 44 charge the Air and Blood : and then inafmucl 44 as the fame Intercoftal Nerve , thqt communi ft cates below with the Nerve of the Diaphragm 44 is alfo continued above with the Maxilla 44 Nerves, when a cackling is begun in the Breaft 41 the geftures of the Mouth and Face patheticaf 44 ly anfvver thereto 3 And when the Dia phragm is wounded in its Nervous part, then tb snufclesof the Face fuffer Convulfions , and th, laughter called Rifus Sardonius ( which is involun tary) is caufed. Befides the abovefaid peculia Nerve, it has fecondly final! twigs from the, Stq machick Nerves and Intercoftal as they defceit; through it. Its ufe Is fir ft to divide the Thorax from th< Abdomen , that noifom and impure Vapours ma; not afeend from the d^ore ignoble parts ( as tin Guts) to offend the more noble ( as the Heart &c.) Secondly „ to help the mufcl.es. of the Abdo men in excluding the Excrements, and ( in WO' men) the Foetus. But thirdly , its chief life is t( *DeMufc. refpiration , in which as * Stem obferves &' gland. 44 it felt rather becomes lefs convex than its com 14 pafs contracted. For , fays he , all the line 44 which you pleafe to conceive from the fftrtebra 44 to the reft of its circumference, both when i 44 is relaxed, and when it is ftretched out and be 44 conies ftifF, are crooked in fome part of them 44 looking towards the Thorax with their convei 44 fide, and towards the Abdomen with their con a cave, Thefe lines thef. lefs they are extended 44 th ( Of the Midriff, \ Dhap. 3. 2 7 5 ,l the more convex they are - whereby the Abdo- 4 men is fo much the larger, and the Thorax the 4 ftraiter : and the more they are confiadted, by' 4 fo much the Surface of the Diaphragm is the 14 lefs convex ; whereby the Thorax is fo much 14 the larger , and the Abdomen the ftraiter. 4 And fo the bottom of the Thorax , ( viz,, the 14 Diaphragm) in infpiradon is more deprefied, 14 but in expiration afcends.] Thus far Steno , to whom ( the often mentioned ) Bartholin af- fents, who fays, 44 that its firft motion is per- 4 formed downwards,which the Lungs following, 4 draw in the Air ^ and by and by it is moved 4 upward, whence the Lungs being comprefied, 4 the Air with the Vapours that are mixt with 14 it are excluded, So that from a convex laxity 4 it comes to plainnefs (in infpiradon ) but is 4 not at all extended. Notwithftanding in ex- 4 piration ( which Diemerbro^ck has well obfer- 4 ved) it is firft of all ftretched as it were with M 4 violence, but it is prefently relaxed again , and 4 by drawing the Ribs together with that tenfi- a; 4 on it begins expiration with fome force , and 4 then the Ribs following it , its tenfion pre- 1 , 14 fently ceafes , and it becomes lax. Which 4 procedure Biemerbroeck illuftrates with a pret- ty and pat fimilitude, when he affirms it to be 4 done in the fame manner as when Bells are rung with long Ropes ^ in which a&ion the ' 4 Rope is firft ftretch’d with violence ^ but be- u caufe the Bell doth prefently follow that vio- 4 lence, hence the Rope forthwith becomes lax, 4 until the Bell being turn’d about to the other ' 4 fide , the Ringer do again ftretch the Rope ; 14 with tie like violence,and draw it back again.! 4t length Bartholin concludes, 44 When the Dia- phragnj is comprefied into the Abdomen ( in 44 infpiration), 276 Of the Breaf. Book II “ infpiration ) the Thorax is elevated, otherwifi “ than others think, who fuppofe the depreffioi “ of the Diaphragm to caufe a depreflion of tb< “ Thorax. But in expiration the Diaphragm be “ ing driven upwards, the Breaft is contracted: “ the Breaft being contracted preffes the include! “ Air, the Air the Surface of the Lungs, tha “the Air may be driven from the FeficuU int< “ the branches of the Trachea , whither as fooi “ as it is come, the rings of the Trachea are con “ traded by the intermediate Fibres, and drivi “forth all the Air; and on this manner dot! “ Refpiration proceed ; all the Ceils of th “ Lungs being filled again by and by in Infpi “ ration. Tie nature jts motion feems to be a kind of mixt motion f us mo ' but rather Animal than Natural ; for though wt move it in our fleep, and fo it may feem natural yet feeing when we awake we can Hop, flacken,oi haften its motion as we pleafe, it feems to be vo luntary or animal. And thus much of the parts containing , now t( the parts contained. CHAP. IV, Of the Pericardium, and ths Humour con rained in it . T H E Parts contained are either Tift era or Fa fa , Bowels or Veftels. Ptricar- The bowels are the Heart and Lungs. But th< Heart being inclofed in a membranous cover called Pericardium , we will firlt treat of it , in tbi Chapter, Chap. 4, Of the Pericardium. 277 It is called Pericardium, becaufe it is placed Its nme ' rip about the Heart. It is called alfo Capfula cordis , the Heart-cafe , and involucrum the Cover, &c. It is membranous, and encompalTeth the whole subftance Heart, whofe lhape it therefore refembles, but a,u ur e ° is larger, both to grant a free motion to the Heart, and to contain its proper liquor. It fprings at the Balls of the Heart from the Origin. outer common Coats ( that are borrowed of the' Pleura ) of thofe VelTels that enter into the Heart. Whence it has five holes according to the num- Holes* ber of VelTels that go in or out of the Heart. As firil one made by the afcending Trunk of the Ca- va, another by the defcending, both which en- ter the right Ventricle of the Heart, from whence there goes out Vena arteriofa into the Lungs, which makes a third hole. A fourth is made by the Arteria venofa entring the left Ventricle of the Heart, and a fifth by the ArUriamagna go- ing out of the fame. Its outlide adheres to the Mediafiinum by many Connexion. Fibres, and is continued to it at the balls of the Heart, where the VelTels perforate it. Its lower end is knit firmly to the centre or nervous part of the Diaphragm, which ( Bartholin fays) is pecu- liar to Men, for in all other Creatures it hangs loofe. It has Veins below from the Phrenic a, above Vcijds. front the Axillares. Its Arteries are fo exceeding fmall, that fome have almoft denied it tc have any : but Dr. Ruyjch fays, “ That in Bodies he had kept above two Years, .he has fhewed “ them as plain as any thing can be feen in the Body, and that there are very few, if any, g membranous parts that are furniiht with great- Of the Breafi. Book II. 278 “ er plenty of Arteries. See his anfwer to Gaubiush fecond Letter, where he delcribes them as derived from four or five feveral Origins, It receives Nerves from the eighth pair ( hereto- fore reckon d for the fixth, ) Dr. Willis fays, 41 It has a great many twigs of Nerves from that &t plexus of the par vagutn that is over againft the “firft or fecond Rib, and that it has fo many foy j “ this reafon, viz.. That feeing it is appointed tl for a defence to the Heart, as often as any “ offenfive matter invades or befets it ( felf ), it “ may be able to contract it felf and fhake off its lt enemy : for it is likely that tremors and inordi- “ nate vibrations of the Heart, which in truth do “ manifeftly differ from its natural Pulfe , do pro- ceed from the violent fuccuflion of this Mem- tc brane. ] Bartholin affirms it to have Lympbe- dutts alfo - 7 which is very probable, that they may abforb part of the liquor contained in it, left it a- bound too much, feeing it receives continual fup- ply : for I am not of opinion that this liquor is fpued out of the Lymphedufts, as Stem thinks,but that they rather imbibe it and convey it to the Duttus thoracicus . It contains in it a ferous liquor , that in health- Its liquor. f u l bodies is a little reddifh, much like water wherein flefn has been wafh’d. It is bred of Va- pours exhaling from the Heart, which are ftopt by this denfe Membrane, and condenfed into hu- mour, Dr. Lower oppofmg this Opinion brings for Argument, that if it were colle&ed this way, becaufe it would be continually a gathering, it would foon encreafe fo much that this Capfula could not hold it. But the abovefaid Lympbe- dutts abforbing what is fuperfluous, waffi away this Objection which if they did not, his own Opinion, 1 . 1 ' Chap. 5. Of the Heart in general. 279 Opinion that it drops out of the Glands feated at the balls of the Heart, would be liable to the fame inconvenience. For fuch diftillation would be as continual as this condenfation is fuppofed to be. Naturally it is not in quantity above two fpoonfuls, ( though it differ much according to the temperament of the Party, the hot having a fmaller, and the cold a larger quantity. ) But in difeafed perfons it is fometimes increafed to half a pound, yea to a whole pound, as Diemerbroeck has oft obferved. This is that liquor that is fup- pofed to have flown from the Side of our Saviour when the Souldier pierced it with a Spear, for faith the Text ( John 19.34.) There came forth blood and miter. Sometimes Worms have been obferved to breed within this bag, and fuch per- fons, when they were alive, have been fubjedt to palpitation of the Heart, and fwoonings. The Pericardium is fome fort of fence to the Their vfes. Heart, but it feems to be chiefly made for the fake of the liquor it contains, which ferves for the moiftening of the Heart, and making its Superficies flippery, that it may move more glibly. CHAP. V. Of the Heart , in general , and of the reajon of its motion. T H E Heart ( in Latin Cor, in Greek **f?, or The Heart. yJa<> a xsa®, to burn , becaufo it is the iource of vital heat ) is the principal Bowel of the whole Body, which no perfedt Animal ooes want, nor can long furvive its Wounds. Vital fpirit and na- tural 280 Of the Breaf. Book II, Its fltui- tion. tural heat are communicated from it to all the parts of the Body, though they are not fo much owing to its fubkance as to the ebullition or ac- cenfion of the Blood and Chyle in it •, as (hall be difcourfed hereafter. It is feated in the middle of the Break, encom- pafied with the Pericardium and Mcdiafiimm , its lower tip or Mucro bending a little to the left fide. Neither its Mucro nor fides are knit to any place, but it hangs loofe in its Cafe , only fuf- pended by the Veirds that go in and out of its upper part or balls, to which the Pericardium ad- heres. Its fituation in Beaks that feed upon Grafs is near the middle of the whole body, reckoning from the Head to the Tail • but in Man ( and mok carnivorous Animals which ge- nerally have Ihorter Necks than others ) it is nearer the Head ; whereof the learned Dr. Lower gives an ingenious reafon. u Seeing, fays kg the 44 trajcftion and dikribtition of the blood de- 44 pends wholly on the Syfiole of the Heart , and 44 that its liquor is not driven of its own nature 44 fo readily into the upper parts as into Velfels 44 eaven with it, or downwards intothofe under it ; 44 if the fituation of the Heart had been further 41 from the Head, it muk needs either have been 44 made kronger to cak out its liquor with grea- 44 ter force • or elfe the Head would want its 44 due proportion of blood. But in Animals that 44 have a longer Neck, and which is extended 44 towards their Food as it were , the Heart is 44 feated as far from the Head as from the other 44 parts • and they find no inconvenience from 44 it, becaufe they feed with their Head for the 44 mok part hanging down, and fo the blood , as 44 it has farther to go to their Head than in others, f lb it goes a plainer and often a keep way. It Chap. 5. Of the Heart in general. 281 It has a firm , thick , denfe fubjlance , thinner Subfiance. md fbfter in the right fide , thicker and more lenfe in the left, but moil compact and hard at ts tip • only on the left fide of the tip it is thin, is confifting moftly of the concourfe of the inner md outer Membrane. Its Parenchyma is for the ;reateft part made up of mufculary Fibres , fo hat it felf may truly be reputed a Mufcle. Its Fibres are a few of them ftreight , but far Fibres. nore oblique. Both are inferted into a Tendon hat is fpread over its bails under the Auricles. 'art of which Tendon at the egrefs of the Aorta 1 fome Creatures becomes bony,as in a Stag, &c. )n the outer Superficies of the right Ventricle here run a few [lender Fibres ilreigjit upwards, nd are terminated in its bafis. In which alfo srminate the oblique ones next under thefe , a- :ending from the left fide towards the right, airal-wife. The Fibres that lye under thefe, old a clean contrary courfe. For they arife vrery where from the right fide of the Heart, 'hence being carried obliquely towards the left, ad having embraced each Ventricle of the Heart, tey afcend to the bafis of the left fide fpiral-wife > the other. But they run not all of them the hole length from the bafis to the cone } for then ould the Heart be as broad or thick at the lower ad as the upper : but fome reach not above half ay, others a little further, &c. and fome to the sry Apex. The Fibres of the left Ventricle iffer not from thofe of the right as to kind, only ley are confiderably ftronger. Which they are •r this reafon, that whereas the right Ventricle aly promotes the circulation of the blood irough the Lungs, the left mull: call; it forth ith that force as that it may circulate through le whole Body. The 2 $: Of the Brea(l. Book Ii The curious Reader may find a moft accurate defcription of thefe Fibres in Dr. Lower's Trea tile de Corde , whither I refer him ^ for , to inuf too long bn fuch minute fimilar parts, would no be fuitable to this Epitome of Anatomy. Thougl by a view of thofe Figures that I have borrows of Him, their ftrudture may be pretty plainl; apprehended. figure. Its fhape is like a Boy’s Top (Tave that it i fiattilh behind) or a Pyramid turn’d topfie tur vy • whence it is divided into its bafis , which i its broader part and upper 5 and into its cone 0 ape: x, or narrower and lower part ^ which end in a tip or macro. Beliefs. it is bigger in Men than in other Creatures coniidenng the proportion of their bodies. I is lefier but more denfe in hot and bold men, tha in the cold and cowardly. In adult perfons it i commonly fix fingers breadth long, and fou broad at the bafis. coat. Outwardly it is covered with a proper Coa which is thin, but ftrong and denfe , and ver] hard to feparate from it • it is the fame with thi outer Coat of the great Artery , as that whid cloaths the Ventricles on the inlide is continuec unto and common with that thin skin that cover: the imide of the Arteries like a Cuticula : and hence ’tis likely (fays Diemerbroeck ) that thf| Arteries borrow thefe Coats of the Heart, as th< Nerves borrow their two Tunicles from the Pic and Dura mater of the Brain. Upon this Menr brane that invefts the Heart, there grows fom( fiard fat about the bafis, which ferves to moifter *t. , . YejjiU. It is not nourifhed by the blood or chyle tha! are received into its Ventricles, but by Vefief running through its Parenchyma, it ,'hap. 5. Of the Heart in general. Its Arteries are two, fpringing out of the A- Arteries \rta before it pafs out of the Pericardium , and re called Coronaria , becaufe their Trunks do not refently enter into the Parenchyma of the Heart, ut fetching a circuit on its furface the better to ranch out themfelves towards its cone, they en- )mpafs its balls like a Diadem. And though at leir rife they turn one on one fide and t’other a the other of the Heart, yet at their ends they fo run into right leet again and inofculate one with the other iat if one inject any liquor into one, it will to the other. It has alio two Veins called Cpronarire , which Veins; acompafs its balls in like manner, and comrau- :cace one with the other. Thefe receive and tfry back the Arterial blood that remains from V le nutrition of the Heart , and refund it I'i'le Cava juft at its entrance into the bntricle. Its Nerves do arife chiefly from the Plexus car - Nerve:; f ucus of the par vagum or eighth pair , into uich plexus many twigs do enter from the I n- Ircoftal. But a little below this plexus after recurrent Nerve has parted from the Trunk c the par vagum , the par vagum fends forth on :h fide a notable branch : which being carried tvards the Heart, and creeping along its balls thind, meet one another, and in all their pro- ofs fend forth twigs through the whole Surface cthe Heart, efpecialiy on its backfide : as thofe t inches which proceed from the plexus cardia - , are difperfed chiefly on its forefide^ as Dr; Hii affirmetho “1 -'ll ii Greaf 2§4 Book ] Of the Breafl. The caufe Great controveriie hath been and ftill is abc of the mn- the motion of the Heart, whether it depend on t twnof ^influx of the animal fpirits, or on the accenii and dilatation of the blood in its Ventricles, partly on one, partly on the other. Plaiifi! Arguments are produced on every fide, but ft as rather tend to ihew the fhortnefs and infuffi ency of the contrary Opinions to folve this Pi nomenon , than pretend to demonftrate any c tain reafon of it. That the immediate Inft: ments of its motion are its Fibres , none < doubt •, but what fets thefe Fibres on work is the queltion. That it cannot be the Animal S rits conveyed by the Nerves ( only ) is appare, firft, becaufe the Heart moves in the Embryo ! ■ fore either Brain or Nerve are fo perfectly f<| med, that the Animal Spirits can be elaborail out of the blood by the former, or tfanfmitiS to the Heart by the latter : yea feeing they , made of Arterial blood, that muft be lent to J Brain by the pulfation of the Heart before tl f can be generated. And fecondly , bedaufe \ Heart of living Foetus ’ s ( as of young Puppie and of Eels, being cut out of the Body and fr|; all the Nerves by which any Animal Spii s fhould how into it, will continue beating as lc as ’tis warm : yea when it has ceas’d beating, 1 : one throw warm blood or but warm water up it, it will recover fome kind of pulfation ags 1 Which may ferve alfo to convift the fecond 0 nion of Errour ^ for if its motion depended o|j on the dilatation or rarefaction of the blood, would ceafe as foon as the blood flows no Ion; into its Ventricles. I! And for a further confutation of the feed Opinion, which fuppofes the accenfion ( and c feqn'i 'hap. 5. Of the motion of the Heart. quent dilatation ) of the blood as the caufe of iiis pulfation , Dr. Lower's Experiment, or his bfervation feem argumentative beyond con- adi&ion. His Experiment is this : “ He drew 1 out of the Jugular vein of a Dog about half of his blood away, injefting by turns into the ! Crural vein a like quantity of Beer mixt with a little Wine •, and this he repeated alterna- tively fo often, till inftead of Blood there flow’d out of the Vein only a paler tincture .‘like water wherein Flefh had been wafli’d, or llaret diluted with very much water ; and yet t! :he Heart in the mean time remitted but a lit- le of its former pulfation. .... His Obfer- he had from a Phyiician worthy ocredit, is this : “ A Youth about fixteen years continuing bleeding for two days toge- , his Friends and thofe that waited on jii “lini, gave him good ftore of Broth to keep “ipand recruit his Spirits ^ which hefwallowing down greedily, his bleeding was now and then ‘ncreas’d thereby , fo that at length having ‘ oured forth almolt the whole mafs of his f-lood, that which now run out was dilute and 1 ale, neither of the nature nor colour of blood, ‘ ut liker the Broth he had drunk fo much of : 1 id this kind of flux continued a day or two. the Heart the mean-while retaining its pul- 1 ition ) till at length being ftoptq the Youth as reftored by degrees to entire health, and ' rew to a robuft and iufty Fellow. 1 This Ex- it ment and Obfervation, I fay, do make it ap- amt, the motion of the Heart depends not on h accenflon and dilatation of the blood, for h i when in the firft the Beer and Wine, in the *.nd the. Broth, flow’d into its Ventricles in d of blood, its motion mu ft either have been tt 2 more 286 Of the Bredjl. Book I more notably alter’d, or rather have quite ceas’i thefe liquors being fo far didant from the natu' of blood, efpecially the Broth. And laftly, that this motion is not cauft partly by the influx of the Animal Spirits, ar partly by the accenlion and rarefaction of t! blood, may be evinced by the Arguments pr duced againft each Opinion apart : and yet if Reafon could be given, this feems the molt pr bablc. Namely, that the blood diddling in the Ventricles of the Heart, is in them accend and rarefied, fo that requiring a larger fpace, bears againd their Sides : whereby the Heart t ing molefted, it calls in the Animal Spirits i help, which coming in in convenient plenty cc: trad its mufcular Fibres, and fo by ftraitning Ventricles drive forth the blood contained them into the Arteries. But we had rather ij genuoufly confefs our ignorance of the reafon fo admirable an adion, and profefs with I Lower , that it is too hard for Man to conceive (|i, and that it is the Prerogative of God only, wm fearchetb the fecrets of the Hearty to know the re fon of its motion alfo. C HAP. VI. Of the Pulfe , and the circulation of the Blood , Ik Pulfe* *~jP H E motion of the Heart is called in Gr -i n , in Latin Vnljus , pulfe or beatij And this is performed by Diajlole , or Dilatatii in which it receives blood into its Ventricles - 7 1 m ,'hap . 6 . Of the Pulfe andcircul. of the Blood. 287 .ftole, or Contraction, by which it expels it out : them. Contra&ion being the proper motion of a syftole ufcle, the Syftole is the proper motion of the^iDia- eart • and the Diaftole is but a ceaiing or refti- ftole. itionfvom that motion. For in the Diaftole e Fibres of the Heart are relaxed, during which 1 e blood diftils downintoits Ventricles out of le Auricles ^ whereby when they are filed and i fome meafure diftended, the Fibres both Teight and oblique begin to contract themfeives, d comprefs or It raiten the Cavities of the Ven- ticles, not only by conlhinging their fides, but itj.fo by drawing up the cone or tip of the Heart rarer its balls, whereby their Cavity is fliortned, ijM that the blood is expelled with force out of" oltem into the Arteries ; which motion is called le Syftole. But why the Heart fliould keep fuch 3 1 . ted turns cf Syftole and Diaftole , and continue tern for ( it may be ) fourfeore years together, tit ( as we faid above J we cannot conceive it, lie reafon of, but admire the Wifdom and Power t the Creatour, in beginning and continuing l:h a motion. At the fame time as the Heart beats, there is ivktb,- t pulfation of all the Arteries to be felt in the the /w//V ctream parts of the Body. Whence may arife tton °f ! ' ; ’ slifpute, whether the Arteries he not alfo en- r ed with a ptiififick faculty. I in.cline to the ne- fholiy on >tive, and think their pulfation is meerly paf -that of 0: ■ le, and that as for other reafons, fo upon the D:r- irount of thefe two Experiments, viz,. 1. That i an Artery he cut in funder, and a Pipe be put i:o each end of the divided Artery, whereby ce blood may be conveyed out of one into the >'her , the pulfation will continue beyond the Ipe, as well as on that fide next the Heart. 11 3 And 288 Of the Breafl. Book I] And, 2 . That in transfufion of blood out of on Animal into another, though the blood be re ceived into a Vein, yet that Vein will have a pii fation anfwering to that of the Artery in tl other Animal whence the blood ilTueth. So tin the pul fation of the Artery feems wholly owin to the repeated impetus of the blood poured ini it out of the Heart in each Syflolc. fhecireu- Now feeing by the continual reciprocation! tmm of the Pulfe there is a conftant expulfion of bloo the blood, from the Heart into the Arteries, and as cont mial an influx of blood into it out of the Cava and feeing the Cava from whence the fupply i is never drawn dry, nor on the other hand, tl Arteries that receive trie blood continually fro the Heart, unduly fwell’d with it it neceflaril follows, that this motion proceeds circularly, vi; that the blood is continually driven out of tl Heart into the Arteries, out of thefe into tl parts to be nourished • from whence it is refoi bed by the Capillary Veins , which condud back through the larger into the Cava, and 1 at length it returns to the Heart again. The ii v r ention of which Circulation is owing to oi Countryman 'Dr. Harvey , and may be prove undeniably by thefe reafons, i. The great quantity of blood that is drive out of the Heart into the Arteries at every Fulf For though the Ancients who knew not this Cii culation, imagin’d that only a drop or two w expelled by every Syflole , which they were m teffitated to fuppofe,' to avoid the great differ fion that the Arteries muft be liable to, if at confidcrable quantity ilfued into them \ yet it Cei tain and demonftrable that there muft neec an Ounce or more be driven into them eac time. For ( taking it for granted that there i •• i ; • , l Tap. 6. Of the Pulfe and circul. of the Blood. 289 .0 other way for any liquor to pafs from the tomach to the Kidneys but through the Heart, long with the blood ) feeing if fome Men at :>me times drink three Pints of Drink, they fhali ifs it out again in half an hour , yea more of 1 'unbridge Waters in that fpace ; and feeing fe- ondly, that there is commonly as much blood 5 Serum that flows to the Kidneys ( the blood eturning back by the Emulgent Veins ) it is [ear that by the two Emulgents ( which are one of the larged: Arteries) there mult pafs in alf an hours time fix pounds of liquor, all which lull come from the Heart •, and how much more len may we conceive to be driven through all le other Arteries that run through the whole ody ? This is more accurately evinced by Dr. .oner’s Experiment , which is this : u i cut a- funder (fayshe ) both the Cervical Arteries in a large Dog , and at the fame time through an hole made in the left lide of his Bread: over a- gainlt the Heart, I conipreft the Trunk of the Aorta below the Heart with my Finger, to hin- der any blood from defcending by it ; and lad- ly, I took care alfo to draiten the Brachial Ar- teries under the Axillee , by which means al= molt all the blood was driven out of the Heart through the Cervicals ( beftdes that which was fent into the rertebrals') and which is wonder- ful to be related, within the twentieth part of an hour the whole inafs ilTued out fo that it is not to be denied but that it all pall through the Heart in that fpace.d And though it may e granted that arnidlt fuch wounds and tortures te Heart does beat fomewhat quicker than at ther times- yet the fame thing is partly evi- ent from wounds in the ■ Limbs when fome no- able Artery is cut afunder, for ' U 4. ’ds derange in tlQVt yo Of the Breajt. Book II how fmall a time a Man will bleed to death evei atthatone Artery. Yea we may give a grea guefs how much blood is fent out at every Pulfe even from the ordinary opening of one Vein ij the Arm , from whence a notable quantity o blood will ifTue in a (hort time ; how much thei may we fuppofe would flow out of all the Veins if they were opened at one time ? Seeing thei Yis evident that fo great a quantity of blood i expelled out of the Heart at every Syjlole , ant that for a!) that the Arteries are not unduly di flended nor any part fweird by it , neither ye the Cava and other Veins emptied , ’tis certaii that the blood that is driven into the Arterie flows back to the Heart by the Veins , in a con ftant circulation. 2. A fecond Argument to prove it , may b taken from the Valves in the Veins, which are f< framed that blood may freely flow through then out of the lelier Veins into the greater, ( and ft into the Cava ) but not on the contrary out o the greater into the lefs. Yea if one blow intc the Cava through a Pipe, there will no wind pal into the fmaller Veins; but on the contrary , i you blow up the lelier Veins , the wind will rea- dily pat's to the larger, and fo to the Cava. 3: And laftly. The fame thing is mold clear b} the Ligature in Blood-letting. For whether yoi let hfaod in the Arm or Foot, you always tye tin Fillet above where you intend to make the ori- fice , and then' the Vein below the Ligature wil prefently fill and grow tumid, but above, it wi! fail and aimofc difappear. Which mufl needs b( from thence , for that the blood being d- ivei along the Arteries towards the extreme parts returns by the Veins and afeends upwards, wbicl coming to the Ligature and being flopt there fwell 2hap .6. Of the Pulfe and circul. of the Blood. §91 Weils the Vein below the Ligature , and fpurts >ut as Toon as the orifice is made : but when the 'illet is loofed again, the blood flows no longer >ut thereat , but holds on its wonted chanel , the fein, and the orifice clofes up again. Having fufficiently demonftrated the Circulat- ion of the Blood, we will ftew two things fur- her } fir ft, how the blood pafles out of the Ar* eries into the Veins, and fecondly , in how long a ime the whole mafs of blood may be fuppofed 0 pafs through the Heart in its ordinary £ir- ulation. As to the firft , it was the Opinion of Rlolanus Ho-m the hat the blood circulated only through the larger Mood pages ^eflels, by anaflomofis or inofculation of the e r eins with the Arteries and that that which run f lt0 ito the fmaller, was all fpent on the nutrition of veins. ai he parts. But it is clear that there mult be a irculation even in the fmallelt , from the great m uantity of blood that will flow out of the lealt CE irtery in the Hand or Foot , when it is cut - fhich it were very abfurd to imagine to be all E i pent on the nourilhment of the refpe&ive part. low there are but two ways whereby the blood ■ I: an be fuppofed to pafs out of the Arterici into he Veins, viz., either by the former’s being ten- Inued to or opening into the latter by inofeu- ition, orelfeby the Capillary Arteries letting ut their blood into the pores of the fubftance of he parts, on whole nutrition partis fpent, and he remainder imbibed by the gaping mouths of he Capillary Veins. That it is neceflary to ad- lie v. this latter way, is evident, becaufe if part f 1 rterial blood did not iilue into the fub- iancc <. f the parts, they could not be nourilhed By it • fc-r while it is in the VelTels, it may add ; Jfarmch indeed ro the parts thro’ which it flows. 292 Of the Breafl. Book II. bat cannot nounfli them , feeing even the Vefiel: thernfelves are not nourished by that ftteam ol blood' that glides along their Cavity, but by Ca- pillaries running through their Coats and if tfcdj blood be driven into the fubftance of the parts, and that in a greater quantity than fu dices for their nourifhment , ( as was juft now (hewn that it- Is 5 ) what is faperfluous mull needs enter the mouths of the Capillary Veins , from which ii goes forward to the larger, and fo' to the Heart But feeing this way of transfofing the blooc through the fubftance of the parts has feemed te fome not to anfwer to that hafty circulation of ii we above demonftrated ; they have thought i necelfary alfo to admit of the former way, namely anaftomofes, by which the Veins are continuer to the Arteries, and that not only in their lar- ger branches (as that notable one of the Sple nick Artery with the Splenick Vein ) but alfc in their fmaller twigs in the extreme parts- Bui we fouft confider, that in a living body the fo- lia parts are infinitely more porous and perme- able than in a dead - fo that though the Anato- miff find their fubffance fo denfe and clofe, as tc make it feem almoft impoffible they fhould per- mit fofouick a pafl age to the blood through them yet he'foould rather believe it, than fuppofe fuel anaftornofes as he cannot di leaver, ( though ii were not difficult to find them out if they had ar exiftence.) For abating that fingle one of tht Splenick Artery with the Ramus Splenicus of tin JRorta % (and perhaps fome of the Arteria with th< Vena pulmonaris in the Lungs) none of the latefl moft accurate Anatorniffs have been able to fine out any. And as for that mentioned, it feem rather to be of an Artery with an Artery ( fuel as are frequent in feveral parts of the body, as an alf( Chap.6. Of the Pu/fe and circul. of the Blood. 293 alfo of one Vein with another ) than of an Ar- tery with a Vein ■, for the Porta from which this Ramus is propagated, is generally reputed rather an Artery than a Vein, for the reafons alledged in Chap. 1 2. of Book I. where we defcribed this Veflel. And fecondly , as to the fpace of time in which In what the whole mafs of blood may ordinarily circulate fp/ ce °f through the Heart , it is probably much fhorter than many have imagined. For fuppofing that the Heart makes two thoufand pulfes an hour, -J 'which is the leaft number any fpeak of, and 10 j bme have told twice as many) and that at every -i; ruife there is expelled an Ounce of blood ( which 15f ve may well fuppofe, feeing the Ventricles are vide enough to contain tvvo Ounces , and that it s probable, both that they are filled near full in , 5 he Diaftok , and that they are near if not quite emptied by the ftrong conftridion of the Heart n the Syfiole ) feeing the whole mafs ufually ex- :eeds not four and twenty pound, it will be em- ulated fix or feven times over through the deart in the fpace of an hour. And by fo much he oftner , by how much the blood comes Ihcrt )f the fuppofed quantity, or the pulfe either na- urally, or by a Fever, ipirituous liquors , or vi~ )lent motion is rendred more frequent. By vhich quick motion the blood it felf is kept from :oagulation and putrefaction , and the parts are :herilhed with vital heat, which heat of the parts s much according to the flownefs or rapidnefs )f the circulation : fo when' we lit dill, and the mile is flow or rare , we grow cold • but wher 4 ipon running or any violent exercife the pulfe )ecomes more frequent and quick , we become hot, ' ' - ! ■ CHAR 294 Of the Breafi. Book II. C H A P. VII. How Blood, is made of Chyle , of its Heat and Colour^ and whether the Body be notmjhed by it. \ A ccording to Dr. Harvey' s Obfervations, there appears in an Embryo a punffum f 'ali- ens , or red beating fpeck , which is Blood , be- fore any the leaft Lineament of the Heart. So that whatever Inftrument of Sanguification the Heart may appear to be afterwards , it contri- butes nothing to the making of the firlt blood • but it feems rather to be made for the blood’s fake , to tranfmit it to all the parts of the Em- bryo or Foetus , than the blood to be made by it. But it muft be confelt that things proceed in the grown Foetus far otherwife than they do in the firft formation. For the parts of an Embryo are nourifhed and encreafed before it hath a Stomach to concoft any thing, and yet in a perfect Foetus none can deny that the Stomach does concod and prepare nourilhment for it : fo it moves be- fore the Brain is formed fo perfedly as to be able to elaborate Animal Spirits j and yet after it is perfe&ed, every one knows that the Brain does elaborate foch Spirits, as being fent into all the parts of the Body by the Nerves, enable them to move. In like manner though there be blood in the Embryo before the Heart be formed , yet after it is perfected, nothing will hinder hut it may at leaft contribute fomething to Sanguifi- cation. We will fuppofe then , that as all the other parts are formed by the Fvs plajtica or generative faculty Chap. 7. Horv Blood is made of Chyle. 295 faculty of the (firft) vegetative and (then) ani- mal Soul, feated in the Ovum , and receive their firft encreafe by the affimilation of the colliqua- mentum • but as foon as they are perfe&ed , and the Fcetm excluded, are nourilhed by the blood : fo the blood it felf being at firft made in like manner, as foon as the Veins, Heart and Arteries are completed fo as it can circulate by them, may, not improperly , be faid to be nourilhed by the Chyle or nutritious juice , the Heart affifting the alfimilation of the one into the other. And this is done in this manner. The Chyle afcending now chyle jo by the Duftus thoracicus (as was defcribed , Book i? turned util. Chap. 10.) and flowing into the Subclavian wobloodi Vein together with the returning venal blood, is ± poured by the Vena cava into the right Auricle, e H and fo into the right ventricle of the Heart in its Diajlole or Relaxation \ then by its Syficle or jo? Contraction it is driven out from thence into ia • the Lungs, from whence it afcends again into the left Auricle firft, and then into the left Ventricle on of the Heart, out of which it is expelled through fa the Aorta , and palling along with the blood on; through the Arteries of the whole body , returns r f ;j again with it by the Veins to the Heart. For it undergoes many circulations before it can be afli- milated to the blood. Which is evident , both becaufe it is the Chyle (but little alter’d) that is feparated in the Placenta uteri for the nourifh- ment of the Foetus , and in the Breafts for the In- fant to fuck, in the form of Milk ■ and alfo from hence, that if one be let blood four or five hours for later) after a full Meal, there will a great quantity of the milky Chyle it felf fwim a-top the coagulated blood. But every time the new in- fufed Chyle paffes through the Heart with the blood, the particles of the one are more intimate- ly Of the Breafi. 296 Of the Breafi. Book II ly mixed with thofe of the other in its Ventri- cles, and the vital Spirit and other adive princi- ples of the blood work upon the Chyle ^ which being full of fait, fulphur and fpirit, as foon as its Compares is loofened by its fermentation with the blood in the Ventricles of the Heart (efpe- cially, but alfo in the Arteries) the principles having obtained the liberty of motion do readi- ly aflociate themfelves ^ and are affimilated with fuch parts of the blood as are of a like and fuit- able nature ^ fo that at length all the mafs of Chyle that is capable of being turned into and what is not , is blood , is fanguified vacuated by Urine or Stool , or other proper Emhndory. Bow the It is a very difficult queftion , by what means blood, be - the blood acquires its beat. In order to the re- tomes hot. f 0 i u tion whereof it will be neceflary to conlider how many ways a liquid body is capable of being heated , and thofe ( according to Dr. WiUvs ) are three. “ Firft , by fetting it to fomething that is “ hot • fo Water is made hot by being fet on the u Fire, or in the Sun, or a Stove, or by dilfolving Lime in it. Secondly , when Saline Corrofives, “ w hich are of a contrary nature , being inixt u with one another, or with fulphureous, ad one on another, and by the great ftrugling and agi- 111 ration of their particles do often excite heat, 41 yea fometime frnoke and burning .• as when st fpirit and butter of Antimony , or when aqua ^ ft y and Oyl of Turpentine are mixed toge- 4t ther ’■ alfo when corrohve liquors eat into me- u tallick bodies, they often grow hot. Thirdly , c ‘ (which is the only way befides that a liquid' st grows hot) when fome humour abounding with 41 fulphur or much fpirit is fet oh fire by, holding 297 Chap. 7. How the Blood becomes hot. “ a flame to it, and fo grows hot by deflagration, “ as Brandy, &c. There are other ways indeed “ of calefadion, as fermentation^ putrefaction^ and 11 attrition , whereby thicker or [olid bodies ofcen “grow hot, but in liquid they produce no fuch 11 effect. Thus Leaven becomes (Tomewhatj hot “ by fermentation , and Dung or wet Hay by pu- M trefatiion ; but neither way Will a liquid body “ wax hot : for though Wine, Cider , &c. fer- “ ment fo much as to burft the Tides of the Hcgs- “ head, yet they are not actually hot ^ nor will u blood become fo , when it is let out of the bo- u dy, difpofe it how you will in fit Glafies to fer- “ ment or putrefie. Indeed the blood within the w body is fermented, and is thereby depurated, “ but it is not heated by fucii fermentation, as “ neither is any other liquid. Neither does the “ heating by attrition agree to it • for though fo- u lid bodies are heated by being rubb’d one a- “ gainft another • yet fliake and agitate Liquids K as much as you will , they (hall be never the u warmer for it. Therefore feeing there ate lt only thofe three ways firft: mentioned whereby “aftual heat can be produced in any Liquors, “ let us fee to which of them the incalefcence of u the blood ought to be aferibed. “ Firft , both the Ancients and fome Moderns lt are of opinion, that the blood is heated the firffc “way, viz., by theadmotion of fomething that “ is hot. Thus the former have taught that the “ innate heat , and the latter that the vital fame is “ lodged in the Heart, and heats the blood as it u pafles through it : But both thefe Opinions fall “ to the ground, fince it is dear that the Heart “is a mere mufcle, and contains no fit fewel for |“ perpetuating a flame , or I know not what im- “ planted 298 Of the Breaft. Book II 44 planted heat : For though it mull be acknow 44 (edged that the circulation of the blood de 44 pends on the continual motion of this bowel “ yet the Heart derives its heat wholly from th 44 bloody and not the blood its from the Heart. 44 Secondly , this heat cannot be caufed in th 44 blood the fecond way, becaufe its liquor in 44 natural ftate i9 always homogeneous ; am 44 though it abound with fait, yet that is odI; 44 volatile, mild and benign. Nor can any on 44 difcover either in the Heart , or in any othe 44 focus a faline or otherwife heterogeneous mine 44 ral, by a&ing whereupon or corroding whereo 44 the fanguineous liquor fhould conceive heat.— 44 Thirdly, as to the third way, whereby liquid 44 grow hot, though it feem an hard faying, tha 4f the blood vs accended ■, yet feeing we can attri 44 bute its incalefcence to no other caufe * wh’ 11 fhould we not impute it to this ? efpecialh 44 feeing the proper paffions of fire and flame agree 44 to the life of the blood. 44 For the chief and molt elfential Requifites tc 44 continue a flame are thefe three , firjl , that ; 44 free and continual accefs of air be granted tc 44 it as foon as it is kindled ; fecondly , that it en 44 joy a conftant fulphureous pabulum o'r fewel 44 and thirdly , that it be ventilated , whereby a: 44 well its fuliginous, as thicker recrements maj 44 be continually amanded from it : And feeing 44 thefe agree to the vital flame as well as to ar 44 elementary, it feems very rational to affirrr 44 that life it felfis a kind of flame.'] Thus far that learned Author, whom the Latin Reader will dc well to confult difcourCng further art this fub jed, in his Exercit. triidico-pbyficd defdng. incdlef eentia five acGenfionei Chap. 7. How the Blood becomes hot. 299 * Dr. Henfhavo thinks that w the dfliimilitude of :t parts between the Chyle and Blood is fo great, 1 that it becomes immediately the caufe of an ex- 1 traordinary ebullition upon their mixture toge- 1 ther ^ which is very much encreafed by the re- ‘ ciprocal motion of the Lungs , whereby the 1 blood is wrought almolt into a froth or foam c by that time ic gets into the left Ventricle of 1 the Heart. Which fudden excefs of heat,is not 1 unlike what happens upon the mingling feveral 1 Chymical liquors together,as fpirit of Wine and 1 fpirit of Turpentine^ and other fuch like, where ; the heat becomes fo great, that it often endan- ' gers the VelTels they are contained in. He af- rms ( contrary to Dr. Willis , and I think to he truth ) that “ new Wine or Mult while it ; ferments, is hot •, and that if juice newly pref- fed out of the Grapes were added to it as it begins to cool, it would again renew its ebul- lition, and its warmth w r ould be continued 1c long as one Ihould perfift to do fo : In like manner he thinks is the warmth in the blood continued by the new affufion of Chyle, which renews its fermentation, and confequently in- vigorates its heat. Diemerbroech is of opinion, that “ the vital fpi- rit (by which he underltands the more fubtiie part of the blood ) while through its great volatility it always endeavours to flie away, does continually agitate the other thicker par- ticles of the blood, with which it is intangled and detained from .flight, and is diverlly vibra- ted by them, and beat back ■, and fo the whole mafs being kept in a continual fermentative motion, there is produced in it an heat , which in a great agitation is great, in a mean , mean, and in a final], 1 final!. , X' I might 3 oo Book] Of the Breajl. I might cite other Opinions concerning t reafbn of this beat , but they generally fall in wi fome of thefe mentioned : of which I fliali n make my felf an Umpire, but think that Dr. W Ivs has faid enough in his above-cited Exercit tion, to evince that it is not caufed either thefe later ways ^ viz., by fermentation , or 1 agitation of the particles of the blood in the ma ner Diemerbroeck defcribes it ^ and whether t accenlion of the blood be a more probable reali of it, let the Reader judge. The colour Why the Blood fliould be of a red colour rath of the blood, than any other, no fatisfaftory reafon (I thin can be given, but the Will of the Creatour,thou fome attribute it to the Heart,others to the mi ture of ialt and fubacid juices with fulphureoi" becaufe from filch a mixture there refults a r colour , as appears in the diftillation of Sal nitt l (which contains many fulphureous particles it • ) or by the pouring Oil of Vitriol upon Co ferve of Rofes, or other thing that is of a pal' red, ( if it contain any thing of fulphur ) for will be thereby made of a moil; deep red. We w not fpend time to fhew in how many refpei thefe Inftances differ from the Phenomenon und conlideration , but lhall content our felves wi inquiring from whence the difference of colo ariles between the Venal and Arterial Bloo Every one knows that when blood is let out of. Vein into a Porringer, the coagulum is of aflor fcarlet colour in its furface , but of a dark rj, from the fuperficies to the bottom, and of fu i a colour it appears as it ftreams out of the oi fee of the Vein. But if an Artery be cut , t': fheam then looks of a far brighter colour , li: the fuperficies of the Venal blood when it is co. hap. 7. Of the Colour of the Blood. 301 jilated in a Porringer. Now the Arterial blood iceives not this florid colour in the Heart . but i the Lungs. For if it receiv’d it in the Heart, ten might the right Ventricle be fuppofed to £/e it as well as the left : but that it does not c fo, is clear by this Experiment of Dr. Lower's. Iyou open the Cena arteriofa which receives the bod out of the right Ventricle, the blood dif- f's nothing in colour from the Venal, but its crdled part looks every whit as black. But if ce open the Arteria venofa as it is entring into II; lefc Ventricle , it has the perfeft colour of terial blood ^ which Ihews, that as it ows not it colour to the left Ventricle any more than : the right, ( being not yet arriv’d at it) fo it nit receive that alteration of colour in the Lugs, in which the nitrous air being diffufed tough all the particles of the blood is intimate- i' mixed with it , and ( if you will ) accends it. F • if there be any fuch thing as a Flamma vita- (properly fo called ) in Animals , though the Hod (or Chyle rather ) be to it in Head of the L or other matter whereon it feeds, yet it o w- ei the continuance of its burning to the Air, •v.hout the continued infpiration of which the A imal cannot live, but inftantly dies, even as a lidle is prefently extinguifhed if you put it uiclofe place where the air cannot come to it, 3 ay fome Engine be fuckt from it. But this ) the bye. For I mult confefs that ( how plau- i e foever this Opinion may feem on other ac- ;dy fome flick in thefe , and others in thofe, tere they are faften’d and united to the fub- nce of the refpe£tive parts ^ and thofe which rough their peculiar figure are unapt to adhere one or other, return again to the Veins and fo the Heart, where they receive fome new alte- r:ion. So that as the life of the FUJI) is in the ood ( according to Levit. 17. 1 1 . ) fo has it its ; pa 1 heat and nourifhment. from it alfo. CHAP. VIII. r the parts of the Heart , viz. the Auriculae, the Ventricles , and the Septum that divi- de th them. 'TAving treated of the Heart in general, and JL of its Atfion, <&c. we now conie to difc Luricles, and out of which it expels it into the irteria pulmonaris and Aorta. They are not al- ogether like one another •, for the right is wi- er, and in lhape almoft femicircular, nor reach- th it down to the Mucro or tip of the Heart - whereas the left is almoft round , and reacheth iown to the very tip. Now 7 though the outfide f the Heart be fmooth, yet thefe Ventricles are 'ery unequal, having their Tides hollowed into ivers Interftices or Furrows , and interwoven vith carnous Fibres reaching this way and that /ay. They are more numerous in Men’s Hearts, han in thole of any other Animal ^ though inch s are big, as Horfes and the like, have them lar- ;er. Thefe Fibres or flelhy Columns ferve to traiten or conftringe the Ventricles , and the lefts or furrows betwixt them help their fides o clofe more exadly in their Syfiole than they ould have done , had they been fmooth. The : ibres are more and ftronger, and the furrows leeper in the left Ventricle than in the right, fea they are alfo in that fide of the Septum that X 4 ~ makes Of the Breafk. Book II. 1 06 makes part of the left, though that fide that look: to the right be well-nigh fmooth. For then was need of greater and ftronger conftri&ion it the left than in the right •, feeing the right ex pels the blood to no greater circuit than through the Lungs, but the left to the extreraefl: parts d the Body. Septum. They are divided front one another by thi Septum , which is a carnous and denfe partitioi that frauds like a Wall betwixt them. It is hoi low towards the left Ventricle , and ( as was juf now faid) has finch like Fibres and Clefts , as th reft of the Cavity ^ but towards the right it i| convex or bunching out,' and has but very litth inequality. Many have been of Opinion that i has fiome wider pores through which part of th blood does pafs immediately out of the right inti the left Ventricle but he that fearches for then diligently will find none, unlefs he firft mak< them with his Probe. And indeed if there wen any in grown perfons, we may much more fup- pofe them to be in Foetus ’ s in the Womb, ir whom are feveral pafiages that after the bird are obliterated. But if thefie were in the Foetus. then fhould Nature have made thofe two othei pafiages in vain, namely the Foramen ovale, where- by the blood palfies out of the Cava into the fFem pulmonaris as it is entring the left Ventricle ; and the Canalis arteriofus , which carries the blood out of the Artcria pulmonaris into the Aorta, i fay, if the blood could have pafiecl out of one Ventricle into the other (without going through the Lungs ) by any pores that perforate the Sep- tum i, thefe other pafiages had been fuperfiuous. And therefore we may fuppofie, that as in grown perfonsrthey cannot be found by any Probe or Briftle, fo they were not there even while the v •< Foetus ^hap.9. Of the afcending trunk of Vena cava. 307 ©-) becaufe it is but one, having no fellow. Itarifethout of the hinder part of the Cava, Vena fay 3Ut more towards the right hand , and defeends?' :hrough the right fide of the cavity of the Thorax. After its rife, which is betwixt the fourth and fifth vertebra of the Bread:, it bends a little for- ward toward the right hand , till it be defeended is far as the eighth or ninth vertebra , where it be- gins juft to keep the middle. It fends forth on :achfide Lntercoftal branches to the Interftices of the eight lowed: Ribs ; arid at the eighth Rib it is divided into two branches : One whereof , being the larger, defeends toward the left hand betwixt nri. 312 Of the BreajL Book II, it voided by urine, the procefies of the Diaphragm , and is inferted fometimes into the Cava above or below the Emulgent, but oftener into the Emulgent it felf : The other being the right is joined alfo to the Ca- va , commonly a little above the Emulgent , but feldom into the Emulgent it felf. Hovo Pus It was formerly held, before the circulation of collected in the Blood was found out, that in an Empyema of ffeTh°rax tj-jg Thorax , the matter was abforbed by the mouths of this Vein, and carried direftly to the Emulgent Veins, where it was feparated Vdth the Serum by the Kidneys. But feeing the Blood does indeed afcend from the Emulgents by this Vein, and that at its infertion into them there is com- monly a Valve that hinders any thing from iifu- ingout of the Fena fine pari into the Emulgent, but permits the contrary ^ it is certain , that if this Vein be at any time an inftrument to evacuate fuch Pus , it mull firft afcend to the Cava , and pafs through the Heart, and fo be carried to the Kidneys by the Aorta and the Emulgent Arteries arifing out of it. But though it is difficult to con- ceive how the mouths of this Vein fhould open fo wide into the cavity of the Thorax , as to imbibe' ilimy ropy Pus , and yet not let forth the Blood that is more fluid • fo that one would hardly af- llgn this office to it : yet when the Pus is collefted betwixt tiie Pleura and Intcrcoftal Mufcles, and the Tumour does not burft, I fee not why it may not be fuppofed that the Intercoflal branches of the Fena fine pari do imbibe the matter out of the’ Tumour, and carry it that way which was juft now fpoken of. And if ever Pus be imbibed out of the cavity of the Thorax , becaufe it floats upon the Diaphragm, the Fena phrenica are liker to do it than this , as was noted before in this Chapter, when we deferibed thofe Veins. But the truth is, Dhap, 9. Of the afcending trunk ofVe na cava. 313 >, ’tis more probable, when fuch matter is void- d by urine, that it is absorbed by neither of hefe veflels nor from the places mentioned , but ather by the Vena pulmonaria out of the Lungs rhen they apoftemate. Of this Vena fine pari we lhall fay no more, but hat at its rife out of the Cava it has a Valve that pens towards the Cava , which having fent forth his vein , afcends on towards the ClavicuU , rengthned and fuftained by the A tediaftimm id Thymus , and before it is divided into the two ami fubclavii ( fometime after ) fends out yet vo other fmall veins called The fuperiour Intercojlals , on each fide one, each Intercom l which has a Valve where it joins to the Cava , ftales fu- ermitting the influx of the Blood into the Cava , P er ‘°res. at hindring its relapfe. Thefe run along the iterfaces or Intervals of the three or four upper- 10ft Ribs. Yet fometimes the Vena fine pari fends vigs to thefe four Interfaces of the Ribs as well to the eight lower, and then thefe fuperiour itercoftals are wanting. Afterwards the trunk of the Cava is divided Vena? fub~ to two large Veins, one of which goes to the clavia?. ghthand, the other to the left. Thefe while tey are within the Brealt, are called Vena fubcla- 'a, running along the under fide of the Clavi- 'Ice : but as foon as they are gone out of it. Axil- res, They fend forth feveral branches both up- irds and downwards. Sometimes the fuperiour tercoftals juft now mentioned ( though feldom ) ife out of them. Next, the Mammariae defcend from them, ( though thefe Branches :metimes fpring out of the trunk of theOz/<2} drifwg uncertain is the origine of fome of thefe Veins.) f rom hefe fend forth double branches. Internal and xternal. The Internal run to the grifayends of 314 Of the Breafl. Book I of the Ribs and their Intercoftal fpaces , at fome of their twigs alfo are terminated in tl glands of the Mamma. The External pafs dow on the outiide of the Breali , and fend mai twigs into the faid glands , and marching furth by the tides of the Cartilago enfiformis defcend 0 ' (| ofth q Thorax, continuing their courfe down ti Abdomen, under the ftreight Mufcles thereof, t about the Navel, where it hath been an old Tr dition that they inofculate with the Vena epig ] firica but this was a miftake, as has been nob more than once already. Bartlwlin fays that fom times there is but one Mammaria. ,, jviedia- The f econ( -i Vein that arifeth out of the Su Aina. " clavian is the Mcdiajlma ■, this fends twigs to t! Mediajiimm ( from which it hath its name ) the Pericardium and to the Gland called Thyrm This alfo fometimes fpringeth out of the trunk the Cava. cervi* The third is Cervicalis or Vertebralis - this tur calis. backwards towards the vertebra of the Nec ( into whofe lateral holes it enters by fome fm< twigs , which difperfe themfelves through t! Membrane that invefts the marrow contained thefe vertebra ■, and other twigs it bellows up< the Mufcles that lie next upon the vertebra . 4. Mufcula The fourth is Mufcula inferior this is fpe inferior, upon the lower Mufcles of the Neck and the u; per of the Thorax. It rifeth fometimes from ti external Jugular. All thefe fpring from the lower fide of the Su clavian veins but thefe that follow from the u per. As • . Mufcula The Mufcula fuperior, which is difperfed thr mperior. the Mufcles of the Neck. 5 Jngti- Then the Jugulars , which are double, E fares. ternal and Internal . As thefe go out of the Subcl vra! Ghap.9. Of the afeending trunk of Vena cava. 3 1 5 ians, there is placed fometimes one thin Valve, bmetimes two, to hinder the return of the Blood utof the Subclavians into them. The External afeend on the outlsde of the leek, and thefe are they which are opened when ne is let blood in the Neck for any Diftemper f the Head, or Quinzy, &c. They afeend but ft under the Skin, and provide for the outward irts of the Neck, Chaps, Head and Face. They ake the Temple-veins, and the Forehead- vein, >th which are wont fometimes to be opened. ;a they fend fmall Capillaries through the fa- res of the Skull into the Membranes that cover ie Brain. The Internal , in Men, are larger than the Ex~ vnal. They afeend from the Subclavian by the i es of the Wind-pipe, on which they bellow 111 l all twigs. As foon as they are come to the ba- / of the Skull, they are each divided into two, greater and lefs. The greater is carried Fkwards, and by that hole of the Os occipitis by v.ich the fixth pair of Nerves ( Dr. Willis' s “ hth ) comes out of the Head, they enter in, a l are difperfed through the Dura Mater , &c. lie lefs enters in by the holes made for the third ail fourth pair of Nerves, and is alfo bellowed 0 the Dura Mater , &c. When the Subclavian Veins have fent forth all •ife branches, they then pafs out of the Thorax i 11 begin to be called slxillar , of which we Ihau ■nt in the Fourth Book, Chap, 1. nto the Vena fubclavia are inferred alfo the Olus chyliferus tharaenus ( of which in the Firlt &k. Chap. to. ) and Lymphaticus ramus , which eirns the Lympha from the Arms, Neck, t fometimes this opens into the Jugular. Y 'CHAF. S ,6 Of the Breafl. Book CHAP. X. Of Vena arteriofa, and Arteria venofa* Veaa arte- rioHu , “jp H E fecond veflel in the Brea ft is common called Fen a arteriofa , but more properly^ terict pulmonaris , both becaufe ft periormeth t office of an Artery, in carrying Blood out of t right Ventricle of the Heart to the Lungs alfo becaufe its Coat is double like that of oth Arteries. Its Valves, As it rifeth out - of the right Ventricle of fl Heart, there ftand at its orifice three Membr nous Falves looking outwards , called Stmilm res , becaufe they make as it were a half circl as alfo Sigmoides or Sigmoidea , from the lhape the Greek letter Sigma , which of old was of t fame figure with an Engliih C. Thefe Valves £ made of the tendons of the Fibres of the Hea as Steno affirms ^ yea the fame tendons, he fa; pafs into the fubftance of the Artery itfelf. f the Syfiole of the Heart they open, and permit t: Blood to ifiue out of the Ventricle into this Ari ty • but in the Diaftole they Ihut, fo that none c return back again. A little beyond thefe valves a Foetus in the womb there fprings out of this / tery a pipe called canalis Arteriofus , that runs crofs the Breafl; to the Aorta , into which it c< veys the greateft part of the blood out of this l tery, without its palling through the left Lobf the Lungs, or the left Ventricle of the Heart j ' alToon as the Child is born it clofes up, and tui| ligamentous, as was faid before of the for at. ovale ; Alfc.on as it is paft out of the Pericardium. bends towards the £ After a Arteria or Wind-pi Bmiw&mgs in ike !h. i d.O/ Vena arterioIa^W Arteria venofa. 317 ad is divided into the right and left branch, ihich applying themfelves to the like branches of le Afpera Arteria do every where accompany ftm on the under fide, and as they run along fid out very many twigs on every fide, which jefently afTociate with thofe of the Wind-pipe, sd of the V'ena pulmonaris . And where the fmall Ipesofthe Afar a Arteria end into the little iund Cells ( which we fhall defcribe in the Chap- t* of the Lungs ) the twigs of this Artery be- i; interwoven with thofe of the Vein do em~ bice them like a Net. Whence one may guefs tit the reafon why the fanguiferous veilels do fo eiftly accompany all the branches of the Wind- pe and its annexed little Bladders, is, that the fired or impregnated with the t of the arous Air. For there is but a very little fpent the nutrition of the Lungs, but the greateft it of it is received by the fmall twigs of the m pulmonaria which accompany thofe of this tery in all its ramifications. The third veflel is called Arteria venofa , other- Arteria 1 e Vena pulmonaria ^ this has but a fingle Coat venofa. he other Veins have. After it has accompani- the Wind-pipe and Arteria pulmona^ir in all ir brandlings in the Lungs, and by ts fmall gs has received, the Blood (by anafloinofes as ft affirm ; out of the Artery, ad thefe twigs u united firit into :wo trunks ( vit. the right ;r left ) afterwards into one, which opens into h left Ventricle, of the Heart. lit its orifice tnere are placed two membranous Its Valves. r ives called Miirales , becaufe when they are 3 ed together they do in iome manner referable feoffs Mitre, They are of a Wronger contex- ' ole mafs of Blood paffing this be in- y % ture j.8 Of the Breaft. Book I ture than thofe called Tricufpides at the orifice the Cava in the right Ventricle • and fo aret Fibres, that afcend to them from the jPapilla flelhy columns, Itronger. For feeing the Blood expelled more impetuouOy out of the left Ve tricle than out of the right, ( for the Blood ft out of the one is to circulate only through t Lungs, but that out of the other, through t whole Body ) it was convenient that the valv and Fibres fhould be Itronger, to fuftain the v lent motion of the Blood, and hindring it fr< returning into this Vein again, to direct its coui into the Aorta whofe orifice opens in the Syji of the Ventricle. Juft as this Vena pulmon aria is entring into ) left Auricle, there is, in a Foetus in the Woe a Pipe called Foramen ovale that opens into it j ifiirig from the Cava, as was noted above, which we (hall here add, that at its orifice ii this vein there is a valve placed, that hinders < Blood from returning into the Foramen out: the vein. And here there is one thing worth noting o cerning the pulmonary Artery and Vein : T whereas in all the other Arteries and Ve through the whole Body befides, the Blood c tained in the Arteries is of a bright fcarlet cole and that in the Veins of a black purple \ on j contrary, the Arteria pulmcnariscontaineth bl purple Blood , and the Vein fcarlet- colout The reafon w'hereof was (hewn before. Chap.) via. That the fcarlet colour of theBlocd is wh and as it defeends , the 41 defending, I will not be againft it •, but I have “by no means found it in man fo feparated and “ divided into two parts,that the one parf fhould “ afcend, and the other defcend, as it is fepre* “ fented in the figures of divers Authors.3 Thus he, and .becaufe he is a perfpn very euri- ous, I have here inferted his figures lately pub* lifhed in his Apfwer to Gaubm’s third Letter. Tab. XI. Fig. i. A The root of the trunk of the Aorta,. out of each fide of which faring The coronary Arteries BB. CC The Arteries running through the auricles of tk heart. D The little branches of Arteries fp ringing out of tk arteria coronaria,£wd difperfed through the coats oj the root of the Aorta. EEE V'ery numerous frigs of Arteries fpreaa through the fubjlance of the heart. FF The trunks of the coronary Arteries cut off , de~ fgned for the back fide of tbe heart. Fig. 2 . A. The heart of a boy about ten years old. BB. The Arteries difperfed through ■the fubjlance of the heart. C The right auricle of the heart. D The trunk of the Aorta emerging and rifrng up out- of the left finus of the heart. E The defending trank of the Aorta. F The right fubclavian Artery united for a little fpace to the right Carotid. G The left fubclavian Artery coupled to the cervical Artery. and vs lefs in diameter than the foregoing. ' hh mt ^hap. ii. Of the branches of the Aorta. y 23 1 H Each Carotid Artery. The left cervical Artery. e L The little Arteries fpringing from the coronary Ar- tery furnifhing the coats of the root of the Aorta. . The afcending trunk of the Vena cava, i The defcendtng trunk of the Vena cava. I Toe Arteries diflributed through the right auricle of the heart , and ariftng out of the coronary Artery. ) The root of the pulmonary Artery coming forth of the right Thalamus of the heart. P The little Arteries fpringing from the internal mammary Arteries and dijlnbuted through the coats of the Aorta. ig. 3. A The trunk of the Aorta of an adult man. A branch of the right fubclavian Artery , out of which the right carotid Artery fpringeth , noted by the Letter C. ) The carotid Artery of the left fide. Toe left fubclavian Artery. The branches of Arteries that fpring from the Arteria coronaria. Now though I muft needs acknowledge that hat this curious Anatomift fpeaks againft the di- ding the Aorta into its afcending and defcend- g trunk has much reafon in it , as appears by le fecond figure j yet having his lieve I (hall Ihere to the ufual divifion , and proceed to Dferve the afcending , and defending trunks of le Aorta in their feverai offsprings, as they have :en hitherto defcribed. The afcending Trunk then running up under 7 ^f ie Vena cava lies upon the Wind-pipe, and pre- ntly fendeth forth two large branches, whereof finding, ie pafTeth to the right,the other towards the left Arm s S 2 4 Of the Breafl. Book II i. Subela- via. 2. IntercO' ftalis fu- perior. 3. Mam- maria. 4. Cervi calis. Arm* They are called Rami fubclavii , becaul they march under the Clavicula ^ and affoon a they are gone out of the Brea ft, are called Axilla res. The right is the larger, and rifing higher goe a more direct way towards the right Arm ; th left is lefs, and rifing lower afcends more oblique ly towards the left Arm. They fend out fever; branches both from their lower and upper fide. ( From the lower proceeds the fuperiour Intercofia which runs along the interflices or intervals ( the four uppermofi: Ribs, and fends flips to tf neighbouring Mufcles and fpinal Marrow. The! fometimes are propagated from the cervical Ai teries, coming out through the holes of tl Vertebra. j From the upper fide of each fubclavian fprinf firft Mammaria , which defeends towards tf Breafts through the Mufcles that fill up the inte: ftices of the cartilages of the true Ribs •, and confiderable branch of each defeending out of tl Thorax by the fides of the Cartilago enftformis , ri down the Abdomen under the Mufculi Reft fpreading there into many twigs : which are fa to inofculate with the extremities of the lil twigs of the epigaftrick Artery afeending. B that opinion is fo oppofite to the circulation the Blood, that it is irnpoffible to be true. For 1 Blood can afeend by the Mammaria^ nor defcei by thefe afeending twigs of the Epigaftricce. The next is Cervicalis f otherwise called E’en bralis ) which fendeth flips to the Fertebr# a Mufcles of the Neck, at whofe feventh Vcrtel it enters in by the holes of the tranfverfe proo fes, and pierceth the Membrane that invefts t-’ fpinal Marrow, bellowing twigs both on t: Membrane and Marrow, and runs up therewii in at the g' eat hole of the Occiput, and being «' • " ' ; '' tc : Chap. ii. Of the branches of the Aorta. 325 ter’d the Skull, both branches (the right and left ) join under the medulla oblongata , and then are di- vided into innumerable moft fmall twigs, which make wonderful net-like Plexus in the Pia Mater about the Cerebellum , and run into the fubftance of the Cerebellum it felf • and fome of them be- ing united with thofe of the Carotides make part of the very Rete mirabile. The third Artery that rifes out of the upper fide e> , Mufcu- of the fubclavian is Mufcula , which is fpent on la. the Mufcles of the Neck, and fometimes alfo on fome of the Arm. After the Subclavians have had all thefe pairs of Arteries going out of them, they pafs out of the Thorax , and begin to be called Axillar , of which in Book IV. Chap. 2. At the fame place, or very near, where the a- Carotides* [bending Trunk of the Aorta fends out the Subcla- /ians fide-ways, the remainder of it is divided in- to two, called Carotides , which afcend diredtly up- wards, ( though the right fometimes arifes from the right Subclavian .) Thefe at their rife are fuftained by th z Thymus, and having bellowed twigs on the Larynx , Tongue, the Mufcles of the Os hyoides and the neighbouring Glands, pafs up on each fide by the fides of the Wind-pipe to the Jaws with the internal Jugular Vein, and there ire each fubdivided into the external and internal branches. The external is fmaller, and is difperfed into ill the Mufcles of the Cheeks, Fore-head, Tem- ples, Lips ^ and in general, through all the outer parts of the Head and Face. The internal, which is larger , fends firft fome .nore twigs to the Larynx , Tcngue, is’c. as alfo to the Glands behind the Ears, and the fpongy parts of the Palate 2nd Nofe, Then it entreth If, the ?j 26 Of the Br'eafl. Book II. the upper Jaw, and bellows a fmall flip on the root of each Tooth (as the external did on the roots of the Teeth of the lower jaw ). whereby fliarp humours flowing in upon them fometimes caufe a very painful Tooth-ach. The/ remainder of it climbs upon the Skull, being about its bafis divided into two branches. The left ahd hinder whereof having fent one flip to the inner Mufcles of the Neck, and another through the hole of the uppermoft Vertebra into the Membrane that inverts the lpinal Marrow, afcending further en- ters the Skull at the hole by which the fixth pair of Nerves ( commonly fo called ) comes out, and creeping along the Pur a Mater ends near its Sinus, (which yet. fome fay.it enters.) The larger branch, tending upwards,is carried through the bony Cha- nel in the wedge-like bone with a winding dud to th q Sella equina ; -at whofe bafis after it has fent out a twig on each fide into the Dura Mater , it opens it felf into many fmall flips, which being interwoven with thofe of the cervical Artery (above-mentionedj make the Rete tnirabile, which is more obfervable in Beafts than in Men. Yet it is not all fpent on the faid (lips, but perforating the Dura Mater , it enters the Pia Mater with two notable branches, which being divided into very fmall twigs are mingled with thofe of the cervi- cal Artery, with which they pafs out of the Skull and accompany the fpinal Marrow even to the Loins. Afterwards it fend s a fmall branch through the fecond hole of the wedge-like Bone with the optick Nerve, out of the Skull, to the Eye, And yet ft ill fupplying more twigs to the fubrtance of the Brain and Pia Mater , and being united with Ibrne other twigs of the cervical Artery, it makes the Plexus choroides . The Chap. ii. Of the branches of the Aorta. 327 The defending trunk of the Aorta, which is lar- the hran- ger than the afending , goes down by the Gullet* d ffjf to which it cleaveth. And hence is a Man that is hot, fo much cooled with a draught of cold drink ; for the Gullet being cooled thereby, the Blood in the Aorta contiguous to it muft needs be cooled likewife. Before it arrive at the Diaphragm it fends out 1. Intercom of its hinder fide the infer tour Inter coftals , which ftalis ;nfe ’ run along the interftices of eight or nine of the nor * lower Ribs, namely thofe which the fupericur In - tercojlah did not fupply. They likewife fend fe fprigs by the holes of the Vertebra , made for the Nerves, to the Marrow of the Back, and to the Mufcles which reft upon the Vertebra , and alfo to saj thofe of the Thorax. Sometimes above this and fometimes below it, there arifes alfo out of the ;fc: chialis , firft found out and fo named by Frederick Ruyfcb , which accompanies all the Bronchia of the te Wind-pipe. - When it comes to the Midriff, there fpring out 2. Fhre- 'i of it the Phrenic a, one on each fide : thefe run- nica * ning all through the Diaphragm, pafs up into the aM Mediaflinam , and fometimes into ' the Pericar - ite dium. Then having penetrated the Midriff it defeends Ccelia- ’M in one trunk to the fifth vertebra of the Loins -ca. in which paffage it firft fendeth forth Cceliaca which arifeth fingle, and is fo called, becaufe it fendeth twigs to the Stomach. This fpringeth from the fore-part of the Trunk, at the firft vertebra of the Loins, and defeending under the hollow of the Liver, upon the Trunk of the Vena Porta it is divided into two branches , the right and left , The 328 Of the Breaft. Book II. its bran- The right which is fmaller, attending, produ- r aftrica ces * n * ts u ^ er P art t * ie Ga ft r * c * dextra , that comes dextrL to the Pylorus, whence Spigelius calls it Pylorica, Cyftic# And befides, the Cyftica gemella, which are verj gemeiise, fmall, and are difperfed through the Gall-blad* der. A nd out of its lower fide there fpring Epiplo'is 1 . Epiplo'is dextra, which runs thro* the right dextra. fide of the inner or hinder leaf of the Caul and the Colon that it is annexed to. Inteftina- 2. lnteftinalis , bellowed on the Duodenum and lis. beginning of Jejunum. Gaftroe- 3- G aftfoepiplois dextra , on the right fide (to piplois the middle ) of the bottom of the Stomach, and dextra. a jf 0 on the Gaul that is knit to its bottom. Hepatic#. 4 Hepatic ae, which are two fmall ones : thefe arc fpent on the inveiling Membrane of the Li* ver ( for its Parenchyma is nourilhed by the Porta ij! the Capfula communis , the Gall-bladder and Pom bilarius. The remainder of this right branch enters the Mefentery with many twigs. The left branch of the Coelidca , which is called Splenicus (fometimes fpringing immediately from the Aorta) is larger than the right , and as it goes towards the Spleen it fendeth forth of its upper fide Gaflrica major , which after it hath be- llowed a flip on the upper and middle part of the Stomach , is divided into two others ; the firft whereof is called C oronaria Jlomhcktca, which ria ftoma- encompaffes the upper orifice of the Stomach chica. |-j, e a G ar \ an( ^ an d fends many twigs to the body Gaflrica °f the Ventricle it feT" , the other Gaflrica fmiflra , fmiftra. which ( according to Diemerbroeck ) is carried to- wards the right hand in to the upper part of the Stomach and to the Pylorus. Out of its lower Epiplo'is fin e fpring, firft Epiplo'is poflicd , which runs to the poftica. fij n der leaf of the Omentum , and the Colon an- Splenica. Gaftrica major. Corona- ii ! r ii ill i t ~ - ----- - - 3iap. ii. Of the branches of the Aorta. 329 exed to it ; fecondly Epiplois finifira , which is Epiplois teftowed on the lower and left fide of the O - iimftra * ten turn. re 3 Juft: as this fplenick branch is entring into the y as breve pleen, there arife out of its upper part Vat breve arterio- rteriofum , which goeth ftreight to the left part fom. :eit f the bottom of the Stomach ; and the Gaflro- piplois ftniftra y which being fuftained by the up- Ga p?^r ier or fore-leaf of the Omentum fends fome twigs ^ r ° ls - 1 5 hereto, and alfo to the left part of the bottom f the Stomach, and to both its fore and hinder !e(j des. Then it enters into the Spleen, whofe ranchings therein we deferibed in the former look. Chap. 1 6. Of the Spleen. All thefe Arteries fpring from the Coeliaca , kli nd accompany the Veins of the Porta of the like fti lenomination. m The next that arifes out of the trunk of the 4. Mefen- iorta is the upper Mefenterick, which fprings from terica fu- n: he fore-part of it as the Cceliack did. It accom- P eri °r. tanies the Vena tnefaraica of the Porta , and runs hrough all the upper part of the Mefentery, and I r eftows many branches on the Guts , Jejunum , team, and that part of Colon that lieth in the right lypochondre. Immediately below this, about the fecond ver- g) . Emul- ?bra of the Loins, there go out of each fide ofgentes. he defeending trunk of the Aorta an Emulgent irtery , each of which being after its rife divided ito two and fometimes three branches , enters he Kidney of its own fide. The right fprings ut of it a little lower than the left. Both are abdivided into innumerable twigs in the Paren - byma of the Kidneys, ( all of which are inverted idth the Veins in one common capfula borrowed rom the Pelv'vs ) and their Capillaries end in the jlands , wherein the Serum that thefe Arteries Of the Breafl. Book I bring with the Blood is feparated therefrom, an carried from them by the urinary Siphons int the Pelvis , of which more in the former Bool Chap. 17. Of the Kidneys . g.Sperma* Next to thefe arife the Spermatic a ( called A tics, teria prapar antes. ) Thefe go out of the fort part of the Trunk very near together ( very fe dom either of them out of the Emulgents, as tl left Sperm3tick Vein does ) and the right paflt over the trunk of the P'ena cava. About tw fingers breadth from their rife they are each joir ed with the Vena prapar ans of their own fid< and defeend with them in Men through the pre cefs of the Peritoneum to the Stones , being divi ded into two branches a little before they arriv at them, one of which runs under the Epididymh and the other to the Teflis. In Women , whe they come near the Tefles , ( or Ovaria ) they ar divided alfo into two branches, one whereof got to the Teflis, and the other to the bottom of th Womb. 7. Mefen- Next below the Spermatick fprings the low terica in- Mefenterick out of the Trunk a little before it i ferior. divided into the Rami iliaci . This er.treth th lower region of the Mefentery, and diflribute many branches to the left part of the Colon and t< the ftreight Gut, and lalHydefcendingto the Am makes the internal hemorrhoidal Artery. Very near to this, out of the Trunk ftill, arifi bares™" t ^ ie Tumbares , reckoned four in number. Thef go out of the backfide of the Aorta , and are diftri buted not onely to the neighbouring Mufcles 0 the Loins, and to the Peritoneum , but enter in a the holes of the vertebra of the Loins , and rut along the Membrane that involves the fpirial Mar tow, and penetrate into the Marrow it felf. I Lfide 'hap. ii. Of the branches of the Aorta. 331 Betides thefe fome reckon other two , on each :ie one, called Muf cults fuperiores , (which run to ie Mufd.es or the Abdomen') unlefs thele be two the four called Lumbares. When the Trunk is defcend^d as low as the th or laft vertebra of the Loins and the top of if fdcrum , it begins to climb upon the Vena cava , nder or behind which it puffed thus fur But as : begins to get upon it , it is divided into two ■[ual branches called Rami ihaci and at its ve . v Rami ilia- 1 vilion there fprings out of icstrtena facra^ whole lall twigs entring in at the holes of Os facrum nnetrate into the Mai row contained in it. The T runk of th=; defcending-^orfd being divi- their :d into the Kami itiaci, thefe are fubaivided pre- branches, : ntly into the interiour and exteriour branches. From the interiour , which is lefs, proceed three tel r.hers. :0 (I Firft, the inferiour Mufcula ( called otherwise x- dtfctis oil Hut tea ) which is bellowed on the Mufcles named la li - : *" Huttei that make the Buttocks, and alfo on the ur< t ii wer end of the Iliack Mufcle and the Pfoas. '■ | Secondly, the Hypogaflrick , which is large, 2 . Hypo- etc .id at the lower end of Os facrum runs to the gaftrica.- ladder and its Neck, and the Mufcles that cover 're Off a pubis. In Men it goes alfo along the two nrvous bodies of the Penis as far as the Clans 2 id in Women it is diltributed in numerous bran- res into the bottom of the Womb and its Neck, ut of which for the greatell part i'Tue thc-Menfes ■ their monthly purgation. It goes alfo to the odex, where it makes the external hemorrhoidal .rtery. . .... Thirdly, The Vmbilical Artery, which afeend- :g by the iides of the Bladder, and being infert- ta ib ’ 4 into the Teritonaum^ proceeds betwixt the two , embranes thereof to the Navel, out of whi<"h it Z paffes ^2 Of the Brea ft. Book U pafies in a Foetus in the Womb, and runs into tl Placenta uterina , of which before. Booh I. Cb. y But after the Infant is born , when there is n more ufe of it , it clofes up , and turns into tl nature of a Ligament, in lome meafure fuftainir the Tides of the Bladder , and hindring ic fro; prefiing on its Neck. From the exteriour branch of the Ramus iliac, two Arteries arife. 4. Epiga- Fir ft, The Epigaftrick , which turning upwar* ftnca. on outfide of the Penton&um runs betwixt and the Mufculi reCti of the Abdomen as high the Navel, where the Mammary Artery meets i and according to tradition ( though faife ) inc culates there with it. Of which before , in tl Chapter. 5. Puden- Secondly, Pudenda , which fends forth a not da * ble Artery on each fide into the nervous body the Penis in Men, and into the Clitoris in Wome Hence it is carried inwards by the jointing of t OJfa pubes to the Pudenda and Groins , and the Glands, and is fpent on the Skin of thofe pari and of the Yard (in Men.) When all thefe pairs of Arteries have arif out of the Rami iliaci , they run down out of t Abdomen to the Thighs , where they begin be called Crurales , where we (hall leave them t we come to fpeak of the Arteries of the Limi Booh IV. Chap. 5. Having now traced all the Arteries fpringi ; out of the Aorta ( whether out of its afeendi or defending Trunk) in the Thorax and Abdomt, taking occafion to do fo , becaufe the great A tery out of which they all arife, has its Origii in the Hearty to which we have confidered it s an Appendage » we fhall pafs on to the deferip • on of the remaining parts in the Breafl , not ] 5 fpoken to, Ti Chap. 1 1. Of the Fibres of the Heart. 333 Tab. XII. fyprefenteth the Fibres of the Heart , with its Auri- cles , Ventricles , Valves i &c. (from Dr, Lower.) r ig. I. Sheweth the outmoft or ftreight Fibres of the Heart. The Bafts of the Heart. \ Its Cone. cc The ftreight Fibres tending upwards towards the bafts . ig. II. Sheweth the fecond rank of Fibres ( which are oblique ) lying next under the former^ which afcending obliquely from the left fide towards the right , terminate in the bails of | the Heart, imitating a Snail- ihell, or Screw, by their fpiral circuit. The Bafts of the Heart . The Cone. The Fibres that encompafs the left Ventricle. .. The Fibres encompajfing the right. A Sinus in the interface of the Ventricles , made f of receiving the Veftels of the Heart. ig. III. Sheweth the third or inmoft rank of Fi- bres, which are oblique aifo, but run a contra- ry courfe to the former •, for they arife every where from the right fide of the Heart, whence being carried obliquely towards tne left ^ and embracing each Ventricle of the Heart they afeend to the Bafis of the left fide. % i % The Of the Breafl. Book II. m a The Bafis of the Heart. b The Cone. c The right fide of the Heart. d The left. e The Fibres of the right Ventricle. f The Fibres of the left. Fig. IV. Shew? the right Auricle of the Heart in- verted and laid open. aaa The Bafis of the Auricle , where it is united to the Tendon of the Heart. bbb The tendinous Circle whereby it is diflinguifhed from the Vena cava. ccc I he carnous Fibres which are carried to the di - verfe or oppofite Tendons. d The Coronary Vein. ee Other leffer Veins appointed for bringing back the Blood which remains from the nutrition of tht Heart . f The upper part of the Auricle. Fig. V. Shews the inner Sinus of the left Ven« tricle. aaa The pulmonary Vein laid open before its entrance into the Heart, b The left Auricle of the Heart. c The Foramen ovale , whereby the Blood flows ou of the Vena cava into the pulmonary Vein juft be fore the door of the left Ventricle. - dd The two Mitral Membranes or Valves. ee The flejhy Columns protuberating out of each fid of the Ventricle. g The place under the Mitral Membranes where th Blood is fent forth into the Aorta, h The Cone of the Heart. in Th J Chap. 12. Of the Afperia Arteria and Lungs. 335 iii The carnous Fibres running on every fide through the whole circuit of the infide of the V’entricle. Fig. VI. Sheweth the femilunar Valves at the rife of the -Aorta out of the left Ventricle, ( where- unto thofe at the rife of the pulmonary Artery out of the right Ventricle are likej aa Tart of the left F'entricle laid open. bbb The three femilunar Valves conciding loofly 1 that they may yield an Exit to the Blood burfiing forth. c The Trunk of the Aorta laid open. Id The two coronary Arteries rifing immediately without the femilunar Valves. =e The root of the Aorta where it is united with the Tendon of the Heart. ff The Aditral Membranes divided and turned lack on each fde % that the femilunar Valves may come into fight. Fig. VII. Shews the femilunar Valves clofed. laa The Trunk of the Aorta cut off at the root. bbb The three femilunar Valves coming clofe to one another , and hindring the recourfe of the Blood out of the Aorta into the F’entricle, :c The two coronay Arteries. CHAP. XII. Of the Afpera Arteria and Lungs. AS in the Fir ft Book, being to treat of the ^ w!ii /A. Stomach , we firft deferibed the Gullet which ferves as a Tunnel to it ^ fo the fame rea- Z 3 foa n 6 Of the Breafi. Book II. fon induces to begin with the Wind-pipe , called Its Figure and Sub- ftance* Trachea or Afpera Arteria, thereby to ulher in the defcription of the Lungs , to which it performs the fame office as the Gullet to the Stomachy this receiving in Air, as that does Meat and Drink. The Afpera Arteria then is a long Pipe, con- fining of Cartilages and Membranes, which be- ginning at the Throat or lower part of the jaws and lying upon the Gullet defeends into the Lungs, through which it fpreads in many branchings. !, It is commonly divided into two parts , thi i .Larynx. upper which is called Larynx , and the lower that is named Bronchus. Of the former we fhal fpeak in Chap. 14. where we fhall treat of tlV parts contained in the Neckg of the other, here. By the Bronchus we mean all the Trachea be hides the. Larynx , as well before as after it arriv at the Lungs. It is joyned immediately to tli Larynx , to vvhofe loweft Cartilage all thofe c the Bronchus ( lb far as it tells upon the Gullet Its c&rtila- are affirnilated. Thefe Carrilages are like fo ma Tarts. 2. Bron- chus. get and Membranes ny Rios, Hoops or Rings, feated one below anc ther at equaddilhmces , and kept in their place by the inner Membrane of the Trachea , whic fdls up their Interitices and tyes them one to anc ther like a Ligament. Yet thefe Rings have nc their circle intire, but on the back fide of tl Bronchus next the Gullet, that they might gi\ way to the Meat in fwajlowing, they pals into Membrane, which is the fame with the inn* Membrane that tyes them together. So that the are in figure like the letter C. But this interfti in ti circle wiiich moll Anatom ills affirm to I membranous, Cafp. Bartholin (after his Father fays is rather carnous, for there are very pla ^ and remarkable carnous Fibres that run fi t “ one fide or end of the Cartilage acrofs to t ' - C “ othei ! pi ) ‘ « I, ■ ]•* i as Chap. 12. Of the Afpera Arteria and Lungs , 44 other, which in expiration ( efperiaiiy viobrnt ) 44 contracting themfelves draw the ends of the 44 Cartilages towards one another on each fide, 44 and thereby ftraiten the Pipe of the Trachea, j And though the Cartilages fo far as they are contiguous to the Gullet, are thus femilunar as it were ^ yet thofe of the branches of the Bronchus within the Lungs have no interfiice in their cir- cumference, being all cartilaginous, though not all of a circular figure, but fome four-fquare, others triangular, &c. as Diemerbroeck obferves. This inner Membrane is plentifully befet with miliary Glands, out of which a good part of that mucous matter that bedaubs its inlide iflues, for the lubricating of it. The outer Membrane helps to conned the Cartilages the more firmly one to another, and the whole Trachea to the neigh- bouring parts, that it may more fafely and firm- ly defcer.d into the Thorax. This is much thin- ner than the other : for the inner ( according to Dr. Willis ) has two rows of mufcular Fibres, the outer ffreight, the inner oblique • the firft by their contraction fhorten the Trachea , the latter ifraiten it } fo that he thinks they aflilt expira- tion, efpecially when it is violent, as in coughing, hawking or the like. Yea he fays, this inner Mem? brane has two others growing upon it as it were, one giandulous, and another vafcular. Through this latter do the Blood-veflels and Nerves every where run \ and the Glands placed in the for- mer receive and keep all the fuperfluous moifture or lympha depoflted by the Arteries, which the Veins do not imbibe, till they can remand it by the Lympheduds ( which fpring from them ; ) or if it be over plentiful, fo that the Lyrnphe- duds cannot receive it all, then it iflues both out of thefe Glands and out of the Arteries into the Z 4 Cavity 337 ? ? 8 Of the Breaft. Book II, Csivii-y of the Wind-pipe and caufes a Catarrh, But the intide of this Membrane is naturally moift, being befmear’d with a fattilh and mucous hu- mour, to hinder its drying, and to make the voice fmoother *, fo that when this humour is fretted off in Catarrhs, or the inlide of this Mem- brane becomes rough from any caufe, the voice becomes hoarfe y and when it is dried by too much heat, as in Fevers, it becomes fcjueaking. Vffih The after a Arteria has veins from the external Jugulars. Arteries from the Carotides, and from the Arteria bronchial! s , ( full: found out by Fre- derick Ruyfch ) which fprings from the backfide of the defcending Trunk of the Aorta , a little above the lower intercoffals. Nerves it receives from the recurring branches of the par vagum , which run moftly along its inner Membrane, yvhence it becomes fo exquifitely fenfible. piyftyu When it is defcended as low as the fourth ver- tebra of the 'Thorax ft is divided into two Trunks, whereof one goes into the right lobe of the Lungs, the other into the left, and each is pre- fently again divided into two, and thofe into Others, till at la ft they end in very fm.all branches, which are difpetfed among the like branches of the pulmonary Artery and Vein, and end into and are continued with the little Bladders that make up the greateff part of the bulk of the Lungs. For lie lungs. Though the Lungs ( called in Greek wAfMv, a i hdr Sub. Nza to breathe ) have been held to be of a car- fUfice, nous fubftance , not much unlike the Liver or Spleen • vet Malpighius hath difeover’d them to be of a far other , namely foft, fpongy and rare, made up of molt thin and fine Membranes con- tinued with the inner coat of the Trachea , which Membranes Chap. 12. Of the Laws. J O 339 ;fi Membranes compofe an infinite number of little *ound and hollow Bladders, fo placed that there s an open palfage from the Trachea out of one nto another , and all terminate at the outer Membrane that inclofeth the whole Lungs. Thefe Bladders though they are continued to :he Bronchia, yet they have no Cartilages as thofe lave but though they are very fine, yet they lave mufcular Fibres , whereby they contrad :hemfelves in expiration, but not fo clofe as to :xpell all the Air included in them j for if the .ungs had wholly fubfided and fallen flat and lofe in expiration, they would have given fome top to the circulation of the Blood through them )ut of the pulmonary Artery into the Vein • ■« 11 ! vhereas now that there remains ftill fo much \ir in thefe reficul ce as to keep the Lungs a little luff’d up and rare, the Blood can pafs the more :afily and fwiftly through them. That there are fuch Bladders annexed to the Bronchia, Diemerbroeck Ihews by two notable Sto- nes : The one of a Stone-cutter's Man that died )f an Ajlbma , in whom he found thefe veficulce fo huff’d with the dull of the hewn Stone, that when le cut his Lungs open, his Knife feem’d as if it vent through an heap of Sand : The other of one :hat being imployed to pick and cleanfe Feathers, lied of a long continued Afihma, and had thefe Bladders quite filled with the fine Dull or Down if the Feathers. From whence he concludes. That whereas in a natural State the Air in infpi- ration is received as well into thefe Bladders as the Bronchia, feeing they could not now admit my Air, being Huff’d with the aforefaid mat- ters, the Patients were necefiarily Afthmatical, and died fo. Of the Breaft. Book II 340 1 nvejiing We raid before that all thefe Feftcula were in Membrane. w jth a common Membrane in the fuperficit of the Lungs and this Dr. Willis will have, dou ble The outer Tunicle is thin and fmootigwhici feems to be a fine texture of nervous filaments the inner rough and thicker , confiding almof wholly of the extremities of the Veflels and j/'tji cuU • and through the little pits that are all ove made in it by them, its inner fuperficies looks lit an Hony-comb. This dwelling Membrane con filling thus of two Tunicles has many large Pores but fuch as admit not any thing to pafs fron within outwards ; for if one fill the Lungs newl taken out of a Sheep or the like ( before they ar cold ) with a pair of Bellows, never fo full wind, there will none pafs out of the Membrane not fo much as to make the flame of a Candle t wave : but on the other fide they do admit eve liquors to pafs from without inwards fo whe the Bread has been opened to let out matter in a Empyema, ( which was too thick to be abforbe by the too narrow pores ) and bitter cleanfing in 1 jeclions have been fquirted into the cavity of th Thorax , to clear it from the purulent matte ftagnating in it, it has been obferved that a goo< part Gf fuch injections have been hawk’d an cough’d up. And though Lome think that whet foever Pus is cough’d up, it is certainly bred i the Lungs themfelves \ yet 1 am of opinion th; in an Empyema when it is thin , thefe Pores ma be fo large as to imbibe it even out of the cavit of the Thorax •, otherwife I fee not how any bouring of an Empyema A hould ever be cure without tapping : for of the two I think this far more prooable way to difeharge the mattf by, than that it fliould be imbib’d by the moutl of the Veins gaping (as is fuppos’d ) either Chap. 12. Of the Lungs, 341 the fuperficies of the Pleura, or Diaphragm. But to proceed. The Lungs are divided into the right and Left Dmpon. part, being parted by the Mediaftinum , and each part js otherwlfe called a Lobe And becaufe they are two, that have no communication one with the other (Tave in one common trunk of the Trachea , by which the Air comes into and goes Dut of them ) hence in common fpeech we fay Lungs in the plural. Each of thefe parts or Lobes is fubdivided into two, fometimes three others, and thofe into many lelTer Lobules , as may be teen in the following Figure taken from Dr. WiUvs. The Lungs hang loo r e in the cavity of the Tho- Connexion . fax, being fufpended by the Afpera Artcria that runs every where through their fubftance , and is it felf fuftained by its connexion to the parts of the Neck. Preterneturally (though pretty often) they cleave by their outer fuperficies to the Pleura , and fometimes with their lower end to the Dia- phragm. They have all forts of Veffels , that are com -Vejfels. mon to them with other parts; but peculiar to 1, Tra ' themfelves they have Bronchia or the branches of chca ‘ the Wind-pipe, for bringing in and carrying forth of Air. Their Arteries and Veins are the Artcria and 2. Arteries Vena pulmonaris , that accompany all the Divisions emi Veins . of the Afpera Arteria within their feveral Lobes. Thefe are faid to have many Anaftomofes one with another, for the readier Circulation of the Blood through the Lungs; however, they are ad- mirably interwoven one with another all through the coats of the Veficula. But of thefe we difeour- fed fo largely before. Chap. 1 o. that we {ball fay no rhore of them here, Befides thefe , that were ail 34* Of the Breajl. Book II. all the fanguiferous VefTels Anatomids had obfer- ved to reach to the Lungs, there has of late been found out an Artery by Frederick Ruyfcb ( which he calls Arteria bronchial'vs ) that feems to convey Blood for the nourifhment of the Lungs and Bronchia. But of this likewife before ( in this Chapter .) 3. Lympbe- They have abundance of Lympheduds that at- duds. tend upon the Veins and Arteries. Their final twigs running upon the outer fuperficies of th< Lungs, towards their Root unite into fevera greater Trunks •, which being inferted into th< common thoracick Duct, difcharge thereinto the Lympha imbibed by them in the Lungs. The] may be made to appear very plain in the out- ward furface, if in dilfeding a live Dog , orn prefs upon the top of the thoracick Dud , fc as nothing be poured from thence into th< Subclavian Vein .• for then the Lympheduds 0; the Lungs , feeing they cannot unload them- felves into the common Dud that is now ftopi and full , will fwell very much , and be very confpicuous. If thefe Lympheduds at any time be obdruded or broken. Dr. Willis thinks there often proceeds from thence a Dropfie of th< Bread or Lungs ^ yea , Goughs and Phthifica Didempers. 4 . Nerses. The lad fort of Vedels difperfed in tht I Lungs are the Nerves. And thefe proceed fron the recurring Nerves of the Far vagum , ufu ally called the fixth Pair , but Dr. Wittvs' eighth, who fays they are didributed all ove the Lungs along with the fanguiferous Veflel and Duds of the Bronchia , to fupply Anima Spirits to the mufcular Fibres of their Coats. The Attion to which they contribute is Refpi ration, of which in the next Chapter, Tab :hap. 12. Of the Lungs . J 4 ? Tab. XIII. ,’prefenteth the Lungs , Diaphragm , Du&us fa- livalis, drc. }g. I. Reprefenteth the Sternum cutoff and lift- ed up, the tJMediafinum , Thymus , Lungs, Diaphragm, &c. AA The inner fuperficies of the Sternum 0/ ffce Cartilages knit to it. 3 T/;e mammary Veins and Arteries defcending un - • der tfce Sternum. 1 The glandulous Body called Thymus. DDD The ftdes of the Mediaftinum pull'd afun- der from the Sternum. E The fpace between the Membranes of the Me- diaftinum, ariftng from the tearing of it from the Sternum. G The Lungs. H The Diaphragm. The Cartilago enfiformis. . The external falival Du(l. jig. II. Shews the Diaphragm of a Dog ( very little differing from that of a Man ) from Cafpar Bartholin. iAA Shew the courfes of the car nous Fibres in the upper or fore Mufcle , which run freight from the Ribs to the Centre or tendinous part of the Diaphragm. I The Centre or tendinous part. ] The hole in the right fide of the tendinous part for the tr unfit of the afcending Trunk of Vena cava. DD The ?44 Of the Breajt. Book II The Mi- on of the J-wgs. DD The lower or hinder Mufcle of the Dia- phragm. E The bole in the upper part of the lower cJTfufd through which the Gullet dcfcends. F The hole in the hinder part of the lower Mufcl through which the Aorta defends. GGGG Its tendinous extremities whereby it adhere to the Vertebras of the Loins , formerly called it procejfes. Fig. III. Shews the lower or hinder Mufcle of Man’s Diaphragm , fomething differing fror that of a Deg, (from the fame Author.) A Shews the Tendon that intervenes betwixt tf. upper and lower Mufcle , commonly called th nervous Centre of the Diaphragm. BB The lower Tendons ( commonly called its pre ccffes ) which arifi by five Heads a/s it we> ( aaaaa ) from the Vertebrae of the Back an Loins. C The hole by which the Aorta ( lying alori the Vertebrae of the Back and Loins ) di fiends. DDDD The fiefhy Fibres of the lower Mufcle i their natural and proper Courfi. E The hole in its car nous part by which the Gull defends . CHAP, XIIL I Of Refpiration. . T H E Adiion to which the Lungs are appoin ed by Nature to mi niftier , is Refpiratio which is an alternative Didfiok and Syfiole dUatatic ?45 }hap. 13 . Of Refpiration. ilatation and contraction of the Breaft , where- y the Air is received in, and driven forth of the .ungs. In dilatation, whereby infpration is perform- Hom^efpU 1, the Lungs are purely paffive ^ for they do not m, f[ w . : all dilate themfelves by any proper power ov^ 0>w: ° culty of their own, being deftitute of inttru- ients to perform fuch an aftion, (viz.. Mufcles either do they attraft the Air by any magnetick roperty : But the Mufcles of the Thorax being 'framed, that tho’ contraction be the only and 'oper action of a Mufcle,yet the Thorax is dilated f certain of them, as it is contracted by others ^ hiltt it is dilated ,there is greater fpace given for tpanding the Lungs, and then the Air partly / the prdTure of the Atmofphere , and partly r its proper elaftiek Virtue ifliies in at the Tra- ea, and infinuates it felf into all its Bronchia , id through them into the PeficuUp nd puffs them 1 up. The manner whereof is very iogenioufly rpreft by Dr. Mayoxo. Namely feeing the Air thro’ the weight of the fuperincumbing Atmo- fphere does not only ru(h into all empty places, but alfo ftrongly prelfes upon whatfoever things are next it ^ it follows that the Air which is continued thro’ the Noftrils and Trachea even to the Bronchia or entrance of the Lungs , doth bear upon the Lungs from within , and endea- vour an entrance into them. Whence it comes to pafs, that, whilft the inlides of the Thorax (which by compreffmg the Lungs from without refitted the pretture of that Airfare drawn out- wards by the Mufcles of the B*eaft that are ap- pointed for its dilatation, and the width of the Thorax is enlarged , that Air which is neareft adjacent to the ofiia of the Bronchia ( all obtta- cles being now removed jrufhes into the cavities 346 Of the Breaft. Book II of the Lungs with all the preffiure of the At 44 mofphere, and puffing them up , occupies anc 44 fills the widened fpace of the Thorax. Nor doe 44 the preffiure of the Atmofphere alone, avai 44 to inlpiration *, but the Elaflick Power of th 44 Air alfo,whereby it endeavours to extend it fel 44 in immcnfum, isaffifling to the fame. Forth 44 Air, efpecially that which is neareft the eartl 44 is compreffied by the weight of the fuperincum 44 bent ; whence it always endeavours to free i 44 felf from that preffiure, much like as a fleec 11 of wooll , when the force that comprefs’d it ; 44 taken away, by a certain motion of reflitutio 44 prefently fpreads and enlarges it felf. Whic 61 may be confirmed by this known Experimen 44 viz.. If a Bladder, out of which the Air is fir 44 in a great meafure preffied,be tyed ftraitly aboi 44 its fphin&er (or neck) and put into a glafs,an “ then the Air be drawn out of that glafs , tl “ Bladder will prefently begin to fwell and pu 4t up to its firft dimenfion. The reafon whereofi 14 That the Air that was in it, though little, whe 44 the external Air (from whofe preffiure the fan 44 w’as driven into a narrow fpace ) is remove 44 prefently expands it felf and puffs up the Blac 44 der, yea, fometimes burfls it with violence. Ju 44 thus is the inflation of the Lungs caufed in ii 44 fpiration : for affioon as the fides of the Thorc 44 (which by compreffing the Lungs make the 44 conckk)are drawn outwards, the Air that 44 at the entrance of the Lungs, whether throu 44 the preffiure of the Atmofphere, or becaufe 44 its own Elaflick virtue, is prefently t'nrufl i 44 to the Lungs, and diftends them.] But in Ex i ration ( or the contraction of the Thorax ) t Air is not only driven forth of the Lungs by t compreffion of the Thorax , but alfo by the co traCti hap. iy. Of Refpiration. 347 la&ion of the mufcular Fibres of the Feficulce ;d of the inner coat of the Trachea and its j onchict. The Mufcles that afTift the dilatation of the Mufcles le aft, are thofe that lift up the Ribs and draw mmflrmg tem backwards •, which fhall be defcribed Book to ffpin u I. Chap. 15. And befides thefe there is another tion ‘ i:ernal Mufcle, namely the Midriff, that contri- ves towards it, as was fhewed Chap. 3. of this 16k, where we treated of it. And as for the faitning or concidence of the Thorax , that it is r.t onely a motion of reftitution . or a ceffacion othe aforefaid Mufcles from their ad ion, is evi- dit, feeing fometimes Expiration is performed e re laborioully and violently than infpiration, a n coughing, hollooing, or the like : And there- in Nature has provided peculiar and proper iffcles for that purpofe, defcribed in the fame Cipter of the Fourth Book and thefe are affiftcd p tly by fome Mufcles of the Abdomen, and partly b the mufcular Fibres of the TeficuU and Bron- as abovefaid. There hath been great Controverfie among wbatklnd Mofophers, whether Refpiration be an Animal of Motion ^Natural Motion. That it is natural is thought Befpimion ; .oe proved, both in that it is performed as well v;n we are afleep , as awake • and alfo that •high it be continued through a Man’s whole 1 , yet we are never wearied with it as we are vh animal and voluntary motions. On the )ter fide, fome prove it to be animal : full be- fe it is performed by fuch Inftruments as ferve 0 animal Motion, namely Mufcles •, and fecond- y'pe.aufe at our pleafure we can make it quicker iflower, ftronger or weaker, or alter it how 'i pleafe. Others thinking the Arguments on * er fide convincing^ take both in, and fuppofe A a it Of the Breajl. Book I 348 it a kind of mixt Action , partly natural , ar partly fpontaneous. But I think there is no n ceffity from the Arguments alledged to grant ti motion to be natural , or any more than anim or fpontaneous. For as to the firjl Argument,!?!) the motion is as well performed when we deep when we are awake, and therefore it cannot voluntary-, if this were allowed to be of fore we mult alfo grant walking and talking to be r tural motions, becaufe many perform them bot when they are afleep. And as to the fecond , frc | our not being wearied by it, in Anfwer to we may diftinguilh of animal a&ions, intofu as are done by inflinft and are free , and it fuch as ferve the affections of the mind : the fc mer proceed always and without impedimei even when we think not thereon, but may n( withftanding be directed and moderated wh we do think of them, and fuch is Refpiratio the latter is not performed continually, as to ril, leap, write, &c. In the former there is a plen • full and continual influx of animal fpirits in the Mufcles, of cuftome or courfe ^ whence the follows no wearinefs , though they be continu;: In the latter, feeing by the determination than made in the Brain, the Spirits now flow in al anon ceafe , fometimes in greater plenty a fometimes in lefs, from this mutation and urn cuffomednefs does the wearinefs proceed. 71s ve Refpiration is fo neceflary to the continual of it, ' 1 of life, that after once the Foetus comes into ' open Air and begins to breathe, it can hardly h two minutes without it. But upon what accol it becomes fo neceflary is not agreed among lea; ed Men, each party exhibiting fuch reafons it, as may beff: fait with their Hypothefes. He fome (and thofe the moll ) think that Helpin' (bap. 13. Of Re fpir at ion. ?49 f ferves for the cooling and ventilating of the Dod that acquires a great heat in the right Ven- tcle of the Heart, and alfo for the carrying out fiiginous fleams therefrom. Others , that it ferves fr the better mixture of the particles of the B)od as it pafles through the Lungs. Others , tit it condenfes the Blood, which was very much riefied in the right Ventricle of the Heart, hereby it comes to take up lefs room in the ._ngs, and pafles the readilier through each Lobe hd the left Ventricle. Others^ that it principal- verves for the Circulation of the Blood thro’ Lungs ^ For in Expiration all the Bronchia ;h the appendant Feficula being in a great mea- nt; emptied of the Air , permit a free entrance r.he Blood into the Lungs by the Vena drteriofa 31 of the right Ventricle of the Heart • but sn the faid Bronchia and VeficuU being filled ijin with Air, do comprefs the Veflels of the Ligs, whereby the Blood that was received into . 1 m in Expiration, is fqueezed out of the Ar- ses into the Veins, and fo its Circulation thro’ $ Lungs promoted • whereas otherwife it would Dnpt to ftagnate and occafion a fuffocation. Dr. %'yow thinks that a double benefit , chiefly , ac- ffws by Refpiration ; firfi , That the Blood by 1 admixture of the Nitro-aereal Particles of f Air is fermented, and freed from coagulati- n, and fecondly , that the fame Nitro-aereal Par- 1 being received into the Blood are carried c:he Brain for the refeftion and fupply of the Lmal Spirits. Laftly, Dr. Willis, Dr. Cbark* 0 &c. think that the Air is drawn in for the inter fubtilization of the Blood, and accend- n or continuing the vital Flame. Some other pinions there are concerning the primary life dllelpiration,’ which we will not recite, as be- A a 7. m§ Of the Breafl. Book 35° ing lefs probable •, and which of thefe produi is the molt likely, we leave the Reader to jud being unwilling to enter into the difpute abi fo difficult a fpeculation in this ftiort Anatomi Treatife. Secondary Ufes of Refpiration are , firjl , form the Voice ; and fecondly, to minifter to ! Senfe of Smelling by drawing or fluffing up I vapours with fome violence through the Noftri without which the Organ of Smelling is but lit affected. Which life Dr. Needham draws fr( Dr. Lower's Experiment : who having cut a Do; wind-pipe afunder in his throat, and turn’d it or ward ( the wound being in other regards hea up again) fo that the Dog took not his breath his mouth or noftrils,but altogether by his thro found, that thereby he loft not his Voice one, but his Smelling alfo wholly, fo that them: ftinking Smells would not excite him. I Tab. XIV. Reprefentcth one Lobe of the Lungs , with its J biles , Membranous Interfaces , &c. from j Willis. Fig. 1. Sheweth one whole Lobe of the Lun in whofe fuperficies the Lymphedu&s appi creeping this way and that way. A The orifice of the Trachea cut off , lying in 1 middle of the Vejfels. B The orifice of the fubjaccnt Pneumonick . tery. ^ _ | C The orifice of the Pncwnonick Fein lying if the Artery . dddd,‘i ( hap. i J. Of the Lobes , &rc. of the Lungs. jji ddd, &c. The outward Lympkedutts difperfed thro ’ the furface of this Lobe . II. Exprefies one Lobe of the Lungs divi- ded into {mailer and very little Lobules , ac- cording to the Ramifications of the Afpera Arteria , the Branchings and ofF-fprings of which Veffel being firft filled by a Liquor in- jefted into them , and then fevered from one another as to the Lobules, were drawn by the Life. j The Trunk of the Afpera Arteria, cut from the f eft of its body. 3 IB Its wider part cut open , that cos well the Holes hat lead into each Branchy as its fir eight mufcular Fibres may be feen. at The aforefaid Holes leading into the Branches hat are extended this way and that way. b) The fir eight mufcular Fibres , whereupon other circular ones lie. Cl The fmaller end of this Trunk intire and {but , that the annular Cartilages may appear . DDD The Tracheal Branches , confiituting the lef- fer Lobules , intire and flout in that place • that the Annular Cartilages may likewife appear in them. EE The like Branches cut open , that the Holes %nd fir eight mufcular Fibres may be feen. FIFF The Stumps from which the Tracheal Bran- ches being cut are removed , that Room may be granted to the refi expanding themfelves after ■heir Divifion. TGG The fecondary Lobules hanging upon the Hems of the Bronchia like Grapes , which may alfo be fubdivided fiill into lefier Lobules , all whofe A a 3 inner ? 5 2 Of the Breafi. Book II inner Duffs pafs out of the Bronchia into the Iff ftculary Cells . HHHH The fanguiferous Veffels creeping through tf. fupsrficies of thofe Lobules. Fig. III. Exprefles a piece of a Pulmonary Lob< wherein the membranous Interftices bein blown up, all the Lobules appear in their pr< per Figure , and fomewhat reprefent a Leaf < Polypody. A A A piece of the Afpera Arteria complicat with the reft of the ye ft els , upon which , made of them all , the Lobules grow like the Leaves a Tree. \ bbbb The Lobules themf elves. cccc The Blood-veftels creeping through them. dddd The membranous Interftices of the Lobul through which the Blood-veftels eeee alfo creep. Fig. IV. Reprefents the divarication of a Tracht Branch diftributed within one Lobule, and Ramification into the Tubes and orbicu' Bladders. A A The ftem of the Afpera Arteria. bbbb The lefter twigs proceeding from that ftem. cccc The tranfit of thefe twigs into the orbicu > Bladders which feem like bunches of Grapes . dd Sanguiferous Veffels diftinff from the Pnem ■ nick , which creep upon the Trachea and ferva murifh it „ C H A ^ i - * • Miap. 14. Of the Neck, 8cc. 35 ? i\ CHAP. XIV. If the Neck and the Parts contained in it, viz, the Larynx. Pharynx, Tonfil- lx, &c. H Aving now difpa'tched all the parts of the ^ Ned, middle Venter or Thorax , we Ihould next )roceed to the high eft, viz,, the Head • but be- wixtthefe two is the Neck fituated, like an Ifth- nus , which therefore we muft take in our way, .nd defcribe the parts contained in it. It is called Collum , either a Colendo , becaufe it Its name, 1 fed to be adorned with Chains, &c. or becaufe t rifeth out of the Trunk of the Body inftar lottvs like an Hill. Collum is a general name for he whole Neck , but the hinder part of it is larticularly called Cervix. The parts of it are either containing , or cm- Tarts con* ained. The containing are the fame which are bund in the reft of the Body , and like them, faving that the Mcmhrana carnofa feemeth to be nore flefhy. The Parts contained are thefe. contained, 1. The Larynx , which is the upper part of i. Larynx, 'he Wind-pipe, and the Inftrument of forming he Voice. It is almoft round and circular in Figure , onely its figure, jetting out a little before, (and fomething flattiih behind,) to give way to the Gullet in fwailowing. Its Bignefs differs according to Age, Sex , and Bigmfs, Temperament, whence proceeds the great biver- fity of Voices. Such in whom it is narrow, as in younger People, have Ihrill and fmall Voices - fuch as have it wide and are come to Maturity, Aa 4 r 3 have Of the Breafl, Book II 3 54 have fuller and more hoarfe. The Voice is alte red alfo in refpecf of the length or fhortnefs o the Larynx , and as the Air is more ftrongly o weakly expelled. 'H ds ‘ It has Arteries from the Carotides , Veins fron the external Jugulars , and Nerves from the re curring Branches of par vagum. subjlme , Befides the Membranes which are common ti it with the reft of the Trachea (defcribed before Chap. 1 2.) it is made up of five Cartilages an< thirteen Mufcles. cmihges. The firfi Cartilage is called SvfsawefoV, fcutifor mis, or Buckler-ltke •, for within it is hollow, bu without imbofTed or convex : that part whic Jfticketh out is called pomum Adami , from an idl Fable,That part of the fatal Apple by God’s judg ment Ituck in his Throat, and that this Cartilag being thereby diftended was made to jet out, ant, the protuberance propagated to Pofterity, It i greater in Men than in Women. In its corner it has four Procelfes , two longer ones above whereby it is joined to the lower lides of thee by cades by the help of a Ligament • and two be low, by which it adheres to the Cartilage nex below it. At the lides of this Cartilage , an< the following, are the Glands placed, called thy reoidea , which Dr. Wharton fays, are of the Ihap of a Pear or Fig, being fomewhat hollow on the, fide next the Afpera Arteria, and fomewhat cop ped on' their outer fide. Their fubffance is mor folid than that of other Glands, and liker to mui cular flelh, though it be not fibrous. They con tribute to the roundnefs of the Neck by fillin up the empty fpaces about the Larynx and th humour feparated in them feems to ferve for th lubricating of the Larynx • whereby the voic pnay be made move fmooth and fweet. n Ihap. 14 . Of the Pharynx. 355 The fecond Cartilage is called xp pper part of the Gullet, which is called Pharynx om ul and at the top of the Larynx , covered with tl common Membrane that inverts ail the Mout Dr Wharton fays , that though they feem tm| yet they are really but; one , being continued t one another by a thin and broad produ&ic which is of the fame glandulous fabrtance wit themfelves. He fays they are of a yellow ifh c< lour, and compares their fubftance to concrete Honey, only they are of a more firm confiftei cy, but they look fandy like it .* They have fmsi VeiTels from the Jugular Feins and Arteries , ar Nerves from the fifth pair, their Dud, They have each a large oval common Duft < Sinus that opens into the Mouth, fo wide in ; Oxe that one may put the tip of the little fing into it. Into this many lefier open, and by difeharge into the Mouth, &c. the liquor that feparated in the Gland. Fallopius hath obferv this aperture or Sinus to look like a fmall ulc when the Gland has been fwelled, and fometirr; by unskilful Perfons to have been treated as fuel, when it has only been forced to gape a little t ; much through the too plentiful defluxion of E moors upon the Gland. ^hap, 14. Of the Glandulae jugulares. 357 The Vfe of thefe Glands was by the Ancients Vfc* uppofed to be only to feparate a certain mucous >r pituitous matter from the Blood , for the noiftening and lubricating of the Larynx, Tongue, 7 auces and Gullet : but Dr. Wharton, and as ma~ ly as attribute a fermentative quality to the Salt- m , afcribe a more noble ufe to them viz., to tiake a Ferment to further the concodfiou of the itomach : yea, Dr. Wharton , ( but I think mifta- ;ingly ) thinks that they are the chief Inftrument )f Tafte. 0 ■ Befides thefe there are other Glands in theNeck, 4. Gian- vhieh from their fituation Dr. Wharton calls Ju- dulse Ju. 'mlares\ for they are feated by the fidesof the Ju- Scares. ;i11 j $ular VelTels. He fays he has obferved them to be fourteen on each fide, befides another longifh one 'eparated from the reft, lurking on each fide at K J :he root of the procejjus Jlyloides between the Muf- :les of the Neck and jugular Veftels. The upper- 31 moft are paleft of colour, and the lower the red- der. They grow in knots as it were, and are of in unequal bignefs, varying from the fmalnefs of ' ; Coriander-feed to the bignefs of a Bean. They have no proper excretory veflel, and fo are of the nature of conglobate Glands, which return, it] the Lympha by the Lymphedu&s into the Blood* Gb Among or near unto thefe Glands are commonly thofe ftrumous fwellings that are fo frequent in the Neck. As for thofe other Glands which are commonly reckoned as Parts contained in the Neck, viz. the Maxillar and Parotides • becaufe their excre- tory Veffels difcharge that liquor that is feparated in them into the Moutb.we fhall defer the defer!- ption of them to the Twenty fixtb Chapter of the Third Book which treats of the inner parts of the Mouth 0 Neither (hall we here mention the Veins ?5« Of the Breajl. Book II. and Arteries that pafs through the Neck to the Head, having defcribed them before, in Chap. 9. and 11. And as to other Parts that make up the Neck, viz,, the feven Vertebra, and eight Mufcles, thole will come to be treated of in their proper Books : And therefore omitting them here, we Ihall pafs on to the Head. The End of the Second Book. The Third Book , i, l la'! ! F i O F T H E HEAD CHAP. I. If the Head in general, and its common con- taining Parts, O W followeth the third and higheft ^ Venter of the Body, called Caput , the Head. This is the moffc noble Cavity of the three , containing the Brain, vherein the rational Soul more efpecially ope- •ates, and whereby all the animal motions of the vhole Body are moderated and determined j as veil as performed by means of the Spirits elabo- rated in it, and fent into all the parts by the Serves. It is feated in the higheft place of the Body, be- its Seat, :aufe it contains the Organs of the Senfes , moft )f which perform their office more advantage- Hilly by this fublime (Ituation. For from hence :he Eyes can behold things remote , as from a kVatch-tower^ here the Ears draw in the founds hat fly aloft • and the Noftrils receive the a- cending Odours. Its figure is fpherical •, yet fomewhat flattifh, >t e, md longifh. It Of the Head. Book III. 360 Bignefs. it is bigger in Man than in other Creatures, confidering the proportion of their Bodies ^ as his Brain that is contained in it , alfo is. Pam. Th e parts are of three forts, for they are 1. dift indive, or 2. expreffive of the regions, or 3. conftitutive of the whole. The parts dijlin&ive are two, the hairy fcalp called Calva , and that without hair called Facies. The parts which exprefs the regions (of the firffc,) are four : 1 . Sinciput or the fore-part,reach- ing from the Forehead to the coronal future; 2. Occiput the Noddle, or hinder part, beginning at the future Lambdoides , and reaching to the firft 'vertebra of the Neck, 3. Vertex , the Crown, which is fituated on the top of the Head between the bounds of the Sinciput and Occiput. And 4. the lateral parts defeending from this on each fide between the Ears and Eyes , called Tempora. or the Temples. The parts conftitutive are either containing , ot contained. The containing are either common 01 proper. The common are thofe we treated of in Chap. 3. of the Firft Book. The Cuticula is thin- ner and fofter ^ but the Skin thicker than in any other part of the Body, yet porous , that room may be left for the Hair to grow, and for its nou- rudiment to pafs to it. The Menibrana carnofa it fome aboundeth fo with Mufcular Fibres , and cleaveth fo ciofe to the Skin , that they can mov< it at their pleafurc. We ihall not need to fay more here of theft or of other the common containing parts , but re- fer the Reader to the above- cited place : anc now proceed to the proper f having firft difeourfee a little of the Hairr Chap Of the Hair. Hiap. 2. 361 CHAP. II. Of the Hair. r H E Hairs of the Head are called in Latin Head. Capilli , quail Capitis pili , and differ not from Ils mme * he Hairs in any other part of the Body , fave in -ngth. Now an Hair may be defined to be a body cold Definition, nddry , fmalf thread-like , bard and flexible, had- ing from the Skin. The Hairs are feldom round, but generally Figure. )ur-fquare , as the ftalks of fome Plants fome- imes triangular, but always porous, the pores unning length-ways. All thefe things may be bferved by the help of a good Microfcope. 'hey are fometimes curled, and fometimes hang ink. Hairs are commonly divided into Congenitifl uch Divifiom > we bring into the World with us, as thole of he Head , Eyelids , and Eyebrows ^ and Pofl- eniti , fuch as begin to grow at certain feafons in ur life-time , as the Beard , the Hairs growing bout the Pudenda , on the Breafl, in the Armpits, nd the like. They are no parts of the Body, and therefore Life, ave no Animal life ^ yet they have a Vegetative fe, and that peculiar to themfelves , and not wing to the life of the Body, feeing they conti- ueto grow after a Man is dead, as has been oh- :rved in embalmed Bodies. Diemerbroeck ( and Tore him Malpighius') ingenioufly compares them o Polypody, or fome other Plant growing upon n old Tree, which continue to grow after the Tee is dead as they did before , becaufe they 3 6 2 Of the Heal Book III. have a proper life diftindft from the form or ani- ma of the Tree out of which and in which they grow. The matter out of which they are bred and Generation nourifhed is commonly reputed to be a moiff, fuli- & Nourijh- gj nous ^ cva f s ^ earthy and fomewhat vifcid excre* rnent of the third concodtion. Spigelius thinks they are nourifhed by Blood .• which opinion he grounds on an analogy he fuppofes there is be- tween Hair, and the Feathers of Fowl • and thefe latter he fays are apparently nourifhed by Blond, for if one pull one from off a young Fowl, its end isbloudy. Diemerbroeck diffents not much here- from, but thinks the Bloud to be prepared and concoftedinafpecifical manner into a crafs, earthy and vifcid juice. Whatever the matter of their murifhmcnt be , it is attracted by the white roots of the Hairs , and is carried even to their very ends by the pores ^ juft as Plants receive nourifh- ment out of the Earth by their Roots , and com- municate it to their outmofl parts. Malpigkm fays, their head or root being round and mucous, is fet in a kind of Oval- Cafe, (as in a Flower-pot) to which cafe a Nerve is evidently propaga- ted. Colour. The colour of them differs according to the Cli- mate, or to the natural conftitution of the party, or to the diverfity of thofe humours that are mix- ed with the juice whereby they are nourifhed. In thofe of cold flegmatick conflitutions they ufe tc be of a light colour in cholerick , reddifh , &c, They are molt commonly ftreight in thofe which are born in cold Countries , but curled in thofe who inhabit hot Climates. v/hy Hair And as the reafon of the difference of the co- turns white, lour of the Hair in feveral perfons is from diffe- rent temperaments, &c. fo the reafon why Mer ir ^hap. 2. Of the Hair. i old Age gro w grey , whenas their Hair before as of another colour, feemeth to be the predo- inance of flegm in that juice that nourilheth lem : whence alfo the Hairs of the Head and ice fooneft turn white , becaufe the Brain does ore abound with pituitous humours than any :her part of the Body. But it is not fo eafie to ve a reafon of fome Mens turning grey in one ghts time , when they have been under great ars ^ ( of which there are many inftances credibly ported.) Yet Diemerbroeck gives a reafon fome- hat probable, vit. “ That in great fear and ter- tour, the heart by accident is in great anguifh, whence it beats little and very weakly , fo that fome from this caufe fall into a fwoon : by rea- fon of the weak pulfe little blood is impelled in- vito the outer parts , whence by and by they grow cold and (tiff • blood failing in the Skin, 0Dr | the colour alfo in the juice that nouriihetli | the Hair, is by and by changed from that ! which before was induc’d upon it from the hu- 3K 'mours mingled with the biood : Then if by '“chance whitilh pituitous humours ftuck before in the Skin, they will prefently infed the juice “that nourilheth the Hair with the prevalency ' of their own colour, which juice palfing through the Hair continually even to their end,and nou- ‘rilhing them , their Colour may from hence "se changed in a Ihort time, and become white, feeing their fubftance is diaphanous as it were, ‘ ealily admitting of any Colour which is com- 'municated to it with the nourilhment.] See his corp. human, p. 559, 550. where he anfwers Ine Objections that may be made again# this Hinion, Book III 364 Of the Head . Tbeir/ufe. The Hairs have three Vfes : for they ferve, ij for Defence, 2. for Beauty, and 3. lhew the ten perature of the whole Body and Skin. CHAP. III. Of the proper containing Parts. T H E proper containing Parts are fix \ to w the Mufcles , the Pericranium , the Periofiem the Cranium , and the two Meninges. Look f the Mufcles in the Fifth Book , and for the Cr nium in the. Sixth. Of the other here. An Firft, the Pen- The Pericranium ( which is fo called from cranium, being extended ^ to Kggriw about the Skull ) i Membrane foniewhat thin , denfe and white , exquifite fenfe , immediately feated under t Membrana carnofa. It covereth the whole Sk next above the Periofteum , except where t ; temporal Mufcles lie upon th e Cranium , for : is fl retched over them •, and feeing it is very fee- ble and tender , it caufeth horrible pain a! inflammation , when the temporal Mufcle i wounded. xion° me ' It is knit to the Dura Mater by fome nerve Fibres, which pafs from it to within the Skull 1 its futures, to ftay firmly the Dura Mater^anda: the Brain which it inverts, from violent cone ; fion. For though in Infants new-born thefe : ftrongly united and in a manner continued, in much that th ^.Pericranium is faid by fome to fprii from the Dura Mater •, yet in procefs of ti 1 they part fo, as to be knit to one another enj by thefe nervous Fibres, by which yet,inflammr CNap. 2. Of the proper containing Parts. ins may be communicated from the Pericranium 0 the Brain. Next under the Pericranium is fpread the Pc- Periods* '•ofieum, which immediately cleaveth to the Skull, um - nd gives it that fenfe which it hath. It felf is very thin and nervous Membrane, and of very :ute fenfe. All the Bones of the whole Body except the Teeth ) are inverted with fuch alike lembrane , and owe their fenfe to it, Dr„ (avers thinks, 11 there is little reafon to maite the pericranium a diftind membrane from, the periofleum of the Skull . For although it be di- vided at the temporal Mufcles ^ this is no more than what the feveral feries of fibres do make the pcrwfieutn capable of in the Leg, or any o- ther part and I have upon the {bin-bone of an Ox divided it into four or five feveral mem- branes, if 1 may fo call them, when it has been dried.] To this I anfwer , that though the mfieum may every where be di-viftblc ; Yet r ature having divided it in no other place, I link ’tis more reafonable to adhere to the former pinion,than to believe {he does any thing lingular ere. Tbefe two Membranes outwardly inverting the P'-etr vef- ranium have Arteries from a branch of the ex- :rnal Carotides. and Veins from the external Ju* 1 1 * mars. The Meninges follow, called by the Arabians The Me- fatrcs • as if all the Membranes of the Body ninges, ere propagated from them. Thefe are imme- jately within the Skull, as the other were with- it • but adhere not dole thereto, as thofe do. hey are two in number : the Crajja Meninx or } ura Mater , 'and the Tenuis Meninx or Pia (ater. B b 2 The 3 66 Of the Head. Book II] Dura Ma- The Dura Mater is the outer, that is , is nex - Cf * to the Skull , through whofe Sutures fending Fi bres to ( or receiving them from ) the Pericraniun it is fufpended thereby j for in other places it i loofe from the Cranium , faving in its bafa t which it is fo firmly knit, that it can hardly b pulled from it ^ or where it is fufpended by Vei fels entring into it from the perforations of th Skull or laftly where it adheres to the Os cribn forme at the top of the Nofe , and fends jag through its holes. It is thicker and harder tha the inner , whence it has the Epithet of Dure hard. It confifts of a double Membrane , th outer of which is more rough, towards the Cro, nium y having very fmall and hardly vifible fibres the inner on its fuperficies next the Via Mater more fniooth and flippery, being bedewed with kind of water , and has very itrong and larg fibres* This infide is loofe, faving that near th; Sinus' s it is knit to the Via Mater by the inferti ons of the Veins, and in the Bafts of the Sku by the Arteries and Nerves. /k na ,. j r [las rr any foramina or holes for the tranfit ( the Vefiels • and befides, one very large one i its Bafts for ti;e deicent of the fpinal Marrov and another fmall one which forms the uppe! orifice of the Infundibulum . Vcjj'd;. It has Arteries { rom the larger branches of th Arteties. internal Carotidcs , (entring into it through tl holes of the wedge-like Bone ) and Feins fro; 1 ' the internal Jugulars. The Veins Dr. Ridley (i his Anatomy of the Brain) fayes , run for fon fpace betwixt its two lamina (as he calls them) t memhuines, after the manner of the Ureters i the bladder, in large trunks, before they cnt< the fmus' s by and by to be deferibed. Dr. Will obferves, That its outer fuperficies has no whe> :hap. Of the proper containing Parts, 3 67 many twigs of Veins as of Arteries^ but that out 'its four ftnus's (which are the venous receptacles the Blood) more Veins go forth through its in - ir fuperficies, which being prefently inferted into eTia Mater are difperfed all over it, and every here meeting the Arteries afcending from the afts of the Head, and being branched with them, ake manifold plexus of Veffels. Dr Ridley fayes, t is Membrane has plenty of Nerves from the S'er-ess. ; remoft branch of the fifth pair, and is thereby ade very fenfible. At the Crown of the Head it is doubled Tahe- d its duplicature defcending inwards, di- des the Brain into the right and left fide: t its defcent is not quite to the Bafts of ie Brain, but only through the cortical part ^ for iward the Bafts both fides of the Brain are con- guous to one another, making one continued Ba- ir, namely that part of it which is called Corpus i llofum , of which in the next Chapter. This du- icature, becaufe it is broader backwards, and ows narrower forwards, and fo refemblesin me manner a Reaper's Sickle, is called Falx. dw this Falx reaches as far forwards as to the p of the Nofe, where it is knit to the upper pro- ofs of the Os cribriforme that Hands up betwixt ! e Procejfus mamrnillares , and is called Galli crifla Cock’s Comb. But its hinder and broader part wards the Occiput being fevered, defcends to- ards both the right and left fide , and parts the 1 rebellum from the Cerebrum. In the faid duplicature are formed four Sinus* s sinus. Cavities, three pretty large, and one little ur, viz., two Carotides and two Vertebrals. The ertebral Arteries being united at the Bafts of the cull, and making a fingle trunk, it meets and tins with the hinder branches of the Carotides • id from the place of their coalition a veryjemar- able branch afcends on either fide under the limbus fthe Brain, which being carried above the crura f the Medulla oblongata is divided into very many 8 b 4 (lender Book III 31 o Of the Head. flender and as it were capillary twigs, fome o which afcend to the Glands featecj behind the Ce rebel, and the reft make the Arterial part of th Plexus Cboroides, The fore branches of the Caro tides do alfo unite one with the other ^ and hot! before and after their joining fend forth twigs al over this Membrane, but chiefly in the fore- par of the Brain. Its reins arife from the four Sinus' of the Dura Mater , ( as was obferved above fror Dr. Willis) and thefe meeting with one another ar diverfly interwoven one with another and wit the Arteries, and return the fuperfluous Blocr by the Jugular Veins to the Heart. Note, That thefe two Membranes fthe Dura ait Pia Mater) npt only inveft the Brain, but the Spi nal Marrow alfo, and all the Nerves that fprin from either : And that the inner coat of the Pi Mater yields a covering to every Angle Fibrm that each Nerve is made up of, whence come the confent betwixt part and part, and betwixt a and the Brain. CHAR IV, Of the Brain in general. the Brain . T H E Pia Mater being taken away, the Brat occurs next ; by which here we mean in tl. general, all that foft fubftance which is contair ed within the whole Skull, and which the Greel comprehend under the word kyw&K©-. It is tl general Organ of fenfe, in which the Soul, tl Governour of the Body , perceives and judget of the Senfations of all fentient Parts ^ and of of which, as out of a Fountain, it communic teth the Animal Spirits ( bred In the Brain J 1 i ' ' V* : ! : ' H 3 ' tl :hap. 4. Of the Brain in general. 371 ie Duds or Rivulets of the Nerves to all the -.ntient parts of the Body, and thereby endows em with the Faculty of performing Animal ftions. The Brain being of fo loofe a Subftance, and The diffi- e Skull wherein it is inclofed, fo hard, that the cuhjofdiP* w orGhizzel are neceffary to break through it, fading iu e Brain mult needs be very much fhatter’d and "ncufled thereby ; and after the Skull is divided, the very pulling of it off, the vafcular connexion r the Dura Mater and it with the Pia Abater & Brain, (and that alfo of the one with the herj being torn in funder, the parts into which e VeOels are inferted, are necefiariiy much vio- ted : and laftly, after the covers are removed, veral parts of the Brain being of fuch difficult ;cefs, that others mult be quite fpoiled, before ie can come to a view of them , and thefe alfo ereby in part violated : Upon all thefe a c- unts a true Anatomy of the Brain , as to its ontiguities, Connexions, Cavities or Ventricles, c. mult be very difficult ^ fo that ’tis no won- :r the obfervations of Anatomiffis are fo diffe- nt, and fo oppohte to one another. But this r the bye. Pafs we on now to difcourfe of the rain more generally. If by Brain we underfland the whole Ence- its Sub - alos , ( or all that which is contained within the fiance, ;ull) it is not of one Subftance, but divers: And diftinguiffied by the particular names of the Ce- brum, (in fpecial)the Cerebellum , and the Medul- oblongata. Nor is the Cerebrum (properly fo cal- d) it felf of a like fubftance, but confining of a ortical, and a Medullar part/ called Corpus Callo- m) thefe differ in their nature, colour and confi- ence. Which difference Malpigbius thus de- fribes, The Cortex vbeing of an Alh- colour) he Of the Head. Book III 37 2 fays, 44 is glandulous. The outfide of the Gland 44 is covered with the Pi a Mater , and its Blood 44 velfels , which penetrate deep into their Sut 44 ftance ^ ( each Gland having a twig of both a “ Artery and a Vein : ) their inner fide fend 44 forth a white nervous Fibre, like a proper Vei is fel as it were, fo far as their brightnefs an u whitenefs permit one to difcover. Thefe F u bres make up all the Pith ( or Corpus callofun, 44 which is of a more clofe and folid Subftanc 44 than the Cortex. They are flattilhly rounc 44 and are not unlike thofe white Bodies, c 64 Intejl inula , which the Tefticles are made u 44 of ^ and in the Ventricles of the Brains of Fil 44 they are fo apparent, that if you hold them bi| 44 twixt you and the light , they reprefent t 44 fmall teeth of an Ivory Comb. He faith the 44 are inferted by their ends into ( or rather ari 44 out of) the Cortex or afh-coloured outer pai 44 of the Brain , and feem all of them to ha^ u their egrefs out of (or rather ingrefs into ) tl 44 trunk of the fpinal Marrow within the Skull, Whether they be hollow or not , or whether ; they are collected into a bundle they have n< Pores and Interlaces arifing therefrom , whi( tranfmit a peculiar juice into the Nerves cont nued to them, he leaves undetermined ■, becau they neither admit of ligature , nor can fen make any difcovery thereof. Dr. Ridley (fro Lcvoenhoeck ) offers at a yet finer defcription | thefe two parts of the Brain , which the curio Reader may find in his Anatomy of the Brain , 89, & c. As for the other parts of the Encepbah viz. the Cerebel and tJMedulla oblongata , the Subflance fhall be tr eated of afterwards , when v come to their Defcription, T 'hap. 4. Of the Brain in general. 373 The Brain receives Blood by Arteries derived Vejfds. om the Carotides and Cervical , whofe Capil- ries are difperfed chiefly through its cortical irt. Thefe Arteries are fo large and numerous, lat a third part at leaft of the whole Mafs of lood is conveyed hither by them •, which feeing irough the fmallnefs of the Brain it cannot be >nfumed in its Nutrition, Mnlfigbius thinks in robable that the coagulative ( or concrefcible ) trum is filtred as it were in the Cortex (or glan- ilous part ) of the Brain from the Arterial lood, and that the Fibres of the Corpus Callofwn , fo many roots implanted into the faid Cortex , nbibe this Strum and convey it to the Medulla ’ longata as the trunk, from whence it is derived ito the Nerves as the branches, and is there the uccus Nervofus, if not the Animal Spirit it felf. art nourilhes the Brain it felf, and what is fu- erfluous to both thefe Ufes , is partly refumed / the Veins of the Meninges (whofe twigs reach ) the feveral Glands of the Cortex ) and partly epofited in the Sims ’ s of the Dura Mater by the irteries themfelves, out of which it is reforbed y the internal branches of the Jugulars , and iereby conveyed back to the Heart. The Arte- ies inofculate one with another ( i. e. the right 'arotides with the left) and fo do the Veins alfo ^ ut not the Arteries with the Veins. It is from he Pulfe of the Arteries altogether , that the eating (or Syflole and Diajlole as it were) of the irain proceedeth. A Man of all other living Creatures hath the Bignefs. iggefi Brain ^ for it weigh eth four or five pound 1 fome ^ and is as big again as an Oxe’s >iain. The outer furface is full of Windings , like Figure, hofe of the Guts , which are feveral! y inverted will? 574 Of the Head. Book III with the Pia Mater , as alfo tied together by it The whole Brain is much of the lame Shape wit the Head, viz., roundilh, but with bunchings on towards the Forehead. Of its Attion we fhall fpeak in the Nint! Chapter. CHAP. V. Of the manner of differing the Brain : of ti. Brain properly fo called , the Fornix, Sej turn, and the three Ventricles. T Here are feveral methods of difle&ing tl Brain ; fome beginning at the Crow; which was the old way *, fome on the right fid as Sylvius ■, and fome behind , as Dr. Wtllv. whofe Anatomy of the Brain being much mot accurate than that of any before him , we wi endeavour to give a fnort but faithful abftra of it. the manner Having taken out of the Skull the whole Enc of differing phalos , or all that which is contained under ti she Brain. name Brain taken in a large fenfe, firft of all 1 the hinder limbus or bordure of the Brain prope' Jy fo called , where it is knit to the Cerebellum and Medulla oblongata , be freed as clear as nr be from its cohelion with the fubjacent pari cutting afunder the velTels and the membranes c every hand, for by thefe onely is it joined them, its hinder part being thus loofened , li jt up and turn it forwards , whereby the Cru, of the Medulla oblongata will lie bare , and T three Ventricles of the Brain, commonly fo calle [ yvid becorn? one empty face , as being a vacui refulti; ,'hap. 5. Of the Brain properly fo called , 375 fulting merely from the complication of the rain. Moreover one may then fee, how the ?o tips of the Crura of the Medulla oblongata ;e knit in two places to the Corpus callofum or ;;dullar part of the Brain*, as alfo obferve the mix fo called, how it is like a fubtenfa , or line awn under the arch of a circle , which begin- ig before, where the aforefaid tips of the ura adhere to the Brain , runs to the Brain’s l ider bordure , to which it is united by two i etched out arms as it were , and fo keeps the uole compages of the Brain in a fpherical figure, iidring it from fpreading into a plane , and ties i firmly to the Crura of the Medulla oblongata. This is Dr. Willis’ s manner of diiledtion, uerein the parts occurr to the Diffedfors in- ft&ion in this order. Firft the Brain it felf , whofe outer fui face is The Brain e full of windings, like the convolutions of the property f» (its : It is exactly divided by the Falx ( above- cfcribed) into two hemifpheres, a right and left-^ :d thefe are imperfedtly fubdivided each into 1 0 Lobes , a fore and an hinder , by a large Unch of the Carotid Artery running crofs the i ddle of them. How deep the Falx enters into te Brain, and of what fubftance the Brain is, has ten lhewn in the former Chapters : We lhall cly further note here concerning its fubftance, tit its medullar part (or Corpus callofum ) is both ticker and clofer by much in the fore parts of t:h hemifphere than anywhere elfe *, and that were it is thickeft, it adheres on each fide to the tis of the Crura of the Medulla oblongata ( called c pora Jlriata : ) but from thefe tips, as from its te, being expanded towards the hinder parts, it lows thinner by degrees , and towards irs outer Irdure its under fide is knit to the Caudex or trunk Of the Head. Book I] J7 6 trunk of the Medulla oblongata by membranes ai veffels. Fornix. Which membranes and vefTels being cut in fu der, and the Brain turned up forwards as abov direded, on its inner or under fuperficies the appears a medullar Procefs called Fornix , whi fpringing forth of the Corpus callofum with double root, is united into one broad Proc< near the place where the tips of the Crura of t Medulla oblongata adherf to the under-fide or rr dullar part of the Brain , and ferves as a Subter to its Arch, ( as was noted before. ) Under t double root of the Fornix there lies a mediil)| Trunk, like a large Nerve, running crofs t: Brain and joyning one Corpus firiatum to theothi And out of the middle fuperficies of the Jonr there Hands up a thin and pellucid Septum or P; ■ tition, which is faften’d to the roof or arch : the Corpus callofum almoft through its who Dud. Septum. This Septum Columbus affirms to be membi nous, and Malpighius will have it to confift ftreight Fibres running lengthways from befc backwards. And thus while the three-fided F nix doth fubtend the Arch that arifes from t complication of the Brain , it divides its Cavh as it were into three Partitions , and makes the look like fo many rentricles 7 by which name thl have been deferibed by former Anatomifts. Three Ven- To thefe three Ventricles thus accidentally fo tricks, nied, the Ancients have attributed a noble Uf : determining them to be the Work-houfe of t: Animal Spirits, where they are both general, and perform the chief works of the Anin Fundion. Fracaffatus ( who calls the Brain! Wind-Inftrument , fomew hat analogous to t: Lungs J thinks that a purer fort of Air afeers throu ;hap. 5. Of the Brain property fo called , 377 irough the Os cribriform into the two fore Ven- •ides , (where it is ethereized) and paffes out : them into the third , and thence into the urth (to bedefcribed in Chap. 7 .) by which it conveyed into the fpinal Marrow, where being ixed with the nervous juice , it therewith con- futes the Animal Spirit, and likewife promotes s motion. Where, and whereof the Animal Spi- ts are generated, we fhall confider. Chap. 9. and all here lhew a more probable life of thefe Veh- icles. They have been commonly diftinguifhed to two anterior , and one poflerior. But the truth , there is but one Cavity or Vacuum , and in- sad of that noble Ufe heretofore afcribed to it, te Anatomifts make it only as a fink or com- on-fewer for excrementitious matter to be col- led in, and to be difcharged out of again by con- sent ways. This excrementitious matter is ge- :rally a ferous hfimour (or rather lympba ) which feparated from the Blood in the adjacent Plexus j> oroides by the help of thofe many Glands that lat Plexus is befet withal, and of the Glandula pi- 'dlvs which the Plexus hangs upon and is woven )Out like a button. As to the exit of this ferous imour , formerly it has been fuppofed to flow om hence to the Proceffus mammillares , and from em to deftill through the Os cribriforme into the ofe. But Dr. Lower denies any fuch office of the r cribriforme , affirming that the holes in it are 1I7 for the tranfit of the Nerves and IVlembranes >ing forth from the Proceffus , and that thefe fill lem fo clofe that nothing can flow through them, nd fays. That the flux of Rheum through the ofe, and upon the Vvula , or into the Mouth,drc, Catarrhs, falls not from the Head, butisfepa- ted from the Arteries in the Glands of the re- eftive parts, as into theNofe through the Glands of 378 Of the Head, Book III of its inverting Membrane, &c. And as to the f< rous matter that is poured into thefe Sinus * s in tl Brain, he fays, it is all abforbed again by the Ve fels gaping into them , and returns by the Jugul Veins to the Heart. CHAP. VL Of the Medulla oblongata and its fore fart viz,. Crura, Corpora If riata , Nervorui opticorum Thalami , Nates and Telfe with the V ulva and Anus ; as alfo of ti Glandula pinealis , Plexus choroides , at, Infundibulum. T H E Brain continuing turned up forwards, above-direfted , the Medulla oblongata li open to view, whofe Parts, &c. we fhall defcril in this Chapter. 7J.~e Rife of The Medulla oblongata feems to arife from tl the Medul- Corpus caliofum by two Heads refernbling the le la oblon- ter y, and the united Trunk by and by defcend S ata * out of the Skull down the Spine, wherein it is cal led the final Man ovo , of which afterwards. Frt cajjdtus quertions whether the Brain , and the G rebell alfo be not rather appendices of, or prop gated from the Medulla finales and oblongata , th< thefe from thofe ; feeing in the Embryo or fir lineaments of a Chicken in the Egg , ifyouprii the Carina (or long thread that afterwards b comes the back ) with a pin, it will contra# felf , whilrt in the Seat of the Brain there is n< thing but a Lympka not yet fixed into a Brai But this by the bye. T "hap. 6. Of the Medulla oblongata, &c. $79 The Sub fiance of the Medulla oblongata is not Its Su b- ke that of the Brain , confiding of ah outward fi aneei r cottical part of an alhy colour , and of an in- er Medullar and white ; but its whole compages medullar j yet it is not pure and fhining , but usky from its many Fibres that hold a various mrfe ; for in fome parts they are ftriated or idious as it were ^ in others direct , running ingthways, and in others circular. Its two heads or beginnings are called its Cm- Crura and ^ and the tips or extremities of thefe Crura Corpora e called Prominentia lentiformes , or otherwife ' nata ’ orpora Jlriata , front the conrfe that their Fibres :ep. Their ends are blunt , and by a pretty rge fpace of their furface adhere to the medui- r fubftance of the Brain where it is thickeft. If le eut them in funder lengthways , then may 1; obferve their ftria t which have a double ten- ancy for fome defcend from their tip towards ie Medulla oblongata , and others feem to afcend om their lower part towards the medullar part ' the Brain, the one meeting the other. So that r the help of thefe Fibres there feems to be a ee paflage for the Animal Spirits from the Brain the Medulla oblongata , Or back again, as there occafion. We obferved above in the former titter, hoW there is a medullar procefs that run- :ng a-crofs joins one Corpus jlriaturh to the other id ihall onely note here further^That juft behind e lower end of thefe Bodies the Procejfus nianU •Wares or fmelling Nerves have their rife from 1 e Medulla oblongata. When thefe Nerves are arifen out of it , its Thalanil ■wa rife into uneven protuberances, out of nervorum 'hich fpring theOptick Nerves , and therefore ■ efe protuberances are called Nervorum opticorum * hdldfnj i (what fomTe both the Olfaftory and G e ©pieU 380 Of the Head, Book II —■a—— —— — — — 1 — — — Optick Nerves hold towards the Nofe and Eye lhall be (hewn in Ch. 1 o.) On the outfide of thefe, Dr. Ridley fayes he h; always found and often fhewed a very fair raedu lary trad, running all along betwixt the corpm Jlriata , and from the very hindermoft extent the Corpora Jlriata forwardly, down to the vei roots of the Fornix , to which they feem to I continuous. Behind thefe Thalami the two Crura of the m dulla oblongata unite into one trunk , upon who upper fide there grow four more notable proti berances, covering its furface for about the fpai of an inch, which yet they do not touch in tl middle , having a cavity under them. The: grow two on each fide , the two formore 1 which are called Nates , and the two hind Tejles. Nates and The Nates (or Buttocks^) are the larger oftl Jeftes« two , and the Tejles feem onely to be an Epipbyj or accretion to thefe. They are all four like ; • • many round hillocks, and are joined one to an< ther by certain procefles. Under them , or rJ ther betwixt their junctures and the trunk of tl Medulla oblongata that lies there-under , there left a narrow but long cavity or chink, called l Vulva &ni the fanciful name ol vulva , into which the; Anus. opens another paffage called anus , and both ri by a ftrait duft down into the Infundibulum. / to the Ufes of the Nates and Tejles , the learm Reader may do well to confult Dr. Will'vs large difcourfing thereof , in Cerebr. Anat. p. 93, but I fhal l not enter upon that Difpute, as beir too conje&ural and doubtfull. fUandul® Betwixt the Nates and the Thalami Nervoru giaealis. opttcorum 7 in a valley as it were, is feated a Gla; duk, (of the conglobate or lymphatick kin< calk (lap. 6. Of the Medulla oblongata, &c. 381 : led in Greek , in Latin P.neaiis , from itfhape, arillng from a broad Bafis to a narrower oped top, fomewhat refembling a Pine-apple, its fatten’d to the fubjacent part , fometimes by ray (lender Fibres, and fometimes by two nota- y medullar Roots. Its Subttance is harder than :lt of the Brain, and of a pale colour. It is in- lied in a Membrane ( which is a portion of the P Mater) as in a bag or cafe : which Membrane ing full of Arteries and Veins, fome of thefe tier into the Gland it felf. This Gland De§ C tes thinks to be the primary feat of the Soul, 11 that all Animal Operations draw their Ori- m from it : But that feems to be too noble an J: for it ^ and it is more likely that it is onely )j he nature of other Glands which are feated nr the concourfe of fanguiferous Veffels, namely : 1 c it may receive into it ferous humours de- nted from the Arterial Blood, and retain them d either the Veins becoming more empty reforb : 1 m, or Lympheduds (where there are anyj :cvey them away. That this is the true ufe of the Glandula pinealvs plexus she more probable, from that notable plexus ofchoroidesi Blod-veffels that encompaffes it, and hangs upon •t 5 it were, called plexus Chor aides , which is 'tftituted after this manner. From each fide of tjf medulla oblongata, where the limbus of the Brain s nit to it, there afcend in a (freight courfe two S eries arifing from the hinder branches of the \ hotides where they are joined to the Verte- ill, which being by and by divided into very nliy fmall twigs , and being met by as many v^s of Veins coming from the fourth Ventricle •I he Dura Mater ( which defcends upon th eglan~ h 1 pinealvs ) form this plexus , wherein both forts ■l/eilelsare very much interwoven one with Cc 2 another,, hi Vfe. another, and which fpreads it felf on each hai (as by two expanded wings ) upon the crura the medulla oblongata as far as to the corpora jlrk yet thefe Veflels run almoit onely upon the il face of the medulla , making no deep infertions ther into it , or into the corpus catlofum unt which they are alfo fpread. This Plexus is be with very many fmall glands , which are all them red , and almoft fpherical , only a lit flattifh. Belides the Veins and Arteries that conftit this plexus , Dr. Ridley mentions a third fort veflel, viz.. Lymphcdutts , which he firft difeove in the Brain of a ftrangied body , running in et ferent ramifications amongft the reticulated tif fels and glands of this part. 44 Which obfervat ; (fayeshej “being added to that of the gri 44 Anatom ill Anthony Nuck , (who in that curi s 41 piece called Adenograpbia , fayes , he faw i 44 coming from the glandula pinealvs , and that « 44 Friend, another Anatomiil , fent him wo “he faw another not far from the aforel; 44 place,) may be of fufficient authority to evi J < “the real exigence of thefe Veflels hitherto i 44 much enquired after, in the Brain, as well aiiji 44 other parts of the body. According to Dr. Willis , it has a dot! ufe : firft , he fays , that the more watery pf of the Blood defigned for the Brain , is l| into the veflels of this Plexus , that the remain: may be more fincere and defecate for the makj of Animal Spirits : which watry part, if it be ! plentiful that it cannot be all received into i Veins, to be returned to the Heart, it is then ; ceived into the fmaller glands wherewith i Plexus is befet, but efpecially by the glandula 1 nealis juft now defcribed 3 by which it is either!! tail)! :ap. 6 . Of the Me Julia oblongata, &c. i ed} or it it abound, may deftil from them in- t< the fubjacent cavity, as into a fink. (But there isio need of its either being retained in the .finds, or elfe of its deftiiling into the fubjacent ;;ity, feeing the Lymphedudh juft now menti- 3 :d are proper redu&ory vefiels for it J A fecond 3 ce is, to preferve within the plicature of the 6iin ( or in the corpus callofum ) an heat, which haifed from the Blood ( as from a fire ) that e sates in the complications of the velfels of the Ixus , and which caufes the Animal Spirits to c :ulate in the corpus callofum. Thus far as to the parts which appear on the Infundfi uerftde of the medulla oblongata , betwixt the bulurnora Jlriata and cerebel. But 'within this fpace iiche bafts of the fame medulla there are other tings obfervable,efpecially the fituation and ftru- : re of the Infundibulum. Now this Infundibulum is, tube-like receptacle, outwardly covered with ahin membrane arifing from the Pia Mater , and mhin fenced with a medullar fubftance , which d'cends behind the coalition of the two Optick lrves,betwixt the crura of the medulla oblongata: i; upper orifice is between the crura ^ and from : nee a Ihort tube or pipe defeends upon the ? ndula pituitaria , ( to be deferibed in the next Capter) mpon which, ferous humours ( or Lym- P ) flow down from the upper cavities of the Bun this way • whence it has its name of Infundi- blum or Tunnel. Which humours Dr. Ridley c nks to be condenfed vapours arifing from the P. teries of the plexus Choro'ides „ And thus we have done with the fore part of t ; Medulla oblongata , which only lies bare by t! turning up of the Brain properly fo called: lithe next Chapter we fhall examine its hinder - G c 3 part a Of the Head. 384 Book I]i parr, which comes to our view by railing up t : Cerebel but of the Cerebel it felf firft. CHAP. VII. Of the Cerebellum, and the fourth Ventrici\ as alfo of the hinder part of the Medip oblongata, of the Rete mirabile and Gh r dula pituitaria. B Efore we can take a view of the hinder parti the medulla oblongata , it is necelfary to ■ move the Cerebellum that is placed upon it , (; the Brain is upon the fore part) which therefc we (hall firffc of all defer ibe. 7 ke Cere* The Cerebellum is feated in the hinder pit foullum, its of the Head , being of fomewhat a globU figure and figure as well as the Brain it felf, and uneu Jubfime. j n j ts f ur f ace ( like it ) by reafon of certain c volutions, both the ridges and furrows when! the Pia Mater is fpread over , tying their fa- milies together , covering their deep furro , and reaching Plexus of veffels to them all. It its convolutions are not fo various and uncert' as thofe of the Brain, but aredifpofed in a cert : order like fo many femi-circles • the lamella 1 plates lying upon and environing it in a para : courfe. All thefe lamella have a cortical p and a medullar, which feem to be of like fuhfta 1 with the cortex and corpus callojum of the Bni defended before. Chap. 4. :h' Te £A ons the Cerebellum , viz,, the / fus vermi- a °d hinder , terminate in a worm-like procejs , 1 formes, wards which the lamella or circles are lhort! lengi Zhap, 7. Of the Cerebellum, &c. 385 engthning by degrees towards the middle ir top. The Cerebellum has a great many plexus of vef- vejfels ani ds befet with Glands, like the plexus chordides of Glands. be Brain, which come into fight by feparating be Pia Mater from its hinder part; for there the lexus creep upon each fide by the worm-like pro- sis, confifting on each fide, of a branch from the ertebral artery, and of venous dudts fent out of ich lateral finus of the Dura Mater. To thefe 'lexus and Glands Dr. Willis aferibes the fame ufe 5 to thofe of the Brain , m, that the Glands :rve to feparate the fuperfluous phlegm from the rterial Blood, and to retain it ; and that both le Arteries and Veins not only running on the irface of the Cerebel, but fending twigs into its iner fubftance, the moll fubtiie and fpirituous art of the Blood being conveyed through long indings and ferpentine dufts of veffels , and fo lblimed into Spirit , is received and retained ithin, whilll the more impure and feculent part fent back by the twigs of Veins that are alfo eeply inferted into the Cerebel. It rells upon the trunk of the medulla oblonga - Peduneulh f, or rather feems to Hand upon each fide of by two feet or falls , betwixt which feet on le fides, the cerebellum above , and the medulla » longata underneath, there is formed a cavity hich is commonly called the fourth Ventricle , of hich by and by. In each of thefe feet that fultain the Cerebel, rheb pro, lere are three dillindt medullar precedes ; the cefes 0 rlt of which proceeding from the Nates y afeends aliquely ; the fecond defeending llreight from le Cerebel, and palfmg acrofs the former, en= mipalfes the medulla oblongata ; and the third efending from the hinder region of the Gere- Cc 4 be. 5 8 6 Of the Head . Book III bel, is inferted into the medulla oblongata , encreai ling the thicknefs of its trunk. lie annular The fecond of thefe Procefles, viz., thatwhic protube - defcends [freight, is it which makes the annulet vancto protuberance ( otherwife called Pons !/'arolu ) upo the medulla oblongata , which it forms in this man ner. Defcending If r eight upon the medulla , afibo as it touches its fides, it feems not to be prefentl implanted into them, but growing into a greate bulk, encompafles the fut face of the faid medull with divers circular Fibres. So that the Fibre of the Procefs of one Fide meeting thofe of th Procefs of the other fide underneath, or at th bafts of the medulla , make this circular proti beran.ee. Which that it may be feen, as alfo th three Procedes of each foot of the Cerebellum , dr. ’tis neceflary to cut the Cerebel through the mid die, from one Worm-like Procefs to the other, fc then they will all appear plainly. c office of t ^ ie Cerebel has generally been r( ekeerebeh pitted to be the fame with that of the Brain , w to elaborate the Animal Spirits , which Anatc miffs have not ufed to dilfinguifh into differ et kinds, till of late Dr. Willis has taught, that foil Spirits afliffc natur al motion, and others fpontaneom Accordingly he makes two Laboratories of the Spirits, appointing the Brain for the confe&ion < fuch Spirits as flow into thofe Nerves that pei form fpontaneous motions, viz., fuch which we ai confcious of, and can moderate or determine , ; the moving of the Hand, &c. and the Cerebel f< the making of fuch as flow into thofe Nerves 1 which involuntary or natural motions are perfo Hied, viz., fuch as are done in a conffgnt maniw without our knowledge or will, as the pulfe of tl Heart, &c. To which opinion of his fome ha' made fJerebe ihap. 7. Of the Medulla oblongata, &c. ? s 7 ierebel, and yet their Heart , &c. moves, Se~ mdly , The motion of the Heart, called natural, epending (in a great me:* fur e) on the influx of ie Animal Spirits conveyed by the par vagum hich arife out of the medulla oblongata , one can- ot eafily conceive how the Animal Spirits fhould ow into thefe Nerves from the Cerebel, and r.ot ; well thofe generated in the Brain or if they stred them alone, why. Thirdly , not only the atural motion of the Heairt fhould be performed y the faid pair of Nerven , but voluntary mo- ons alfo, as thofe of the Larynx , &c. He that r ould be fatisfied of the grounds of Dr. Willis'* s )pinion, may confult his Cerebr. jin at. capp. 1 5, !7- . We faid a little above, that betwixt the two 7 he fourth ;et of the Cerebel Handing on each fide , and Venftjck* ne Cerebel it felf above, and the trunk of the tedulla oblongata below , the fourth Ventricle was armed, which we need not further deferibe, on- i fpeak a word of its ufe * which fome have hought to be, for the perfefting of the Animal pirits ( as they were prepared by the three other ) nd therefore they have called this the noble Fen~ ricle. But as was faid above of the other three, hat they feemed not to be defigned purpofely ■y Nature , but reflated only accidentally from he conformation of the circumjacent parts, nd ferved only as Sinks to receive ferous hu- nours feparated in the Glands : 10 we believe that his refults in like manner, and is of the fame r iie ufe. Having now removed the Cerebel from off the 7 be hinder runk of the Medulla oblongata , we come to have p*rtof Me? 1 view oi the hinder part of the Medulla. Now, d' jlla ^' D = >mitting to fpeak of the vertebral arteries that run ' £ ata ? Jj) by its lides, ( as having mention'd them Gften before) 3 88 Of the file ad. Book II before) as alfo of the pairs of Nerves that ari out of it (which we fhadl defcribe afterwards) fhall only in this place take notice of the tv medullar pyramidal Bodies adhering to its lide Corpora Thefe proceed from th e annular protuberance foi pyramida- me d about the Medulla by the fecond Procefles c Jia * the feet of the Cerebel, near the bafis of the mi dulla , and being diftinfl: from the reft of the m< dullar trunk, they tend ftreight towards the fp nal Marrow, and in t. heir progrefs by little an little becoming narrower, after about the fpac of an inch, they end into fharp points pyramida wife , whence they have their name. Dr. Will] thinks them to be du or chanels of the An mal Spirits from the annular protuberance , 01 which is all one, from the Cerebel, to the Nervt that fpring out of tha Medulla oblongata , ther whereabout thefe pyramidal bodies end. We have now dome with all the parts of th Encepbalos , whether relating to the Brain, Medui la oblongata , or Cerebel, from whence we migli proceed to the attion of the Brain • but we wi! fir ft defcribe the Glmdula pituitaria feated in th cavity of the wedge-like Bone, with the notabl Plexus of veffels fpread about it in fome creature- called Rete mirabile - and in the next Chapter trea fhortly of the fpinal marrow , as being an append): or continuation of the Medulla oblongata. Glandula This Glandula pituitaria has a proper feat of it pituitaria. own made for it in the middle of the wedge-lik Bone, in a cavity commonly called Sella equine It is not fo big in Men, as in many other Crea tures, being hardly bigger than a large Peak Its fubftance is far differing from that of othe Glands : 41 In conliftcnce indeed ( as Dr. Ridle fayes ) 44 4 tis the fame with molt of the conglo 44 bate kind , if not fomewhat harder ; bu a Yl . •* Chap. 7. Of the Glandula pituitaria. 389 4t then being prelt or fqueezed, it emits much “more water than any of them. In its circum- ference ’tis almoft four-fquare , above fomewhat hollow, and below convex. It is covered with a irery thin Membrane from the Pia CMater , pre- ceding from the Infundibulum , and by means of this Membrane it is knit very clofely to the Sella. It has been heretofore a current opinion, that on ItJ v r this gland is poured by the Infundibulum that fe- J ‘ rous humour that is colleded in the Ventricles of :he Brain above *, and that from this Gland it de- vils through the holes of the wedge-like Bone up- )n the Palate, foto be fpit out by the Mouth. But Dr. Lower denies this, appealing to the ftrudure 'jf the parts , and his often experiments upon Halves Heads : “ In which , he fays, the wedge- ‘ like Bone lying under the Glandula pituitaria , is c fometimes perforated in divers places , at lead x by one large dud , which being divided into ,l two , does on each fide open into the Jugular * Veins : fo that if Milk or Ink be injeded thro 5 ;t thofe duds by a Syringe, it prefently palleth :c through on each fide into the faid Veins *, and “ nothing of Tindure will appear about the Pa- “ late, Noftrils, Mouth, Fauces or Larynx . So 14 that in a Calf the Humour that proceeds from 14 the Brain, returns all again into the Veins. “ And the fame thing he fays he has lately tryed. 14 in a Man’s Skull , wherein though the wedge- 44 like Bone be never perforated , yet Nature has u framed other duds, whereby all the Serum may 44 be again derived out of the Ventricles of the u Brain into the Blood : for there are two Vet “ fels feated on each fide the Sella Turcica (to be ‘‘ deferibed Book VI. Chap. 6 Jwhich with gaping. “Mouths Of the Head. 19° Book III. 44 Mouths as it were receive all the Water deflril- 41 led out of the Glandula pituitaria, and deoofite 4 Mt on each lide into the Jugular Vein? t-dthoufc 44 the Skull •, whofe duels will eafily a ppear , if 44 Water or Milk be fquirted forcibly out of a 44 Syringe into either Jugular Vein near the Skull, “for the liquor will by and by break out near the 44 Glandula pituitaria which makes it evident, 44 that whateyer Serum is feparated into the Ven- 44 tr icles of the Brain, and ifiues out of them thro’ 44 the Infundibulum , defbils not upon the Palate, 44 but is poured again into the Blood, and mixed et with it.j So that according to this opinion, the Rheum that ilfues fo plentifully fometimes in- to the Mouth and Fauces , &c. falls not from the Brain, but, as was noted above, is feparated from the Arteries immediately by the Glands of the refpe&ive parts. Utete mi- In thofe creatures that have the Glandula pitui- srabile. taria large ( as in Calves for inflance ) the two Carotid Arteries meeting about the Sella of the wedge-like Bone prefently divide themlelves in< to fmall twigs, which being interwoven with like (though not fo numerous,) twigs from the internal jugular Veins, and alfo with nervous Fibres from the larger trunk of the fifth pair of Nerves, make on each fide a notable Plexus , called Rete mirabile There enter into this Rete fome twigs alfo from the Cervical Arteries^ and there pafs out of ii feveral twigs into the Glandula pituitaria. Sc that in thefe Creatures that Gland feems to be o: the fame ufe to the Rete mirabile , as the Glandule pinealis is to the -Plexus char aides, viz., to feparate a ferous matter from the arterial Blood. But ir Man( according to moil Anatomifts ) this Rett »:s wholly wanting-, fo that there palling onlj foretimes 3 twig or two, and fometimes none from Chap. 7. Of the Rete Mirabile. 391 ■ — — — f from the trunk it felf of the Carotid Artery Into the Glandula pituitaria , that Gland is of lefs ufe in him than in other Creatures that have the Rete. ifet Dr. Ridley affirms , that he never found this Rete wanting, or with any difficulty difcoverable n Men, fpringing from and lying on the inlide of ;ach Carotid Artery. But confeffies that it is far .'mailer in them than in Brutes ; for which diffe- rence he thus accounts. “ Brutes by reafon of ■‘ their prone pofition, would, but for this Rete, be * in danger of having their Brains deluged as it u were with an over-great quantity of the influ- ‘ ent Blood, and of a rupture of the vefTels,by its ‘ violent ingrefs •, and this danger fo much the ;‘ more threatned, by how much the fame caufe ‘ which brings it into the Brain with that force, 4 is equally as great and effeftual to hinder its ‘proportionable return : For the relief of which ‘ inconveniency Nature hath contrived a means of ‘ its more eafie and fafe defcent into the Brain, ‘ by turning that one large dream of Blood ( which ‘ through its being pent in one chanel becomes fo ‘rapid) into many more, ( by which means the I Carotid trunk aboye the Dura Mater in thofe Creatures is very fmall to what it is beneath - ‘ whereas that Artery in Men, &c. hath the fame ; ‘ bignefs on both fides that membrane ) and they ‘ not only reticulated and contorted for the more flow and laborious ( which contrivance ,c the Ancients thought was only for a mors exaft *‘ preparation of the blood for Animal Spirits^ de- “ fcent of the blood, but alfo many of them by their infertion into the Glandula pituitaria , at- II tended withfmall Veins ifliung thence, to takeoff ’‘ fomepavt of the burden too And that to the ‘‘aforefaid pofition of fcveral Creatures ought chief- “ lytobe afcribedthe variety of magnitude of this 392 Of the Head. Book III. Medulla fpinalis. u Rete in feveral of them, its fize in Dogs feems “ highly to evince •, in whom, by reafon of their 4< Horizontal pofition,being neither fo prone as fe- 44 veral Brutes who feed on grafs, nor fo ereft as 44 Man, this Rete is found fmaller than in the firft, 64 and larger than in the laft. CHAP. VIII. Of the Spinalis Medulla. I T has been our method, whenfoever we have come to the rife or origine of any part that i»! extended through feveral regions of the Body, tc give a general defcription of it through its whole extent, as if it all belonged to that region where its rife is. Thus, for inftance, we gave a genera defcription of all the Arteries of both Head anc Abdomen as well as of the Thorax in our Anatomj of the middle Venter, becaufe they have alio; them their rife from the Aorta , that fprings outoij the left Ventricle of the Heart feated in that Ven- ter. In like manner having defcribed the Medulk oblongata within the Skull, we Ihall profecute it ir its defcent down the vertebra of the Neck, Back Loins and Os facrum , wherein it is called the fpk nal marrow : But this very briefly. We lhewed above how its head ( the medulk oblongata ) was joined by the corpora Jlriata toth< corpus callofum of the Brain, as alfo by thofe ma ny protuberances that are upon it, both to thi Brain and Cerebel, from and through which thi Animal Spirits are derived into it. Its trunk with in the Brain ( alter its crura are united ) is gene rally about an bands breadth long : but its lengt! ii ;hap. 8. Of the Spinalis Medulla, 39 j the fpine is very different according to the va- ous ftatures of Men. Its Subfiance is fibrous ( which appears by the Su %, ]:lp of a Microfcope ) as if it were compofed of fiance. i numerable {lender long filaments, which whe- 1 er they are hollow or no cannot be difcovered {rough their finenefs. If one cut through its Subfiance, there will Ve (r e fc i numerable little fpecks or fprinklings of Blood rpear, but the Veflels are fo fmall that they (mot be difcovered. But there are plainly dif- fer able very many twigs of Arteries and Veins inning through the Membranes that inveft it jeing principally branches of the Cervical ) from nich Arteries the Blood is infus’d into the pores t the Medulla , as it is imbib’d again from thence 1 the Veins. It is round and long, and decreafeth not in its Figure, t cknefs by the Nerves that go out of it. But c the contrary (as Dr. Willis obferves) “ Where hhe moft and the largeft Nerves fpring from it, 4 1 is there thickefi, as particularly at the rife 'if the Brachial and Crural Nerves. Of which I gives this reafon, 44 becaufe within the medul- * Lar tra&s the Animal Spirits do not run down Si rad pafs by fwiftly, but for the moft part iffu- ‘ ngleifurely from their fountains, when they “lave filled all fpaces, they keep their aboad in II hem; and where more fpirits are wont upon “bccafion to be fpent on any work, there are 41 irovided larger receptacles or ftore-houfes for “ hem.] Only towards its end in the Os [acrum iljrows fmaller and fmaller. It hath three Membranes. The firft is tha tMm~ w ich immediately cloaths it. This fpringeth brums, h m the Via Mater , and palfeth through its mid- f (dividing it into two parts) alone without the outer. m Of the Head. Book II] outer. The twigs of Arteries and Veins run moll ly through this. The fecond covereth the firi and fpringeth from the DutaCMatcr. There fto diftance between them, as there is in the Brai but one toueheth another ciofe, being knit tog< ther by Fibres. The third, proceeding from tl Ligament which tieth together the fore parts t the VeYtebra , covereth both thefe. Its iivlfi- It is divided all along from the very firft mee to. ing of its Crura within the Skull, to the end i Os facmm , by a membranous partition parting into two ^ but this divifion is not apparent in tl Spine, becaufe of the Dura Mater that covers i but it may he difcovered if that be taken off, ar the medulla fevered in the middle. The partit on is made of the Pia Mater , and by means of it is that the ufe or motion of one fide onely fometimes taken away in the Faille. As for the Nerves that fpring out of it , tho fhall be defer ibed after we have done with tho of the Brain. CHAP. IX. Of the Action of the Brdin , and the (fuppofei Succus nntritius of the Nerves. -1 I T is generally agreed that the proper Attu of the Brain (taken in a large fenfe)is the el borating of Animal Spirits ; and that they a fent frorh it by the Nerves into the feveral par of the Body , for performing both natural ar anirha! A&ions. But what and of what natu thefe Animal Spirits are, and in what partial I F a Chap. 9. Of the Action of the Brum. ? 9 *> iart of the Brain they at e generated , is not greed upon by learned Men. Stem thinks it not improbable , that the Ani- ial Spirits are of the fame nature with the mat- s P lnti :r of light. Dr. Ridley calls them fluidum Ani- '■ale, of which he thinks there is no reafon to made. >rm any other Idea than what we ordinarily ive of the purell: liquors. And he looks upon AnM Q , lis Animal fluid onely as a body confifting the Brain. \ very minute and flexile particles, contain- p. 108. I in fuch a fpace as allowes them a capacity being agitated on all lides by vertne of the p. 15^ btil matter or ethereal glcbuli they fwiin in, &c. r. tViUti fuppofes they are fpirituo- faline , and at in the Mufcles they do effervefce with a dex of a contrary nature fupplied by the iood , whence the Mufcle g'ows turgid , and (nfequently contrads. Some are of opinion iat they differ in no other regard from the Vi- 11, but only as they are conveyed by proper dfels, and minifter to other purpofes, and are 1 a cooler temperament \ but that there is no tecifical difference betwixt them. Others on the rer fide think they differ in fpecie , and agree in (thing, but only that the Vital Spirits and Blood the matter out of which the Animal Spirits a: formed. Another fort deny the Arterial Blood t be the matter of thefe Spirits , and affirm that t: Nerves of the Stomach, &c. abforb a part of t: Chyle, of which they are made , and belldes, alutritious Juice, ( of which by and by. ) And fne there are that fuppofe Air alfo to be an In- ?:dient, which either afeends into the Braiii t ough the Os cnbriforme , ( and fills the Ventri- c.-3, according to Fracaffatus ) or infinuates it ft: into the Bfood as that circulates through the ‘ ngs. We cannot Hand upon the examination D d and ?9 6 Of the Head. Book III and refutation of feveral of thefe Opinions here but upon a due confideration of the Argument urged for each, we think that the Animal Spirit are fpecifically diftindf from the Vital , but tha the Vital, with the Arterial Blood, their Vehicle are the true and onely matter, out of which the; are elaborated. where eh- And there is no lefs difference in what part c bomei. the grain the Animal Spirits are made. Som deputing to that office the Sinus of the Fah others the four Ventricles of the Brain, efpeciall the fourth , a third fort the Plexus choroides an Rete mirabile ^ Des Cartes thinks, that they are ft parated out of the Arteries of Plexus choroides i the Glandula pinealis into the Ventricles j an others laftly affign the fubftance of the Brain an Cerebel (efpecially their cortical part ) for tl place of their confe&ion. As to the Sinus of tl Falx , the life of that was (hewn above , Chap. And as to the Ventricles , feeing they are ofte almoff quite full of wateriffi humour , but alwa] have fome , they feem very unfit for the making ( ftoring up fuch fubtile and volatile Spirits as tl Animal are. As for the Plexus choroides and Re •mirabile , there is no Veflel that goes out of eith- which contains any thing but under the form < Blood ^ fo that feeing there are no Vafa deferent (or call them what you will )to convey theSpiri from thefe Plexus to the origin of the Nerves, v cannot reafonably aferibe to them fuch an Adtio We muff; therefore fubferibe to the lad Opini the firft opinion. Nor does it feem reafonable > imagine that the Chyle ihould afcend from the :omach, &c. to the Brain by the Nerves, whiles lis nervous juice that is contended for, with the D d 3 Aninial 400 Of the Head. Book III, Animal Spirits, is defending by the fame ; foi one cannot conceive how fuch contrary motion: of liquors in the fame Veffel can be at the farm time. Though from the fudden refedtion tha perfons ready to faint receive from fpirituous li quors, &c. it be probable that certain Effluvu or fubtil and fpirituous vapours do enter the ner vous filaments of the Mouth and Stomach, am recruit the Animal Spirits immediately , withou fetching that compafs that I believe all the Chyl does. And as the Nerves imbibe no Chyle froc the Stomach, &c. fo receive they no more froi: the Arteries, than fome of its molt fpirituous am volatile particles elaborated in the Brain int Animal Spirits, which have indeed fome littl moifiure accompanying them as a Vehicle, bu which is neither of a fuitable nature nor of pro portionable quantity for the ncurifbment even c the fpermatick parts only. For feeing the Nerve have no conipicuous Cavity, but only impercep tible Pores, by which any liquor can drill alon them • fuch liquor muff needs be moll thin am watery, and therefore unfit to be aifimilated t any part. And lafcly, as to the Opinion that i feparates the particles of the Blood, and fo di ilributes thofe that are refpedtively proper foi unto, each part, as the fulphureous to the fat &c. or is to the Blood as the form is to the mat ter ^ it is an ingenious Hypothelis 1 confefs, bt whether true, I dare net affirm. I lhall only ad what Dr. Havers fayes on this fubjeft, viz.. a 44 do not fuppofe that the fuccus Nutritius of tl u Body is from the Nerves \ yet they have, ; “ other parts, a fupply of it for their ownnourift[ 4C ment, which I take to be all the fuccus Nutritn they have,] CHA! Chap. io. Of the i. and 2. fairs of Nerves. 401 CHAP. X. If the Nerves arifmg from within the Skull ; and firjl of the frjl and fecond Pairs. W E have now done with all the parts of the Encepbalos wherein the Animal Spirits are .ither elaborated or ftored up, and have alfo de~ cribed the nature of the Spirits themfelves : it ■emains, that we Ihew by what and how many nftxuments they are difpenfed to the parts for he performance of whole fundions they are ne- •eflary. Thefe Inftruments are the Nerves , all >f which fpring either out of the Medulla cblonga- a within the Skull, or out of the Medulla fpinalis n the Spine. They all of them arife by Pairs , fo hat they are not reckoned to be fo many Nerves , jutfo many Pairs of Nerves. As for the Tabs vithin the Skull, they were formerly reckoned ;o be but /even, fumm’d up in thefe Verfes, Optica prima • oculos movet altera ^ tertia gujlat : Quart a, & quinta audit • vaga fexta ^ at fep « titna lingua eft. Butftrider Examination has found them to be nore • Dr. Willis particularly has encreafed them :o the number of Tew, holding the Procejjus mam- millares to be the olfaftory Nerves, and the Par vagum and Intercofiale to be two diftind pairs : ind laftly, defcribing a tenth pair, which defen- ding out of the Skull with the Medulla , emerges betwixt the firft and fecond vertebra of the Neck. We (hall adhere to this account, and de» Dd 4 fcribe 4 ° 2 Of the Head. Book III Nervi OI- fa&orii, the fir ft pair. jheir rife . firorrefi. fcribe the Olfactory and Optick in this Chapter , am the reft afterwards in order. Of all the pairs of Nerves that rife within th Skull, the OftaCtory or fmellingpair arife the fore moft,and are therefore reckon’d for the firft.The fpring from the Crura of the Medulla oblongata betwixt the Corpora flriata and the little hillock or eminences out of which the optick Nerves ril ( called by Galen their Thalami. ) Though Die tnerbrocck , that ( following the Ancients ) denit them to be Nerves, affirms that they fpring nc from the faid Medulla , but from the globous mar row of the Brain (properly fo called) and its for V entrides. From their rife they run forwards under tli bafts of the Brain, (encreafing in bulk as they go as far as to the Os cribriforme at the top of th Nofe, growing there into round procelfes lik Paps, being therefore called Procejfus papillares o Mammillares. cavity and They are manifelHy hollow in their whole pro Subjlance. grefs, and their fubltance is very marrowy am foft. Having arrived at the Sinus of the fieve-lik Bone, they there acquire coats of the Du,ra Mater with w hich being clad, Dr. IViflis fays, they aredi vided into many Fibres and Filaments, which pai out of the Skull through the holes in the faid Bon into the caverns of the Noftrils, running througi the Membrane that inverts thofe caverns. Dr. Willis aferibes a double ufe to them, ma king them both the true Organs of Smelling, am alfo Emunftories to the Brain, thinking that whe too much Serum is colle&ed in its Ventricles, thef deriving it thence, fend it forth by their filament through the 0$ cribriform e jnto the Noftrils. pie merbrocck believes they have only this latter ufe V: - ..... • • on j, Insertion. Vfe. "hap. io. Of the i . and 2 . pairs of Nerves. 40 J nly that the Serum or Lympba diftils from lem as well upon tire Fauces a.nd their Glands, s into the Noftrils. Dr Lower grants only the vmer and fays, that “ It is incredible that the humour that is contained in the cavity of thefe procefles Ihould iflhe out by the Nerves, ( or Nervous Filaments ) into the Noftrils, for if it did, the fenfe of Smelling rnnft needs be much prejudic’d thereby. And befldes, if this water could diftil by and ont of the Nerves, much more might the Spirits, that are thinner , and more fubtil, fly away. And as to the humour contained in the cavity of the Procefles, he fuppofes it to be of very great ufe : namely, that when Effluvia, or rnoft fubtil Particles ex- haling from an external object, are delivered to the OlfaQory Nerves , that their Species may reach the Brain the better, it was neceflary that thefe Nerves or Proceffles Ihould be made hollow from their very rife, and be filled with a limpid humour .* Not that 1 believe, fays be, that the Species themfelves are conveyed through their cavities into the ventricles of the Brain, or that the Animal Spirits are lodged in ' thofe Ventricles, as the Ancients thought j but that they are therefore hollow and moiften’d within with water, that their marrowy Bodies may ferve the better both for retaining and conveying Smells into the Brain : For as things fmelled are better perceived from moift Bodies and in a moift Air,than in a dry feafon from the parched ground (as Huntfmen know too well) fo it is likely that in the fame manner as they ' are beft perceived outwardly, they are alfo beft ' conveyed inwardly, &c. ) And indeed, if we vill allow them to be Olfactory Nerves, f as I hink there is great reafon) it is very incongru- ous ous that they fhould ferve for an Emun&ory i the Brain , to difcharge its fuperfluous Sent) And therefore we think it fit to acquiefce in tl Learned Phyfician’s Opinion • and to believe th the Lympha or Serum gathered in the ventricles the Brain, is emptied by thofe ways we before oil ferved out of the fame Author, and not at all 1 the nervous Filaments that pafs from thefe Pr< cefles through the Os cribriforme into the N< ftrils. Nervi op- The fecond pair are the Optici or Viforii Nen tici, the Je- which bellow upon the Eyes the faculty of feein Their rife, ^ey fp r * n g from the upper Tides of thofe un qual protuberances of the crura of the Medulla o longata , which are called Nervorum opticorum th lami • from whence being carried forward , ar fomewhat downwards, after having fetcht a cor pafs, they meet one another about the Infrna bulum , upon the fella of Os fphenoides ^ whei they are united by the clofeft conjunftion , bi not confufion, of their Fibres, which run parall lengthways in thefe Nerves , as they do in ; other. cavity. They are obfcurely hollow until they be un ted • but after, their hollownefs cannot be difce ned. This hollownefs may be lhewed in a lar{ Beall newly killed, and in a clear light. Thus do Riolanus , Gliffon , drc. teach. But V j alius , j4quapend. &c. deny that they have ar mcenbro manner 0 f cavity. Malpigbius fays, 44 They har * 44 not one cavity only, but fundry -, but that the f 41 cavities refult only from the necelfity of the 44 llru&ure, all their inner or medullar part co; 44 filling of round Intejlinula or Fibres runnir 44 lengthways , which cannot be fo clofely fittf 44 to one smother, but that there will refult lor Interlace lhap. 10. Of the i. and 2. pairs of Nerves. 405 1 Interfaces, which yet perhaps are of no ufe,nor of the nature of Duds , but only accidental. ‘But whether the Intefiinula or Filaments them- ‘felves have not little chanels in them , f like to Blood-veflels) he thinks may be doubted of: ' But feeing fenfe has not yet difcovered any fuch, ”tis probable that there are to be admitted only ‘ little Pores and Interfaces in the medullar fub- ftance, by means whereof the nourilhing and vi- vifying juice may be propagated. After their unition they are feparated again, infertion. d each of them running further forwards , paf- s through an hole of Os cuneiforme , and is infer- d obliquely into the centre of the Eye of its vn fide. Dr. Willis fays , they receive not only nervous Veffeh. bres from the third pair of Nerves, but alfo vigs of Arteries from the fore-branches of the arotides , which run upon them as far as the ifis of the Eye. Whence, he thinks, a Reafon ay be affign’d,why,when a man grows fleepy af- :r plentiful eating or drinking, he prefently feels notable heavinefs or oppreflion as it were about is Eyes. For when the Blood becoming very irgid fills the velfels that run through the Brain, lore than ufual, and by diltending them ftops le pores of the Brain ^ thefe Nerves alfo in their hole courfe are compreiled by the Blood that is tcome turgid in their Blood-veflels likewife. Dr. Ridley fayes , that he has feen the bloud- eflels to run not only upon or with them, but al- ) in inje&ed bodies exadly quite through the aedullai y fubftance of them, into the reticular oat of the Eye, wherein they end in an infinite umber of the moll capillary ramifications, which y an injedtion of that Artery, made with Mer- cury, 406 Of the Head. Book II' cury , becomes very delightfully ccnfpicuous t the Eye. Subftance They are very foft, fo long as they are withi and parts, the Skull, but having pafs’d the Or fphenoides , th< become fomewhat more firm and hard. The re; fon of which alteration feems to be , that with) the Skull they are only clad with the Pia Mate but as they go out, they afiume a fecond coat froi the Dura Mater . They make From the whole fubftance of thefe Nerves, im the proper from their two Membranes and the inner medu I ar an< ^ kbrous fubftance, are the three ( propet l " e yes ' Tunicles of the Eyes framed \ for the Cornea c Sclerotica doth proceed from the Dura Mater , tl C boro tries or Vue a from the Pia Mater , and tji Retina from the marrowy fubftance. CHAR XL Of the thirds and fourth Pairs. ike third hpHE third Pair are termed Motor ii Oculoruni X becaufe they move the Mufcles of the Eye; \ inning" They have their beginning at the innennoft par * “ ‘ “ or hafts of the trunk of the Medulla oblongata be hind the Infundibulum. why both This pair is united at its rife \ whence is coni: the f- nionly drawn a reafon why one Eye being mo the fine vec * £owar( I s any objcdt, the other is directed al ob]eft!' fo to the fame. But though this conjunction ma be a reafon why the Spirits fhould flow e^uall to the Mufcles of each Eye ^ yet it fatisfies no why they fhould flow at the fame time , into dif ferent Mufcles. As for example ; Why , whe one would look ta the right fide , the Spirits ar * ' prefeatl (hap. ii. Of the and 4. Pairs. 407 tefently determin’d into the external tnttfcle of • 2 right eye , and into the internal of the left ; ad not into the external, or internal of both* nd therefore a truer reafon of both Eyes being nved together to one objed, is the intention of t: mind, which aiming only to have a view of ce objed at one time, directs the fpirits to thofe Iifcles only that ferve to turn the Eye towards tatobjed, &c. They arc fmaller and harder than the former, Their fub- id prefendy parting one from the other , they fiance er whereof bending downwards , is beftowed <:i the Palate and upper region of the Fauces ;d the upper being carried beyond the orbit of ft Eye, pafles through an hole of the upper 4lo Of the Head. Book II Jaw, with the Vein and Artery which it twif about, and fends many flips to the Mufcles of th Cheeks, Lips„ Note, and roots of the uppi Teeth. From its twilling about the fanguif rous Veflels defigned for the Cheeks, and oth< parts of the Face, may a reafon be drawn wl one blulhes when he’s afham’d : for the Anim Spirits being difturbed by the imagination of fon uncomely thing, as if they took care to hide tl Face, enter this Nerve diforderly ; fo that i twigs embracing thefe fanguiferous Veflels, t comprefling and pulling of them caufe the Bloc to flow too impetuoufly into the Cheeks and Far bytxhe Arteries, and detain it there fome time t conftringing the Veins. The fixtb The ftxth pair rife juft by (but below ) tl pair. fifth, and each prefently finking under the Bui ^nTiJfer Mater, goes out of the Skull by the fame hole wit Tm." t ^ ie Nerves of the third and fourth pairs, and carried by a Angle trunk towards the orbit of th Eye ■, but fo, as by the fide of the Sella Turcica iij inofculates with the fecond or greater branch c the fifth pair, ( as was noted in the former Pan graph : ) whence fending back foraetimes ont fometimes two twigs, thefe being united with th recurring twigs of the fifth pair (above-mentkwi ed) make the beginning of the Intercofial Nemi Afterwards going forwards, near the orbit of th Eye it is divided into two Branches 5 of whic one is inferted into the abducent Mufcle of th Eye placed in its outer corner *, and the other be ing cleft into many Fibres, is beftowed on th feventh Mufcle proper to Brutes , whereby the defend the Eye from external Injuries accidental ly occurring, when they are faid nittitare ( whic l think we have no word to exprefs in Englifh.) 'hap. 12. Of the 5, 6 . and 7. Pairs. 41 1 The fevsnth pair, by the Ancients commonly Tbefevevtk 1 ckon’d for the fifth, minifter to the fcnfeofPdJf ? haring. Each Nerve has two Procefies,one foft, fffff 2 d the other harder, which might feem to b e t j ont t o diflindt Nerves, but they are ufually accoun- ;1 for one. They fpring a little behind the l:mer, out of the fides of the Medulla oblongata. l\ Willis fays, the fofter procefs arifes from the Iver fide of the annular protuberance, from vience it afcends ^ and the harder from its up- irpart, from whence defcending it meets the tier. The foft part or procefs (that is properly t: auditory Nerve) is carried through an hole of i petrofum into the cavern of the Ear, which it c aths with a moll: thin Membrane. By this are finds conveyed to the common Senfory. The bder procefs ferves rather for motion than ffe ^ which palling out alfo through the Ospttro- fn y by its proper hole, prefently admits a twig fm the Par vagum or eighth pair, after which iis immediately divided into two branches * one vereof tending downwards, is bellowed on the ihfcles of the Tongue and Oskyoides- y and the oar winding about the auditory palfage, and oiding upwards, is divided into three twigs ; 0 which the firfl correfponding to the Nerve of ti firlt divifion, bellows certain flips on the Muf- tis of the Lips, Mouth, Face and Nofe, and fo f rates fome outward organs of the Voice, as tl former fome of the inner • the fecond is diltri- a ed to the Mufcles of the Eye-lids and Fore- id, and the third to the Mufcles of tire Ears. '•hence upon fome unufual and altonilhing found, s>' a certain natural inltinft, the Ears prick up,and tl Eyes open. As alfo the voice does offici- My anfwer as an Echo to thofe founds that are P ceived by the Ears, from the community of E e the 412 Of the Head . Book III the Nerves diftributed to the organs of the voic and Hearing. CHAP. XIII. Of the eighth , ninth , and tenth Pairs. fhe erghh ^ E next jP^V in order is the eighth, whii pair . * A h as ufed to be reckoned for the fixth, ai is otherwife called par vagum , or the rvandrii pair , from their being diftributed to fundry pari Their rife. They fpring below the auditory Nerves, o of the fides of the Medulla oblongata , the root each Nerve confuting of twelve Fibres at le; ( in Man ) to which a notable Fibre, or rath Nerve ( much greater than any of thefe twelvi corning from the fpinal Marrow as far as from bout the lixth or feventh vertebra of the Neck,! joyned, and both are inverted with the fame C( from the Dura Matey , as if they grew into c Nerve ^ but if their common Coat be remov< this acceffory Nerve, and many of the other bres remain rtill diftind, and after they are gci out of the Skull together, are difpenfed to fe ral parts • the acceffory Nerve to the Muffles the Neck and Shoulder-blade *, and one nota Fibre of the eighth pair to the harder procefs the Auditory or feventh pair, as alfo two oth to the Mufclen of the Gullet and Neck. But , other Fibres of this par vagum continue unit and inrtead of thofe companions they have ft ted with, each Nerve entei tains a new namely a br anch from the Inter coflal or ninth pji whereby is made a notable Plexus f which Nerve is Hike the Joint- of a Cane, or the f) )hap. 1 2 . 0 / the 8. 9. & 10. pairs of Nerves. 413 3on the Trunk of a Tree where a Bough goes lit, whence they are called ganglioformes ) and lit of the fame Plexus there fprings a confidera- e branch, which being carried towards the La- nx is divided into three twigs i of which one : >es to the fphin&er of the Gullet, a fecond to e upper Mufcles of the Larynx, and the third aing under the Cartilage fcutit'ormvs , meets the ip of the recurring Nerve and is united to it. :low the aforefaid Plexus of this par vagurii,e ach Pfogrefa link goes ftreight down by thefidesof the afeend- ig Carotides , on which they beftow fome flips, ad at the bottom of the Neck each receives a •:ond branch from the Intercoftal, (viz., from its j ft Plexus) and near thereto the left Nerve of lis pair fends out another twig into the recur- int Nerve , but fo does not the right. From Ince both trunks defeend without any notable unification, till they be come over againlt the lit or fecond Rib •, where out of a fecond Plexus or knot ) many Twigs and Fibres go towards Is Heart and its appendage, from whence this xxus is called Cardiacus. There is one notable (ference ( which we cannot but note) of the t o recurring Nerves that fpring out of the trunks ? this eighth pair, viz.. That that on the right le arifes out of it higher, and windes about the jrillar Artery ^ whereas that on the left fprings hch lower therefrom, and twilling about- the t Trending trunk of the Aorta returns back from t? nee. Dr. Willvs fays that the recurring Nerve i really a diftind Nerve from the Par vaguni inn the very Origin?.!, and was onely included i the fame cafe or cover for the more conveni- ft and fafe palfage. The branches of the Par *igum do frequently unite with others of the itereoftal pair about the Pfacordia, And when Ee 2 their 414 Of the Head. Book III their two Trunks are defcended as low as ovei againft the Heart, many twigs go out of then into the Lungs, &c. Whence both trunks de fcending by the Tides of the Gullet are dividei into two branches , outer and inner : The oute unite with the outer, and the inner with the in ner, and both defcend to the Stomach , in whic End. they terminate , but are fpent chiefly upon it upper orifice. As for their more particular di ftribution, we have fpoken thereof while we trer ted of the parts thcmfelves on which they ai bellowed. The with We are next to defcribe the ninth pair ( whic Pah. before Dr. Willis was not diilinguifhed from thi going before . ) It is called the Intercoflal , becau as its Trunks march down by the roots of tl Ribs, betwixt every Rib they receive a brant thek from the fpinal pairs. They have no prop root of their own, but each trunk is compound! of two or three recurring branches of -the fifi and fixth pairs, (near their originej as was not< Trogrefs. when we treated of thofe pairs. Being thus fo med they pafs out of the Skull by their prop holes, and prefently each has a Plexus near thofe the Par vagum , into which, two nervous procef from the tenth pair of the Brain are inferted, ai out of which there goes a twig into the fphindt of the Gullet, and into the Plexus ( aforefaid) the Par vagum. Whence defeending by the m telra of the Neck , by that time they arrive at middle , each has another greater Plexus , it which a large Nerve from a neighbouring veil bral pair is inferted ; and from which proceed it ny twigs that uniting with others of the Par i gum arc diftributed all about the Pracordia y alfo one Angle one a little lower. This PleA cervm ■hap. iy. Of the 8.9. and 10. pairs of Nerves. 41 5 cvicalvs out of which fo many branches fpring, is ; oper to Man, being not found in Brutes. From leNeck they defcend by the ClavicuU into the .wax, where having arrived at the fecond Rib, <:h receives three or four branches from the ver- ibral Nerves next above, whereby is made anb- t;r notable Plexus ( commonly called the Inter- nal.) From whence as they pafs down by the Dts of the Ribs, in every one of their Interfti- (i and even as low as Os facrum , from every inting of the vertebra each receives a vertebral hnch. Afloon as they are defcended out of the aity of the Breaft, and are come over againft t: Stomach, each fends forth a notable branch, viich tending towards the Mefentery , make its ef Plexus , which are in number / even , five leones which are upper , and two left that are Per. For each branch is prefently divided into 1 0 other , and every one forms one Plexus , viich make four \ and the fifth is in the middle «thefe, being the largeft, and like the Sun a- r.mgffc the Planets ( as Dr. Willis compares it. ) iid thefe are the five upper. The two lower art 1 med of branches that fpring from the trunks c (tended as far as the lower part of the Loins, al are diftinguifhed by the names of Plexus Infi- x's, and dlinimus. As to thepatts that all the t igs which fpring from thefe feven Plexus are dtributed to,it may be learned from the defcripj- tn of the parts themfelves in the Fir ft Book , in vich we conftantly mentioned from whence e h part had its Nerves. Laftly, when this In- t coftal pair is come to the Os facrum , its two hunks bend toward each other , and feem to b knit together by two or three Procefles , and a length each of them ends in fmali Fibres End. ftt are diftributed into the Sphincter of the dus, Ee 3 We 4io Of the Head. Book III. the tenth We are now come to the tenth and laft pair of Nerves that rife from the medulla within the Skull. and Pro . This pair fpting from the fides of the medulla fit. grefs „ hind all the reft, and defcending with it out of the Skull into the vertebra of the Neck, they come oul betwixt the firft ana fecond vertebra thereof. Pre- fentiy after their egrefs each fends forth a brand into the Plexus of the Intercoftal Nerve of its owi fide : but their main trunks being carried down wards, and each receiving a twig from the nintl pair, they are beftowed on the Mufcle fiernothy reoideus , and fome other Mufcles of the Neck So that though this pair rife within the Skull yet it feems to be more of the nature ofth Vertebral Nerves,as bellowing fome branches 01 the Intercoftal, and being all the reft of it fpen upon the Mufcles of the Neck. And thus we have done with all the Nerve that proceed from the Medulla within the Brair in defcribing of which we have followed Di Willis for the moft part , that moft acqirat Tracer. Them, Tab. XV, Fig. I. Reprefenteth the outer or upper fuperf cies of the Brain taken out of the Skull ^ whet the Limbus of the Brain being loofed from ii coherence with other parts by Membranes, Sifted up and bent forwards , that the Crura < the Medulla oblongata , the Fornix , Nates ar Tejles with the Glandula pinealis, and other pr< celfes may be dearly and diftindtly feen, (fro Dr.' WiUbsJ ' ■ ' • A A The Limbus of the Brain , which in its n&t ral Situation was contiguous to the Cerebe Sum, - B 1 is/ et Paj.&t. i'.i: ^ ■sift. : m'' KM •r.> ' Ch. 1 1' Of the Brain , Cerebellum, Eyes , &c. B The Bordure or Margent of the Corpus callo- fum fpread over both Hemifpheres of the Brain , whkh in its natural Situation lay upon the Gian- dula pinealis. C The Fornix. DD Its Arms embracing the Crura of the Medulla oblongata. EE The Crura of the Medulla oblongata /out of which the optick Nerves proceed)whofe Ends (being placed further out of fight) are called Corpora ftriata. F The Glandula pinealis, betwixt which and the root of the Fornix is the chink that leads to the Infundibulum. GG The orbicular Protuberances called Nates. HH The leJJ'er Protuberances called Teftes, which are Procejfes of the former . II The Medullary Procejfes , which afcend obliquely from the Teftes to the Cerebellum , and make a pan of each of its Meditullia. K The joining of thofe Procejfes by another tranfverfe Procefs. L The Rife of the pathetick Nerves ( or fourth pair) out of the joining of the aforefaid Procejfes . MM A portion of the Medulla oblongata lying un- der the aforefaid Procejfes and Protuberances. N The Foramen of the Ventricle or Cavity that lies under the orbicular Protuberances. 00 A portion of the annular Protuberance let down from the Cerebellum and embracing the Medulla oblongata. PP The outer and upper Superficies of the Gere-e helium. Figure II, Reprefenteth the Eye cleft in two ( from behind forwards) that the divers Situation of the hu/V ~hap. 13. Of the Nerves of the Brain. 419 &K kk The Auditory Nerves , and their two Procef- feson each fide , the feventh Pair. JL 111, &c. The Par vagum or eighth Pair , confifi - iayr of fever al Fibres. dM 7 k S final Nerve coming from afar to the Ori- gine of the Par vagum. . The firft Hole that gives a paffage to one of the Branches of the foft part of the auditory Nerve. 1 . The fecond Hole that gives a pafj'age to another Branch of the fame Nerve. ; ig. V. Shews the Cochlea,whkh the forefaid Au- thor makes a part of the Labyrinth, but other Anatomifts call a third Cavity, Tab, XVII. leprefenteth the Brain in a middle fedtion, the Blood-vedels being firft injedted with wax s ( from Dr. Ridley.) %A The Fornix cut off at its roots and turned bach ) b Its roots at the beginning of the Thalami Nervo- rum opticorum. : c &c. The Thalami Nervorum opticorum. i 'd That part of the crura Fornicis which growing fomewhat thicker as it turns off towards the Late- ral Ventricles , runs over the crura Medullas ob- longata, which being very prominent in Sheep and Calves, help to thrift it up into fuch a protuberance as the Ancients called Bombyces or Hippocampi. ; e That part of the Plexus Choroeides which is made of the firft branch of the Cervical Artery, fometimes feeming as though it came from the comnunicant branch in the lateral Ventricles. f The 422 Of the Head. Book III f The place where thofe two Plexus’s on each fide me under the Fornix. g g 7 ’hat other part of the Plexus which is made c the fecond branch of the Cervical Artery joined witi the firfi by a communicant branch not to be fee: here , lying under the crura Fornicis, which is ex panded all over the Ifthmus, becoming glandulou near to y and efpecially under the Glandula pinea lis covered here with the Fornix, h h Two large Veins coming from the top of the uppt part of the Plexus down to the other branch of th Plexus, all the length of the third Ventricle , an then terminates in the fourth Sinus, i i The trunh of fever al Arteries appearing as the were cut off in dividing the medullary -(* and cineri tious * part of the Brain. k k A venous branch on each fide entring the Plexu Choroeides, from whence there are many flip branched upon the corpora ftriata. A A Tl)e corpora ftriata whole . I The rima of the third Ventricle. mm A long medullary trail between the Thalart Nervorum opticorum and corpora ftriata. n n, &c. The Centrum ovale of V ieullenius. O The fourth Sinus of the dura mater. P The Torcular where the Sinus’s meet. QQThe lateral Sinus’s. R A large Vein entring the lateral Sinus on one fidt S S, &c. The Cerebellum covered with the fecon procefs of the dura mater on its uppermoft part. T T The vertebral Arteries. V V The Vertebral Sinus’s. W The Medulla Spinalis with its integuments. X X The flyle fupporting the large Veins of the Plexj us Choroeides in the third Ventricle. q q The LympheduCls of the Plexus Choroeides. Y Y Two of the Cervical Nerves fpringing from tl Medulla oblongata 0 f f Tk lhap. 14. Of the Nerves of the Neck. 423 * f The medullary part of the Brain. The cineritious part of the Brain. CHAP. XIV. Cthe Nerves of the Spinalis Medulla ; and firjl of the Nerves of the Neck . ■ YTE obferved above, that when the MeduU /V la oblongata is defcended out of the Skull i:o the Spine, it lofes its name of Oblongata , and quires that of Spinalis , ( which name it borrows f>m the Spine through which it pafles ) but is of U fame fibrous or filamentous fubftance as it vs within the Brain. And now we come to cfcribe the Nerves that fpring out of it, which cift the motion of all thofe parts, which thofe M pair already defcribed, that arife within the full, reach not to. In its whole progrefs from the Skull to the Coc- Nerves of, there fpring out of it thirty pair of Nerves :fP rin E™g pen of which are of the Neck, twelve of the wax , five of the Loins, and fix of Os facrum. medulla. Th z fir ft and fccond pairs of the Neck come not ut of the Tides of the Vertebra , as all the reft do • nt becaufe of the peculiar articulation of the two ipermoft vertebra , fpring out before and be- nd. The fore Nerve of the firjl pair cometh out seven of :tween the bone of the Occiput and the firft ver- the Neck, bra of the Neck, and is bellowed upon the 7 ^:^ ufcles of the Neck which lie under or behind ?d,r ' te Oefophagus , and on the Skin of the Face. The nder Nerve cometh out of the hole which is com- 424 Of the Head. Book III common to the Os occipitis and the firll wrtefot of the Neck. This hath two twigs : Thefmalle is bellowed upon thofe Mufcles which lie upoi the Occiput , and upon the skin of the Head a high as the Crown ; the bigger is inferted inb the Mufcle which lifteth up the Shoulder-blade. the fecond. The fore Nerve of the fecond pair (which i fmaller) cometh out between the firll and fecon Vertebra, and is bellowed upon the Skin of th Face. The hinder cometh out of the Tides of th hinder procefs of the fecond Vertebra , but pre fently is parted into two twigs. The thicker c which is bellowed upon the whole Skin of th Head even to the Crown •, The fmaller upon th greater llreight, and the lower oblique Mufcle which Itretch out the Head. Dr. Willis fays, tha 1 the firll and greatelt root of the Nerve of the Did phragtn arifeth from the fecond pair of the Neck of which Nerve we fhall fpeak more by and by. The five remaining pairs of the Neck, as all all the pairs of the Back and Loins, and the fir] of Os facrum , come out of the lateral holes be twixt the Vertebra , and immediately after thei exit are divided into ’'he fore and hinder branches and are dillributed as folio weth. ne third. The third pair come out of the lateral hole between the fecond and third Vertebra , and eac being immediately divided into two branches, th formore thereof have each four twigs : The fir; is inferted into the long Mufcle, or the firll of th benders forward of the Neck ^ The fecond d( feending is bellowed upon the Mufcles which 11 under the Oefophagus , being firll united to a twi ofthe fourth pair *, The third afeending goet 1 Zo the Skin of the back-part of the Head, bavin firll joined with the thicker twig of the hinde Nerve of the fecond pair t The fourth' h beltov e :hap. I4< Of the Nerves of the Neck. 425 Of the Head. Book III How the Brachial and Crural Nerves are form ed out of the Nerves of the Spine, (hall be mori particularly, but briefly, (hewn in the next Book. And thus we have done with all the thirty pai of Nerves that arife out of the Spinal marrow , ha ving (hewn which way they pafs , and to wha parts they are diftributed : which fhould be dili gently noted, that we may the better know t what place to apply Remedies when from an outward Caufe, as from a fall, bruife or the lik< ''any part has loft either (enfe or motion, or botl For the Medicine is to be applyed always to tl; beginning or rife of that Nerve that palTes to th; part, and not to the place in which the fymptoi appears. And the fame thing is to be obferved i Palfies, when the ufe of fome particular Limb taken away from an inward caufe. the Blood- Having finiflied our difcourfe of theVeffels th; vejjels of firing from the Spinal marrow, we will add ^ word to what was faid above, Ch. 8. of the 2?/oo< ' ‘ ' * veffels th3t are difierfed through it, from Dr. Willi Thefe are ot three forts. Arteries, Sinus and Vein It is fupplied with Arteries after one manner abo't the Heart, and after another below it.For above i feeing the trunk of the Aorta is prefently cleft ii to many branches, which depart from the Spin therefore frcm its Axillar branches there fprin a Vertebral Artery on each fide , which afcendii' .(freight to the Occiput , fends a twig in at eve joynting of the Vertebra : But below the Heart, i afmuch as the Aorta in its whole defcent lies upi the Spine, there are received into the Spine tv Arteries from its back fide, betwixt every joyu ing of the Vertebra. But both above and below, t ; Arterial branches that are carried toward the fpit , being prefently divided each into two , one tw; is bellowed on the neighbouring Mufcles, and t ; Chap. 17. Of the Nerves of Os facrum. 43 3 )ther enters in at the joynting of the Vertebrce , vithin whofe cavity it is fubaivided into three ither twigs, two of which are beftowed on the Medulla (with its two Membranes) and the third >n the Membrane that lines the infide of the Ver- ebra before. How thefe branches of Arteries in- ifculate with one another, may better be concei- r ed by the faid Author ' s draught of them in his fab. 1 3. than by a verbal defcription. 1 therefore emit the Reader thither. The Sinus , he lays, are ontinued from the lateral Sinus of the Brain, and 11 along the Spinal marrow they lie under the Ar- eries, having one Velfel to receive the Blood from he Arteries, and another to deliver it to the Veins, erving for the fame ufes as thofe of the Brain lid, which were Ihewn above in Chap. 3. of this look. Its reins , like the Arteries, are communica- ed to it different ways above ^ and below the Heart. 4bove , a branch arifing from the trunk of rena ava below the fubclavian, accompaines the Ver- ebral Artery up to the Occiput , fending a twig in it every jointing of the vertebra : but below the deart, becaufe the trunk of rena cava does not, ike the Aorta , lie immediately upon the Spine, ind fo cannot immit twigs into it dire&ly, there- ore it fends out of it felf rena fine pari , out of vhofe trunk two branches fpringing , and each >f thofe being divided into two, one of them is jeftowed on the neighbouring Mufcles , and the )ther enters the Spine. Yet below the Kidneys, vhen there is lieve given to the rena cava to be :arried near the Spine, the rena fine pari ends, md the vafa Lumbaria proceed immediately from the T runk of the Vena cava as well as from the Trunk of the great Artery. The bran- chings of the Sinus and reins within the Spine and their anafiomfes are curioufly delineated in the F i 4 aforefaid 4$4 Of the Head. Book III, aforefaid Tab. 1 3 which deferves to be confultef by the Reader. CHAR XVIII. Of the Face and its Parts , I N the former Chapters we have difeourfed 0 that part of the Head that is decked with Hai called Calva , of the Brain, aokes and vapours, too much light and the in- ries of the Air are kept out, and the outward micle of the Eye called sldnata , but efpecially lat called Cornea , which covereth the Iris and upilla, is moiftened, wip’d and clean’d. They >nfift outwardly of a very thin Skin which has ) fat under it inwardly they are lined with the trier anium, that is here moft thin and fmooth. etwixt thefe parts comes the Membrana carnofa , hich is alfo very thin. Each Eye has two. In lan the lower is lefs, and is but very obfeure- ’ moved in comparifon with the upper : but in irds the lower is the larger , and in moft feems ily to be moved, the upper remaining unmove- )le. Stem mentions feveral punCta lachrymalia in leir inner Membrane, which run on each fide in- ) one Duft, (called by him Collicia) whereby the iperfiuous moifture of the Eye-lids is conveyed itotheNoftrils. At their edges they have little >ft Cartilages, ( called Cilia in Latin ) to ftreng- Cilia, len them, and that they may meet the more ex- hly. Upon thefe Cartilages there grow Hairs, hich having attained to a certain length, will natii- 43 s Of the Fie ad. Book III Supercilia. Canthi. Their Glands. Whence Tears pro- ceed. naturally grow no longer, fo that they never neec to be cut. Thofe on the upper Eye- lid turi fomething upwards,and thole on the lower down wards. Above the upper Eye-lid grow alfo a Set of Hairs,betw_ixt it and the Fore-head, out of th Super cilia or Eye-brows } thefe lie pretty flat bend ing from within outwards, and hindei fweat frcn the Brow, dull or other things from falling inti the Eyes. The Eye-lids have two corners called Canthi The outer of thefe is lefs, and in its upper part i has a Gland placed ( ufually called Innominate or namelefs, but might be named lachrymalis , a affording the mod of that Lympha that makes th Tears. ) This Gland is conglomerate , bein; made up of many leffer , and has fmall twigs of Arteries that creep to it, and depolite Serum o Lympha in it to fupply matter for Tears upon oc caflon. But the ordinary ufe of this Lympha i to moiften the infide of the Eye-lids, and the Su perficies of the Eyes, that they may move mop glibly. Stem has obferved that in a Calf the fore, part of this Gland is elegantly divided into Lobe ( being indented on its edge) and that betwixt th intervals of thefe there pafs out excretory Velfe! from the Gland, which running forward withi the. inner coat of the Eye lid make little holes in . at a little diftance from the Cilia, thro’ which the difcharge their humour. And he doubts not bi there are fuch Veflels in Men, in whom he cal them vafa lachrymalia. Dismerbroeck having rei koned eight opinions concerning the caufe, orig ; and matter of tears, reje&s them all, and this w have mentioned with the reft : ana thinks th. their matter is the more ferous and thin particl of the pitukous humour collefted in the Brai and flowing to the Eyes upqji its contra&io hap. 19. Of the containing farts of the Eye. 439 rough the Foramen lachrymale feated at the in- j:r corner of the Eye. Which the Reader may :e defended in his Anat. lib. 3. cap. 1 5. There is aother fpongy and foft Gland in the inner Can- vas or Corner, feated upon the Foramen lachry - tale, which helps the former in its office, but is :)t above a third part fo big. Dr. Brings fays, lerearetwo or three lymphatick Veitels that ceive Lympba from it, and end in the inlide ' the Eye-lid , and that eight arife out of the rmer Gland , and end in the Tunica adnata , here they continually depofite fomething of mpha 1 to keep the Eye moift. Nerves come to lem from the fifth pair , which communicating ith the Intercojlal , are much irritated in the iffions of fudden joy or of fadnefs, and fo twitch id comprefs thefe Glands that the Lympba is ueezed or milked as it were out of them, as Dr. Wlis ingenioully fuppofes. Steno thinks, that 1 weeping, the flux of tears is principally owing ) the contraction of thecapillary Veins, by which leans the Blood and ferum cannot be fo quickly irried back from thefe Glands as they are brought ) them by the Arteries, and therefore the ferum uzes out ( as blood has alfo been obferved to do mietimes. ) Which Opinion differs not much •om Dr, Willis'* s, if we will fuppofe the con- raCtion of the Veins to be owing to the Nerves, s it is reafonable we Ihould. As for the Mufcles of the Eye, they ffiall be de- :ribed in the Fifth Book. CHAP. 44° Of the Head. Book III The Titni- dei of the Eye, one common. “Three pro- per. i. Sdero* tica. CHAP. XX. Of the Tunicles of the Eye. H Aving done with the outward or containin parts of the Eye, we come now to the Ey it felf, and firft of its Tunicles. The outmoft Tunicle of the Eye is common , an is called Adnata. It fprings from the Pericraniun, and is fpread over all the White of the Eye abov the Sclerotica , reaching as far as the Iris. B this the Eye is kept firmly within its orbit , froc whence it is alfo called conjunctiva. It is of ver exquifite fenfe, and has many capillary Veins an Arteries creeping through it, which are moft con fpicuous in an Ophthalmy or inflammation of th Eyes. Under this Tunicle are the Tendons t the Mufcles extended and expanded to the cit cumference of the Iris , which increafe its whifc nefs } and fome take them for a fecond Tuniclt calling it Innominata. The proper Tunicles of the Eye are three , a< cording to the threefold fubftance of the Optic Nerve. For this Nerve ( as all the other ) cor lifts of two Tunicles fpringing from the JDw and Pia Mater , and an inner marrowy fubftanc From the Dura Mater fpringeth the outmoft co; of the Nerve , and from this the Tunicle that fpread next under the Adnata , called Sclerotii from its hardnefs ^ but in its forepart where covereth the Iris and Pupilla , it is named Come from its tranfparency j though fometimes th latter name includes the whole Tunicle , as we behind and on the fides, as before,, Th 'hap. 20. Of the Tunicles of the Eye. 441 That which lieth next under the Cornea is much 2 '..^ ho * linner than it, and is called Choro'ides , from its r0id€S ' Tembling the Membrane Chorion wherein the vtus is included in the Womb. Its fore-part is cherwife called Vvea, becaufe it is fomewhat of lie colour of a Grape. This fprings from the la /Watered is fpread from the bottom or cen- te of the Eye behind, all over the Eye to the aplia 3 to whofe circumference when it is come, i becomes double, making with one part the 7m, Mth the other the Ligamentum ciliare . On the ifide it is of a duskifn colour , ( in Man ) but lacker on the outfide. But where it makes the ih, it is of divers colours refembling the Rain- yeft I w, from whence is borrows its name in ime it is more blue, in others black, in others jey. This Tanicle is perforated before as wide < the Fuplla ( or fight of the Eye) to permit the lys of vifible fpecies to pafs in to the cryftalline 1 mour. Next unto which cryftalline humour lies !e Ligamentum ciliare, the fecond part of the du- licated Vvea. This confifts of (lender Filaments < Fibres, ( like the Flairs of the Eye-lids ) run- ng like fo many black lines from the circumfe- tnce of the Vvea to the Tides of the cryftalline Frnour, w hich they encompafs, and widen or cnftringe as there is occafion, by contracting or t ening the Foramen of the Vvea. The third Tunicle is made of the medullar 3. Red- bftance of the Optick Nerve, and is called Reti~ torinis. r cr ketiformis (Net-like : ) This feemeth to be Thu the t s principal Organ of Sight. For, as Dr. Briggs 1:11 argues, neither the cryftalline humour,/^, trough which the rays pafs much refracted 3 nor t; Tunicle Cboroides, are at all fit for this ufe. Ir this latter partfas arifing from th zPia Mater ) tanot communicate the imprefilons of the rays to Book III 442 Of the Head. to the medullar part of the Brain, which it doe not at all touch. Whereas the medullar Fibre of the Retina have communication therewith , a fpringing therefrom, and therefore can well pei form that office. The Fibres of this Tunicle ar extended from the bottom Or inner centre of th Eye, where the Optick Nerve enters it, as far a the Ligamentum ciliare , (to which it affords Ani mal Spirits for the continuance of its motion.) 1 one take this Tunica Retina and put it into wari water, fhaking it a little, to waffi off the mucoi fubftance that cleaves to it, and then hold it u to the light, thefe Filaments will appear very nu merous like the threads of the fined; Lawn. CHAP. XXI. Of the Humours and Veffels of the Eye. The hu- Ext to the Tunicles of the Eyes are the Hu mours of mours contained in them to be conlldereci thref^ ^efe are * n nutn ^ er three, -dqueus^ Cry fiallinus , and Vitreus. The fecond weighs as muc again as the firft, and yet not fo much as the thin by a lixth part. The Cryftalline is the moft deni of confiftence by much \ and the glaffie mor denfe than the watry. x.Aqueus. The Aqueous humour is outermoft , being pel lucid and of no colour ( as neither are the othe twoj It fills up that fpace that is betwixt th Cornea and the Cryftalline humour before. If an thickifli particles fwim in it , then Gnats , Flies Spiders webs and the like will feem to be flyin before the Eyes. But if thofe particles grow fti thicker, and clofe together fo as to make a filn an Dh. §1. Of the Humours and Veffels of the Eye. 443 nd this be fpread before the hole of the Pupilla , hen is the fight quite taken away , which difeafe ; called a CataraCt. This Humour is very clear, nd thin, and therefore eafily diffipable • but by ’hich way its expence Ihould be fupplied, is diffi- cult to determine. Some think it is fed by the .rteries out of which this water iflues through I 10W not what Glands : others derive it from le Nerves, and a third fort from the Lymphe- ids. But Dr. Ant. Nuck refutes all thefe Opi- ons- the firfi; from the non-appearance of any lands; the fecond from the no ( or at the oft a very fmall quantity of ) liquor that at any me can be obferved in the Nerves : whereas if ; e tunica cornea be prick’d, and all or the great- 't part of this aqueous humour be let out , he iis found by repeated Experiments that it will I recruited again in fix hours fpace. The third •pinion he refutes from the general office of bmpheduds, which is, to bring back from the ircumference to the centre, and not contrarily, Ucaufe the valves wherewith they every where ® ;ound cannot admit of that motion. Wherefore :,i ’ (ploding all thefe Opinions, he eftabliffiesa new 3i[ c.e of his own, upon the fcore of the new Veffiels t> ei lat he has obferved to terminate in the tunica vnea , ( which he calls duftus ocuiorum aquofe, nich we lhall defcribe from him by and by ) af~ lining, that thefe Duds are the Conduits by T luich this humour is fed , and that they fupply i ordinarily with feveral drops daily, becaule of te continual tranfpiration of it by pores looking rim within outwards. As to the particles of t s Humour, from feveral Experiments he has tide, he thinks it is demonftrable ; 1. that it (ntainsinit a very limpid and pellucid water. 3 Vifcid and tenacious particles. 3. A fait and G g an 444 Of the Head . Book III a.Cryftal- linus* j.Vitreu: an acid. 4. Earthy particles. 5. That it want not alfoitsvolatil fpirit. The Cryftalline humour ( fo called from its be ing as clearly tranfparent as Cryftal ) is placet betwixt the aqueous and the vitreous, but no exadly in the middle or centre of the Eye, bu rather towards its fore-part. It is inclofed in th bofom as it were of the vitreous humour , and ; flattifh on the fore-fide, but rounder behind. ! is more bright and folid than either of the otto two. It has been the common Opinion that it inclofed in its proper Membrane, which is calle either Cryftallina from its tranfparency, or An nea from its moll fine contexture. But Dr. Brigg a very accurate Anatomizer of the Eye, denii any fuch Tunicle, affirming that it is meerly at ventitious when the humour is expofed for fon while to the Air, or is gently boiled. As to tl colledionor reception of the rays of things v fible, this humour is the primary inftrument fight: though as was faid before, the tunica ret net is the principal as to perception , becau 1 through it the rays are communicated to t) common fenfory. The third and laft Humour of the Eye is t yitreous , fo called becau fe it is like to molt Glafs. This is thicker than the Aqueous, b thinner than the Cryftalline • and much excee them both in quantity, for it fills up all the i ner or hinder hemifphere of the globe of the Ey, and a pretty deal ( toward the lateral fuperfici.es I of the formore. It is round behind, but hollo’' ed in the middle forwards , to receive the Ci ftalline into its bofom. This humour is alfo f; ! to be feparated from the other two by a prop Tunicle called Vitrea , which the aforefaid inf juous Author likewife denies. Ch, 21. Of the Humours and Veffels of the Eye. 445 See the Situation of thefe Humours reprefent- :d in Fig. II. of lab. 15, inferred p. 41 7. The Eyes have Arteries from the Carotides , The VeJJels vhich bellow twigs on their Mufcles y and on °f heir Tunicles. And thefe are accompanied with reins fpringing from the Branches of the Jugu- irs. As for their Nerves , they either affill the :nfe of feeing, and are called the Optick Nerves, 'hich we have reckoned for the fecond pair, and efcribed before Chat). 1 o. or ferve for the moving f them, being inferted into their Mufcles, and to lis purpofe ferve the third and fourth pair , and >me twigs of the fifth. As to their Lymphedutts , e have fpoken of them above , Chap. 1 9. when e difcourfed of the Glands placed at each C an- us or Corner of the Eye-lids. Befides thefe Vef- Is, Dr. Ant . Nuck , whom we cited but juft now, as difcovered a fifth fort of Velfel, called by him rfius oculorum acpuofi, which he believes do re- m the fecond Pair of the Neck, being joined ?th the harder procefs of the feventh Pair. As j ' the Cartilage , it is a fubftance that is fieceft for t s place. For if the Auricle had been bony , it tght by many Accidents have been broken off; c if it had been fielhy or only membranous , it V| uld not have flood fo fpreading , but have fptdowm Whereas a Cartilage is not in dan- Og 3 get 44 8 Of the Head. Book III. ger of breaking, and yet it is ftiff enough to keep this outer part of the Ear expanded. It is tied to Os petrofum by a ftrong Ligament which rifeth from the Pericranium. Vfes. The Vfes of the outward Ear or Auricle are thefe : Firft, it ferveth for Beauty. Secondly, il helps the receiving of the Sounds. For firft , il gathereth them being difperfed in the Air. Se condly, it doth moderate their Impetus , fo that they come gently to the Tympanum. Such a< have it cut off’ upon any occaiion , are very mucl prejudic’d in their Heat ing , which becomes con fufed with a certain murmur or fwooing like th< Fall of waters. i'i.rotides. behind and below each Ear , there are fe * veral Glands outwardly under the Skin , that ari called Parotides . But there are two more notabl than the reft, near one another ; of which one i lefler, and is conglobate *, but the other bigger confifting as it were of many leflfer, and is conglo nterate. From th econglobate^ according to Stem there arife Lympheduds , returning the lymph that is feparated in them into the jugular Veins and in the conglomerate the faliva is feparated which is conveyed into the Mouth by prope Duds: but of thefe more by and by , in Chap ter 2 6 . C H A P, XXIII. Of the inward Fart of the Ear. T H E inward Part of the Ear is that whic we properly call Auris 1 and begins at tl Meatus Auditorius , or that in molt Cavity of tl Auricle in which the Ear-wax is collected, Th Cavil Meatus Auditori* us. 449 Chap. 23. Of the Ear . Cavity afcends fomething with a winding Dud, :hat the vehement Impetus of Sounds may be a lit- :le infringed before they vibrate upon the Tympa- num. Monf. du Verney (that has lately writ a particular Treatife of the Ear jfays, that this meatus >r tube that reaches from the Concha to the Tym- panum , confifts partly of a Cartilage, and partly )f a Bone* The Skin that covers it , he fays , is The Ext- urnilhed with an infinite number of Glandules® 3 ^ (fayellowifh colour, each of which has its Tube a tpening into this Meatus, by which they fend that 'ellow glewy fubftance which is ordinarily found n it, and hinders Infe&s from creeping into the iar, entangling them like Bird-lime, it; Before its inner end is fpread the Tympanum or 7 ^ j-ym* Drum , which is a nervous , almoft round and panam, jellucid Membrane, of molt exquilite fenfe, divi- cJ ling the outward from the inner Ear. Some will lave it to fpring from the Pericranium , others rom the Pia Mater , a third fort from the Dura Water , a fourth from the fofter procefs of the Auditory Nerve expanded. And laftly , feme hink that it has a proper fubftance , fpringing irJ rom no other Membrane, but made in the firft ormation of the parts. It is very dry , that it Ci night give the better found. It is ftrong, that it hould the better endure external Harms. It is nchafed in a chanel or rift made in the cricum- erence of the outer end of the Bone that joins to he Cartilage which forms the largeft part of the Weatus , and it has a Cord that runs crofs it be- iind, which fome take for a Ligament to ftrength- n it • but du Verney fays it is a branch of the fe- 'enth pair of Nerves, which fupplies twigs to the dufcles that move the Tyynpanum : (for it hath wo Mufcles to move it, which fiiall be deferibed n the Fifth Book, Chap. 8.) G g 4 When 45° Of the Head. Book III Ik firfl When it is taken away, there appears a Cavil Cdwtj. ontheinfide of it, which byfomeis alfo called Tympanum , but by du Vcrney , the Barrel. Hi fays, it is a quarter of an inch long, and half ai inch wide. It is encompafled round with Bone and clad within with a Membrane that is inter woven with a great number of Veffels. Us four lit- In this Cavity are contained four little Bone tie Bones, that are moveable, and conduce much to Hear ing. They have no Marrow in them , nor an covered v, ith any Membrane or Pcriojleum • ye at their extremities where they are joyned , the] are bound with a fmall Ligament one to another And they have this alfo peculiar to themfelves that they are as big in Infants as in grown per Tons, as are alfo the Bones of the Labyrinth anc Cochlea . cording to Vefhngius and du Verncy. 3 . Malle- The firjl is called Malleolus , the little Hammer olus. It hath a round Head, which is inarticulated intc the Cavity of the Anvil by a loofe Ligament, This Head is continued into a fmall Meek or Han- dle, which reaching beyond the middle of tht Tympanum , adhereth to it. About the middle il hath two proceffes : The one of vyhich , being Ihorterbut thicker, has the Tendon of the inter- nal Mufcle inferted into it ^ and the other being longer but fmaller, the Tendon of the external, whereby this Bone immediately, but mediately th< Tympanum is moved, as fhall be further explain- ed in the aforefaid Chapter of the fifth Book. And fee Tab. 16. before-going wherein all thefefoui Bones with the Muicio? are reprefented. % Incus, The fecond is called Incas , the Anvil , having om id, and two Feet, being fpmewhat like one of ^e grind ng or double Teeth that has twe roots, onely or f its Feet is cenfiderably longei than the other. The Head it pretty maflle , ha* ving lhap. 2 $. Of the Ear. 45 1 Stapes= Os orbl- culare* ing in the top of it a little fmooth cavity, which xeiveth the knob or head of the Hammer. The nalleft ( but longeft) Foot is tied to the top or ;ad of the Stirrop by a loofe but firm Ligament* '.it the thickeft, broadeft and Ihorteft refteth up- l the Os fquamofum. The third is St apes , or the Stirrop. This is not 3* compaft and folid as the two former, but more )rous. ' In Figure it is almoft triangular, in the iddle hollow , to give way to the palling of the ir to the Labyrinth. In the upper part of it is a ryfmall and round knob, upon which the long- t foot of the Anvil refteth. Its Shape is much a~ N upted to the F me fir a ovalis(whkh opens into the ibyrinth jabout which it is tied round fomewhat ofely,fo that it may be driven to within its Sinus^ lit cannot without violence be pulled outwards. “4 The fourth Bone was found out by Franc. Sylvi- i, and from its round fhape is called Orbicular e. is tied by a flender Ligament t-o the fide of the - apes , where the Stapes is joined to the Incus. oil u Vherney fays, that this Bone comes betwixt the ng foot of the Anvil and the knob or head of i e Stirrop : And that on that fide next the Head 1 the Stirrop it iso. ex, being received into a :tle Cavity of the faid Head and on that fide :xt the Foot of the Anvil 't is a little hollow, ceiving the faid Foot into it felf 5[t From the lower fide of this fir ji inner Cavity, c y^ ’herein thefe Bones are contained , there is a nels, '. and Meatus or Chanel to the Palate of theMouth rar the root of the Vvula • and another from its )per fide that runs to the cavity of the Noftril, ; has formerly been taught - but the aforefaid uthor deferibing it to be much wideigbut a great :al fhorter than the other, fays , That it pene^ ates to within the finuoffties of the mammillary procefs 45 2 Of the Head . Book II procefs of the Temple-bone. Thole who thougl it to run to the Noftrils,fuppofed it to convey tli ther pituitous Matter collected within this fir Cavity - but du Ferney thinks its ufe to be,to pe mit the internalAir to retire into the finuofities the aforefaid procefs when the Tympanum isdrivi inwards by the external Air, and that the inte nal Air returns from thence again upon the r taxation of the Tympanum. And as to the fbrm chanel,he calls it an Aquedutt , and fays,that its fii| and ihorter part is bony,but the fecond and long partly cartilaginous and partly membranou which part palling near the root of the Nofe is 1 ned with a glandulous skin that is a continuatic of that which cloaths the infide of the Noftrils.J that he believes that part of the Air which drawn in at the Nofe penetrates this chanel ( at fo may afcend to the Ear ) and on the contrat thinks that aqueous humours defcend by it int the mouth by its aperture in the Palate ; for 1 denies that there is any Valve in it which migl flop any thing from palfing either way. Oth( Authors ( not denying this latter ufe , but ncf fuppoling that it had any communication wit the Noltrils inftead of the former ufe derive from thence ) have thought , that air and all founds might pafs through it in at the Mouth t the Ear, by obferving that thofe who are thick ( hearing do ufually hold their mouths open whe they liften attentively, which they do probabl becaufe they are partly allifted thereby in the hearing. koks. In the middle alfo of this cavity oppofite to tl Tympanum , in the os petrofum there are two hole the greater and higher of which is Ihut by the ba fis of the Stapes ( when no founds alfeft the Eai and is of an oval figure, whence it is called Fern P (hap. 23 . Of the Ear. 455 fa ovalis , and opens inwards or backwards Feneftra jetty wide into the Labyrinth. The other is oval!S ° i s and lower, and is of a round lhape, whence iis called Rotunda. The Orifice of this is open, Rotunda, 1 1 within the middle of its chanel it has a rift tierein is inchafed a thin, dry and tranfparent lembrane like ‘that of the Tympanum. Behind nich it is divided into two Pipes divided by the tfquamofum , one of which tends to the Cochlea , te other to the Labyrinth. This Labyrinth is the fecond inner cavity, being The fecond. lr lefs than the former, and was firft fo called by cavity or i;i. Allopus , from the hollowed bony femicircles Labyrinth. (loathed with a thin membranej returning cir- darly into the fame cavity. The Fenejlra ovalis id rotunda open into it out of the firft cavity : i d befides thefe holes it has five others, one of 'hich opens into the end of the larger Gyrus or inding of the Cochlea : The other four are fo (d hall that they hardly admit an hair, through tiich the moll flender Fibres of the auditory erve proceed to the inner membrane that en- mpalfes this cavity. The third and laft inner cavity is called Cochlea , The third. :caufe in its fpiral winding it refembles a Snail’s Cavity cat- iell. It is lefs than the Labyrinth, and has two, Coch " metimes three or four fpiral windings , which e cloathed inwardly with a moll: thin Mem- •ane, into which, as into the Labyrinth, the flen- -r Fibres of the auditory Nerve enter, through iree or four very fmall holes. DuFerney makes but two inner cavities , viz, le Barrel ( which we defcribed above ) and the abyrinth. But then he divides the Labyrinth in- ) three parts : the forempft of which he calls ie Feftibulum or Entrance • the fecond compre- ends the three femicircular conduits or chanels, which 454 Of the Head. Book III which ( he fays ) are on that fide of the Veftibl which is towards the hinder part of the Head and the third is the Cochlea, which is on the othe fide. But this new diftin&ion is of lefs moment and therefore I pafs it over. As for the fhapeof th Labyrinth and Cochlea , it is (hewn before in Tab 1 6. But they are reprefented much larger tha; according to nature, as are alfo the Bones in th firft cavity, that their parts might appear mor plainly. The conge- Thefe three inner Cavities are all formed with nit Air. j n the procejjits petrofus of the Temple-bone , an< in them is contained a molt pure and fubtil Air which fome think to be included in them in th very firft formation of the parts, and therefor call it Aer lnfitus and Congenitus. Some fuppof it to be Animal fpirit, effufed into them by th< auditory Nerve. 7be veffels This inner part of the Ear has Veins, Arteries of the Ear. and Nerves from the fame origines as the outer only the harder procefs of the auditory Nerv< goes to the outer , and the f of ter to this inner, which coming by the hinder Meatus of the Os pe trofum is infer ted into and difperfed through thi circles of the Cochlea and Labyrinth. iLcrm? All the parts of the Auricula and Auris concui what, “and 1:0 the perfe&ing the Hearing, which is a SenJ bm per- whereby found is perceived from the various trembling formed . motion of the external Air, beating upon the T ym panum, and thereby moving the internal Air witl the Fibres of the auditory Nerve, and communicatee to the common Senfory. Now Sound that is the ob- ject of it, is nothing elfe but a quality arifing frorr the Air or Water beat upon and broken by tht fudden and vehement concuflion of folid Bodies And the diverfity or greatnefs of fuch found i:l difUnguilhed by the four Bones that Hand on the infich ;hap. 24 . Of the Nofe. 455 fide the Tympanum : For as from the greater or ‘ fs, gentle or harlh impulfes of the external fo^ :>rous Air ( fluctuating like Waves caufed by a !one thrown into the Water ) the Membrane the Tympanum is accordingly driven or fhak’d :;ainft the Malleus , the Malleus againft the Incus , ad the Incus againft the Stapes ^ fo, as the fame t apes and Os orbicular e open the Fenejlra ovalis lore or lefs, is there a freer or ftraker paflage ranted to the internal Air out of the firft inner < vity into the Labyrinth and Cochlea , in whofe irtuous and unequal windings it is varioufly in- inged and modulated, from whence the fpecies ( found that is made thereby, ( according to the 'verfity of the external impellent ) is fometimes sore acute, fometimes more full, fometimes more irfh, fometimes more gentle, fometimes bigger, metimes lefs: the Idea of which Species is car- ed to the common Senfory, ( and fo reprefented 1 the mind) by the auditory Nerve that expands felf through the Membrane that invefts the id Labyrinth and Cochlea. CHAP. XXIV. Of the Nofe. r H E Organs of Seeing and Hearing being de- The Nofe, fcribed in the foregoing Chapters, we come )w to the Inftrument of the third Senfe, viz., wiling , which is the Nofe. The parts of the Nofe may be diftinguifhed in- Its extern > the more external ^ and the more internal. The na } .ore external parts are thefe, the Cuticle and‘ viz ’ Sin, Mufcles, Veins, Arteries, Nerves, Lymphe- u&s, a proper Puft, Bones and Cartilages. Firft, the 456 Of the Head. Book II Skin. the Skin cleaveth fo fait to the Mufcles and Cai tilages, that it cannot be fevered without ren ; Mufcles . ing. Secondly, as for the Mufcles , they are fi down in the defcription of the Mufcles, Book f Veins, M Thirdly, the Veins come from the external Jugi series and. lars, as the Arteries from the Carotides. Fourt! Nerves, ly, the Nerves fpring from the fifth pair. Fiftl ly, Stem has obferved in Sheep and Dogs a Lyn phatick V elfel in each Noftril ^ and ’tis probab there are the fame in men. Sixthly, Both Ste j and Dr. Needham defcribe a Meatus or Duct, h; ving two foramina in the canthus pf the Eye, bi opens but by one into the Nofe : and Dr. Neet bam has obferved another paflagc going out < the middle of this, toward the Palate. By whic Duds any one may perceive that in weeping, great quantity of water doth flow from the Eye Bones. Seventhly, the Bones are defcribed in Book V Cartilages. Chap. 6. Eighthly, the Cartilages are in numbe five ; the two upper are broader, and adhere t the lower fide of the Bones of the Nofe wher they are broader and rough , and being joine to one another pafs from thence to the tip c the Nofe , making up one half of the Alee : tb two under make up the other half, being joine to the upper by a membranous ligament th fifth divideth the Noftrils. Thefe Cartilages ar moved by the Mufcles. Its inner The inner parts of the Nofe are thefe : FirfI Pf ts ‘ the Membrane which covereth its infide, whic lous 11 Mem- *" ome think proceedeth from the Dura Mater , pa| brans. fing through the holes of the Os cribriform g wit the nervous Fibres. This Membrane on its bac fide hath abundance of little Papilla or Glands in which the Serum or Rheum is feparated tha runs out by the Nofe , ( though Diemerbrocc thinks them to be the true Organ of Smelling . Secondly I hap. 24. Of the Nofe 0 457 Scondly, the Hairs , called in Latine FibriJJi^ Hair. viich hinder the entrance of infers and of duft iia great meafure, as one draws his breath in at fa; Nofe. Thirdly, the red flelhy fpongious fub- smgie f; nee, with which the holes of the Os fpongiofum fop,. uthe upper fide of the Noftril are filled up . him which the Polypus fpringeth. The length of a comely Nofe is the third part Length. <3 the length of the Face. The upper part of the Nofe which is bony , is Ok deno » :led Dorfum Nafi, or the ridge. The lower rt } vmion of 1 eral parts Ala or Pinna. The tip of the Nofe, w mbulus , and Orbiculus. The middle cartilaginous ptition, Septum • and the fkfhy part, that at t.: bottom of the Septum reaches from the tip a the Nofe to the root of the upper Lip, Coium- » The two holes that are caufed by the par- tition, are called Nam the Noftrils. And thefe abut their middle are each divided into two, 33 of which goes up to the Os cribriforme , to envey feents thither .• the other defeends down b an the Palate to the Fauces , by which Rheum f; s down either of its own accord if it be very tin } or by fluffing the Air up ftrongly in at oPsNofe, if it be thick, which we may hawk a I fpit out at pleafure. The Nofe is an external adjuvant organ of its ufeh Selling, as the Auricula is of Hearing. For when 1 ells exhale out of odoriferous bodies into the a| by taking our breath in at the Nofe, the ftnts accompanying the air afeend up the No- il is to the top of their Cavity, viz., to the Os curiforme , through whofe holes the olfa&ory frves (otherwife called procejfus mammillares)\i - ft out by their Fibres, and are difperfed through tl; Membrane that cloaths the infide of the No- Oils, efpecially its upper part : which Nerves, Fibres Of the Head. Book II Fibres and Membrane are the inward immediai and adequate organ of Smelling, Other inferioi ufes the Nofe has alfo : as firft, fometimes to tal in our breath by , that we may not keep or Mouth always open for that purpofe. Secondl to help the Speech, which is very much impai ed by the lofs of it. Thirdly, it ferves for tl reparation and difcharge of the mucous humou in the Blood. CHAP. XXV. Of the external parts of the Mouth. j T H E next part to be defcribed is the Mouti whofe parts are either External or Interne The External are the Cheeks and Lips. As to the Cheeks , their fubftance being Mu cular, this is no proper place for their defeript on (but Book V.) only we fhall note from Sten that betwixt their Mufcles and the inner invel ing Membrane of the Mouth there is fpread < each fide towards the lower Gums a large coi glomerate Gland , from whence many fmall Du<5 open into the cavity of the Mouth , pouring S Uva thereinto. And as to their parts we flu obferve this further, that their upper part ne under the Eyes, that jets out a little and is cor monly higheft of colour, is called Malum or T mum faciei , in Englifh commonly the Ball of t Cheek ; and their lower part that is ftretchi out in blowing of a Trumpet or the like , is a led Bucca. The Lips are framed of a carnous foft fungo fubftance* and of the Mufcles * covered with tl Jhe Outer parts of the Mouth. Jhe Cheeks. Jheir glands. Jhe lips. ‘hap. 2 6 , Of the Mouth, -459 nin Skin, under which, on the inlide , efpecially "'the lower Up, there lie numerous Glands, \hofe excretory VelTels penetrate the Skin, pour- ig forth their Saliva into the Mouth. They are i number two, the upper and the lower. ( Of teir Mufcles fee Book V.) The upper Lip has a 1 tie dimple in its middle which is called Phil- tm-j and its fides are named e«, whence the Hr that grows thereon is called Mufi aches. The VJes of the Lips are thefe * Firft , they ^ he u f es °f ilp to retain the Meat in the Mouth, while it is tbe Lips ’ cwing. Secondly, they ferve for beautifying of t: Face, if they be well falhioned. Thirdly, i ■ the containing of the Spittle in the Mouth,that ilhould not drivel out conftantly, but be Tpit ct when we pleafe. Fourthly to keep the Gums a 1 Teeth from external Injuries. Fifthly , for uning of the Speech. CHAP. XXVI. Of the inner Parts of the Mouth . '“'HE inner Parts of the Mouth are thefe : ffe inner- The Gums^ the Teeth ^ the Palate or Roof of. Parts ?f' , I Mouth , the Almonds, the Vvula^ the Tongue y t>£ om " ’ tl Glands and falival Balls, Fhe Gums {Gingiva) are two, rhade up of i. Gums, nrd flelhy fubftance , deftitute of motion , fet i: a Rampire about the Teeth for the keeping *:hem in their Sockets. \s for the Teeth , look for them in Book VI. 2 , Teeth, Cip. 8. The Roof of the Mouth is its upper part , fome- 3 * TaUh*. d ig concave like a Vanity formed in the Os fpbei H h width andb dltoia isfc III.* j - foH 4 6o Of the Head . Book II] noides, and ferves partly for perfe&ing of til Voice by repercufling the Air, and partly affiii the Senfe of Tailing. It confifts of Bones (( which. Book VI. Chap. 6 .) of a peculiar glandi lous Flefh and a thick Tunicle, full of little hoi for the Saliva that is feparated in the Glands deltill through into the Mouth. Stem calls tl glandulous fle(h, the palatine Gland , and fays, it conglomerate, and continued to the Tonftls • ai that there fpring out of it innumerable flend Duds, which perforating the Membrane make like a Sieve. The fame Author mentions al two holes that it has in its fore-part , juft with the Teeth, which come from the Noftrils. . Of the Tonftlla or Almonds we have fpok before in Book II. Chap. ult. Uvula. The Vvula is a red , fpongy and longilh C runcle, that being fornewhat broad at its Ba hangs down from the middle of the Palate ( whe the Noftrils open into the Mouth ) with a fnt but bluntifh End. It is covered with a very 1 and foft Skin, and is often fwelled with Deflu: ons of Rheum , hanging down flaggy , which called the falling of the Vvula , and by ignore! People, the falling of the Root of the Mouth. §*,lon&ttc. The Tongue ( Lingua , dlingendo , from lickir is the Inftrument of Taft e and Speech. It i long and broad, • thicker at the Root than wards the Tip. It is cloathed with two Membranes • The ou i covers onely the upper part of the Tongue , z is very porous, being pretty fmooth in Men, If in fome Brutes it is rough , by reafon of ab' dance of copped bodies which arife out of upper lur face of the Tongue, and are cloatli with this Membrane. Which Bodies are of a c tilaginous fubftauce , and Hand like the Teeth Wo Of the Mouth. 461 jhap. 2 6 , Vooll-cards, bending towards the root of the 'ongue. This Membrane has a line that runs , ngthways of it in its middle, dividing the Tongue to two parts. The inner covers the whole ongue, the lower fide as well as the upper, his is thin and foft, and has many Papilla pro- iberating out of it, which in the upper part of i e Tongue intrude themfelves into the pores of ie outer. Malpighius makes the outer Mem- iane to be that which cloaths the fides and un- cr fide of the Tongue as well as its upper fide : ; d this which we call the fecond , he names a irvous and papillar body, running through the nper furface of the Tongue like a Membrane. As to the fubftance of the Tongue there is subftme. I I eat diverfity of Opinions. Some think it to be Gland others, that it has a peculiar fubftance ; mi itigelius, that it is truly a Mufcle ; and fo does P. Wharton call it •verus Mufculus , though to- rn tirds its root ( he faith jit hath fomething of a ver fmdulous fubftance. Malpighius ( exercit . Epiftol. [t, (lingua, p. 9.) fays, it is rather mufculous than fltimdulous , and defcribes its fubftance thus. \$ ‘Immediately under the aforefaid Membranes ‘ .here lie ftreight flelhy mufcular Fibres, where- mb by the Tongue is drawn inwards and ihortned. d 4 But the centre of the Tongue confifts of a ma- 4 fifold kind of Fibres, long, tranfverfe and ob- 1 ique, which riding one upon another are in- Vi ' .erwoven like a Mat. This inner part is fofter 4 'ind more lufcious to the tafte than the outer ‘lot that it is of another fubftance, but becaufe 1 1 is loofened and larded as it were by a cer- tain lufcious fat that ( efpecially toward the ba- 4 is) fills up the Interftices of the Fibres * and ‘ here are moreover on the fides of the Fibres t n this place 2 fort of miliary Glands which H h 2 “ give 462 Of the Head. Book III “ give it the more pleafant relilh.3 But thougl this be its fubftance, yet it cannot properly b« called a Mufcle, both becaufe no Mufcle ferve< to move it felf, but fome other part \ and alf< becaufe one Mufcle is not moved by another^ th< Tongue is by feveral pair, to be defcribed Book V Connexion. It is connected to the Os hyoides , Larynx , anc Fauces , and by a membranous Ligament to th< parts under it. The extremity > of which Liga meat is called Framtm, which being too Ihorf or extended to the tip of the Tongue , hindret fucking in Children, when they are faid to b Tongue-tied. VeJJels. Its Feins proceed from the external Jugular and are very apparent under the Tongue, wher they are called Ranulares. The Arteries com from the C amides. Nerves it hath from the lift and eighth pairs. Alms The actions and ufes of the Tongue are thef and ujh. Firlt, it is the lnllrument of Tailing ; efpeciall 1 ' the PapilLe in its inner Membrane, which hat nervous filaments ( running amongft: the fielb fibres J inferted into them. Secondly, it fort eth or mod ulateth the Speech. Thirdly, it hel] eth the chewing of meat, by toflingof it to ar fro, and turns it down into the Gullet. 7 .Glands. Befides the Glands already mentioned the are feveral others, forne of which are placed the Mouth, and others, though not feared thei in, yet difcharge into it by proper Duds that quor that is feparated in them, and therefore 1 properly enough to be treated of here. Parotides. The firft are the Parotides , which are of t' forts. Conglobate and Conglomerate , and are bell feated In the hollow under the Ear. The Cong bate are lituated on the upper and fore-fide of u Conglomerate. The Conglomerate are of an I regu .'hap. 26. Of the Mouth 46 ;gular fhape, fuch as the inequalities and emi- ences .of the circumjacent parts grant to them, hey were both of them formerly reputed E- ) undories of the Brain, and fuppofed to ferve kewife for the fuftentation of the Veflels that ;cend this way. But Stem, and from him others live found out more noble and genuine ufes for 1 em. The Conglobate feparate the Lympba from le Arterial blood, and condud it by Lymphe- (ids into the Jugular Veins. The Conglomerate ive not only inferted into them Veins and Ar- tries from the external Jugulars , and Carotides , :d Nerves from the harder branch of the fe- inth pair ^ but alfo there fprings out of each a jculiar Veflel commonly called a Salival dutt. Their falu t)m the liquor it conveys. This Veflel arifes valdufts. ct of it by many fmall roots , that prefen tly I iite into one Trunk, which running on the out- i e of the upper Jaw-bone by a {freight courfe ( a man ) as far as to the centre of the Utfufculus hcinator , there opens into the cavity of the nuth, into which it difcharges the Saliva which i had imbibed out of the Parotis of its own flde, Tis is called Duttus faint alis Stenonianus , from its 1/entor Steno^ or otherwife Superior , to diftin- [Hh it from the maxillar which is the lower, i; to the origine and ufe of the Saliva , we fhall i ;ak thereof by and by. The fecond Glands I call Nuckiana , being Nuckia- lely firfl: defcribed, with the Salival duds pro-n their Orifice , whereby they can eafily dif- large themfelves, and yet nothing return out of le mouth into them. The laft Glands to be treated of are the tguales , to the firft difcovery whereof and of§ uales ’ leir proper Salival duds, feveral pretend. They underneath the Tongue on each fide, and each r them fends forth a proper excretory Veffel c falival Dud, which running parallel with lofe of the internal maxillar Glands , open in le fame papiUce, but have a peculiar Orifice of leir own, ftraiter than that of the other. Now the ufe of all thefe Glands is to feparate ^ iu h e °f le Saliva , and to convey it into the mouth by le falival Duds. As to the Origine of the Sa~ a> ' a im va , it ismoft probably derived from the Arte- al blood. For as the Arteries pour nutritious lood into all other parts , fo they do into the lands alfo 5 part of which they convert into leir own nourifliment , part is returned by the eins in the circulation, and part (viz. of what ferous) they feparate, and bellowing a fubacid uality thereupon make Saliva for Spittle ) of it. To the competition whereof ( if not for the iparation of it)fome think a nervous juice is con- touted, the rather becaufe larger and more nu= lerous twigs of Nerves are communicated to the ilands than to moft other parts, which yet have more exquifite fenfe than thefe. But in refu- Hh 4 tation 4 66 Of the Head. Book III tation of this Opinion, the above-mentioned Dr Nuck alledges this Experiment : 44 That if th 44 Nerve that runs to any Gland be either har< 44 tied or cut in funder, yet the fecretion of th 44 Saliva will not thereupon ceafe , but will onl 44 proceed move (lowly ^ ] which flownefs may b attributed, not to the want of any conftitutiv i principle of the Saliva , fo much as to the wan of that motion in the Gland ( that to be fure de pends as well upon the Nerve as upon the pulfa tion of the Artery ) which is neceffary for th quicker difpatch of the Saliva through or out e the Gland. I lhall not need to difcourfe of th manner of the fecretion of the Saliva in th Glands, feeing it proceeds like the fecretion c other parts, ( v . g. of the Kidneys) viz., from th conformity of the particles of the liquor to th pores in the Gland or the mouths of the excre tory Velfel. After its feparation , its motio into and along the Lymphedu&s is much fur thered by the mufcular motion of each part re fpedively. Now the Saliva is not to be reputei a meer Excrement, for it is believed by all mo dern Anatomifts, that it ferves for the furtherin; of the fermentation of Meats in the Stomach, i it be not the main ferment of it, as was Ihewei in Book I. Chap. 7. That it has a fermentativ quality Diemerbroeck proves by this Experiment That if a piece of white Bread be chewed an moiften’d with much Spittle , and then be mixe> with Wheat-pafte kneaded with warm Watei at will make it ferment. Dr. Nuck thinks it i an univerfal ferment for Meats and Drinks , par taking of divers qualities ( or particles ) but c none in any excelfive degree. That it is acic he demonftrates by this familiar Obfervation ■ 4 That if when Milk is a boiling , one tak a Spoor Of the Mouth. 4&7 ' hap. 2 6. a Spoonful to tafte of, and then prefently whilft itismoifl: with the Saliva , put it into 4 the Milk again ( Hill a boiling ) the Milk will 14 break as if fome acid liquor were mixed with ‘it.] That it is endued with a volatile Salt, i thinks is evident from its curing the Itch,Tet° ■ trs, &c. That oleous particles are mixed with te acid, he fuppofes muft be concluded from its \ ling Quickfilver. And whereas it ufually be- (ines frothy in the mouth upon its being agita- ti by the motion of the Mufcles of the Tongue,, ® d thofe which move the lower Jaw , that he (inks proceeds from its being endued with a 11x1° til fait and fpirituous oleous and acid particles^, Mle the volatile fpirit vamfhesj * The End of the Third Book, 7 ’he 4 here it is wont to be opened in the Sciatica , or J ier diftempers of the Hips f) but the minor goes ajl further than the Mufdes of the Hip. The d ler three are fpent on the Mufdes, Skin, &c. m the Thigh, Leg and Foot. CHAR V. Of the Arteries of the Thigh 9 Leg T and Foot . Book II. Cb. 11. defcribing the defending Branches of the Aorta, we traced them to the nighs, where the Rami lliaci begin to be called £ wales, aswasfaid of the Veins. The Crural Artery 474 Of the Veffels of the Limbs 0 Book Pi Artery is lefs than the Vein, and before itarrh at the Ham fendeth forth three Branches, vi Mufcula cruralis exterior , interior , and Poplite The firft enters the fore Mufcles, the fecond t! inner Mufcles of the Thigh ^ and the third ro down the hinder Mufcles as low as the Hai whence it has its name. When the trunk oft Crural Artery is pall the Ham, it fends out thr more called Tibiaa exterior , pojlerior elatior ai pojlerior humilior , which are bellowed on t Mufcles, Skin, &c. of the Leg and Foot- ai what remains of it defcends to the Foot, upi which it is fpeiit. CHAP* VL Of the Nerves of the Thigh, Leg 9 and Foot . T H E three lower pair of Nerves of ti Vertebra of the Loins, and the four u permofc of Os facrmn conftitute the Crui Nerves. For all thefe very near their Ri Joining together , and proceeding united for while , make four Nerves. The ftrfi and thi enter the Mufcles that lie upon the Thigh-bo whether for its Motion , or of the Leg. T fecond accompanies the Crural Vein and Arte down by the Groins and the infide of t .Thigh, on whofe formore Mufcles it is me of it fpent, but fends one notable Branch dov the Leg, as far as to the great Toe. T. fourth is the thickefl, hardelb, and ftrongeft all the Nerves in the Body, This diftrib,; Seth Twigs to the Skin of tte Buttocks aa Of the Glands of the Limbs* - A N APPENDIX T O 475 Iiigh, totheMufcles of the Thigh and Leg ul being defcended to the Ham is divided in- t he outer and inner Branches, which beftow f rigs on all the Mufcles and Skin of the and Foot, to which there comes no o- Ir Nerve, but the aforefaid Branch of the ini. BOOK IV. 4 |. . Of the GLANDS of the Limit , ff Aving finiflied the Defcription of the Vef- CL fels of the Limbs, this feems the fitted l;e to mention the Glands of the fame, feeing ^fte minifter to thofe , either as fupporting i n in their palfage, according to the Ancients j ^‘•r s feparating Lympha from the Arteries, ac- ting to fome Moderns, (or Superfluities from $ iNerves , according to orhers) and returning I'fameby Lymphedufts into the Veins. 'he molt confiderable of thefe Glands are Glands of lie in the Groin a-nd Arm -pit. The former the Grom dialled Bubones , ( not only when fwelled,_but a [ I rits • the Veins carry back from them what bl is not affimilated to them and the Nerves bi Animal fpirit whereby their adion is perform And thefe Nerves fpring either from medulla oblongata within the Brain ^ or from fpinalis , fo called after it is defeended out of Skull into the Spine. Dr. Willis is of opin that the Nerve which enters every partic Mufcle, is fmgle and peculiar from its very ( ginal , though it be included in a common i with many others t otherwife he cannot cone how the Animal fpirits which are direded by Soul along the Trunk of any Nerve , for fuc fuch a particular motion, fhould hit the way one branch rather than another. As foon a hath entred into the fubftance of the Mufcle, divided into innumerable twigs, whichinal fpace from its infertion become fo very flei! and fine, that they efcape the fight. Some n[ Lymphatick VefTels common parts of a Muj but according to Stem’s obfervation, though l ap. i. Of, the Parts of a Mufcle. 479 u along their furface, they do not enter into fin. fow thefe are called the common parts of Muf- ^ ca u^ If, becaufe they are common to them with other common , a;s of the Body that are endowed with the fame i l of Velfels. But as to each particular Muf- 1 they have every one their peculiar and pro- E; Velfels, numerically diltindl. That is, though fie twigs of Velfels that are infer ted into one Ifcle, be propagated from the fame Trunks rn which other twigs pafs to other Mufcles • thofe twigs, whether of Arteries, Veins or i ves, that are bellowed on one Mufcle, are >lly fpent thereon, -and pafs not out through nvefting Membrane again to any other. 'he proper parts are fo called, becaufe they are The proper r per and peculiar to a Mufcle , and not com -rohyfocaU Ji to any other part. The firlt of thefe is fibrous flejh, or jlefhy fibres, rhefe are, ■j'ch fome diftinguifti into two parts, fibres and 1, Fibres, and fibres again into fiefhy, and membra- 0 >)FleJbf. tu. Si Fibre is thus defined by Dr. Glijfon in Cap. 4. lf/enrric. A Body in figure like a thread, /lender, ei '.cions , tenfile , and irritable, made of fpermatical n ter , for the fake of fome motion and firength , ^ Aiich he thus explains tc In figure like a thread J '~- ‘ e. oblong and round J 'lender ] like a Spider’s 1 'eb : tenacious ] whole parts firmly cohere and 1 re not eafily broken tenfile ] viz. that may be ; c stended as to longitude, its latitude being let- 4 :n’d, and in like manner that may be thicken’d * 5 to latitude , its longitude being fhorten’d • t ’ ritable ] i. e. which by irritation may be exci® * sd to contract it felf, and the irritation cealing, ‘0 be remitted of its own accord ^ made of fper - ttick matter! namely if it be a bare Fibre 1 I i 3 u but Of the Mufcles. Bookv 4 but if it be ftuft with a parenchyma , perhaps 11 is not always made of only fpermatick matte u (for the ftuft Fibres may be divided into fa a guincous and fpermatick j of the former ki ‘fare thofe of the Mufcles • of the latter , th< “ of the Stomach and Guts : ) for the fake cf fo j motion and Jlrength 3 for in that it is tenacious adds ftrength to the part , and that which extended and contradfed , is defti: "/fair courfe. “ apt to be u for fome motion.] (20 Mem- branous* Thefe fiefhy fibres are commonly fireight , not always , for fometimes they run round , as the Sphindters. Befides thefe fiefhy Fibres , fome later Ana mifts defcribe another fort which they call mt branous , running from Tendon to Tendon ov thwart the other , cloathing them and knitti; them to one another ^ and make them to co- municate to the fiefhy ones their motory inftir, , and alfo to convey to the Tendohs the Spin which flow into the belly of the Mufcle by 1 Nerves , as likewife the fame Spirits from i Tendons back again to the belly of the Muf( as there is pccafion. /left wfat. The Fibres being ftuft in their Interfti end of what w ith a fanguineous parenchyma, are that which properly call flefh. For ( faith Dr. Croone ) all fkfh.of a Mufcle (which makes the greateft p of it, and of which the bulk of the wfyfte Be chiefly coniifts) feems to be nothing elfe but t portion of the blood that flows through the int vals of the Fibres, which thickning by their co nefs is ftaid amongft them. Stem denies any rencbyma • and fays, that every Fibre is tendin at both ends , and carnous in the middle : ; that the fame Fibres which being ftraitly knit made* one another , make the Tendon being m lot y the fide of another. But fuppofing this to be he Origine of this Membrane , ( which I pro- x>fe as doubtful ) we muft not conceive that the Fibres are wholly fpent thereupon fo as to ter- minate there ; for under this Membrane they run g i 4 (being Of the Mufcles. Book V 3 -.A fen - don . Ms defini- Wn. Which Mufcles Have Ten- dons, <0f what they are framed,. (being di veiled of their parenchyma ) lengthwaj of the Mufcle, and conflitute its Tendon. The laft proper part of a Mufcle is the Tendo ) which Spigclius defines thus : It vs a ftmilar an fimple part , of a peculiar kind , diffufed through t)| whole body of the Mufcle lengthways , which in for r part thereof vs united , (and there it is white wit; a kind of brightnefs, denfe,hard and fmooth) an in fome divided and fluffed with flefh ( where it not eafily difcernible : ) and feeing it vs very muf adapted for contraction , when it vs contracted at of pleajure , it moves together with it felf that part ini winch it vs inferted . Stcno affirms the rife of Mufcle to be tendinous, as well as its infertion and defines a Tendon to be a body continue* . from the beginning of Mufcles to th^eir end. All Mufcles which are appointed for the mo ving of bones, have Tendons which are infertec into thofe bones they are tp move : but com monly thofe which move other parts , as thi Tongue, Lips, &c. as alfo the Sphin&er of th< Bladder, and anus, have none, or however fuch a are not eafily difcoverable ^ for indeed fome af- firm ( as Dr. Croone) that every Mufcle has it Tendon. There are fundry Opinions as to the fubftanci of a Tendon. Spigelius ( as appears by the fore- going definition) thinks it to be a fimple part,thai is, truly fimilar, and not appearing fo to the Ey< only. He fays, it is neither a Nerve, nor a Liga ment, nor is it a fubftance mixt of both ^ but i is a part of its own proper kind , fofter than ; Ligament, and harder than a Nerve, yef alius 01 the other hand affirms ( with Galen ) that it is diffimilar body, compofed of a concourfe of Fi bres. Ligaments, and very (lender Nerves, grow ing by degrees into one body, Diemerbroeck doubt ihap. i. Of the Parts of a Mufcle. 483 Dt but that the Nerve which enters into any [ufcle, is extended as far as its Tendon (though cannot be traced by the Eye thither) becaufe of ie very acute fenfe of the Tendon \ and yet the endon, he fays, is not ameer Nerve, but’tis ikely that the Fibres and Membrane with a Li- unent are intermixed with it.] I think ’tis molt robable, that it is only a produftion or profan- ation of the Fibres freed from their parenchyma^ id clothed with the inverting Membrane of the ufcle, which it lelf feems alfo to be derived om the Fibres, as was noted above. But what- er its fubftance be determin’d to be, it has al- ays been held to be the principal part of the mfcle , and the' chief inftrument ofitsaftion-, uough according to Stem it is not it felf that ontra&s, but the flelhy Fibres by its means. Dr. Yillis thinks that the Animal Spirits which refide i the Mufcle, do in ceflation from motion re- ire into the Tendons, and in motion are darted om thence into the parenchymatous or flefhy part, here they are joyned with more, flowing in by le Nerves. The Tendons are fometimes round, as in the 7 /^, fufculus biceps ; fometimes broad, as in the ob- gure . ]ue and tranfverfe Mufcles of the Belly. fi- Thefe are the parts conJUtutwe of a Mufcle. I z The parts ith befides thefe , parts derived from the Pyji- m ( or rather from its action ) and thofe are ^Jpo/um tree : The Head, the Tail, and the Belly. The 1 ' lead, or beginning is that part of the Mufcle that 'ifes from the part unto which the contraction is ade : the Tail or end is that part of it which is iferted into the part which is moved: the Belly all that (flelhy) part that lies betwixt the Head id Tail. Stem thinks the Head and Tail of a Mufcle 484 Of the Mufcles. Book V Mufcle are better exprelt by the two Extremes feeing if that be the Head to which the contra ftion is made, then neither extream, but th middle or belly is the head, becaufe both the ex treams in contraftion move towards it : or if an will contend that one end is moved towards tfi other , the fame end is not always the quiefcer one in all the motions of every Mufcle ^ an therefore the fame end in feveral motions bein fometimes the Head, and otherwhiles the Tai this diltin&ion breeds but a confulion. the ufe of The ufe ( or rather attion) of a Mufcle was ir re-head, upon which they defcend with ftreight ibres to the Eye-brows , where they terminate. ■sy the help of thefe we draw up and wrinkle the )re-head, and by confequence pull up the upper ye-Jid a little. The Skin grows very clofe to left Mufcles. Some defcribe another pair of Mufcles of the Corru- are-head, called Conugantes , whofe Fibres de- ts •ending a-flant from the lower part of the From etwixt the Eye-brows towards the top of the fofe , ( where they meet one another ) help to nit the Brows (as we call it ) when we frown . ut thefe feem to be onely a part of the frontal Iufcles,having their Fibres running in this place little obliquely. CHAP. IV. Of the Mufcles of the Eyes. r H E Mufcles of each Eye are in number fix ; Each Ep four ftreight, and two oblique. The ftreight bath fix love the Eyes upwards and downwards , to the Mu J cles * ight hand and to the left .• the oblique move them bliquely. The ftreight are more thick and flelhy han the oblique. As to their beginning, ( viz., of the ftreight ) Four hey have all the fame origine • as to their pro- ft^igbi. refs, the fame ftrufture ^ and as to their end, he fame infertion. Their Origine is contiguous . nd acute, being at the hole through which the ptick Nerve enters the orbit of the Eye , from t \ mu * ’ vhofe Membrane they fpring. Their middle , or belly* 490 Of the Mufcles . Book V belly, is flelhy and almoft round. Their end is ; molt thin and membranous Tendon, whereb] they are inferted into the tunica cornea , where ii is pellucid, near the Iris , and fo do encompaf the whole Eye before as far as it is white. Th efirft of the freight is called attollens of Ele vator , becaufe it mbveth the Eye upwards $ ant it is fomewhat larger than the fecond that moved the fame downwards, becaufe it requireth great er force to pull any thing upwards than down wards. This firft is otherwife called fuperbusjbel caufe that motion of the Eye is owing to it, whei we are faid to look high. For which reafon th< fecond has the name of humilvs , becaufe by it wijj look down ; whence alfo it is otherwife namet deprimens. The third is called adducens , becauf it moveth the Eye inwards towards the Nofe $ a , alfo bibitorius , becaufe we are wont to ufe it t<| look into the glafs or cup when we drink. Th< fourth is called abducens , from its drawing thi Eye outwards from the inner corner to the outer and alfo indignatorius , becaufe that motion or call of the Eye (as we call it,) is proper to Men ir the Palfion of Anger. The firft is placed in the upper region of th< orbit, the fecond in the lower, ( oppofite to th< upper ) the third in the inner corner of the Eye| the fourth in the outer. Twoob- The oblique Mufcles are called circumagehies lique. winders or rollers about , and amatorii , or amo Their Rife r ous and are in number two. Th zfirft is obliquu. find Infer- ma j or ^ or jhperior^ the upper and larger. This be uon ‘ ginneth at the hole by which the Optick Nervt enters into the orbit of the Eye, as the four fore going Pair did , and palfing to the upper part o the inner corner of the Eye, endeth in a fmall anc round Tendon , which pafleth thro’ a tranfverf cartilag) ihap, 4. Of the Mufcies of the Byes. 49 1 rtilage there placed, ( called by Fallopius Trocblc- ,) as a cord through a pully, and is inferted into toms enlfue , partly becaufe the Tendon pafleth r f* e b if partly bfecaufe it is covered with the pericra- r0USm & lium. This Mufde forcibly pulleth up the lower [aw, and fo ffmtteth the Mouth. The fecond is call et&majjeter^ becaufe it ferveth 2 . Piaffe' dr chlwihg by moving the Jaw to the right and ter or\y- >flft (ides ; from its ufuation it may be called late- teraje i K k 4 rale. Of the Mufcles , Book V| rale. This hath two beginnings ; one of whic is nervous, large and ftrong, fpringing from th future, where the firft bone of the Jaw is joine to the fourth ^ the other flelhy, proceeding froi the Os jug ak , from whence marching toward the Chin, it is implanted into the whole breadt of the lower Jaw ftrongly. The Fibres of th Mufde, by reafon of its two beginnings, croi one another \ fo that it does not only move til Jaw laterally, but backwards and forwards al fo : upon which account fome efteem it a doubii Mufcle, . Ali f or „ The third pair is called pterygoideum ( or atifoi me exrer me) externum , or maxillam abdueens. This hat mim, or alfo a double beginning , partly nervous an ® axillani partly flelhy •, fpringing partly from the uppe abdueens. externa i (ides 0 f t h e WS ng-like procefs of the « fpbenoides , partly from the rough and lharp linjt of the fame bone. Whence marching down witl freight Fibres, it becometh greater and thickei And at length is inferted by a ftrong Tendoi into the inlide of the condy hides procefs of th lower Jaw , under the Tendon of the tempora Mufcle. This moveth the Jaw forward, where by the Teeth of the lower. Jaw are made to ftanc further out than thofe of the upper. 4. Alifor- The fourth pair is termed maxillam adducens me inter- or pterygoideum internum , This draweth the Jav num, or towards its head, or backward, This, in the be maxillam ginning being nervous, doth fpring from the in adducens. ner cav j t y 0 f wing-like procefs of the os fphe no'ides ^ then becoming fleihy, large and thick and marching down by a ftreight paflage , it i inferted into the inner and hinder part of th lower Jaw by a nervous, broad and ftrong Ten don. Befides its more proper a&ion of drawin the Jaw backwards , it alfo helps the temper; Mufch ;hap. 8 . Of the Mufcies of the Ear . 499 lufcle to draw it up , and fo do the fecond and bird pair In fome tneafure , wherefore we rank 11 thefe four amongft the Shutters, The fifth and laft pair opens the Mouth by pul- - Depiie ng down the Jaw , whence it is called Befri- mens, or tens, and otherwife digajlrkum or biventre % be- biventre e jufe it hath two bellies, Anatomifts commonly eckon this for the fecond pair of the Movers of le lower Jaw; but feeing it has a diftind office •om the other four , we have plac’d it laft. It as its beginning from the Styloides procefs of the 'emple-bone, where it is nervous and broad ; id afterwards becoming flefhy, fmall and round, : pafleth downwards, and in its middle where it rbmeth to the flexure of the lower Jaw-bone , it )feth its flelhy fubftance , and degenerates into a ervous and round Tendon ; but by and by it be- ames carnous again , and going along the inner de of the lower jaw is inferted into it? forepart nder the Chm. It lofeth its flelhy fubftance and ecomes tendinous in its middle, that it may give ray to the Jugular Vein afcending in that place. This Mufcle, as hath been faid , draws down the aw, in which action fome think it is partly al- lied by the par quadratum defcribed 111 the fore- ;oing Chapter. CHAP, VIII Of the Mufcies of the Ear., T HE Ear confifi? of an cuter and an innet part ; and each has its proper Mufcies. ' The outer part is moved but' very obfcurely, becaufe in Men the Mufcies are exceeding fmall; f© 5©o Of the Mufcles. Book \ The auri- cula hath four Mufi eks» fo that Galen calls them, only lineaments or r femblances of Mufcles, There are commonly rec oned four of them, which by their lituation fee fit to move this outer part of the Ear (called m cula by Smelius , to diflinguifh it from the tm part called auris) four manner of ways. The firjl is called attoUens . This arifes at tl outer edge of the fr ontal Mufcle ( where it is co tiguous to the temporal ) with a thin and met branous beginning ^ and in its defcent lies up< the temporal Mufcle , by degrees becoming na rower, and is inferted into the upper part of tl Ear, which it moveth upwards and forwards. The fecond is called detrahens. This arifet broad and carnous from the mammillary Procefi and growing narrower is inferted into the ro( of the Cartilage of the Ear , fometimes by tw< fornetimes by three Tendons. It draweth tl Ear upwards and backwards. The third is called adducens ad anterior a. when by the Ear is drawn forward and downward. Thi, is but a particle of the Mufculus quadraim , ths pulleth down the Cheeks, defcribed before, whic afcending with its Fibres , is implanted into th' root of the Ear. The fourth is ahducem ad poftenora , whici draws the Ear backward. This hath its begin ning in the back-part of the Head, from the Til nicies of the Mufcles of the occiput , above the pro ceffus ntammillarbsjNhexe it is narrow, but waxinj broader it is carried downward tranfverfly , anc is inferted into the Ear behind. All thefe Muf cles in Horfes, Oxen and the like , are very larg< to what they are in Men, (yea they have me>r< than thefej whereby they can move their Ear: move ftrongly and apparently, to fiiake off Flie< or any thing that offends them. Monf ZThap. 8 . Of the Maf 'les of the Ear, 501 Monf. du Vemey only reckons two Mufcles of he Auricle , the firlf of which, he fays, is made ip of certain carnous Fibres arifing from that part >f the pericranium that covers the Temporal Mu A :le, from whence defending in a {freight line it nferts it felf into the upper and back-part of the Concha. Thefecond, he fays, likewife conlifts of ive or fix carnous Fibres, that take their rife from he upper and foremoft part of the procefs Ma- hides , and defcending obliquely for about an inch :erminate at the middle of the concha. In the inner part of the Ear(called Anris') there a uns ire three. The firft is called exterms. It is fmall , tllree ’ 'pringing pretty broad from the upper part of Io f:he meatus auditorius • then becoming narrower it ■grows into a very fine and fmall Tendon , which oeing carried contiguous to the tympanum , is in- ferted into the longer procefs of the malleus. The handle of which malleus adhering to the tympa- num , when the malleus is moved by this Mufcie, the tympanum is fo alfo,both of them being drawn a little outward and upward. The feeond is called interim. This is very fmall, 2. aftd is placed within the os petrofum. It hath its beginning in the hafts of the wedge- like bone, there where it is joyned with the proccjjhs petrofus y and at about its middle it is divided into two fmall Tendons, whereof the one is infertea into the {hotter procefs of the malleus , and the other •into the neck or handle of it. This drawls the head of the malleus obliquely forward , and pulls it inward from the incus , and together with the malleus , it draws the tympanum alfo inwards, to which the handle of the malleus is affixt. Thefe two du Verney reckons for Mufcles of the Malleus , and he deferibes a third belonging to the Stapes , which ( I think ) no former Ana- tomic 5° 2 Of the Mufcles . Book V tomift hath obferved. He fays , it is hid with! a quill-like cavity formed in the os petrofum a! moll at the bottom of the barrel , from whenc it takes its rife. Its belly is thick and carnous,am in a little fpace it ends in a very loofe Tendon which inferts it felf into the head of the Stapei The cavity which contains the belly of the Mul cle is about the fixth part of an inch long, and i much wider than the hole by which the Tendo: of the Mufcie pafles. CHAP. IX. Of the Mufcles of the Tongue* T HE Tongue being the chief fnftrument o Speech, and a part which ferves to roll thi 1 Meat in the Mouth this way and that way, hai all manner of motions, being moved forward anc backward, upward and downward, to the right! hand and to the left; it is alfo ftretchedoul broad, or contra&ed. Its Mufcles are either pro- per to it felf, or common to it with the os hyotdel ( to be defcribed in the next Chapter.) the fugue It has five pair of proper Mufcles. The firfi is kuspve genipgloffum , fo called from its rife and inferdot * air ‘ ' (yhwy the Chin , and ytfom the T ongue) as moll 1 9 of the reft are. This pulleth the Tongue for- ward without the Teeth and Lips. It fpringetfi from that rough part of the lower Jaw-bone whidj is in the middle of the Chin, in the inner and lower lide of it ; and is inferted into the lower fide, and towards the root of the Tongue. i. The fecond is called Tpfiloglojfum ( on the fame account.) It arifeth from the middle and upper - part of the os hyoides or ypfihides^ and ends in the middle — • hap. io. Of the Mufcles of the Tongue. 5©§ .r ddle of the Tongue^ which it draws freight tckwards or inwards. The third is called Mylogloffutn. This fpriogetfi 3, torn the Inner part of the lower Jaw, where the r; theft grinding Teeth are, (whence it has its . ane) and is infer ted into the Ligament by which ,il: Tongue is tied to the fauces . Authors differ but the ufe of this pair *, fome thinking that it l iws the Tongue downward \ others, that if jad and carnous beginning •, from whence de= finding with ftreight Fibres , and covering all ti: outiide of the Cartilage Tbyreoides , it is in- fited into its under-hde. When this is con- *cted, it draws the buckler-like (or tbyreoides ) frtilage upwards and inwards , and thereby laitenefch the Chink of the Larynx. The -*• ■ -■ * , ■ — ($c*6 Of the Mufcles. Book \ 2 . The Sternothyrmdeufft arifeth from the upp and inner-part of the Jternum with a carnous ai broad beginning , from whence afcending wii ftreight Fibres up by the (ides of the Wind-pip (continuing the fame largenefs and fubftance) is at laft inferted into the lower fide of the hue ler-iike Cartilage, by drawing down which opens or widens the Chink. Diemerbmck affig dear contrary actions to thefe Mufcles, viz., th the former widens, and this latter ftraitens t Simula of the Larynx „ Phe pair The proper are five pair, ( or only nine Ml of proper . cles, as fome reckon, dteeming the fifth pair i * be a fingle Mufcle.) The firft pair is called Cm thyreoideum anticum . This fpringeth from ti fore- part of the Cricoides or ring-like Cartiiag (to, that which is immoveable ) and is inferti into the lateral parts of the Thyreoides , which moves forwards, and fo widens the Simula , ft the forming of a big voice. Bartholin , fromti infertson of the Nerve, fays , it arifes from tl Thyreoides, and is inferted into the Cricoides. All, if this pair be very broad, he fays , it may be d; vided into two pair, (which Riolanus has done' and then the fecond may be called Crkothyreoa um later ale. 2, The fecond pair, which is called Crkoarytm* deum pofiicum , fpringeth carnous from the hindc and lower part of the Cricoides , and afeendin with ftreight Fibres is inferted with a nervoi end into the lower fide of the Arytscnoides , let ving to pull its two Cartilages fideways, ao thereby to open and widen the Larynx. The third is Cricoarytanoideum laterals , whil fpringeth from the fide of the Cricoides , where is broadeft, with a (lender beginning, bat grow ing prefenfly larger, it is Implanted Into the fie; •hap. ii. Of the Mufctes of the Larynx. 507 the Arytmoides, in that part that the foregoing I not cover. This openeth the Larynx by draw- the Cartilages obliquely aiide, and fo affifteth aftion of the former. The fourth pair is called Thyreoarytmoideum. is is internal, carnous and broad, ariiing from b fore interiour part of the Thyreoid.es , and is ki- ted into the fide of the Arytxnoides , whofe car- jges it draws the one towards the other , and ftraitens the Larynx. The fifth and laft is reckoned by fome for a .... ,r,and by others but for one Mufcle. It is called 1 , ytmoid.es, becaufe it has its rife from and infer- n into the Cartilage fo called. Its rife is at the • ider Line of the Cartilage, from whence being a :ended with tranfverfe Fibres, it is inferted in- ; the fide of the fame, and by conftringing of it aitens the Larynx. Thefe are the Mnfcles that perform the moti- i of the Larynx • but as to the ufe of each par- alar, Authors difagree very much. Dr. Croons es this general rule to underftand their r^fes, at thofe which lie on the forefide of the La- ,x, ferve to open or widen the Rimuia ; and fife which lie on the hinder-fide, to ftraiten or Itit. To whofe Opinion great deference is owing. \s for the Epiglottis , which is reckoned for the i h Cartilage of the Larynx , though in fome 3 ices it have Mufcles, yet Anatomies generally nee that in Man it has none, nor is moved with t oluntary motion, but is only deprelfed by the sight of what is fwallowed, and by the drawing y . he Tongue backward or inwards which mo- '.it being over, the Epiglottis itands up again in t natural and proper polture , and fo opens the Irynx . L 1 4 > 5 » CHAP, 508 Of the Mufcles . BookV CHAP. XII. Of the Mufcles of the Uvula, Palate and Throat. 'HE Vvula is faid by Veflingius , Riolan The Uvula f ■ 1 faid to have &c. to have two Pair of Mufcles to hold two Fair of U p ^ 0 f one called Pterygoftaphilinum e u J ces ' ternum, which fpringeth from the upper Jaw, little below the furthermofl: Grinder, and is i ferted into the fide of the Vvula : the other h rygoflaphilinum internum proceeding from the lo\ er part of the internal wing of the pterygou Troceffus, and inferted into the Vvula in like ma ner. But thefe Mufcles are very hard to difc ver : and indeed there feems no occafion for the feeing the Vvula has no apparent motion , ai its own frame feems fufficient to fufpend it. From the aforefaid wing-like Procefs (oft Os cuneiforme ) does there another Pair of Mr cles arife, firfh found out by Dr. Croon'e , and: him called Pterygopalatinum. Its Infertion isin the Roof of the Mouth by the fide of the pal tine Gland (defcribed in Book HI. Chap. ult. frc The Palate hath one Pair. StenoJ Its life is very obfcure ; but perhaps 7 he Throat Itrong hawking it may ferve to comprefs the fi Gland a little, and to fqueeze out of it fome that humour that is feparated in it. The Throat . or the beginning of the cefophctg hath three ca ]] ec j pharynx , hath feven Mufcles, to wit , th Sphpittet* Pair and a Sphmaer 1. Of the Pairs , the firjl is Sphenopharyngceu This fpringeth from the fharp point of the! fphemid.es with a fmall and nervous beginni: and palfing downward, ends in a fine Tend' 1 wh Chap. 1 3- Of the Mufcles of the Head. 509 vhich is inferted obliquely into the lateral part >f the Palate and Pharynx , which it widens in wallowing. The fecond pair is called Cephalopharyngaum, and oringeth from that part where the Head is joyn- d to the firlt Vertebra of the Neck •, from whence larching down, it is fpread about the Pharynx nth a large plexus of Fibres, and feemeth to make s Membrane. This ftraitens the Throat in fwal- ]ai >Wing. The third is Stylopharyngaum. This fpring- g from the Styloides Procefs of the Temple- one, is inferted into the fides of the Pharynx dilate it. That Mufcle which hath no fellow is called ' wfophagireus. This arifes from one fide of the '■ by- 1 aides Cartilage , and circularly encompaffing ie Pharynx with tranfverfe Fibres , is inferted ito the other fide of the Thyreoides • and :rves to contrad the Mouth of the Gullet, ; the Sphinfters of the Anus and Bladder do ofe parts. CHAP. XIII. Of the Mufcles of the Head. E Mufcles of the Head man „ or proper. The are common are either com - the Muf- thofe of the hich move the Head together with the Neck, HecL{i dre hich are to be defcribed in the next Chap- °' r. The proper are thofe which only move the jh e p r0 p er ead, the Neck remaining unmoved, and thefe are eight e in number fixteen, or eight pair, and move it P air * L 1 2 either Of the Mufcles. Book V. either forward or backward , to one fide or thi other, or about. The fir Jl pair , called Majlcideum , bend th Head forward, if both ad together ^ but on on fide obliquely, if but one. Thefe have each double beginning *, one nervous from the top ( the Sternum , the other carnous from the uppi fide of the Clavicula ^ which origins joyning , becomes wholly carnous, and afcending oblique by the Neck, at laft is inferted with a carnous er into the Mammillary ( or mafloides ) procefs < the Temple-bone. This is the only pair that placed in the forepart , and bows the Head fo ward •, all the reft are feated behind , of whit the five next bend it backwards if both ad ("which is called extending of the Head) or I little Tideways if but one and the two laft fer to turn it about. The ficcond pair is called Selenium or Tricing lare. It rifes with a nervous beginning from tl! Spines of the five uppermoft Vertebra of the Th rax , and of the five lowermoft of the Ned from whence afcending and becoming thick ai carnous, it is implanted into the Occiput with broad and fiefiiy end. The third is called Complexum or Trigcminu. becaufe it has fo plainly a threefold beginning, th •it feems to be a compound of three Mufcles. C beginning is from the tranfverfe Proceffes of t fourth and fifth Vertebra of the Thorax , a fecc from thefe of the fir ft and fecond of the fan and a third from the Spine of the feventh Ver bra of the Neck : All which in their afeent I ing united into one , are inferted into the Oc put fometimes by one, and fometimes by a tri Tendon. 'hap. I}. OftheMufclesoftheHead. 51 1 The fourth pair is called Parvum & crajfum icaufe it is but a little one, yet pretty thick „ This nth under the third pair. It arifes nervous from l e tranfverfe Proceffes of the fix uppermoft Vev- ara of the Neck, and is inferted into the hin- der root of the Mammillary Procefs. The fifth pair is Reftum majus. Thefe fpring- ig from the tip of the Spine of the fecond Ver- pra of the Neck , are inferted into the Oc- i'Ut. The ftxth , Rettum minus. Thefe lie under the frmer,and proceeding from the back- part of the fit Vertebra end into the Occiput. Thefe five laft ferve all to bow the Head back- ed or extend it : the two following turn it aout, as was obferved before. The feventh is Obliquum fuperius. This pair lies rderthetwo Retta , anfwering to them infub- iince and form. It fprings from the tranfverfe 1 ocefs of the firft Vertebra of the Neck, and is ■; iiplanted into the Occiput by the outer-fide of the itta. Some fay its rife is here, and its infertion i:o the Vertebra. The eighth , Obliquum inferius. This rifes from te Spine of the fecond Vertebra of the Neck, and iinferted into the tranfverfe Procefs of the firft Irtebra of the fame. So that having both its rife ;d infertion in the Neck, it might juftly be reck- < ed for a Mulcle thereof , and fo fhould have len deferibed in the next Chapter : but we have inked it amonglt thofe of the Head , partly l)m the authority of moft Anatomifts who ge» 1 rally have done fo, and partly becaufe the firft irtebra into which it is inferted , always follows te motion of the Head , as fhall be {hewn in the J xt Book, Chap. 10. Of the ufe of thefe two laft firs we have fpoken already. LI 3 4 - 6 , G H A P. 5 12 Of the Mufcles. f he mufcles common to the head and neck are four fair. I. 2 . 3 - 4 *® Book\ CHAP. XIV, Of the Mufcles of the Neck . T HE Head Is not only moved bythepwj Mufcles abovefaid primarily, but fecond rily alfo by thefe of the Neck , which are thei fore called common , and are eight in number , each fide four. The firft and fecond pair be the Neck, and together with it the Head dire ly backward, or obliquely ^ the third and four; diredly forward , or to one fide , as both one aft. The firfl is called Sfinatum. This proceed! from the roots of the Spina of the feven upp Fertebra: of the Thorax , and of the five lowed the Neck , is inferred ilrongly into the whc lower lide of the Spine of the fecond Fertebra the Neck. The fecond , Tranfverfale . This riling from t tranfverfe, Procefles of the fix upper Ferteb of the Thorax , is inferted into the out-lide of ; the tranfverfe Procefles of the Fertebra of t Neck. The third, Longum. This being placed behii the Oefopbagus, doth fpring from the bodies of t fifth and fixth Fertebra of the Thorax , and as afcends is knit to the fides of the bodies of all t Fertebra , till it come to the firft or higheft oft Neck, where each touching other they are be inferted into its Procefs , which anfwers to t body of the other Fertebra. The fourth, Triangulare , or Scalenum. It pi ceeds carnous from the firft rib, and is infert into the iniide of all the tranfverfe Procefles * ZTbap. 1 5. Of the Mufcles of the Thorax. 5*3 he Neck, except fometime the firft and fecond. t is perforated to make way for the Veins and trteries which pafs to the Arms. The ufes of 11 thefe pairs were fhewn at the beginning of the Chapter. CHAP. XV. Of the Mufcks of the Thorax. T Aving done with the Mufcles that belong to TjL the Head, the higheff Center ,we come now thofe of the middle or Thorax which afiilt Re- nration. Of thefe fome dilate the Bread in In- [ iration, fome contraff it in Expiration. Of the Dilatersfthe firft is called par Subclavium. ^ his arifeth flelhy from the infide of the Clavi-ters. •da near the Shoulder- point, and palling oblique- 1. ' ( or almod tranfverfly ) is inferted into the rd Rib, near to the Sternum. The fecond is Serratum majus anticum. This 2. r difes from the infide of the bafts of the Shoulder- lade, and the two uppermoft true Ribs , and is iferted into the five lowed true Ribs , and two g| ppermod badard Ribs , before they end into lartilages. It is called Serratum or Saw-like, be- lufe its unequal extremities being intermixed r ith the like unequal beginnings of the obliquely efcending Mufcle of the Abdomen , imitate the "eeth of a Saw. The third is Serratum pofticum fuperius. This 3* /ing under the Rhomboides 1 ( or fourth Mufcle of he Scapula ) fpringeth membranous from the pines of the three lowed Vertebra of the Neck, L 1 4 and 514 Of the Mufcles. Book V and of the firft Vertebra of the Back, and is infert ed into the three or four uppermoft Ribs. , The fourth is Serratum po fit cum inferius. Th; arifeth from the Spines of the three loweft Verb bra of the Back, and of the firft: of the Loins, an is inferted into three or four of the loweft ffhorl Ribs. '• ^ Fifthly , The eleven external lntercoftals , whi< perform the office but of one Mufcle. The fpring from the lower part of the upper Rib, ar are inferted into the upper part of the lower R obliquely. There is another Mufcle befides thefe that a fills the widening of the Breaft, namely the D'u fhrapin : but of it we fpoke at large in Book 1 Chap. 3. where the Reader may find its Defcript on and Ufe. 7 he Con - Thefe that follow contract the Breaft. Fhj ratters, the par triangulare. This arifing from the midd ; t- Line of the Sternum, is inferted into the bony em of the third, fourth, fifth and fixth true Rib ( where they are joyned to the CartilagesJ Ste fays, its rife is from the Sternum , and infertic into the Ribs. 2. The fecondh Sacrolumbum. This arifeth fro the edge of os Ileum , the upper part of os facrw and the Spines of the vertebra of the Loins ^ ai afcending up to the Ribs, is implanted into ea* of them in their lower fide , about three Finge breadth fiom the Spine, by a particular Tendo Dicmerbroeck defer ibes another pair oppofite this ( which he calls cervicale defeendens ) fprin ing from the third, fourth, fifth,lixth and feven vertebra of the Neck, and is inferted into the u per fide of each Rib as the Sacroh'mbum is into t lower. And fays, that this pair by pulling t Ribs upwards in infpiration widens the Btea hap. 1 5. Of the Mufcles of the Thorax. 515 the other by drawing them down in expiration daitens it. Thirdly , The eleven internal Inter coflals , which 3» ce as one Mufcle. Thefe pafs obliquely from the 1 wer to the upper Rib. Their Fibres run a con- tar y courfe to thofe of the external , cr offing of tem like the drokes of the Letter X. I place the Internal Intercoftals among the The ufe of Ontraders of the Bread , as alfo the External the inter- a;ong the Dilaters,becaufe mod Anatomids have c °ft al Ml '^‘ cnefo-, though fome there are that think the 17 ^ i.ernal dilate it, and the external contrad it. Va, Dr. Mayoxv is of opinion, that they both of tem dilate it. For going upon this fuppofition, fiat the Thorax is widened by drawing the Ribs uward, he thinks them both equally adapted for titadion. For feeing in all mufcular motion part that is lefs firm, is moved towards that viich is more firm, and that each lower Rib fuc- cfively is joynted loofer than that immediately - aove it, it mud needs be, that the internal up- c their contraction draw the Ribs upwards as ii kll as the external, and that not obliquely, but credly. For by their eroding one another they ietljhder the obliquity of one anothers motion ( for rich each feverally is fitted) and fo perform the ok me motion as if their Fibres defeended freight iut Dm the upper Rib to the lower ^ which courfe ( Fibres v/as not convenient here, becaufe of tire nail fpace betwixt one Rib and another , which mild not permit them to have that length which :s): lie nature of Mufcles requires.] Thus that inge- ious perfon difeourfes, 1 think, very probably. Thefe Mufcles of Refpiration are much affided : their aft ion , lecondarily, by the Mufcles of the bdumen , ScapuU and Arms, which fhall be de- ribed in their proper Chapters. C H A P, 5 16 Of the Mufcles . CHAP. XYL Of the Mufcles of the Back and Loins. T H E Back , but efpeciallv the Loins , bei moved diverfly , viz., backward and fc ward and to the Tides, into every Vertebra th< j fc back are Tendons of Mufcles inierted , as if chi and loins were a great many Mufcles in all. But there « have four twit four ("proper ) pair to affift the motion P air - both. The fir/t pair are two triangular Mufcles, whi being joyned together make a kind of a quad] ture , and are therefore called far quadratu Thefe arife broad and thick from the hinder u per cavity of Os Ileum , and the inner lide of Sacrum , and are inferted into the tranfverfe Pi! celfes of the Vertebra of the Loins even up to t lowelf Rib. If both thefe aft together, they be the Vertebra of the Loins (freight forward ; if c alone, obliquely forward. J 2. The fecond and principal pair are the Mufc longijjimi. This fprings from all the Spines of J'acrum and of the Vertebra of the Loins , and aj from the intide of Os Ileum where it is joyned the Sacrum j from whence it afeends all up 1 Spine, and terminates in the procejfus mammii m of the Temple-bone, in its way lying up, the tranfverfe procelfes of the Lumbar Vertebi and bellowing Tendons on the tranfverfe Proc fes of all the Vertebra of the Back, ( whence fo have divided this Mufcle into as many as tlf are Vertebra. ) It is almolt confounded with i two following from its rife till the lowelt Vo bra of the Thorax , where it begins to be fepa m the fide of the Cartilage mucronata , and from Cartilaginous ending of four Ribs ^ and fo arching ftreight down along the Belly , it is in- fled by a ftrong Tendon into the Os pubis . It 1th fometimes three , fometimes four tranfverfe feriptions or interfe&ions , that appear tendi- nous ; 5 2 ° Of the Mufcles, Book V nous : whence fome divide each Mufcle int four or five Mufcles, accordingly as they hav three or four interfedions. And indeed if Gc leti* s Rule be true, that wherefoever the Nen is inferted into the Mufcle , there is its head : v\ mult confefs they are diltind Mufcles. F< Nerves are inferted into both their upper ar lower parts, and into each of thofe that lye b twixt the Interfedions. And by fuppofing the thus diftindt , we may conceive how they m; better perform their primary adion, which ftrongly to comprefs the Belly for the expulfk of the faces or foetus. Under thefe Mufcles ( the Aneria and Fena mammaria defcend to abo the Navel , as the Arteria and Fente epigaftril afcend under them to near the fame place ; at' thefe were held to inofculate one with anothe (the defcending with the afcending ) till of la that fuch inofculation is difcovered to be meer imaginary. 4. The fourth pair is the pyramidal. Thefe Mufcli are feated upon the lower part of the Rett fpringing carnous from the OJJ'a pubis into whicj the Retti are inferted. They are broader at theii hafts , and in their afcent grow narrower and nai rower till they end in an acute Tendon, which inferted into the linea alba , and reaches fom< times as high as the Navel, though their carnoi; part be but about an hands breadth long. The are faid to affift the RetU in their adion, and ai for that reafon called otherwife Succenturiati. Bi they feem to fome more particularly to ferve t comprefs the Bladder in making Water \ thoug conlidering the fhortnefs of their carnous par and 'their external lituation , ’tis difficult 1 conceive how they can much affill that adio: which moft probably is chiefly performed by tl v prl :hap. 17. Of the Mufcles of the Abdomen. 521 roper mufcular Fibres of the Bladder it felf, but erhaps may be fomewhat promoted by all the ufcks of the Abdomen as well as this, while they cnftringe the Belly and fo prefs the Guts againft le Bladder •, which preffure is remotely owing fo to the Mufcles of the Thorax , efpecially the iaphragm. Sometimes one , and fometimes both 1 thefe pyramidal Mufcles are wanting, and then le ending of the Refit is broader and more car- inis. The fifth pair is the tranfverfe. Thefe cleave 5* ofe to the Peritonaeum on their infide : and they iz called tranfverfe , becaufe their Fibres run ofs or athwart the Belly. They fpring from a Igament that grows from the tranfverfe procef- 1; of the vertebra of the Loins, from os Ileum , and le infide of the cartilaginous ends of the baftard lbs , and end in a broad and membranous Ten- on in the line a alba. The ufe of all thefe Mufcles hath been held to Their ufi, \ fir ft, when they adt not , to defend the vifcera mtained under them from external injuries, and encreafe their heat : and fecondly , when they e in adlion, firft to further the excretion of the cerements } fecondly, to help the exclulion of e Infant in labour * thirdly, to alfift the Bread: ftrong expiration and expectoration } and urthly, to help to bend the Trunk of the Body rward in ftooping, which is chiefly done by the ?ffi. But Diemerbroeck thinks that the ftreight, ^ramidal and tranfverfe are all that ferve for the >mprelTion of the Belly, and that the oblique do evate or dilate it. And he endeavours to prove lis to be their adtion } fir ft , becaufe there will ; no Mufcles to elevate the parts of the Abdomen , thefe do it not} whereas it is both evident to e- ery one’s own obfervation inhimfeif, that the Abdomen ::: ; 522 Of the Mufc/es . Book \\ Abdomen is alternately elevated & depreft, and si! fo fuch an alternate elevation and depreflion feet' neceflary for the furthering the motion of the A liments and Humours through the parts contai 1 ed in the lower Belly. Secondly , he appeals to the! oblique fituation, which is inconvenient for pr< ] ling. Thirdly , he thinks their rife and the lengl of their Tendons evince, that their ufe is not comprefs. For he fays, when their flelhy pg grows tumid , they draw the Tendons with t line a alba outwards, and elevate them • and tl this Intumefcence ordinarily concurs with that the Mufcles that dilate the Break. Cafp. Bt\ tholin believes the tranfverfe chiefly confpire wi the Diaphragm to refpiration. For demonkrf ting that the Diaphragm is a digakrick or do |i ble-bellied Mufcle, the nervous centre being t Tendon intervening between the two Belliel he has obferved further fin Oxen ) that the for part of the Diaphragm extends a particular Ten don to the end of each of the cofta notha , wherj to the upper part of thefe tranfverfe Mufclj firmly alfo adheres and fo he fuppofes th; there is a continuation of the one into the othei the two bellies of the Diaphragm , and the trail verfe Mufcles making on each fide a trigaftrii one. And upon this fuppofition he is of opinio 4 That feeing in infpiration , wherein the Brea 44 is to be dilated, the Ribs ought to be drawn U] 44 ward, at which time alfo the flefh of the fai u trigaltrick Mufcle is lelaxed , and the Di u phragm , being from bowed become mo] 44 plane and relaxed, and tlirult toward the Abd 44 men, permits the Ribs to be a little lift up art 44 eionged tot the dilatation of the Break ; whi( 44 when at length it is contraded by the fieff 44 Fibres of this trigaltrick Mufcle , the Ribs ri 44 tori 'flap. 1 8. Of the Mufcles of the G enitals. 52 j turn to their former Angles with the Vertebra, and the contracted Fibres of the Diaphragm rom plane becoming bowed , do afcend up iirther into the cavity of the Breaft , which, >y depreflmg the Sternum alfo , they ftraiten, ind fo caufe the Air to be expelled out of the , lings.] So that he makes the chief Ufe of tranfverfe Mufcles to be to affift Expi- ion. that CHAP. XVIII, f the Mufcles of the Genitals , both in Men and Women . r: N the Firft Book, Chap. 23. Of the Yard , we defcribed its Mufcles and their Adtion , whi- r the Reader may pleafe to turn, and here we 11 but juft name them. They are two Pair. The The Penis ■ are the Ereffores or Dir eel ores , which arife ,mh . tw0 m the inner knob of the Coxendix , and are in- Palr ° ofted into the nervous bodies of the Penis , near e ttlir beginning. The fecond are the Acceleratores , :ii.ch arife from the Sphincter of the Anus , and xing on the under fide of the Penis (by the Tides ol:he Vrethra ) end about its middle. The Clitoris in Women, ( fomething refem- Te Clito- )hg the Penis in Men ) hath alfo two Pair of Muf- ns hath * J fo :1 , which having defcribed Eookl. Chap. 29. we trv0 r ‘ i}r ° ii not infill; on here , but remit the Reader t her. ^s to the Cremafier Mufcles by which the Te- ll are fufpended in Men , fee them defcribed M I. Chap. 31. As for Womens Tcjles , they r c e no Cremaftfcrs, Mm CHAP. ; . ... . - ---J 5 24 Of the Mufcles. Book ^ CHAP. XIX. Of the Mufcles of the Bladder attd Anus. T H E Bladder , as was fliewn in the Firfi: Bo Chap. 19. confifts of three Metnbran whereof the middle is mufcular , being ends with carnous Fibres \ yea by Sftgelius it is reckc ed for a Mufcle , and called Detrufor Vrin or Spines of the five loweft Vertebra of the leek, and of the eight upper moft of the Thorax it jringeth membranous. Being thus broad at its life, it grows narrower in its Frogrefs, and is in- Mrn 2 fetted 526 Of the Mufcles. Book \ ferted into the whole Spine of the Scapula , in 1 the Shoulder-point, and broader part of the Cl vicula. Now through its large beginning ai indifferent narrow Tendon or End, it comes pafs that its fibres hold a various courfe*, fome them being fir eight, others obliquely defending^ others obliquely afeending. Whence it is alfo tl it performs divers offices } for it draws the dire&ly backwards by its ftreight Fibres, ( whi fpring from about the firft and fecond Vertebra the Thorax • ) obliquely downwards, by the < liquely afeending, (which arife below the ftreigh and obliquely upwards, by the obliquely defeen ing, (which arife above the ftreight.) The fecond is Levator , or patientia Muf cuius, called from its helping to fhrug up the Shoulde when we would intimate that there is no Remc but Patience. This hath its beginning from ll tranfverfe Procefles of the firft, fecond, thirds fourth Vertebra of the Neck } which beginniii being united aboutthe middle of the length ofi Mufde, it is at length inferted by a broad i carnous Tendon into the upper corner of i Shoulder-blade, which it draws upward, and | Authors fay) fomewhat forward. J The third is Serratus minor anticus. This ;| under the Pe&oral Mufcle, and fprings from i four uppermoft Ribs ( except the firft ) bef they become cartilaginous , by four flefhy poi ons reprefenting the Teeth of a Saw , and is ) ferted by a broad Tendon near to the Anchor-] Procefs of the Scapula , which it draws forw towards the Breaft. The fourth from its Figure is called Rhomboi This is placed immediately under the CucuM It fpringeth flefhy from the hinder Procefles ,) Spines of the three loweft Vertebra of the N- 5 2 7 C lap. 21 . Of the Mufcles of the Arm. nl fo many uppermoft of the Thorax , and is in- *fted by as broad a flelhy ending , as the begin- ig was, into the Bafts of the Shoulder-blade, ich it draws backward. Befides thefe four proper Mufcles it hath others t are common to it with other Parts \ which in le meafure afiift its Motions, as the Serratus \or , defcribed above. Chap. 15. and the Delto- K , which we fhall defcribe in the next Chap- f — — . iff I it: l! oli CHAP. XXL Of the Mufcles of the Arm. # Arm m common acceptation is meant ii: I of all the diftance betwixt the Shoulder* cantor Neck of the Shoulder-blade, and the rift ; but we take it more ftriftly here for that t onely that reaches from the Shoulder to the ow, ( which it felf is otherwife called humerus') . confifts of one bone , which we (hall call the ulder-bone. It hath five motions, for it is mo- Bach Am backward , forward , upward , downward, circularly. t is moved upward by two Electors , Deltoides Eredors , Suprafpinatus. Firfi , Deltoides (fo called, be- 1 , life in lhape it refembleth the Greek Letter I’ta fpringeth nervous and broad from the a idle of the Clavicula , the top of the Shoulder, a: l the whole Spine of the Scapula , as from fo any diftind beginnings. But prefently becoming cnous and thick, it grows narrower and narrow- e nits Progrefs, till it end in a ftrong Tendon frnious without and nervous within ) which is Mm3 inferted 528 Of the Mufcles. Book\ inferted tranfyerfely into the middle of. tl Shoulder- bone, and moves it either upwards, ar forward towaids the Face, or elfe backwapfis , thefe or thofe of its fibres are contrafled. Ai befides its moving or the Humerus , it helps al to d>. aw up the Scapula. 2 - The jecond. is Suprafpinatus , or Super fcapula f/perior. This arifes from the Bafts of the Scapu and fills up the upper Inter Pc apulium, 'viz., all tl c; : ty that is betwixt its Spine and upper Edg and palling over the jointing of the Scapula wi the Shoulder-bone, by abroad and ftrong Ti den is inferted obliquely into the neck of the 1 ; ter. Some think this doth not only lift t Arm upward, but help to turn it about alfo. Deprejjors, It is pulled down by Latijfimus , and Rotum 1 . major. LatiJJimus isfo called from itslargenefs^ r with its fellow it covereth almoft the whole Ba It is called alfo Ani Scalptor , or Ter for ^ becat ! thofe Offices are performed by the help of tl Mufcle. It fprings by a broad membranous beg r.ing from the hinder Precedes or Spines of the Vertebra of the Back-bone, that are betw : the fixth of the Thorax , and the middle of facrum , as alfo from the upper edge of Os ileui then paffi.ng upwards when it is come to til part of the Back, where the Ribs begin to be; it becometh fielhy, and is carried over the lov corner of the Scapula , ( from which alfo it of receives many caruous Fibres ) where becom| narrower, it is inferted into the Shoulder-bo' by a ffiort broad Tendon, between the Mufc\ peel or alts and this that follows, viz.. 2. Rotundus major , or more properly. Teres mm (For Rotundus means a thing fphaerical, but T 1 long and rcund like a Thread , as this is,) fpringeth carnous from the whole lower edge ^hap. 21. Of the Mufcles of the Arm. he Scapula , and is inferted by a Ihort and ftrong tendon into the Shoulder-bone, a little below :s Neck, and moves it contrary to the Deltuides , iz. downward and fomewhat backward. It is drawn forward by PeBoralis and Coracoide- Movers t. PeBoralis hath a very large and for the greatelt forward. art membranous beginning , ariling from divers s * arts, yet is one and continuous. In its upper part I: rifes from the middle of the Clavicula : in its i iddle, from the whole length of the Sternum and ae Cartilages of the Ribs annexed to it ; in its voeft, from the Cartilages of thelixth,feventh and ghth Ribs. It prefently becomes carnous and lick, but narrower , and running towards the d houlder it is inferted into the Shoulder bone, a ttle below its Head, between the Deltoides and le Biceps of the Cubit. The Fibres of this Mufcle re of three forts, viz. obliquely defending, :reight ( or tranfverfe) and obliquely afcendingj ad accordingly it draws the Os humeri either di- e&ly forward towards the Bread by its middle rreight Fibres, or elfe obliquely forwards , viz. j irward and upward, or forward and downward, sthe obliquely defending , or obliquely afcend- ig Fibres are contra&ed. Coracoideus or Coracobrachiaus fpringeth from 2. he Coracoides Procefs of the Scapula , and endeth bout the middle of the Shoulder-bone , a Hiding he obliquely defcending Fibres of the PeBoralis i moving that Bone obliquely forward and pward. It is moved backward by three : Infrafpinatus , ffff . 'ubfcapularis or Imnterfus , and Rotundas minor. 1C wir ’ nfrafpinatus or Suprafcapularis inferior fpringeth rom the lower Bafts of the Scapula , and filleth up he lower Interfcapuhum , viz. all that fpace that s betwixt its Spine and lower edge, as the Supra- M m 4 fpmatus 53 ° Of the Mufcles. Book V t & •-n 3 - fpinatus did that between the Spine and uppe edge. It is inferted by a broad and Ihort Tei don into one of the Ligaments , that ftpengthc the jointing of the Shoulder-bone with tl Scapula. Subfcapularis or Immerfus poflefleth the who inner cavity of the Scapula. It fpringeth froi the inner part of its Bafts , flelhy, and lo contini i Ing, pafTeth forward (but becoming ftill narrow er) to the Neck of the Scapula , and at the laft l a broad Tendon is inferted into one of the Lig t ments that ftrengthen the aforefaid Shoulder joint. i Rotmdus minor arifeth from the loweft corn of the Scapula by a flelhy beginning, and is in) planted into the Neck of the Shoulder-bon Some make but one Mufde of this and the R] tundus major . ' 1 As to the circular motion of the Arm , that j not performed by any particular Mufcle , but li veral of thefe contribute towards it , namely tl Suprafpinatus , Infraspinatus and Subfcapularis , arj in fame meafure the others alfo. CHAP. XXII. Of the Mufcles of the Ulna. H E lower part of the Arm from the Elbe to the Wrilt is called the Cubit, and coi fifteth of two Bones,called Vina and Radius. Tl Vina ferveth for flexion and extenfion; but tl Radius belpeth to turn the Cubit inward Or ou ward, fo as to make the back or palm of tl Hand look upward or downward. :hap. 22. Of the Mufcles of the Ulna. 531 The Vina is bended by two , to w jt. Biceps, and tno Bend - 'rachUus interms . Biceps is fo called becaufe it °i ths [lath two heads , both of which fpring from the 11 na ° houlder-blade. The one is outward , tendinous i . id round, fpringing from the upper brim of the Icetabulum , or cavity of the Scapula , into which foe head of the Shoulder-bone is received The ther is broader, and is framed partly of a Ten- an, and partly of Flefli : it fprings from the Lnchor-like Procefs of the Shoulder-blade, from hence defcending by the infide of the head of le Shoulder-bone, it meeteth with the former, id both together become a ftrong flelhy Mufcle : ® hich lying on the infide of the Arm, afterwards 151 ids in a thick , round , and ftrong Tendon, hich is inferted into the infide of the head of le Vina , (or of the Radius , as Bartholin will ave it J This Tendon is fometimes pricked in :tting blood in the Arm , and then it caufeth tatlreat Pain. Bracbiatis internus lieth under the Biceps , being 2. ;i ) lorter than it , and altogether flelhy. It rifeth 'here the Deltoides endeth, viz., from the middle f the Shoulder-bone , unto which it cleaveth rmly, and is inferted between the heads of the Ana and Radius , in their fore-fide. ^ The Vina is extended by four Mufcles , Longus , Four ex- \revis , Bracbi&us externus, and Cubitahs. Longus senders. ath two beginnings the one is partly flelhy and 1 • lartly nervous, at the lower edge of the Scapula , ear its Neck, ( where it hath a peculiar hollow- lefs to receive it : ) this defcends by the infide of he Shoulder-bone, and when it is come as far as he infection of the am fcalptor ( defcribed in the 'oregoing Chapter ) there arifes another carnous leginning towards the outer fide, that (according ;o Spigelius ) joins with it and makes up one Mufcle, which 53 2 Of the Mufcles. Book V which is inferted into the inner fide of the hinde Procefs of the Vina called Olecrcinum. Brevis arifeth from the hinder part of th Neck of the Shoulder-bone, and endeth in th outer fide of the Olecranum •, namely, in that par of the Elbow that we lean upon. Brachioeus exterms (To called by Riolanus , to di ftinguilh it from the interms ) is placed toward the outfide of the Shoulder-bone, and is confour ded with the other two , and endeth where the do. This feemeth to be Spigelius' s fecond begir ning of the Longus , which he fays grows into or Mufcle with it. Cubitalis or Ancon&us arifeth from the lowe end and hinder fide of the Shoulder-bone, an palling over the Elbow-joint, it endeth by a nei vous Tendon in the fide of the Vina, a very litti below the Olecrcinum or Ancon , whence it is calk Ancon&us. Some make one Mufcle of this and tl Brevis . Note , That the Fibres of both thefe Bendei and Extenders of the Vina keep all a ftreigl courfe , and fo only move the Cubit ftreighi wife. CHAP. XXIII. Of the Mufcles of the Radius. The Radi- H E Radius , the other Bone of the Cubit, ns hath four Jj^ moved accidentally for in common ) by tl mufcles. 2Vl U fcl e s of the Vina, to which Bone it is faften’d but it has befides, proper motions of its own, an for the performance of thefe, two forts of Mu cles of which fome are called Pronatores , ' vi tho ^hap. 23. Of the Mufcles of the Radius. 535 hofe that turn it inwards , and the Palm of the land upwards ; and others Supinatores , which urn it outwards $ and the Palm of the Hand lowrfwards. The Pronatores are tvoo in number. The firfi is, r. ’ ronator fuperior rotundus or teres. This fpringeth rom the root of the inner knob of the Shoul- ier-bone at the Elbow , and from the inner fide if the Vina, where it is joined to the Shoulder- one • and running obliquely on the infide of the ladius endeth about its middle in a membranous Tendon. The fecond is Pronator inferior quadratus , which 2 . 5 altogether fleihy. It fpringeth from the lower nd inner part of the Vina , two Inches broad ^ hen marching tranfverfly above the Ligament vhich joineth the Radius to the Vina, it endeth in he infide of the Radius. The ending is as broad is the beginning wherefore it is called quadratus >r four-fquare. The Supinatores are in like manner two. The Two SupP Hrfi is Supinator longus , To called , becaufe, of all natores. :he Mufcles which lie along the Vina, it hath the T « longeft Belly. This fpringeth fleihy from the edge of the outer knob of the Shoulder-bone ; and marching obliquely under the Radius , is implant- ed by a membranous Tendon into the upper fide of the lower end of the Radius , bending fome- what to the inner fide. The fecond is Supinator brevis. This fpringeth 2 . from the outfide of the ligament which ftreng- thens the jointing of the Vina with the. Shoul- der-bone, and from the hinder Procefs of the Vi- na , as Spigelius defcrib^s it •, but as others, from the outer Procefs of the Shoulder-bone ■, from whence it pafleth on obliquely , being without membranous, 534 Of the Mufcles. Book V. membranous , and within flefhy , and is inferted into the middle of the Radius. Note , That though for orders fake we have de- fcribed the Mufcles of the Radius next to thole of the Vina • yet when one would Ihew them in dif- feftion, the Mufcles of the Fingers, Thumb and Wrift are firft: to be raifed, and then thefe of the Radius after thofe are taken away. CHAP. XXIV. Of the Mufcles of the Wrift. 'The wrifl npH E Carpus or Wrift has three Motions : It is hath four X either bended , extended , or moved fide- Muftles. ways. For its flexion and extenlion it has proper Mufcles : but as for its motion Tideways , that is not performed by any proper Mufcles, but by a Bender and an Extender of that fide to which it is moved, if they aft together. The Benders lie on the infide of the Cubit, and the Extenders on the outhde. Two Bend- ^ en ^ ers °f the Wrifl; are two ^ of which ers s the firft is Cubit ers “ Lfl le inner knob of the Shoulder-bone, and de- doa :ends flefhy betwixt the Vina and Radius till ear the Wrift, where it is cleft into four fkfhy ortions, which prefently pafs into fo many round of iendons, all whereof are involved together in trc ne common, thin, and mucous Membrane , that M hey may march the more fafely. Thus they are win arried under the tranfverfe Ligament of the 01: Vrift, and along the Palm to the fecond joynt f the Fingers ( growing there broader and thin- rve er ) into which they are inferted , one into hoi ach. Spigelius notes. That as they pafs along he firft Joynt, they run under a tranfverfe Liga- lent ( that fprings from one fide of the bone, nd is inferted into the other) as under an arch : irhich Ligament hinders them upon their con- ra&ion from ftarting up out of their places. "Sear their end each has a Fiflure or perforation, 0 give way to the Tendons of the profundus par- ing through. The Of the Mufeles . Book V 5j8 z. The fecond is named profundus or perforans This arifeth from the upper parts of the Vina anc Radius , a little below the joint of the Elbow, an< being cleft at the Wrift into four Tendons, thef run ( inverted in a common Membrane ) unde the annular ligament of the Wrift, and alfo th tranfverfe ones of the firft joint of the Fingers and laftly through the clefts of the Tendons t the Sublimis , and are implanted into the thir joint of the Fingers. 3. The third fort of Mufeles are called Lumbricc les , one to each Finger. Thefe are very fmaL and arifing from the Tendons of the Mufculus pro fundus , end each in a round Tendon in the firl joint of the Fingers , being confounded with th Tendons of thofe Mufeles that move the Finger laterally • yea fometimes they proceed furthe along with them by the Tides of the Fingers , t the third joint , and affift their lateral motion The firft of thefe Mufeles bends the fecond join of the Fingers , the fecond the third , and th Lumbricales the firft. ifoee Ex- The Fingers are extended by three Mufeles tenders, whereof one is common to all the four Fingers and two proper to two particular. o„e com - The common is Extenfor magnus. This arifinj mon . from the outer knob of the Shoulder-bone , a lit I tie above the Wrift is divided into four Tendons which palling the Wrift like the foregoing are in ferted into the fecond and third joints of the Fini gers. Some make two of this , fuppofing tha Tendon that is inferted into the little Finger , t< be the Tendon of a Mufcle that is diftinert fron that from which the Tendons are propagated t< the other three Fingers ^ but grant, it has the fame origine, and keeps the fame courfe. 3hap. 2(5. Of the Mufcles of the Four Fingers, The two proper are one of them called Indicator , Two proper ecaufe it belongeth to the fore-Finger. Itarifeth i. :om the middle of the Vina on its outfide , and f a double Tendon it endethin the fecond joint f the fore-Finger : but one of the Tendons ;cometh one with the Tendon of the Extenfor \agnm. The other is named Juricularis , becaufe it be- ingeth to the little Finger. It arifeth from the nper part of the Radius , and inarching between ie Vina and the Radius it is inferted by a double fed 'endon into the backfide of the little Finger , of iiM nich Tendons one coalefces with that of the lesimmon Extender. .til The Fingers are moved laterally two manner is c ways : for either they are brought to the numb, or they are carried from it. Thefe Mo- Movers ltd is, t»ns are performed by eight Mufcles , called In- teraJly, uott t'offei , becaufe they are placed between the a & ht ' idji fines of the Metacarpium. That is , fix of them d a; placed in the three Interftices of the four fines of the Metacarpium , one on the outfide of iluft Bat Bone which fuftains the fore-Finger, andano- iinapr on the outfide of that which fuftains the lit- t Finger. They are flelhy and round,and fpring arlfm the Bones of the Metacarpium^ to which they ai) adhere, as they pafs along them. When they i: come to the Roots of the Fingers , they pafs r an iio Tendons , which cleave to the fides of the tit: Figers, and end in thelaft joynt of the Fingers C ; nir the root of the Nails. When the Tendons o the Lumbricales join with thefe, they may be r kon’d amongft the Movers of the Fingers late- riy , and then there will be twelve in all , the Imbricales being four, and thefe Inter ojfei eight : & ufually the Lumbricales ferve onely to bend the fit Joint of the Fingers, as was (hewed above. N n Befides Of the Mufcles. Book V 54° Abducing Befides thefe Mufcles, the fore-Finger and the Mufcles, little Finger are faid to have each one proper Muf fw * cle. That of the fore-Finger may either be callec Abducens in refpect of the middle Finger fron which it draws it ; or Adducens y in refpedt of th 1 Thumb towards which it draws it. It fpring from the infide of the firft joint of the Thumb and ends in the Bones of the fore-Finger , whic it pulls towards the Thumb. 2. That of the little Finger is called Abduttor ( fc fome hypothenar') and fprings from the third ar; fourth bone (of the fecond rank) of the Wriil whence proceeding along the palm of the hand, ;■ is implanted by a fmall nervous Tendon into tl outfide of the firft Joynt of the little Finger,whic 1 it draws outwards from the reft. CHAP. XXVII. 1 ■ Of the Mufcles of the Thumb . five Ex- HF ^ k Thumb is extended by two Mufcles. Tl- tfniers ef ». firft is called Longior. This arifeth fleflj the Thumb, from the outfide of the Vina , near the membr t . nous Ligament which tieth together the Vkl and Radius. From thence it is carried oblique; upon the Radius , and before it come to its 4 pendix , turneth into a round Tendon \ whi i palling under the annular Ligament of the Wri , marcheth along that fide of the Thumb, which next to the fore-Finger , and is inferted into - third bone. 2, The fecond is named Brevior. This arifeth fre the fame origin with the other , and pafleth t liqnely above the Radius. By one Tendon it implant) Chap. 27. Of the Mufcles of the Thumb. 541 mplanted into the root of the firft Joynt of the Thumb, (which anfwers to the bones of the Me- icarpium that fuftain the Fingers }) the other be- oming membranous , cleaveth fait to its fecond nd third bone. It is bended alfb by two Mufcles ; one of which Two Ben. ^ringing from the upper part of the Radius , is ders. nplanted into the firft and fecond Joynt of the *• 'humb • the other being lefs, proceeds from that 2 * )ne of the Carpus which fuftains the Thumb, dng under the other , and reacheth to the mid- le of the Thumb. Thefe two are all the Benders cknowledged by Bartholin , Diemerbrceck , &c. but ■ pigelius , de hum. corp. fabric. 1. 4. c. 19. defcribes ?jvo which bend the firft Joynt , four the fecond, id one the third. Thefe two which bend the rft joynt , together with the Abducens of the ime, he fays, make the monticulus pollicis or ball Monticu- f the Thumb , or as Chiromancers call it monti - lus lunar. ilus Luna. It is moved laterally by two Mufcles. The firft Movers la * called Thenar ( by Riolams ) or Abducens. This terall JJw°' iringeth from the inner part of that bone of the T “ Vrift , which ftayeth the Thumb , by a nervous sginning : then becoming flelhy , it is inferred ito the firft Joynt of the Thumb by a membra- ous Tendon, and draweth it from the fore-Fin- er. Some make three of it. The fecond is Antithenar , or Adducens , which 2 . eth in the fpace between the Thumb and fore- inger. This doth arife from the outfide of that ane of the Metacarpium which fuftaiceth the )re-Finger - and being flelhy is inferred into the rhole inner fide of the firft joint of the Thumb, nd fendeth a membranous Tendon to the fe- ond. This draweth the Thumb to the fore- inger. Some deferibe a fecond Adducens arifing N n 2 • from 542 Of the Mufcles. Book V. from the inner fide of the bone of the Wrilt that fuftaineth the Thumb, and ending in its fe- cond joint. Authors differ very much as to the Number, Rife,and Infertion of thefe Mufcles of the Thumb, which is occalioned partly by their fmalnefs , and partly from their croffmg and being entanglec one with another , fo that ’tis very difficult t( trace and raife them. CHAP. XXVIII. Of the Mufcles of the Thigh. T H E Thigh hath four manner of motions : i is either bended ( and that forwards , o backwards ) or drawn inward or outward , o moved round. Two Bend - It is bended forward by two Mufcles. Th ers forward firft is called PJ'oas , or jLumbam : this lieth in th ofthetbigh. inner part of the Abdomen, upon the Vertebra c i - the Loins, &c. It arifeth flefhy from the fide c the Bodies and from the tranfverfe Proceffes c the two lowermoft Vertebra of the Thorax , an two or three uppermoft of the Loins , froi whence defending by the infideof Os ilium, whe it is come to the Os pubis, it turns into a roun and ftrong Tendon, which is inferted into th lefler Rotator of the Thigh-bone. 2i The fecond is lliacus inter ms : This fpringef with a ilender and flefhy beginning from the it ner Cavity of Os ilium, and being joined to tf Pfoas by its Tendon, it endeth before betwee the greater and lefler Rotator. 'hap. 28. Of the Mufcles of the Thigh. 543 It is bended backward or extended by the ThreeBend- ijiree Gluui , which make up the Buttocks , and ers f ck ' :rve to go backward withall, or elfe to raife the bdy up ftreight after fitting The firfi which i the greateft, andlieth outmoft, is called Glut*- I major. It fpringeth very carnous from the o ccyx , from the Spine of Os facrum , and from il the circumference of the Cofia or edge of Os ium, and is inferted by a ftrong Tendon four iches below the great Rotator. The I'econd lies in the middle, whence it is cab 2 . II Glut reus tnedius. It fpringeth from the fore- ] rt of the Cofia and back of Os ilium a little Iwer than the former, and is inferted into the cter and upper part of the great Rotator. The third lies undermoft, and is called Glutaus 3 „ rnor. It fpringeth a little lower than the former, (rom the outer or backfide of Os ilium) lying uolly under it, and is implanted into the upper id inner part of the great Rotator by a broad ;d ftrong Tendon. It is drawn to the infide by the Mujculus tri- one Draw - vs. This is the thickeft of all the Mufcles of er to the in- le Body, and might more juftly be called quadri - of, feeing it has four beginnings ^ but they that apofed the name of triceps, made a particular ;ufcle of the firft of its four Heads, and called i Fettineus or lividus. The firfi Head doth pro- ted nervous from the upper part of the Os pubis, d is inferted into the rough line of the Thigh- bne. The fecond fpringing from the lower fide 1 the fame bone, being letter is inferted a little Jgherupinto the faid line. The third ariling iom the whole lower part of the Coxendix , is ferted a little under the leffer Rotator. The jiirtb fpringing from the Apex or tip of the Cox- Uwc is implanted into the inner and lower Tu- Mn 5 bercle st:; 'i>J 544 Four turn- ers to- wards the Out fide. I. •"> O' 4 - Fm turn- ers about obliquely. I . Z. Of the Mufcles. Book V bercle of the Thigh by a round Tendon, which i joyned with the (lender Tendon of the firft pai of this Mufcle. It is turned towards the outfide by four fma Mufcles called Qtfadrigemini. They are place behind upon the articulation of the Thigh, or by another. Th efirjl is called from its fituatic lliacus externus , and from its figure pyriformi < it is longer than the reft, and arifeth from tl outfide of the three lovveft vertebra of os facrw The fecond arifeth from the knob of os ifchiw The third arifeth from the fame part. The three are inferted into that dent that is in tl top of the great Rotator or as Bartholin fays, i to that fpace that is betwixt the two Rotators. T fourth is called Quadrigemmys quadrat us , and more fiefhy and broad than the reft : it iieth tv inches diftant from the third, arifing from the i fide of the knob of the ifchium , and is implant into the outfide of the great Rotator. It is turned about obliquely by two Mufcles c; led Obturatores. The firft is Obturator interms, tl. turneth it outward. It arifeth from the inn circumference of the hole that is between the chium and os pubis , from whence palling tranfve ly outwards over the Coxendix , it is inferted it the aforefaid dent or cavity of the great Rotat The fecond is Obturator externus ; this arifti from the outer circumference of thefaid hoi and turning about the neck of the Thigh-bone about a Pulley , it endeth in the faid Cav of the great Rotator and turneth the Thigh ■ ward. ’ ' Note, That though for orders fake we have c • fcrib’d the Mufcles of the Thigh before thofe the Leg, yet the Difledtor cannot fo eafilyn conve 545 - — - — — — Chap. 29. Of the Mufcles of the Leg. :onveniently raife and fhew them, till thofe of ;he Leg are firft raifed and removed. : i - CHAP. XXIX. Of the Mufcles of the Leg . r H E Leg is made up of two Bones as well as Five Bend - the Cubit, viz.. Tibia and Fibula ^ but Ana - ers of the omifts have not diftinguifhed their Mufcles like 1 ^’ hofeofthe Vina and Radius , but call them all, be Mufcles of the Tibia or Leg. Now the Leg is either bended, extended, or Inoved obliquely. There are five that bend it. The firft is Longij - j . 'mus. This arifeth from the inner knob ofO* Hi- nt , and defcends outermoft juft under the skin »n the inlide of the Thigh, running obliquely over he other Mufcles , and a little above the Knee nding in a Tendon , which is inferted under the vnee, into the fore and inner fide of the Tibia. It t otherwife called Fafcialis , becaufe it embraces he Mufcles that lie upon the Thigh like a Swd- •hg-band } and alfo Sartorius , becaufe it helpeth »ne to fit crofs-legg’d. The fecond is called Gracilis , and fpringeth 2 ; pith a nervous and broad beginning at the joint- of the Os pubis * from whence it runs down he infide of the Thigh, and is implanted by a ofind Tendon into the inner fide of the Tibia t tear the infertion of the firft, but a little ower. The third is named feminervofus , becaufe it is 3, aif nervous and half flefiiy for it arifes nervous i om the knob of the Ifchium , and fo continues N n 4 till 546 Of the Mufcles. Book V till its middle where it becomes flelhy, defcendinj on the backfide of the Thigh •, and when it i come near the Ham, it turns into a round Ten don, which is inferted into the inner fide of th Tibia, towards the backfide, running as far as it middle. | V The fourth is called femimembranofus , becaufei is half membranous. It proceedeth from the fam knob , partly nervous, and partly membranous and endeth by a broader Tendon than the thir in the hinder part of the Tibia. wj The fifth is called biceps , becaufe it feems t have tiro Heads . : for firft it arifeth from the fam knob of the Ifchium nervous ^ and from thenc being carried on the outfide of the Thigh, abou its middle it becometh flelhy, as if it begu: there '■with a fecond head ; from whence de feending it is inferted by a notable Tendon in to the outer fide of the upper Appendix of th Fibula. , ! five Ex- The Leg is extended alfo by five Mufcles. Th tenders, firfi is membranofus : this proceeding flelhy fron i. the upper part of the fpine of Os ilium , on th outfide of the Thigh-bone near the great Pro cefs or Rotator turns into a broad membranou Tendon, wherefore it is called Fafcia lata , for i covereth almolt all the Mufcles of the Thigh am Tibia , and at Lift is inferted a little below th Knee, into the outer and forefide of the Tibia an( Fibula. 2 1 The fecond is ReClus : this fpringing from th lower part of the fpine of Os ilium , and paflinj with a carnous and round belly ftreight down th Thigh before, when it is come to the Patella , i ends in a broad and ftrong Tendon, by which i adheres clofe to the Patella , as if it would en< . in it • but it pafies further and is Snfertc Chap. 29. Of the Mufcles of the Leg. 547 ito the forefide of the Tibia a little below the inee. The third is named vafius ext emus : this fpr^g- i:h from the root of the great Rotator , and de- eding along the outer and forefide of the 'high endeth a little below the Patella , near the me place with the former. The fourth is called vafius internus : this arifeth 4. om the root of the leller Rotator , and defcend- ig on the inner and forefide of the Thigh endeth little below the Patella with the other. The ifius externus defcends on the outfide of the Bus , and the internus on the inftde thereof, 'hence they have their name. To thefe fome add a fifth Mufcle called Crure- 5. ; , which fpringeth from the fore-part of the high-bone , between the two Rotators , and ad- oring clofe thereto in its defcent, endeth in the me place with the former. Note , That thefe four laft Mufcles being joined ngether about the Knee , make one common ; road and ftrong Tendon, by which they involve le Patella or Knee-pan , and which being infer- :d into the Tibia , tyes it and the Thigh-hone ^ )gether like a ftrong Ligament. Note alfo, That ‘ t: le Mufcles which extend the Leg are ftronger fan thofe which bend it, that the weight of the ody may be the more firmly upholden when we and. There is alfo a fingle Mufcle called Poplitaus , one Mover n_- ! r Subpoplitceus , which moveth the Leg obliquely : obliquely. iis lieth in the hollow of the Ham , and fpring- th from the outer knob at the lower end of the 'high-bone, and is carried obliquely to the Inn- er and inner fide of the Appendix at the upper nd of the Tibi#. C H A F. Of the Mufcles. Book V 548 CHAP. XXX. Of the Mufcles of the Foot or Tarfus. T H E Foot is moved according to the motio of the Tarfus or Wrift, ( or as fome call the Inftepf. hough that name is more proper to tl Metatarfus or upper arched part of the Foot.| Wherefore the Mufcles that perform thefe me tions, are indifferently called the Mufcles of tt Foot or Tarfus. Two Bend - The Foot then is either bended, extended , c T of the moved tideways, according to the motion of th - oot ’ Tarfus. It is bended when it is drawn forward or upwards. To perform which motion it hat 1. two Mufcles. The firjli s Tibimus anticus : thi arifeth from the upper Appendices of the Tibi and Fibula , and cleaving unto the whole Os Tibu about the middle of it it becometh narrower, am: turneth by degrees into a Tendon, which paflin under the annular ligament of the Tarfus or Wril that fprings from the lower Appendices of th Tibia and Fibula , is commonly divided into two whereof the one is inferted into the firft of thof bones which are called innominata , and the othej into that bone of the Metatarfus or Inftep tha is fet before the great Toe. If the Tendon con tinue one, then it is implanted into the inner lid of this laft Bone. £. The fecond is Peronaus anticus : this arifeth froc the outer and upper part of the Perone or Fibu la , and being carried through the fiffure of th outer Ankle, it is inferted into that Bone of th Metatarfus which fuflaineth the little Toe. I defeends all along by the outljde of the fore gojn| ;hap. 30. Of the Mufcles of the Tarfus. 549 oing Mufcle, and hath fometimes two Ten- ons. The Foot is extended when it is drawn Three Ex* own wards or backwards. To perform which tenders - otionit hath three Mufcles. The firfi is cal- To d Gemellus exterms , being reckoned by fome :>r two *, alfo Gaflrocnemius exterms , becaufe it ith the following maketh the Calf of the Leg , hich in Greek is called Gajlrocnemia. It hath vo Heads, the firft of which arifes in the Ham, om the inner Head of the Thigh-bone , flelhy id broad ^ from whence it marcheth down by the ick and inner part of the Tibia , and when it is jme to the middle of it,becometh tendinous. The ther Head likewife arifeth in the Ham, but from le outer Head or Prominence of the Thigh- one, and pafiing down by the outward and back art of the Leg, becometh tendinous a little a- ove the former,- and joining with it they both , row into oneftrong, broad, and nervous Ten- on, which is inferred into the hinder fide of the leel. The fecond is called Gemellus intemus , or Ga- 2, kocnemius interms , becaufe it lieth under the for- ner ; and laffcly Soleus , from its refembling the lole-fifh in fhape. It is of a livid colour , fpring- ng from the backfide of the upper appendix of :he Fibula by a Among nervous beginning , and growing pretty bulky it continueth fo till it hath pafied the middle of the Tibia^ when it becometh larrower, and tendinous ^ and a little above the Heel it is fo united to the Tendon of the former Gemellus , that both feem to turn into one, which is inferted into the Heel. The third is Plantaris. This fpringeth from 3, the outer head of the Thigh-bone in the Ham, very fmall but carnous from whence it defeends but 55o Of the Mufcles. Book V but a little way before it ends in a very long an< (lender Tendon, which joining very clofely wit thofe of the two former is fattened to the Heel but reaches as far as the middle of the foal of th Foot : ( Spigelius fays , as far as the Toes, and i inferted into the firii joint of each of them,imita ting the Palmaris of the hand.) The three Ten dons of thefe three Mufcles thus uniting make on moft ftrong and thick Tendon , ufually called th great Cord , and this being implanted into tb Heel makes a wound there fo very dangerous. y'voo Mo- vers fide - ways. 1 . The Foot is moved Tideways by two. The fir JI{ is called Tibialis pojlicus , adducens pedent , or Nat ticus , becaufe Sailers ufe it much when the 1 climb up the Matt. It fpringeth both from th Tibia and Fibula , and from the Ligament whic tyeth them together ; whence defending amon the hinder Mufcles , near to the inner Ankle becometh tendinous : then patting by it, it goet to the foal of the Foot , and is inferted into th under fide of that Bone of the Tarfus which i next to the cubiforme , viz. the third cuneiform This moveth the Foot inwards. The fecond is called Peronaus or Fibuhfus pojh cus : this arifeth from the upper and hinder pai of the Fibula or Perone , by a nervous and ftron beginning • and in its deftest becoming flelh and round, it cleaves to the outfide of the Fibuli having its outer part of a livid colour, but th inner of a red. When it is come to the middle c the Fibula it becometh tendinous, and defcendl with the Peromeus anticus by the fitture of the out er Ankle , but joins not with its Tendons, for goes under the foal of the Foot , and is inferte into the root of the firft or greateft of the thre Off a cuneiformia^ that is feated before the gre; Toe. Sonk C lap. 1 i . Of the Mufcles of the Toes . 551 sometimes, though feldom, there is another Vilcle, called Teronaus tertius , which being very luder accompanies the pofticus in its whole pro- ofs, and is inferted into the fame place, affifting t Action, which is, to bend the Foot outwards. CHAP. XXXI. Of the Mufcles of the Toes , "■'HE great Toe is moved by its proper Muf- 1 , cles , as the Thumb of the Hand was : but : other four by common , which we will firft jcribe. They are either extended, bended, or moved sliquely. MThe Extenders are two. Th efirft is Tenforlon- p. This arifeth by a nervous and acute begin- 1 g from the fore and inlide of the upper u 4 ppen~ * w of the Tibia , and prefently becoming carnous, igoeth ftreight down along the Fibula , and be- ii; come to th eTarfus it is divided into four Ten- das, which palling under the annular or tranf- rfe Ligament thereof, go each to one of the fur Idler Toes, and are inferted into their fe- c id and third joint on the upper fide. As they r 1 along the backfide of the Foot they are tyed c; to another by a membranous Ligament, for tiftrengthening of them. The fecond is Tenfor brevis . This lieth under 2. t; former, having its beginning from the tranf- ^rfe or annular Ligament of the Tarfus, fielhy ai broad, and by its four Tendons is inferted i o the firft joints of the four Toes , ( Spigelius f r s, into the fecond J The 552 Of the Mufcles, Book'V six Beni- The Benders of the four Toes are in like mat m. ner two, and four Lumbr icales. The firft is Flex *• longUs , or perforans: it lieth under the GemeU, internus and arifeth from the upper and hind 1 part of the Tibia by a long and flelhy beginning and paffing down along the Tibia, ( unto whii it cleaveth) when it is paft the middle of it, becometh tendinous : then running by the inn 1 Ankle, under the Ligament of the Tibia and He 1 to the Soal of the Foot, it is there divided in four Tendons, which paffing through the ho: of the Flexor brevis , are infer ted into the third laft joint of the four Toes. 2e The fecond is Flexor brevis , or perforatus : tl fpringeth from the under and inner fide of t ; Heel-bone, and when it hath palled the itiidc ! of the Foot, it is parted into four found Te dons, which are inferted into the fetond joint the four Toes, being perforated to give way the Tendons of the former Mufcle to pafs to tl third joint. Lumbri- They are alfo bended by four Lumbrkal tales. which agree altogether with the Lumbricales tile hand both in their ufe. Figure and Rife.Tb fpring from the Tendons of the two former, fm and round, (or rather from the membranous Lin ment that inclofes them jand are infer ted by a fml Tendon into the fide of the firft joint, whi they help to bend. The flefhy fubftance, whii rifeth with two acute beginnings from the f< part of the lower fide of the Heel-bone, a I reacheth to the Rife of thefe Mufcles, feem< much to -further their Adtion, and to afford th'i their carnous Subftance. TenMwers The Toes are moved obliquely by the Intel ■ obliquely, /ei, which are fo called, becaufe they are plac between tbs bones of she MstatdrfuSi They are 1 55 ? « flap. 51. Of the Mufcles of the Toes. 1 number, whereas there are but eight in the tckof the Hand, becaufe the Metatarfus hath tie bone more than the Metacarpus , there being '.e to fuftain the great Toe as well as the reft * iiereas the Thumb hath none. Each of them 1 th fpring from the under fide of that bone up- which it is placed, but prefently turning to its e, it keeps its courfe along the interftice of the nes till it arrive at the firft joint of the Toe,in- the fide whereof it is inferted by a ihort and i newhat broad Tendon. If the inner be con- tused, the Toe is moved inwards -, if the outer, ctwards. But if they both ad together, then 1 jfc the Toes extended. In the four diftances be- t een the bones, there are eight fuch Mufcles •, 'jt a the outfide of the great Toe one , and another atheoutfideof the little Toe. But befide ft, te little Toe hath a proper Abduttor to move it , ctwards, which arifing from the Heel paffes on . te outfide of the fifth bone of th q Metatarfus, ad is inferted into the outfide of the firft joint ( bone of this Toe. Th q great Toe hath five peculiar or proper Muf- one Extent us. The firft is Extenfor : this fpringeth by a derofthe ::fhy beginning from the outfide of the Tibia, Pollexc^ here the Fibula ftands out from it : after a Ihort Great ree ° ace it pafieth into a Tendon, which running un- :r the annular ligament of the Tar f us, and march- g along the upper part of the Foot, is inferted ito the whole upper part of the great Toe, hich it extends. The fecond is Flexor: this fpringeth from the cue Bender , ?per and back part of the Fibula , and defcend- ig by the fide of the Flexor longus to the inner aikle , it there becometh tendinous and run- 554 Of the Mufcles. Book 5 1 Three Mo- vers fide- ways. I. 3 - — - — — ning with the longus under that ligament the * which tyeth the lower appendix of the Tibia l the Heel, it is infer ted into the third or laft bo of the great Toe, by one ftrong Tendon, fervi to bend it. But fometimes it is divided into tv Tendons, whereof one is inferted as abovefaii and the other into the fecond Toe: and wh this happens, the Flexor longus fends but thi Tendons to the three laft: Toes, and none to t fecond. The three following move it fideways: which the firjl is called Abducens pollicem , becat 1 it draweth the great Toe from the reft: , towa: the infide of the Foot. It fpringeth nervous fro the Ligament which tieth together the Heel-boi and the Talus (or according to fome,from the ii ner fide of the Heel it felf ) and running fo wards on the infide of the Foot, it is inferted 1 a round Tendon into the outfide of the firft joii of the great Toe. The fecond is called Adducens pollicem majc drawing the great Toe towards the reft. Th fpringeth from the Ligament that ties thofe tw Bones of the Met at a/ fus together which fuftai the little Toe and the next to it, and proceed^ obliquely over the other Bones is is implanted in to the inner fide of the firft joint of the gres Toe. The third is called Adducens pollicem minor (an othevwifeTranfverfalis from its running a-crofs th Foot.J This arifeth from the Ligament that bind the firft joint of the little Toe, and paffing crol the firft bones of the other Toes it ends in th infide of the firft bone of the great Toe. Som think this ferves onely to tie together the fir l bones of the Toes (like a Ligament :) But Cafe • 555 4 hap. JI. Of the Mufcles of the Toes, ris (who firft found it out ) fays it draws the eat Toe to the little one, and fo makes the Foot illow, grafpiflg the ground as it were, when we n in itony and uneven places , to fix the Foot fore firmly. d . Let not the Reader wonder, that he meets not (this Difcourfe of the Mufcles, with the ingenious , Compels new difcoveries : For befides the - * |w Mufcles which he has found out , he differs very much in his defcription of the old from mer Anatomifts, that I have thought it better refer the Reader to his Myotomia Reformat a t l m to do him any injury by curtailing what is ■ to be perufed at large by the curious. ■ i Having thus finifhed our Difcourfe of the Muf* ij s, 1 have thought fit to fubjoin two Figures, lerein are reprefented as many of the Mufcles can conveniently be Ihewn in two poftures of ’ Body. Which 1 have added, to let Beginners this Art of Anatomy fee the manner of the j. ng of the Mufcles in their natural Situation^ d of the running of their Fibres. C(1 w- Of the Mufcles. Book"' Tab. XVIIJ. Reprefenteth the Mufcles as they lie tp view the fore-part of the Body. a Sheweth the Frontal Mufcle. b The Temporal. c The Mufcle called Maffeter. d The Maftoideus. e The Deltoides. ff The Biceps, g The Extender of the Wrifl. h The Bender of the Wrifl. * The Bender of the Thumb. I The Extender of the third Joint of the Thumb. kk The Bed oral Mufcles. 1111 The freight Mufcles of the Abdomen. mm The Linea alba. nn The obliquely defcending. oo The Mufculus fartorius or fafdalis. pp The ftreight.Mufcles of the Thigh. qq The Triceps. r Part of the Membranofus. ff The Vaftus internus. t The Vaftus externus. *2 mWMiiMINI Txt.XL Chap. 3 1. Of the Situation of the Mufcles . Tab. XIX. Reprefents the Mufcles as they lie to view in the hinder part of the Body. aa Shew the Trapezius, b The Deltoides. c The Suprafpinatus. d The Infrafpinatus. e The Teres major, f The Extender of the. Arm . g The Brachialis. t j h The outer Extender of the Wrifi . i The other Extender of the Wrifi.: I : k Ttje Mufculus radii longus, ( 1 1 The Latiffimus dorfi. f|n m The obliquely defcending . 1 The Quadratus. 30 The Gluteus maximus, p The Vaftus externus. j Part of the Membranofus. rr The Seminervofus. ff The Semimembranofus, : The Gracilis, a The Triceps, t The Biceps. f The Subpopliteus. \Z The Gaftrocnemius. t The Peronseus. The End of the Fifth Book, The O 2 ( 559 ) hthe Sixth Booh OF THE BONES- JC,H AP. I, Of Boms in general , their conjlituent and in- tegral farts. A Bone is called in Greek Vioy, from to Bones, then f\ fland ■, for according to Hippocrates , vi# name] adfJMTi saw , og Stun# , ^ it affords J lability , Jlreightnefs and form to the Body . It may be defined to be a fimilar part , #zo/£ Definition, dry , cold , fctfrd, inflexible , wif of /e«/e , uf- f or ding fiabiliment and form to the whole Body. Bones have been commonly taught to be made Matter and of the more crafs, tartareous or earthy part of hoh»/&- the Seed in the Womb , and that they are nou- Me »*‘ rifhed with the like particles of the Blood , and moiften’d with their contained Marrow, And I fee no reafon to recede from this Dodrine. unlefs one would commence litem de nomine , BfajJgle about a term : for though Women have n3 true Seed , and the Man’s being only an adive prin- ciple of generation, affords nothing of matter to the parts of the Foetus , but only impregnates the Ovum , ( as was ftiewn in B. I. ) yet if we will bat O o 3 granf 560 Of the Bones. Book .VI. j grant the name of Seed to the humour in the O- um, ( which we may do without abfurdity) we may continue the old manner of fpeaking. Now though they are continually nourifhed, yet to- wards Manhood, by the increafed heat of the Body , the primigenial moifture is fo lefTened, that the bones through their hardnefs are not apt to be any longer extended *, and fo Men ceafe to grow any higher of ftature. As to the integral and conftituent parts of , Bones, their Periofteum or inverting Membrane, their Subftance , Pom, Marrow , Glands , FeJJels , &c, Dr Havers in his OJleologia nova , has far outdone all former Anatomifts in his account thereof, which is very worthy the perufal of all that are curious in Anatomy. Thither therefore I refer the Reader, and fhall here only exhibit a ftiort Scheme of part thereof. And firft as to the Pe - riofleum that cloaths them. Perioftc- The Periofteum (he fays ) 44 has two forts or fe- 44 ries of Fibres, the under deriv’d from the Dun 44 Mater , the upper from the Membrane of tht 44 Mufcie that lies upon it : which Fibres lie one 44 upon the other, but are not interwoven on< 44 with another. 44 The under Fibres run all parallel diredl) 44 from one end of the bone to the other, and ar< 14 continued from one bone to another by mean 44 of the Ligaments that joyn them together ii 44 their articulations, upon which they pafs. 44 The outer hold the fame courfe with th< 44 Fibres of the Mufcie from whence they are de 44 rived, fometimes rtreight , fometimes oblique 44 and fometimes tranfverfe • and when the; 44 have run fo far as to make up their part of th« 44 Periojleum , he thinks, they are inferred into th 44 bone, and are fucceeded by others from fom I — — . □hap. i. Of the Bones in general. 561 ‘ other Mufcles. Some of the Tendons of the ‘ Mufcles alfo propagate Fibres to make fome 4 part of the Periofieum : but others penetrating 1 it are immediately inferted into the bone. “ The inner Superficies of the Periofieum flicks 1 as clofe to the bone as if it were glued to it ’ 4 and befides, the Periofieum has little fibrillce , or 4 threads continued from it , that enter into the 4 fubftance of the bone, which give them (proba- 1 bly ) fome internal fenfe. The Vfes he afcribes to it, are, 1. “To be a te - its yfes. 4 gument to the bones. 2. To convey Spirits in- J 4 to the fubflance of the bones for maintaining ' 4 their heat, for preferving their fenfibility , and 4 to affift in the work of their accretion and nu- 4 tridon,by means of the minute Fibres it immits 4 into them. 3. To help to fet limits to the 4 growth and extenfion of the bones j as the 4 Bark is fometimes obferved fo to bind young 4 Trees, that it is neceffary to open it before ;4 they can have the liberty of thriving. 4. It is 14 ferviceable in the conjunction of the bones and 44 their epiphyfes , ( while thefe are cartilagi- 44 nous ) alfo of the bones which are joyned by “futures or harmony , and in the connexion of 44 the bones and their Cartilages. 5. To joyn 44 the Heads and Tendons of the Mufcles fall to 44 the bones ^ namely, of fuch Tendons as do not 44 penetrate it, (as fome do notj Having done with the Periofieum , he comes to The fub. the fubfiance of the Bones, which he defcribes ° r ter this manner. He fays, 44 they confift of 44 meUa or Plates lying one upon another, and 1 44 thefe of fmall firings or Fibres running length- 44 ways of the Bones, (like as we fee in Whale- 44 bone.) Which firings , though fome of them “run to the very extremities of the Bones , and O o 4 44 others 562 Of the Bones. BookYI, 44 others approach near to them, do not terminate 44 there, fo as to have diftind ends, but they are, 44 where they may be thought to terminate, 44 fiill continued, and run tranfverfly and as it 1 44 were arched, that the firings of one fide of 44 the Bone proceed fo as tq meet and be united 44 to thofe that are propagated from the oppofite; 44 and this at both extremities , that they are a 44 continuation , though not of the Figure , yet 44 in the manner of a Ring. Therefore they are 44 not all of a length , but in every Plate they 44 fall one Ihorter than another. 44 In feveral Bones the Lamella are difpofed di« 44 verily-: In thofe Bones which have a large Cavi- 44 ty, they are on every fide contiguous and clofe- 44 ly united : But in thofe which have not any 44 great Cavity , but are altogether fpongious 44 within, many of the internal Lamina are pla- 44 ced at forne difiance from one another in all 44 their length, having betwixt them a cavernous 44 fubftance or fmall bony cells. And fo have al» 44 fo thofe Bones which have a large Cavity, fome 44 of thefe lelfer cells at both their extremities. fbeir Next he comes to their Pores, and fays, 44 That Tores , 44 in the Bones whofe Plates are contiguous, there 44 are Pores through and between the Plates , be- 44 fides thofe which are made for thepafiageof the 44 Blood-vefiels : And thefe are of two forts: 44 The one penetrate the Lamina, and are tranf- 44 verfe, looking from the Cavity to the external 44 fuperficies of the Bone : The fecond fort are 44 formed between the Plates , which are longitu- 44 dinal and ftreight, tending from one end of the 44 Bone towards the other , and obferving the 14 courfe of the bony firings. The firfi kind are 44 formed not only in the firfi internal Lamina , 44 but in every one, even to the outermoft ; tho* 44 the Chap, i . Of the Bones in general. 565 44 the nearer they are to the Cavity , the greater “ is the number of the Pores. And as they pafs, 44 they do not obferve any fuch order as to lie di- 44 redly one under another to form any continued 44 paflage from the Cavity to the external Plate. 44 The fecond kind , viz,, the longitudinal , are 44 not to be obferved but by good glafles , unlefs “it be now and then in fome particular Bones. “ By thefe it is that the medullary Oil diffufes it “ felf, and is immediately beneficial to the Plates. “ The other ( viz., the tranfverfe) are but fubor- 41 dinate to thefe , and rather defigned for the “ paflage of the Marrow into them, than for the 1 “ immediate communication of it to the fubftance “ of the Bone. 44 The Medulla contained in the Bones confifts Me Mar- 44 (befides the Blood-veflels ) of an inverting 44 Membrane, in which are included membranace- 3 44 ous lobules or bags, and in thefe bags Veftcula or n| 44 glandular bladders, very much like the veficu- 44 lar fubftance of the Lungs. And thefe glandu- 44 lar bladders ferve both for the feparation of the 44 medullary Oil from the Mafs of Blood, and for i tl the reception and confervation of it. In an hu- 44 mane Bone which he had prefervcd till the me- 44 dullar Oil was wholly evaporated , he found 44 thefe PeficuU remaining dry, but intire , and 44 their fubftance reprefenting in a manner a 44 Sponge. They feem to have Pores or immedi- 44 ate paifages out of one into another ( as have 44 alfo the bags) by which the Oil has a freer 44 courfe to the joints, and Subftance of the Bone, i 44 for whofe benefit it was defigned. By the ftrid- 44 eft enquiry he could never find any thing like 44 Duds ( as pafs from other Glandules ) and in- 44 deed thefe are not here necelfary , bepaufe 44 the Oil is not carried from the glandular Vehi- cles’ 5^4 Of the Bones. Book VI. “ cles to any large receptacle, but flows out of the “ fuperficies of the Marrow in as many places, as “there are tranfverfe Pores in the internal “ Lamel. The Medulla ferves to oil the fubftance 11 of every Bone, which the drier it were, the 11 brittler it would be ; It lubricates alfo theii 44 Articulations, and hinders their ends from being “ worn , or overheated with motion •, and it 46 moiftens likewife the Ligaments by which they 41 are tyed one to another. But in thefe two lafl 41 Ufes it isaflifted by the Mucilage which is fepa- “ rated by the GlanduU mucilaginofa ( as he calls 44 themj which he has obferved in all the Articu- “lations-of the Bones , and are of the conglome- 44 rate kind, of which more in the next Chapter. 44 Now the manner of the medullary Oil’s inll- 44 nuating it felf through a Bone and its being 44 difpenfed to all the parts of it, is this : It firfl 44 palfes being liquid ( as it all is while the Ani- 44 mal is alive ) out of the Cavity through the 44 tranfverfe Pores of the firfl: internal Lamina, 44 and not having Pores of the fame kind diredly 44 fubjacent in the next Plate to tranfmit it to- 44 wards the outfide of the Bone, it flows into 44 the longitudinal ones formed between thefe 44 two (the firfl and fecond J Plates, and being car- 44 ried along in them till it find fome tranfverfe 44 Pores in the fecond Plate, it paffes through thefe. 44 which when it has done, it is again obliged tc 44 alter its courfe to run into and flow along the 44 ftreight Pores between the fecond and third 44 Lamina . Thus it paffes through and between 44 the Plates fucceffively, till it has made its way 44 to the external Plate. 44 Thus the medullary Oil is difpenfed in all 44 the Bones to thofe Plates which are contigu | 44 ous, and have no intermediate Cavities to en' 44 tertain 5 6 5 ihap. i. Of the Bones in general . tfertainany medullary Glands of their own: But where the Plates Hand at fome diftance (as they do in fuch Bones as have not any great Cavity ) there are the fmall caverns ( above- mentioned) which are capable of containing fome medullary Glands, from whence the Plates have more immediately, and without the for- mer method of conveyance, the benefit of the 4 Marrow. 44 He divides the Blood-vejfeis of the Bones in- vejfsls. ' to nutritious and medullary. The moll confide- : rable of the nutritious enter at the ends of the Bone, viz,, the Artery at one end, and the Vein at the other. The medullary commonly 1 enter the fides of the Bones (and that oblique- ’ ly, as the Ureters do the Bladder) both by one 4 Foramen .] There are no Nerves that are inferted ; ntothem (except into the Teeth ) but thefe )nly run through the Periofieum that inveffc them. 44 Some Bones have large Cavities in them, as ' 4 Os humeri , and femoris , the Vina and Radius , ,l Tibia and Fibula , the Bones of the Metacarpus. and Met at ar fits ^ of the Fingers and Toes, and u of the Os hyoides : to which may be added the ” lower Jaw } though the Cavity compared with 44 the magnitude of the Bone hardly deferves to 44 be ftyled large. Belides thefe large cavities 44 which are in the inlide of Bones, there are lef- 44 ler cells or caverns in their fubllance, which found in all the Bones, even thole which have a large cavity.3 But of thefe before, when we fpoke of the dillribution of the Marrow. Befides the large Cavities and Caverns in the inlide or fubllance of the Bones, moll have Juper large Ca- vities, ami Caverns. are « u Superficial Cavities ficial Cavities or Sims ’s, which Dr. Havers di- Fora “ llinguifhes into Sulci cr Furrows (which are the mma. ions 5 66 Of the Bones. Book V long ones ) and Pits , as he calls the fhorter on< And they have befides, holes for the nutritio and medullary Veffels, as was but juft now ol ferved. On the outfide of the Bones there are al to be obferved their Prominences or Protuhera ; ces , of which there be two kinds : for it is e ther a continued part of the Bone jetting mac feftly above its plain Superficies, for the mo commodious Infertion of the Mufcles, &c. and called Apophyfis , a Procefs • or elfe it is like an a( ditional Bone growing to another by fimple ar immediate contiguity, ( and generally fofter at Epiphyfis. more porous than it) and is called Epiphyfis , { Appendage. If the Protuberance of the Bone 1 round, it is called its Caput ^ under which is tf Cervix , as in the upper end of the Thigh-bom If it be flat, it is called Condylus : if fharp. Cor on Other Protuberances or Procefles are named fro; the fimilitude they have to other things, as St; hides , Coracdides , &c. yfg' Their Vfes are many : for they ferve i. for tl firmitude and fuftentation of the Body, like bean and pillars in houfes : 2. for a defence to foir parts • fo the Skull defends the Brain, the Ril the parts contained in the Breaft : 3. for progre lion or walking, of which they with the Mufcl< are the only inftruments : 4. they give lhape t the parts of the Body. Thefe are their generi Ufes • as to their particular llfes, thofe will b fhewn as we defcribe them feverally. Prominen- ces y ViZ. Apophy- fisj or G H A I **- _ (hap. 2. Of the conjunctions of Bones. 5 6 7 CHAP. II. Of the different conjunctions of Bones one to another . fc Ones are joyned to one another either by Ax- > tkulation or joynting \ or elfe by Sympbyfis growing together. Articulation is either for manifejt , or obfcure 4^^ >tion. The former is called Diartbrofjs , be- t ion. ife the Articulation is loofe ", the latter Symr- ofis , becaufe it is clofe and compad. Diarthrofis , or that loofe joynting which ferves u Diar- • tnamfeji motion, is threefold. Firft, Enartbrofts , throfis, lich is, when a large head of a Bone is received :o a deep Cavity, as the Thigh-bone into the . . p-bone. Secondly , Arthrodia , which is when ; Cavity which receiveth is lhallow , and the ad of the Bone which is received, fiattifh : fuch the Articulation of the Radius with the Shoul - : r-bone, or of the Shoulder-bone with the Sea - ' la. The third is Ginglymos when the fame ’me receiveth , and is received. This falleth t three manner of ways. Firft, when the Bone received by another , and receiveth the fame - 7 is is feen in the Articulation of the Shoulder- me with the Vina. Secondly, when a Bone re- iveth one Bone, and is received by another : hich is done in the Spondyls or Vertebra of the ick, where the middle Bone receiveth the up- ;r, and is received by the lower. The third when the procefs of the Bone being long and mnd, is inferted into another upper Bone, and 'is turned in the Cavity like an Axle-tree in a Wheel ; . 568 Mucilagi- nous Glands. Of the Bones . Book VI. -1 Wheel 7 fo is the fecond vertebra of the Neck i joynted with the firft. Note , That in all thefe Articulations are pla- ced thofe mucilaginous Glands above-mention- ed , firft difcovered by Dr. Havers , and accu- rately defcribed by him in his Ofleologia nova , p. 187, &c. from whence take this Ihort account of them.They are of two forts .* fome are ftnaU and numerous in every Joint , which are fet thick all over the mcmbrane,excepting where there are any large glands, and they are all of an equal magni- tude, fo as to render it every where glandulous. But in fome parts of the membrane , and in the Sinus' s of the bones in the Joints, thefe Glandules are fo conglomerated , as to form remarkable Glands, which I reckon as a fecond fort. The colour of thefe is fomething tranfparent , when they are not difcoloured with bloud-veflels'. They are foft and pappy, but not tender and friable, fo that they are not eafily broken by comprelfion. They are (as I have faid before ) conglomerate , though they do not confift of feveral lobules or bags of lefler glandules, as fome other glands do 5 but of feveral membranes fuperftrated one over another , fet thick with fmall round bladders, which not only lie contiguous , but tenacioufly adhere one to another, as the feveral membranes likewife do. By the pores of thefe little blad- ders the mucilaginous liquor is percolated and diftinguifhed from the reft of the mafs of bloud, which is conveyed to them by the Arteries, and from them it flows into the interftices of the joints by the excretory palfages , which all thefe glandules have. The figure of the Glands is va- rious, and accommodated to the finus or cavity, in which they are feated. Their fituation is dif- ferent in the feveral Joints ‘ 7 and is , in general, fuch,, Chap. 2. Of the conjunctions of Bones. fuch, that they cannot be injured by a comprefiion from the bones \ and yet there is this contrivance, that the bone does either in the inflexion , or ex- tension of the Joint lightly prefs upon them , fo as to promote the excretion of the humour, which they Separate , into the Joints , when they are moved and ftand moft in need of it.] A more particular account of thefituation fand number ji alfo ) of thefe large mucilaginous Glands fnall be given , when we come to fpeak of the particular Articulations. Synarthrofis or Articulation for obfcure mo- s.Synar- tion , is fuch as that of the Ribs with the Fer- throfis ’ tebrnly in the outward Lamina , the inner being soyned only by harmonia. The counterfeit or mendofa refemble a line on- Two com - y, and are more properly called Harmonia than terfeit. Sutures. Spigehus reckons five of them, others nore, but the chief of them are but two. The firft sailing from the root of the Proceffus mammil- ■ arts upwards, with a circular Dudt circumfcribes the Temple-bone, and defcends down again to the bafts of the Ear : this Suture joyns the bones Df the Synciput 7 Occiput , and Sphenoides with the Temple-bone , this lying upon thofe like the jkales upon Fifh , whence this Suture is called Squamofa. The fecond runs from the top of this quamous conjunction obliquely downwards to- wards the Orbit of the Eye, to the beginning of :he firft common Suture , and joyns this bone ibove with the bones of the Synciput , and below with the bone of the Forehead. The common futures are thofe whereby the Common aones of the Skull ( as alfo the common bones )* mures * are joyned to thofe which are contiguous to them. And of thefe by Diemerbrosck there are reckoned five. The firft is that by which the outer procefs of the Os frontis is joyned with the firft bone of the upper Jaw. The fecond is feated in the outer and lower part of the Orbit of the Eye. The third afcends obliquely from the in- ride of the Orbit to the top of the Nofe. The fourth proceeds obliquely by the middle of Os jugale 7 joyning it (or rather the firft bone of the upper Jaw ) to the Temple-bone. Tb efiftb 7 be- low in tbe cavity of the Noftrils , tends from be- P p 2 hind 574 Of the Bones. Book VI. hind forwards : Spigelius fays , this is common to the Os cunei forme with the Septum o! the Nofe. 7 he ufes of The Sutures have three ufes. The firjl is to the Sutures, help to ftay the Brain from fiiogging , aud its parts from being mifplaced in violent motions, by permitting fome Fibres to pafs through from the ! Dura Mater to the Pericranium, for from this to that ) by which the faid Mater and the Brain in- verted in it are fufpended as it were. The fe- cond is to permit the Vapours and Fumes of the Brain to evaporate. And the third, to hinder the Firtures that happen in the Skull from knocks or falls, &c. from extending any farther than through one bone, for they generally ftop at the next Suture. CHAP. V. Of the proper Bones of the Skull . six proper Hp H E Bones proper to the Skull are in numbei hones of JL fix , one of the Forehead, another of ths the skull. Occiput , two of the Grown, and two of th« Temples. i.Osfron- Firft , Os frontis , the Forehead-bone. It i; t-is. bounded by the Coronal and firrt common Su turc, before ^ and in the fides by the tempora? Bones. It is but one in thofe of ripe age, bu double in Children , being divided by a Sutur parting down its middle from the Coronal to th Nofe, its Cavity .. Betwixt the Lamina of this Bone at the top cjl the Nofe, there is a large Cavity or Cavern, (ol ten two) from whence two holes pafs to the Nol tril; Chap. 5. Of the proper Bones of the Skull. 575 trils. The outer Lamina that conftitutes this Cavity , makes the upper plane part of the or- bit of the Eye •, but the inner, on each fide above the Eyes, forms a bunchy protuberance uneven with many jettings out like little Hills. The Cavity is inverted with a very thin gre.eni.(h Mem- I brane , and contains a clammy humour. What its ufe may be, is hard to fay ^ fome think it gives an Echo to the Voice, making it more fonorous ; others that it receiveth the odoriferous air drawn in by the Nofe, to ftay it awhile before it be fent to the Brain. But thefe feem but vain con- jectures. It hath two holes in the middle part of the Eye- Hoks dj ... brow, which come from the orbit of the Eye, by p onu which the fi rft branch of the Nerve of the fifth conjugation of the Brain goes to the Mufclesof the Forehead, &c. Befides thefe more manifeft holes. Dr. Havers has obferved “ in this Bone, and in 44 the Bones of the fynciput at thofe Angles which 44 meet in the coronal future , and all along on 44 both fides the futura Jagittalis , numerous Pores 44 penetrating into their fubftance, which he con- 44 ceives to be perfpiracula , by which the offenfive 44 vapours , which arife and gather within the 44 Cranium , do perfpire. Which Opinion, fays 41 he, may feem the more probable, if we coniider 44 how fweats do eafily and frequently arife in the u Forehead , even when they are not difcernable 44 in other parts • to account for which we may 44 reafonably fuppofe that there is fome other way 44 of evacuation , befides what is made from the 44 mafs of blood by the cutaneous Glands , which 44 are to be found in any part of the Skin as well 44 as there. It hath alfo four procejjes • the greater two are p rgce p; , feated at the greater corner of the Eye , and the x ' P p 3. ‘ kffer j ~j6 Of the Bones. Book VI, lefler two at the lefler , making the upper part o: the orbit. 2,3. Troo The Bones of the Synciput or Crown are ir Bones of _ number two. Before, they are joined with th« tl:e s y nc '“ Bone of the Forehead by the Coronal future 3 he- hind, with the Os occipttis , by the Lambdoides 3 or each fide to the Temple-bones, by the Sutura fquamofa 3 and to one another in the middle of the Crown , by the fagittal Suture. On the outfidt they are finootb , but on the inlide uneven , fo tVy have a great many furrows running along their inner fuperficics for the paflage of the Vein' of the Dura Mater. Their fubltance is thinne . and more rare even in the adult than that of thi] other Bones (Tor the better exhalation of va pours) but in Infants that abound with much hu nudity , they are membranous and foft, harden ing by degrees. , ^ y w0 Below thefe on each fide are the Bones of thi rempk- Temples. They are joyned in their upper pari 'Bones. to the outfide of the Bones of the Synciput by thi Sutura fquamofa 3 before, to the procefs of th< firft Bone of the upper Jaw 3 behind, to the 0. occipitis , by a counterfeit Suture. Thefe Bone: are even and thin in their upper part , like i Skale, (and eorifift but of one lamina) but below thick , hard and unequal or craggy 3 wherefore they are called Petr of d. Each has They have each two Sinus 3 the outer greatei wofinus. lined with a Cartilage , betwixt the Meatus audi- torius and the procefs that makes part of the 0 : 'figale 3 this receives the longer procefs of the lower Jaw : the inner lefs, common to it wit! the Bone of the Occiput , placed on the hinder fide of the firii named Procefs. one Appen - By thefe Sinus there flands a {lender, fharp and longi& Jppendix , from its Ihape called Stylifor- y 1 cs ° mis. trj Chap. 5 . Of the proper Bones of the Skull. 577 mis, which in Infants is cartilaginous, but in the lre adult becomes bony. Befide this appendix they have three Procejfes , Three Pro- two external and one internal. c eJJes. The firjl external is blunt, thick, and Ihort, a It p roce p little hollow within, and becaufe it fomewhat re- fus mam- I; fembles a Cow’s Pap, it is called Mammillaris. millaris. The fecond is carried forward from the Meatus 2 of the Ear, and is joined with the firft Bone of the upper Jaw, both of them framing the Os ju- gate, of which in the next Chapter. The third, that is internal, is called Procejjus petrofus, and Os petrofum, from its hardnefs and petrofus cragginefs. It is pretty long, jetting out to the inner Bafts of the Skull , within which it has two Holes, through one of which an Artery , and through the other the auditory Nerve pafs to the inner Cavities of the Ear, that are excavated in this Procefs , namely the Tympanum, Labyrinthus, and Cochlea : and without the Skull it hath three holes the firft of which is the Meatus auditorius * the fecond is narrow, Ihort and oblique, near to the firft, by which the Jugular Vein enters the inner Cavities • the third is feated betwixt the Procejjus Mammillaris and the Stylotdes Appendix , and ends into that paflage that goes from the Ear to the Mouth. As to the four little Bones that are contained in its firft inner Cavity, viz.. Incus, Malleus, Sta- pes, and Os orbiculare , we have fpoken of them before in Book Ilf. Chap. 23. The Os occipitis , that makes the hinder and 6,Os occh lower part of the Head, is five-corner’d, by two of which corners it is joyned in its upper part to the Bones of the Synciput by the Lambdo'ides Su- ture, by two other in its forefides to the Temple- bones by a counterfeit or fquamons Suture, and Pp 4 M 57 8 Of the Bones. Book VI. by its fifth corner to the Os cuneiforme. It is but 1 one in the adult, but it confifts of four or more in Infants. It is the thickeft and moll compact 1 of all the Bones of the Skull. its Sinus. it is faid to have nine Sinus, two external, and feven internal. The external are one on each fide of its great hole behind , by which the fpinal Marrow defcends. Of the internal the two lar- geft are thofe that receive the Protuberances of the Cerebellum. frocejjes. It has nlfo five Protuberances or Procefes, four of which are by the Tides of the great Foramen afore- faid, and being all covered with a Cartilage are received into the Sims ' s of the firft Vertebra , fer- ving for the articulation of the Head : the fifth is larger than thefe, afcending inwards from the great Foramen , and parting the Protuberances of the Cerebel. Holes, Laftly, it has five Foramina , of which the low- eft and largeft is that by which the tJF/edulla ofr- iongata pafies out of the Skull into the Vertebra. The reft are lefs, and are for the tranfit of the Vefiels, CHAP. VI. Of the Bones common to the Shull and upper Jaw. Three com- “rjltherto of the Bones proper to the Skull : ~ JTX Now fellow thofe which are common to it neiforme.' an< ^ u PP er Jaw. Thefe are three : Firft, Sphe- noides or Cuneiforme , the w 7 edge-like bone \ fo lib. i. de called, quoth Schneider , 4t Not for the propriety cmrrhvs, « 0 £ - ts ^g Urej f or j t endeth in a blunt point ;nor, ** 1 \ • 1 ’ 44 as Ch. 6 , Of the Bones common to the Skull, &c. 579 “ as many think, only upon the account of Sciffi- u on or cleaving ; but efpecially with refpeft to 44 an Arch (of which this is the Cuneus or Wedge .) 44 For the Bones of the Forehead, Synciput , Tern- I 44 pies and Occiput make the Tides of the Arch, 44 and this Bone of which we fpeak , does like a 44 Wedge fill up that fpace that lies betwixt thofe 44 riling fides.J Before, it is joined with the Fore- head-bone ^ behind, to the Os occipitis. At the fides it doth accompany a good way the Os petro~ fum. Above, it doth touch the fir# , fourth and fixth Bone of the upper Jaw ^ and below , the Bones of the Palate of the Mouth by its wing-like Procefies, It is thick in the middle, but thinner at the edges, and in the adult it confifls of two Lamin<& and a Diploic , like the other Bones pro-? per to the Skull. In Infants it confifts of three or four. It has four external Procejfes , of which two, that its pmef are contiguous to the upper Jaw , are called Pte-fes. rygo'idcs , Ali formes or Wing-like • and four inter- nal alfo, which with the fpace betwixt them com- pofe the Sella equina or Turcica , upon which the sella Tur- Clandula pituitaria lieth, that receiveth the pitui- tica. tons excrements falling from the Brain by the In- fundibulum. Of this Sella and its fubjacent Cavi- ty Schneider thus writes. 44 In that Sinus that is Idem ib. 41 called Sella equina a certain Cavity lyeth under p.209, &c, 41 the upper Lamina of the Os curie if or me. In the 44 Skull indeed of an Infant, this Cavity is always 44 naturally abfent ( for in thefe the Bone in that 44 place is fungous : ) But after the Infant is a 44 year old (as Fallopius teaches ) it begins to be 44 made, and according to the encr<=afe of the 44 Bone is greater or lefTer. A thin skin cloaths 44 this Cavity, which is not of a green colour , as 44 Bcsubinus teaches but is very thin, foftifh and 5S< Of the Bones. Book VI. “ whitilh This Antrum ( or Cavity ) and M the like are formed by Nature to the end the Holes. Sinus* Cl Skull fhould not be too ponderous No- tc thing but Air is contain’d in it In fome “ Skulls it is wanting. Moft of the more ancient Anatomifts fpeak of feveral Holes in this Bone for the tranfit of fuch pituitous humours (into the Noftrils or Palate,) as fall upon , or are feparated by the Glandula pituitaria. But as we intimated from Dr. Lower in Book III. Chap. 5. there are no fuch Holes in it for that office, but thofe excrements are reforbed by the Veins , as that Learned Doftor affirms. Yet it hath fundry Perforations for other purpo- fes, viz., for the paffiage of the motory and optick Nerves of the Eye , and of other Nerves for the motion of other parts , as alfo of Veins and Arteries. It has divers Sinus : Outwardly or below it has one in each wing-like Procefs , giving room to the zJWufculus pterygo'ides ( or pterygojlaphilinus) internus ^ ( or rather to Dr. Croone's pterygopalati- nus. ) Inwardly or above, it has one large one called Sella equina , before defcribed out of Schnei - der : and two or three fmall ones. The fecond common Bone is Os cribriforme , be- briforme. caufe like a Sieve it hath many holes , by which the filaments of the olfa&ory Nerves or Procejfus mammillares pafs into the Noftrils. It is feated in the middle Bafts of the Forehead at the top of the Noftrils , and is covered with the Dura Ma- ter which accompanies the nervous filaments afore- faid through the holes. It is joyned by the Su- tures called Harmonic to the Os frontvs , the fe- cond Bone of the upper Jaw , and to the Cunef forme. 2. Os cri- On Ch. 6 . Of the Bones common to the Skull &c. 58 1 On its upper fide in the middle it has growing its Frocef- upon it a kind of triangular Procefs , like to the f es ' Comb of a Cock, which is therefore called Crijla * CaUi. And oppofite to this in its lower fide it has another that is thin and hard , dividing the Nofe into two parts or Noftrils , the right and the left, and is called Septum naft. To this Os cribriforme , in the cavity of the Nof- Offafpoiv trils, there adhere two other Bones called Spongi- S 10 ^- ofa , becaufe they are full of caverns or holes like a Sponge or Pumice-ftone. But moft Anatomifts confider them as parts of the Os cribriforme , con- founding their names one with the other , calling this. Os fpongiofum , or cribriforme indifferently. The third common Bone is (from its fhape) cal- 3- ju= led Os jug ale, or the Yoke bone. This indeed is § aie * not truly a diftinft Bone, but is made up of one Procefs of a bone of the Skull, and of another of the upper Jaw : But becaufe it has a diftind name, and is common to the Skull and upper Jaw , as partaking of both, we therefore reckon it for a diftind common Bone. I fay it is made up of two ProcefTes, of which the hinder is a Procefs of the Temple-bone that is carried from the Meatus au- ditorius forwards- and the fore one is a procefs of the firfl: bone of the upper Jaw , that maketh the lower fideof the outer corner of the Eye , which reaching backwards meets the other, and is joyn- ed to it by an oblique Suture, and fo makes the Os jugate. By which defcription of this Bone , its fituapion mfitus- appears to be on each fide of the Face betwixt the tionani Meatus auditorius and the fit Tb bone of the upper u f e ° jaw : and its principal ufe feems to be for de- fence of the Tendon of the temporal Mufcle, and to give rife to one of the Heads of the Mulcle Maffeur. CHAP, 582 Of the Bones. the Jaw- bones are twOjtbe up- per and lower, the upper confifts of 12 . bones. Book VI. CHAP. VII. Of the upper and lower Jaws. T Hns far of the Bones of the Calvaria , or Scalp : next follow thofe of the Face, which are the Jaw-bones with their Teeth ■, to which we (hall fubjoyn the Bone of the Tongue. The jaws are two, the upper and lower , The fubftance of the upper Jaw, efpecially on its 1 inlide, is not folid but fpongious ^ and unequal, becaufe it is framed of fundry Bones. They are fix pair, fix in each fide. The firjl is almoft tri- angular, feated on the lower fide of the outer cor- ner of the Eye, and by its procefs maketh up the bell part of the Os jugale as was (hewed in the for- mer Chapter. Th efecond is a round, little , and thin bone in the inner corner of the Eye, having an hole in its lower part , called Foramen lachry- tnale , upon which the Glandula or Caruncula lachrymalvs refteth , and through which a branch of the fifth pair of Nerves pafleth to the inner Membrane of the Nofe. The third is thin as the former , but quadrangular. It is placed be- tween the two former in the inner-fide of the Or- bit of the Eye. The fourth is called Os mala:, the Cheek-bone , and is the greateft and thickeft. This maketh up the greateft part of the Cheek and Palate , and containeth all the upper Teeth In its Caverns. It is joyned above , on that fide next the Nofe , to the bone of the Forehead , but below with the wedge-like bone • before , with the fecond bone of the upper Jaw , behind with the third, and laft of all with its fellow. Under the Eye it has a hole for the paflage of a branch Chap. 7. Of the upper and lower Jarvs. 58? )f the fifth pair of Neryes that is bellowed on :he Face ; and another near the bottom of the Mofe , by which an Artery and a Vein pafs from :he Palate to the Nollrils. The fifth is long, lard, and reafonable thick } it with its fellow maketh up the bony part of the Nofe. It is joyn- sd with the Cartilages of the Nofe below , ( to which purpofe it is very rough on that fide ) but to the internal procefs of the Os frontis above. The ftxth is broad and thin, and ( with its fellow,) makes the Roof of the Mouth. Note , that the under-fide of the Orbit of the The Orbit Eye is formed by the firlt , fecond , third , and °f the . E J e > fourth of thefe bones of the upper Jaw, and the upper- fide by the Os frontis : only the Os cimei- e * forme makes up a little part in the hinder fide of the outer corner. The lower Jaw in thofe of ripe age is but one The lower Bone, but in Children, till they are a year or Jam con- two old, it confills of two, which are joyned to- f'fl s hut of gether at the Chin by Synchondrofis , and after- one ^ one ° wards grow into one. This is moveable, but the upper immoveable. It refembleth in ihape the Greek letter ». At each end of it there are two procejfes , where- [ts p 0ce f of the one from a broad bafts grows lharp , and jes. is called Corone , going under the Os jugate , and having the Tendon of the temporal Mufcle firmly inferted into it. The other may be called Articu- laris , becaufe it ferveth for Articulation. This has a long Neck and a longifh but fiattilh Head (or Condylusj that is covered with a Cartilage for its eafier motion. By this Head it is inarticulated into the larger Sinus of the Os temporbs that is alfo lined with a Cartilage, and is knit ftrongly there-* to by a membranous Ligament. This 5 84 Of the Bones. Book VI, Cavity. This Bone has a cavity within, efpeciaily in the fore- part toward the Chin, which (as Dr. Havers affirms) does not contain a marrowy juice for its nourilhment, but ferves only as a chanel for the Nerve and the bloud-veflels to run along in. Holes. It has four Foramina *, of which two are at the roots of the Proceffes, by which a branch of the fifth pair of Nerves together with a Vein and Artery pafs to the Teeth ( as fhall be Ihewn fur- ther in the next Chapter ) and two other in its fore- part by the Tides of the Chin, by which two twigs of the faid fifth branch pafs out again to the lower Lip and its Mufcles and Skin. Surface. j ts superficies is fmooth for the greateft part, but in fome places there are afperities for the firmer infertion of the Tendons of its Mufcles, as was fhewn in the defcription of thofe Mufcles. The Alve- Both the Jaws have Alveoli or Sockets for the * oil of both Teeth, in number equal with the number of the fam. Teeth. But when in old age the Teeth fall out, the Sockets clofe together, fo that in time there remains no print of them , but the bone becomes fmooth and ffiarp. CHAP. VIIL Of the Teeth . 7 he Teeth, r T"'H E Teeth are called in Latine Dentes , quafi their name J[ Edentes , from their office of eating. They and amcu - are j n their Alveoli three manner of ways the firft and chief is by their Articulation with the Jaw-bones, by gornpbofis •, the fecond is by the Nerve which is inferted into their root. Of the Teeth . 585 Chap. 8. by Symeurofis ^ and the laH is by the Gums which cleave to the outfide of their roots by Syjfarcofis. Their Subfiance is the harden of all other Subfiles, Bones, but more efpecially that part of them that Hands out naked above the Gums. This part Dr. Havers thinks ought to be efteemed .. 44 rather ftony than bony , and yet not the whole 44 of it neither , but only the outfide or cortex , 44 which like a Shell covers the bony, which being w broken off or decayed , the bony quickly rots tl and moulders away : upon which account it is, 44 that when the Gums are eaten away , fo that 44 fome part of a tooth , which is not defended i 44 with this Hony cortex , is laid bare, it is eroded ; 44 when that part that naturally Hands out of the 44 Gums , and is by fuch a folid fubHance fecured, 44 fuffers no fuch injury. The Hony part is not ... covered with any Periofieum ; but that part which is within the Sockets of the Jaw-bones is invefied with a thin Membrane , which he fays , 44 is not . 44 the true Periofieum (though that invefts the j 44 Socket wherein they Hand) but is propagated 44 from that Membrane that covers the Gums, 44 and is common to the whole Mouth , which ~ 44 does not terminate with the Gums, but when it 44 comes to their extream edge , turns in , and 44 is refle&ed between the other fide of the Gum 44 and the Tooth, defeending into the Alveolus or 44 Socket,and adhering on one fide immediately to 44 thofe, parts of the Teeth which lie within, and 44 on the other to the hard fielhy fubHance of the 44 Gums, which with this is communicated to the 44 roots of fome teeth ( efpecially in the upper 44 jaw ) to faHen them more firmly in their “Sockets-, and where none of this hard fiefh in- 44 tervenes, it coalefces as it were into one mem- 44 brane 586 Of the iBones . Book VI. “ brane with the Periofteum that covers the infide “ of the Socket. By this membrane, and the Nerve inferted into the root of every Tooth, thefe lower parts of the Teeth become exquifitely fenfible. Cavity and The Grinders have a manifeft Cavity within, j Vejjeis. (but the lncifores and Canini but an obfcure one) whereinto by the very fmall holes of their roots they each receive a Capillary Artery from the Carotides , a Vein from the Jugulars , and a twig of a Nerve from the fifth pair ( as abovefaid.) The Vein , Artery , and Nerve are united together, and clad with a common Membrane* when they enter the Jaw, within which they have a proper Chanel to run along in under the roots of the Teeth, fending twigs to each as they pafs under them. Principle. The Rudiments or Principles of the Teeth are bred with the other parts in the Womb , but lie hid for fome Months within the Jaws and Gums. Thefe Principles are partly bony and partly mu- cous, and both parts are at firlt included in a membranous and fomewhat mucous FoUiculus of cafe, which in procefs of time they break through (fome fooner, others later ) their bony part a- fcending upwards out of the Gums, and their mu- cous part ( hardening by degrees ) defcending downward into the Jaw fo far as there is fpace for it the FoUiculus it felf turning to a kind of Cement, whereby the Tooth is faftened to the Tides of the Alveolus. . n At what time and in what order they break and growth. f m h out ofthe Alveoli, is known to every Nurfe : omitting therefore to fpeak of that , I fhall only note. That the T eeth alone , of all the Bones in the Body, continue to grow fo long as a Mari lives , ( and they continue in his Head ) for die Chapa 8. Of the Teeth. :lfe would they be foon worn to the flumps by :heir daily ufe ; and we fee that when a Tooth s loft out of either Jaw ( in the oldeft people) :hat which is oppofite to it in the other Jaw, vill commonly grow longer than the reft, having lone to grind againft ^ though it mu ft be confeft, :hat the feeming length of old people’s teeth , is nore owing to the falling away of their Gums, ihan the growth of their teeth. When Children come to be feven or eight rears old, they change feveral of their Teeth ^ >ut very rarely, if ever , all. The Incifores or •'ore -teeth , the Canini , or Eye-teeth , and the ‘oremoft Double-teeth moft change , but the •eft of the Double-teeth very few. Now con- erning this changing of the Teeth , we muft mow, that the old ones do not come out by the ■oots, but their upper part only drops off, their •oot remaining ftill in the Socket of the Jaw, vhich (being like Seed for the new ones ) by legrees grows up above the Gums to fupply :he place of that which was fallen off. Com- nonly about the twentieth year ( or upwards ) here fpring out two Double-teeth behind the :eft , which till then had lain hid in their Sock- ets. ' Thefe are called Genuine Teeth , or Den- es fapienti & , becaufe Men are then come to years )f difcretion. As for the number of them , commonly there ire found fixteen in each Jaw •, if there fall )ut any difference in number as to individual perfons , it generally falleth out in the Mo- lares. . There are three ranks or forts of Teeth, Thofe of the firfi rank ( or the foremoft ) are called Incifores , Cutters. Moft commonly four are found in each Jaw : they have but one Cbinge a Dentes fapientiiso Number, Sons, 5 8S Of the Bones. Book YI Root or Phang , and To eafily fall, or are pul led out. Thefe firft make way out of the Gums in Children , becaufe the tops of then are fharpeft. Thofe of the fecond rank ari called Canini , or Dog-teeth, from their length! hardnefs and lharpnefs above the reft. In eacl Jaw there are two , at each fide of the Cut ters one. They are otherwife called Eye-teeth | either from an Opinion that their roots , ( viz, of the upper ) reach as far as the Eyes , or tha the fame Nerve that moves the Eye fends twig to thefe Teeth ; neither of which coni ceits are true. The roots of thefe are fingl as thofe of the Incifores , but they are bot< fometimes crooked ; and if fuch people i whom they are fo, chance to have one of then drawn, they can hardly be pulled out withou breaking off a piece of the Alveolus in whici they are fix’d. Thofe of the third rank ar called Molar es , Grinders- becaufe like Mil ftones they grind the Meat. Moft commonlf they are twenty in number , five in each fid j of both Jaws. The two foremofte that ftanr next to the Dog-teeth , are lefs than the reft having but two knobs at the top , but the threl hindmoft are larger and have four , being in manner fourfquare. The two foremoft alf have but two roots at moft , but the threj hindmoft commonly three or four. But thof of the upper Jaw have for the moft part on root more than thofe which areoppofite to then in the lower, or however their roots are larger The reafon whereof may be , firft , becaufe the; are pendulous, and fo are the apter to drop out andfecondly, becaufe the fubftanceof the upper jaw is not fo firm as that of the lower, Thi bap. 9. Of the Bone of the Tongue. 589 The ufe of the Teeth is principally to chew the Vf e * j eat to prepare it for the Stomach , that it may le eafilier conccd it into Chyle. The Incifores ite off the Morfel, the Dog-teeth break it , and ie Grinders make it fmall ^ wherefore they are ft in the top , that they may the better receive «d keep the Meat • and rough, that they may } ind it the better. The Teeth contribute alfo t the formation of the Speech, efpecially the ] >re-teeth \ for thofe that have loft them , lifp, we fay , and cannot pronounce plainly fuch llables as have C. X, &c. in them. C H A F. IX. Of the Bone of the Tongue called Os Hyoides. *pHE Os hyoides is feated at the root of the Os hyoi- L Tongue under the lower Jaw , and above des, its fi- !e Larynx. It is (haped like the Greek Vowel u , tuxtion ini il/hence it is alfo called Os Ypfiloides ) or like the iwer Jaw, being arched before , and extending ill; two points or horns backward. It is commonly compounded of three Bones. Pirts hat in the middle is gibbous forwards, and hol- ly inwards j by its gibbous iide it is joyned to e bafts of the Tongue , and into its concave it ' ceives the Epiglottis. The other two are lateral, i d are called Cornua, or Horns. Each of thefe . s a Cartilage adhering to it •, and the middle, 7o. They are all tied to the adjacent parts, irtly by a flefhy, partly by a nervous or mem- anous fubftance, Q.q * It vfe. It ferves for the in r ertion of feveral of thof' Mufcles that are defigned to move the Tongue fdeferibed Book V. Chap, io.) and alfo for keep ing the Throat open , that the Meat may hav paffage out of the Mouth into the Stomach , an< the Air into and out of the Wind-pipe, while w fpeak and breath. CHAP. X. Of the Bones of the Neck , viz. the Clavicul and Vertebrae. H itherto of the Bones of the Head \ we (houl next proceed to thofe of the Trunk (accort ing to our divifion of the parts of a Skeleton : but betwixt thefe lieth the Neck , whofe bones w muff deferibe in our way. Thefe are of two forts, to wit, the Clavicul or Chanel-bones, and the Ttrtebra. . As to the Clavicula, fome reckon them tot! - Thorax, others to the Shoulder •, but confident tion, figure , their fituation , they may as fitly be reckoned fubjhnce, pertaining to the Neck. Tlmy are called Claz number, and con~ nexion . cuU from their refembling the ffeape of old fafh oned Keys, which were of the figure of an It lick /•, fuch as Spigelius fays he has feen belonj ing to old Houfes at Padua. They are not crooked in Women as in Men. Their Subjlan is thick and fpongie, but more about the heat th in about the middle. In number they are tw o:ie on each fide. Near the Throat they a: round ; but towards the Shoulder flattifh. Th< are joined to two Bones, to wit, by one end t Thap. 10 . Of the Bones of the Neck. 59 1 ! ie Shoulder-blade, and by the other to the top of he Breaft-bone, Their Vfe is to uphold the Shoulder-blades, vfi, lat they fhould not Aide down upon the Breaft gl agether with the Shoulder-bone ; which falleth ut, when there happens a fra&ure in thefe ■ones. The other Bones of the Nec\ are the amvfu\ot, r Vertebra • but before we come particularly to efcribe thefe , it will be convenient to premife imething concerning all the Vertebra of the Spine ] general. There are reckoned thirty Vertebra of the vertebra pine in all; viz. feven of the Neck, twelve of of the whole io le Thorax , five of the Loins , and fix of Or facrum. spine, their ;o ach coniiits of a Body, that is convex forwards Di id fomewhat hollow behind , but above and pj ts an £ elow plain : which body is not of a folid and Holes, ard fubftance , but fomewhat fungous and )fti(h. This body has three forts of Procejfes rowing out of it toward its hinder fide, two ranfverfe, four oblique , and one pofterior or a- ate, which are of an harder fubftance than it felf. 'here is alfo a large proper Hole in its middle, or rather betwixt it and its Proceffes ) for the efcent of the Spinal Marrow : and on its upper nd under fides two fmall lateral common ones, hat is common to it felf and that next it : for ne half of thefe holes is excavated out of the awer fide of the upper Vertebra , and the other alf out of the upper part of the lower ; and they erve for the entrance of the Blood- veffels into he Spine, and for the exit of the Nerves that pring out of the fame. The Vertebra are joined to one another behind Connexion >y Ginglymus , forwards by Harmonia ; on the out- ide by an hard Membrane , on the infide by a t * ' Q_q 3 mem- Of the Bones. Book V membranous, hard and ftrong Ligament , read ing from the firft Fertebra of the Neck to the C facrutn. Thus far of what is common to all the Fertebra. As for what is proper to thofe of each of the for Divijions , that fhali be (hewn in their particul Description. Vertebra And f° r t '' ie ^ ert:e ^^ of the Neck , whii of the Neck are in number feven. The Bodies of thefe are lei [even, but harder than thofe of the other , which w convenient becaufe they are more moved. Th< are not of a Semicircular Shape like the othe but rather four-lquare as it were. Their tran verfe Precedes have each an hole in them, (whii the reft have not, ) through which Veins and A teries pafs to the Head. Their pofteriour Proce fes or Spines are forked or cleft into two, exce] in the firft and lalt Fertebra. s„A.tlas» The firft or uppermoft Fertebra is called Atla becaufe the Head Hands upon it , like the Glol of the World. It hath no Spine behind ( one! a little blunt knob ) left the two fmall Mufcles < the Plead ( called Obliqui inferiores ) fpringin from the fecond Fertebra and inferted into thi fhould be hurt , when the Head is bowed foi ward. Spigelius fays it has no true Body , but n ther ( inftead of it ) a Tubercle in its forefidi Both its obliquely afeending and obliquely dt Lending Procefies have each a Sinus in them : th upper receiving the Tubercles of the Occiput, an the lowe r the afeending Procefies of the fecon Fertebra. Upon thefe the Head is moved foi wards and backwards. The fubftance of th Fertebra is harder, folider, but thinner than th; of the reft, becaufe it is the leaft, and yet its C; vity is biggeft. Within on the forefide of i great Foramen , it has a femicircular Sinus line i Chap. io. Of the Bones of the Neck. 59 ? with a Cartilage , whereinto it receiveth the tooth -like Procefs of the fecond Vertebra ^ round which procefs (fays Dr. Havers) are fome muci- laginous Glands planted, and one on each fide. The fecond is called Vertebra dentata , becaufe 2. Denta- out of its upper fide, between its two afcending ta, Proceffes, there fprings a round , longifh and hard Procefs, in fliape like a Tooth , which being inverted with a Cartilage is jointed into the fore- faid Sims of the firft Vertebra , upon which as upon an Axis the Head with the faid firft Verte- bra turns round. And when a luxation happens here, the Neck is faid to be broken. This tooth- like Procefs in that part which enters not into the faid Sinus , is invironed with a Ligament , by which it is knit to the Occiput. The hinder Pro- cefs of this Vertebra is cleft into two , as thofe of the four following are , for the more convenient infertion of the Mufcles and Ligaments. Its tranfverfe Proceffes are lefs than theirs, and have alfo fmaller holes. The four that lie next under this are in all The other like it , fave that their tranfverfe ocf v ^ lateral Proceffes are larger , and divided into two as well as the hinder. The feventh is the largeft of all. It is liker to the Vertebra; of the Thorax than of the Neck ; for neither its tranfverfe nor hinder Proceffes are cleft like the foregoing , but both are like thofe of the Vertebra of the Thorax , to be defcribed in the next Chapter. things Q.1 4 CHAP, 594 Of the Bones . Vertebra cf the Stick (Twelve, Book VI CHAP. XI. Of the Vertebrae of the Thorax. I N the next place we come to the Bones of the Trunks which is divided into the Thorax and abdomen. The Bones of the Thorax are the Vertebra of the Bach , the Ribs and Breafi-bone. Firft, as for the Verttbr they are twelve in number, unto which fo many Ribs (of a fide) anfwer ^ there are feldom thirteen of each, but more feldom eleven. Their Spines or hinder Proeefles are not divided into two as thofe of the Neck, but are folid and fimple. The tranfverfe are Ihort and blunt, and have each a lhallow Sinus for the inarticulation of the Ribs ^ but are , not perforated like thofe of the Neck. The ob- Hque Proeefles (which are four, two afcending, and two defcending) ferve for the articulation of one Vertebra with another. The defcending are a little hollowed, and receive the (fomething protuberant) Heads of the afcending Proeefles of the next Vertebra below them, fucceflively. The fore-part of their Body next to the cavity of the Thorax is round, or convex ^ and the hinder part lunated, or concave. On each fide they have a fmooth Sinus for the reception of the heads of the Ribs ; for into thefe Sinus they are receive4 as well as into thofe of the tranfverfe Procefiesl As for their Holes , they have one large proper one in their middle, which containeth the Spinal Marrow ^ and the one half of two common lefc fer ones , that is , one' half on their upper fide, and another on their lower, as they join Of the Ribs. 595 Chap. 12. to one another, for the egrefs of the Nerves, and ingrefs of the Veins and Arteries, as was (hewn before in the general defcription of the Vertebra. CHAP. XII, Of the Ribs « T H E fecond fort of Bones in the Thorax are the nibs. the Ribs , which (as was Ihewn in the for- Their sub- mer Chapter) are ulually twelve in number, fl^ce. Their Subfiance is partly bony, partly cartilagi- nous - 9 the firft ferving for firmnefs and ftrength, the fecond for articulation, and the eafier motion of the Breaft in refpiration. The bony Subftance towards the Vertebra of the Back is thick and foundilh, but towards the Sternum flat and thin , and ends in a Cartilage. Within, their bony part is fungous or fpongie ", whence the Ribs being broken are more readily joined toge- ther by a Callus than mofb other Bones. The Cartilages in bignefs anfwer the Bignefs of the Ribs : for the bigger Ribs have the bigger Car- tilages ^ and on the contrary. The Ribs in the upper fide are blunt or broadilh, but in the under (harper. In their lower and inner fide they have a furrow that runs along them to receive the intercoftal Veflels, the Veins, Arteries and Nerves. On their infide towards the cavity of the 'thorax , they are cloathed with a periofleum un- derneath the pleura^ and (accordingto Dr. Ruyfch ) the veflels run along it, and not between the two 'skins or membranes which compofe the pleura. The Ribs are of two forts, viz., long or fort. ’ - The Of the Bones. Book VI. 5 9 6 seven Ve- The long (other wife called the true Ribs ) are feven in number (being theuppermoft :) Thefe are articulated both with the Vertebra and Sternum. Their cartilaginous ends or heads are received into Ihallow Sims’s in the Breaft-bone and their bony heads being covered with a Cartilage are i e« ceived into the Sims's in the bodies of the Vertem bra • and the fame heads have each a Tubercle (except the two loweft) that being alfo lined with a Cartilage, are articulated into the lhallow Sinus's of the tranfverfe Prjoceftes. 44 In both 44 thefe Articulations with the Vertebra (Dr. Ha- 44 vers fays) are mucilaginous glands to be found, 44 but the large# is in the lower articulation, and 44 on that fide which is next the cavity of the Tho- 44 rax. The articulation into the Breaft-bone, is by Arthrodia ■, but that into the Vertebra , by Sy- narthrofis for the motion of the Ribs at that end is very obfcure, as being ftraitly tyed to the Ver- tebra by Ligaments. Note, That the Cartilages of thefe true Ribs are ufually obferved to be harder in Women than in Men which may feem to be for the better fuftaining of the weight of their Breafts that lie upon them. Five No- The J hort (otherwife called Noth* or Spuria, ths. baftard Ribs) are five in number ^ of which the four upper moft having their Cartilages bending upward and cleaving one to another, are joined before to the lower fide of the Cartilage of the feventh true Rib : but the laft, which is the leaft, is loofe from the reft, and grows fometimes to the Diaphragm, and fometimes to the Mufculus reSius of the Abdomen , as alfo fometimes does the loweft of the four next above it. Behind they are joined to the Vertebra of the Back, like as the true Ribs were y onely the two loweft, ( and fome- times Ch. i$. Of the Bre aft -bone. times the third) are received only into the bodies of the Vertebra , and not into the tranfverfe Procefles which here have no Sinus for their re- ception. The Vfe of all the Ribs is firfi , to keep the ufe, Breaft and the upper part of the Abdomen di- ftended, that in the former the Heart and Lungs may have free fpace for their motion j and in the latter, the Stomach and Liver might not be prefl upon by the circumjacent parts. Secondly , to pre- ferve thofe parts from external injuries, as from bruifes or the like. And lajlly, to fuftain the Mufdes that ferve for refpiration, and to yield to or obey their motions for if the Breaft had been environ’d with one continued Bone, it had not been capable of dilatation in infpiration, nor of contra&ion in expiration. CHAP. XIII. Of the Breajl-bone or Sternum. E Sternum (which is the laft bone of the ^ Stero A Thorax ) is feated in the middle of the Breaft num , f before, ferving as a Breaft -plate, and having the fubftme , cartilaginous produ&ions of the true Ribs inarti- culated into it. It is of a red fungous fu’oftance , and in Children almoft wholly cartilaginous •, on- ly its uppermoft part is in them fomewhat more bony than the reft, perhaps becaufe one end of the Clavicula is joynted into it. In Infants it con- lifts of feven or eight, but after fome years they fo coalefce one to another, that in the adult it is compounded but of three, 2nd in aged perfons it feemeth 59 s Of the Bones. Book VI. It confifls of three Bones and Cartilage. feemeth but one Bone •, yet it is diftinguilhed by two tranfverfe lines, (hewing the former divifion, which are more confpicuous in the inlide than outfide. The uppermofl Bone is thickeft and broadefl: ^ it hath in each fide a longifli Cavity lined with a Cartilage, to receive the heads of the Clavicles : between thefe in its middle and upper part is a lunated pit called Jugulum. It has alfo a fmall Sims or Dent on the infide , to give way to the Wind-pipe defcending. The fecond Bone is nei- ther fo thick nor fo broad, yet a good deal longer. It is joined to the former by an intervening Carti- lage, and in each fide has five or fix Sims for the inarticulation of fo many of the true Ribs. The third is the fhorteft of all, yet it is broader than the fecond, unto the lower end of which it is joined. What true Ribs were not jointed into the middle Bone, are received by this. To its lower end is annexed the Cartilage called Mucronata or Enfi- formis y Sword-like. This Cartilage is triangu- lar, about an inch long , and on the outfide of it there is formed a Cavity in the Bread, called Scro- biculus Cordis or the Heart-pit ^ and the gnawing Pains fometimes felt there, Cardialgice ^ though thofe Pains are not from any primary AfFeftion of the Heart Jout of the upper Orifice of the Stomachy which lies under this Cartilage, and has the name of Cardia , from its great confent with the Heart, (as fome derive the reafon of its name J CHAR Chap. 14. Of the Vertebrae of the Loins . 599 CHAP. XIV. Of the Vertebrae of the Loins. T H E Bones belonging to the Abdomen (which is the fecond or lower part of the Trunk ) are thefe five Vertebra of the Loins, five or fix of Os facrum , Os Coccygvs and Ofja imominata. The five Vertebr E Shank ( or Leg ft.rictly fo called ) is The boms J. compofed of two Bones. The greater is of the lag called kwW, Tibia , the lefler in&v Fibula „ Thefe iw0 ’ are flightly articulated into one another near each end ^ but in their middle they recede one from the other, yet fo as they are tied together by a ftrong membranous Ligament that comes between them. The Tibia ( commonly called Facile tnajus) is 1. Tibia, partly three-Icjuare, by its fharp edge before ma- king what we call the Shin. It has an appendix at each end. That above is bigger , and in its upper part hath one Procefs, which is received by the Sinus of the Thigh-bone ; a lid two long- 1- ifh Cavities for the receiving of the two Promi- nences or Heads of the Thigh-bone* (fo that the Arti- 6 1 4 Of the Buttes. Book VI. Articulation is by Ginglymus ) as was faid in the foregoing Chapter. About thehrims of thefe Sinus there is joined by Ligaments a moveable Carti- lage, foft, flippery, and bedewed with an unctu- ous humour, from its fhape called Cartilago luna- ta , the Moon-like Cartilage. It has alfo a little Head behind ( below the forefaid Appendix') which enters into the Sims of the upper Appen- dix of the Fibula. Its lower Appendix is lefs than the upper, jetting out with a notable Procefs to- wards the iniide of the Foot , making the Malleo- lus interms or inner Ankle. It has two Cavities ; one lefs in its fide,by which it receives the Fibula ^ another greater and lower, divided as it were in- to two by a fmall Protuberance in the middle, and lined with a Cartilage , receiving the convex head of the Talus that lies under it ^ as the faid Protuberance is received by the ihallow Sinus in the convex head of the Talus : the one being ar- ticulated into the other by Ginglymus , fo that the Foot is moved upwards and downwards (or ben- ded and extended) upon this joint. 2. Fibulg. The lelfer and outer Bone of the Leg is called Fibula ( or Focile minus , ) it is as long as the for- mer, but much {tenderer. This has alfo an Ap- pendix at each end : the upper of which reaches not fo high as the Knee, nor is it jointed to the Thigh-bone \ but in its inner fide has a Ihallow Cavity which receives the little hinder ( or late- ral) Head of the Tibia, that is feated under its upper Appendix which is jointed with the Thigh- bone. The lower Appendix of the Fibula is re- ceived by the Sinus of the Tibia , and extending its Procefs to the fide of the Talus , makes there- with the Malleolus exterms or outer Ankle, which is lower than, the inner. CHAP. Chap. 23. Of the Bones of the Tarfus. 615 CHAP. XXIII. “I Of the Bones of the Tarfus. the Foot ( as of the Hand) there are three parts, Tarfus , Metatarfus , and the Toes. The T arfus is the diftance between the lower end of the two Focils , and the beginning of the five long Bones which fuftain and are articulated with the Toes. Some call it the Inftep , but we ; have in the former Book (of the Mufcles ) named j e it the Wrift, fuppofing that by the Inftep the Ms - e j tatarfus is rather underftood. It hath f even Bones much differing from one the Tar- another in bignefs and fhape. fus hathfe* Th tfirft is called Talus or Aftragalus ( in En- vin Bones ' glifh the Ankle or Huckle-bone.) This is of a va- Talus " rious figure : Above , it has fomething a convex head with a fhallow Sinus in it, articulating with : the Tibia , as is defcribed in the foregoing Chap- ter. By the Procefs of the Tibia that makes the inner Ankle it is hedged in as it were on the in- fide, as it is by that of the Fibula on the outer. Before , it has a long neck , on which grows a round head that enters into the Sinus of Os navi - culare , upon which jointing the Foot is moved fideways. Its binder fide is rough, and in its up- per part has a tranfverfe Sinus for the receipt of the Ligament of the Tibia, and in its lower a lit- tle defcending Sinus , by which the Tendons of the Mufcles of the Foot pafs. Below , it has a Si - nus behind and a Protuberance before, by which it is articulated with the Heel-bone by Ginglymus . Betwixt the Sinus and Protuberance there is a long and pretty deep Cavity, and over againft it snc- 616 Of the Bones. Book VJ. another fuch in the Heel-bone. In thefe is con- tained a raucous fubftance which moiftens the cartilaginous Ligaments that joyn the T alus to the Heel-bone , keeping them from drying by continued motion. 2. Os cal- The fecond Bone of the Tar f us is called os Calcis 7 ds„ or Calcaneus , the Heel-bone , and is the biggelj; of the feven. It lies under the Talus , with which in its upper fide it is articulated in the manner juft now defcribed. Behind , it receiveth the great Tendon called Nervus Hettoreus , ( or the great Cord) compofed of the Tendons of the three Mufcles that extend the Foot. Its fore end is re- ceived by the Os cubiforme. On its inftde it has a large Sinus , by which the Tendons and larger Vellels defcend to the under-fide of the Foot • and on its out-fide it is uneven with feveral knobs, for the firmer connexion of the Ligaments and Tendons. 3. Os na- The third is called Os navicular e or Cymbifor - viculare. me, from its figure. Behind , it receiveth the Ta- lus in a large Sinus •, but before , it is convex, with three flattifh fmooth heads that are admitted into the very fhallow Sinus of the three Offa cuneifor » mia to be defcribed prefently. The remaining four are lefs than the three al- ready defcribed, and Hand all in one rank ; the firH of them articulates with the Heel-bone, the other three with the Os naviculare. There is no Cartilage betwixt them, but they are knit one to another on the out-fide by a cartilaginous Liga- ment ^ and are cover'd both in their hinder and fore-part with a fmooth Cartilage where they are O, cu- joynted with other bones. The firft is called Cu- biforaie. biforme or Die-like, having fix fides. This is big- ger than the other three that lollow ^ and is lea - ted on the out-fide of the Foot, In its forefide it is : i Chap. 24. Of the ref of the Bones of the Foot . 61 j is joyned to the fourth and fifth bone of the Me- tatarsus \ in the hinder with the Heel-bone • and- in the in-ftde , to the third bone of the Cuneifor- ms : but its other three fides, viz., the outer , up- per, and lower are joyned to none. The three enfuing are called Cuneiforms , or < 5 . Three wedge-like Bones for above they are thick, and Cuneiform below thinner, fo that being joyned they all of mia ° them reprefent a Vault, being convex on the up- per-fide, but on the under hollow ^ in which hoi- iownefs the Tendons and Mufcles are lodged , fo that one does not prefs upon and bruife them in going. The firft of thefe Bones is the great eft, feated in the in-fide of the Foot } the fecond is the lealt, placed in the middle ; the third is in the mean between both in bignefs,and Hands next to the Cubiforme. Thefe three, behind , are joyned to the Os naviculare , and before to the three firft Bones of the sjddetatarfus. CHAP. XXIV. Of the ref of the Bones of the Foot . Metatarfus , or Inftep, hath five Bones ^ Tk; bones J. for one is appointed for the fuftaining of °f the In ‘ the great Toe, as well as others for each of the lte i > y ve ° reft : though in the Hand it is not fo, where the Thumb has no bone in the Metacarpus anfwering to it. Their fubftance is very hard and folid , but they are hollow within like fo many Pipes , and are longer than the bones of the back of the Hand. That which ftayeth ( or is articulated with) 6 1 8 Of the Bones. Book VL with) the great Toe is thickeft, but the longeft is that which ftayeth the next Toe : the other three grow each fhorter than other , but are al- moft of an equal thicknefs. Their lower ends being round are inferted into the Sims of the firft joynts of the Toes : but the upper in their own Jhallow Sinus receive the Bones of the Tar jus. of the Toes The Bones of the Toes are in number fourteen ^ fourteen, for the great Toe hath only two, but the reft three. Thefe Bones are folid without , and hol- low within like thofe of the Inftep. Their Arti- culation is altogether like that of the Fingers , fo that we (hall not need here to defcribe it over again. And the mucilaginous Glands are like- wife the fame. Each Foot has twelve Ojfa fefamoidea , as well as the Hands , which agreeing both in lhape and fituation with one another, the Reader may be fa- tisfied concerning thefe of the Feet in the defcri- ption of thofe of the Hand in Chap. XX. Tab. XX. 1 Cha p. 24* The Figure of a Skeleton. Tab. XX. Reprefenteth the Skeleton of an adult Body on its fore-fide. a The Os frontis, b The Os temporis. cc The two hones of the Nofe, dd The OlTa jugalia. ;e The bones of the upper Jaw . f f The lower Jaw. i'gg The Teeth in both Jaws. ! ihhh The Vertebra of the Neck, Thorax, Loins and Os facrnm. 1 The Clavicular :k The Scapula. |l Their firfl Procefs which articulates with the Os Humeri. nm Their fecond called Acromium, inn The Bones of the Sternum. >0 The Os Humeri. >p Its upper and inner head that articulates with the Scapula. |q Its upper and outer head which ferves for the im- plantation of Ligaments. i 1 The inner head of its lower Appendix which receives the Ulna. ■ The outer head of the fame Appendix which receives the Radius. : u The two Tubercles of the Os Humeri : t the in - 1 terndl , ii the external. : The Ulna. r The Radius. :z The eight Bones of the Carpus. A A The four Bones of the Metacarpus. BB The 6 20 Of the Bones. Book VI, BB The four Fingers and Tbumb 7 each of which con • ftjis of three Bones. 1,2,3,4,5,5,7,8,9,10,11, 12. The twelvi Ribs 0 <*® The Os ilium. The Coxendix. yy The Os facrum. «A The Os pubis. The connexion of the Os Ilium and Coxendix with the Sacrum. m The Tubercles of the Coxendix . 1 C The inner »» the outer . The Thigh-bones. st The neck of the Thigh-bone . kk The upper head of the Thigh-bone that is receivei into the Acetabulum of the Coxendix. 'ak up The two Trochanters : >a the inner , pp thi outer. vv The two lower heads of the Thigh-bone . £5 7 he Patella, ee The Tibia. •wvrThe Fibula. ?e The Talus. Os Naviculare. tt The other Bones of the Tarfus. ' - m The five Bones of the Metatarfus, » The fourteen Bones of the Toes. i ' ( 621 ) A N V • A P P E N D I X TO THE SIXTH BOOK : Defcribing the CARTILAGES, LIGAMENTS and N A I L So CHAP. I. Of a Cartilage . A S an appendix to the Doftrine of Boms we will add a word or two of the Cartilages ind Ligaments of the Body : becaufe the former :ome nearelt to the nature of Bones and the atter, as they tye feyeral other parts one to an- >ther, fo efpecially the Bones : and laftly, of the Vails, which from their fimilitude of fubftance re alfo conveniently fubjoyned to the Bones. A Cartilage ( or Griftle) is a ftmilar part , cold , A Cani - 1 fry, and void offenfe , flexible, and not fo hard as a what, lone. But when by age its glutinous particles re dried up, it many times degenerates into a ; lone. ' Note, That though a Cartilage be of it felf of wfymifi, . dry fubftance, yet it is always kept moift on its yinfe* S f 2 Super- 622 An Appendix to Book VI. Superficies by a mucous or flimy humour that be- dews it, whereby it is made flippery and fit for motion. Note alfo , that it is an infenlible part, becaufe it neither admits of Nerves nor Mem- branes , by which alone parts Income fenfible. Which wasfo ordered by Nature, becaufe other- wife, feeing they are principally feated about the Joynts, all motion would have become painful. This has been the common opinion : But Dr. Havers fays, that the Cartilages are covered with a Membrane ( as the Bones arej which he names Perichondrium , ( though it be only a continuation of the Periojieum) and that from it Fibres pafs into the Cartilages themfelves, whereby they are made (partly.) fenfible. Though he thinks the principal ufe of this Membrane , efpecially in fuch Carti- lages as are joyned to any of the Bones, is to ftrengthen their conjunction. As for the Cartilages of the Eye-brows , Ears, Nofe, Larynx , &c. we fhall not need here parti- cularly to defcribe them, having done it where we treated of the refpeClive parts ^ only we will ob- ferve in general, that all the Bones in their arti- culations one with another, (viz., fuch as admit of I manifeft motion ) are covered cr lined with Car- tilages, for their eafier and glibber motion \ and fometimes themfelves are the medium by which 1 Bones are joyned, which articulation is called Syn - chondrofis , fuch as that of the OJJd pubis ; others by tipping as it were the brims of the Cavities of the greater joynts, make the Sims deeper • and others laftly conftitute parts themfelves, as thojfe of the Ears, Larynx , &c. Chap* 2, Of a Ligament. 623 CHAP. II. Of a Ligament. A Ligament is a firriilar part , cold and dry , of A Liga - a middle Subfiance betwixt a Cartilage and a mm Membrane, appointed for the tying of f undry parts together. Note , That as it is either harder or fofter than Their differ is fuitable to its proper nature, it acquires the Epi- rences. thets of cartilaginous or membranous refpe&ively : fo, that which proceeds out of the top of the Thigh-bone and is inferted into the Cavity of the Coxendix , is called a cartilaginous Ligament, for its hardnefs and that which environeth the joint of the Shoulder, is called membranous, from its I foftnefs, Thofe which tye Bones together are without why fome fenfe , ( for otherwife upon every Motion we dre «/ - * - ,Q; I Gibson 1697 I